RaUI 基于XML实现的权限类 用户名 用户id 密码 权限控制Id 用户备注 是否是管理员权限 是否是超级管理员权限 设置权限 权限名称 权限值 返回是否设置成功 获取权限 权限名称 默认权限值 返回权限值 获取权限 权限名称 返回权限值 批量导入权限 权限相关的内容 返回是否执行成功 导出权限 返回导出文本 清除所有权限 返回是否执行成功 字符串字数统计 返回字数统计信息 字符串统计信息 汉字数量 英文字母数量 英文单词数量 数字数量(一个数字字符算一个数) 数字数量(一串数字算一个数) 字节总数(汉字算2个字节) 总数(英文单词算一个数，一串数字算一个数) 可见字符总数(一个字母算一个数,一个数字算一个数,空格算不可见字符) 汉字转拼音静态类,包括功能全拼和缩写，方法全部是静态的 汉字的机内码数组 机内码对应的拼音数组 把汉字转换成拼音(全拼) 汉字字符串 转换后的拼音(全拼)字符串 把汉字转换成拼音(全拼) 汉字字符串 转换后的拼音(全拼)字符串 把汉字转换成拼音(首拼) 汉字字符串 转换后的拼音(首拼)字符串 把汉字转换成拼音(全拼) 汉字字符串 用指定字符分隔 转换后的拼音(全拼)字符串 汉字转拼音缩写 要转换的汉字字符串 拼音缩写 汉字转拼音缩写 (字符串) (小写) (空格间隔) 要转换的汉字字符串 拼音缩写 汉字转拼音缩写 (大写) 要转换的汉字字符串 拼音缩写 汉字转拼音缩写 (字符串)(大写)(空格间隔) 要转换的汉字字符串 拼音缩写 取单个字符的拼音声母 要转换的单个汉字 拼音声母 取单个字符的拼音声母 要转换的单个汉字 拼音声母 字符串操作类 字符串转Base64 Base64转字符串 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 是否返回所有匹配 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 是否返回所有匹配 判断是否有不可见字符 获取可见字符串 获取的内容是否允许包含空格 判断是否包含日文平假和片假 转换指定字符串为布尔类型 转换指定字符串为Double类型 已重载.计算两个日期的时间间隔,返回的是时间间隔的日期差的绝对值. 第一个日期和时间 第二个日期和时间 已重载.计算一个时间与当前本地日期和时间的时间间隔,返回的是时间间隔的日期差的绝对值. 一个日期和时间 转换指定字符串为Int类型 转换指定字符串为Int类型 转换指定布尔类型为Int类型,true为1，false为0 判断指定字符串是否是布尔类型 判断指定字符串是否是Double类型 判断指定字符串是否是Int类型 根据年月日转换成日期 追加字符 获取2个字符串中间的内容,point1为空表示从首位开始算，point2为空表示算到结尾。 判断字符串是否只包含数字或英文 判断字符串是否只包含英文 判断字符串是否只包含数字 判断字符串是否匹配,支持?*通配符 待匹配的字符串 匹配的通配符 通配符替换 支持忽略大小写的替换功能 是否忽略大小写 获取匹配的内容 提取字符串中的英文和数字 如果存在英文词组,则按词组方式提取 字符串位置类 是否是英文 是否是数字 Json扩展 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 获取值 对变量的拓展 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 是否返回所有匹配 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 是否返回所有匹配 判断指定内容是否存在列表中的词 替换文本(忽略大小写) 需要替换的内容 替换后的内容 替换文本(忽略大小写),可支持通配符 是否是通配符表达式,不是，则普通替换，忽略大小写，是，则启用通配符替换 将颜色转换为Html颜色格式 支持忽略大小写的替换文本功能 是否忽略大小写 获取字数信息 获取符合要求的第一个结果 是否是正则 查找字符串,忽略大小写 查找字符串,忽略大小写 判断字符串是否是数字或英文 判断字符串是否含有日文 判断字符串是否是英文 判断字符串是否是数字(不同于IsInt,本函数是判断字符串是否只含有数字,对字符串长度没有限制) 是否在指定范围内 是否在指定范围内 转换指定字符串为Int类型 最小值 最大值 如果字符串不在范围内，则使用本默认值 转换指定布尔类型到Int类型,true为1，false为0 将指定类型转换成整型 将数字转换成字符串,小数点末尾后面不包含0 将数字转换成字符串,小数点末尾后面不包含0 将数字转换成字符串,小数点末尾后面不包含0 将数字转换成字符串,小数点末尾后面不包含0 将指定类型转换成整型 将指定类型转换成长整型,如果时间时间类型,则转换为Unix时间戳 转换为Unix时间戳 转换为Js时间戳 转换为Unix时间戳 将指定类型转换成长整型 转换指定类型为Double类型 转换指定类型为Double类型 判断时间是否在指定时间上 判断时间是否在指定时间上 判断时间是否在指定日期 判断时间是否在指定日期 转换DateTime类型到日期时间字符串(例如 2000-01-01 08:08:08) 转换DateTime类型到日期字符串(例如 2000-01-01) 转换DateTime类型到日期星期字符串(例如 2000-01-01 星期六) 转换DateTime类型到Unix时间戳 转换Unix时间戳到DateTime类型 判断字符串是否与内容匹配 将变量值转换成Double类型,如果不在指定区域范围内，则使用默认值 转换到文件大小字符串 转换到文件大小字符串 转换指定类型为Decimal类型 将变量值转换成Decimal类型 将变量值转换成Decimal类型,如果不在指定区域范围内，则使用默认值 转换指定类型为DateTime类型 将变量值转换成DateTime类型 转换指定类型为布尔类型 追加字符 获取指定字符串之间的内容 获取指定字符串之间的内容 判断指定字符串是否是Int类型 判断指定字符串是否是Double类型 判断是否是布尔类型 将字符串转换为Base64类型 判断字符串是否在指定长度 判断能否转换成日期格式 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 根据表单字段名,获取对应的值 大文件与批量文件操作类,支持中途取消操作,本类需要实例化操作 传输进度 当前传输完成的值 全部值,为-1表示无法获取 当前传输的百分比,为-1表示无法获取 当前下载速度(值为每秒下载的字节数),为-1表示无法获取 携带的参数(可选) 传输失败的事件 错误描述 携带的参数(可选) 文件传输出错 文件传输进度 文件夹传输进度 取消事件 取消事件 是否跳过相同文件,默认不跳过(根据文件大小和修改时间来判断) 大文件按流复制文件,支持自动创建目标文件夹。 true：复制成功 false：复制失败 原始文件路径 复制目标文件路径 携带的参数(可选) 复制文件夹到目标文件夹,不支持进度事件,支持中途取消 源文件夹 目标文件夹 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 复制文件或文件夹到目标路径,不支持进度事件,支持中途取消 源路径 目标路径 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 复制文件夹到目标文件夹,支持进度事件,支持中途取消 源文件夹 目标文件夹 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 复制文件夹到目标文件夹,支持中途取消 源文件夹 目标文件夹 总数量,如果不计算,则使用-1 操作的数量,包含成功的和失败的 携带的参数(可选) 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 获取文件夹中的文件数量 文件夹路径 返回文件数量,中途取消则返回-1 获取文件夹的大小 文件夹路径 返回文件数量,中途取消则返回-1 添加文件到指定文件夹,会进行自动重命名，并返回重命名后的文件名(含路径) 要添加的文件路径 要添加到的文件夹 是否根据时间进行重命名 返回是否成功执行 成功执行则返回路径，否则返回空 文件信息 获取版本号 获取版本号 根据版本字符串输出double类型的版本号 比较两个版本号大小 oldVer小于newVer,返回1,大于则返回-1,相等返回0,不支持则返回-1000 从字符串中提取版本号 比较版本号 old小于new,返回1,大于则返回-1,相等返回0 判断是否是管理员方式运行 Hosts操作类 获取并转换hosts内容 hosts内容 获取hosts并转换hosts内容 追加内容到hosts里 要追加的内容列表，每一行为ip 域名的格式 0表示无需新增,-1表示添加失败,1表示追加成功 write为true,追加内容到hosts里;为false,判断是否需要追加 要追加到的内容列表 要追加的内容列表，每一行为ip 域名的格式 是否要写入,如果为false,则只判断是否需要追加,而不写入Hosts文件 0表示无需新增,-1表示添加失败,1表示追加成功 write为true,追加内容到hosts里;为false,判断是否需要追加 要追加的内容列表，每一行为ip 域名的格式 是否要写入,如果为false,则只判断是否需要追加,而不写入Hosts文件 0表示无需新增,-1表示添加失败,1表示追加成功 追加内容到hosts里 要追加的内容 0表示无需新增,-1表示添加失败,1表示追加成功 追加内容到hosts里 ip地址 域名 0表示无需新增,-1表示添加失败,1表示追加成功 从hosts文件里删除内容 要删除的内容 0表示无需删除,-1表示添加失败,1表示删除成功 从hosts文件里删除内容 ip地址 域名 0表示无需删除,-1表示添加失败,1表示删除成功 Host信息 IP 域名 注释 是否要删除 Ini操作类 写入Ini 获取Ini 声明INI文件的读操作函数 GetPrivateProfileString() 声明INI文件的读操作函数 GetPrivateProfileString() 声明INI文件的读操作函数 GetPrivateProfileString() 获取所有节点名称(Section) 存放节点名称的内存地址,每个节点之间用\0分隔 内存大小(characters) Ini文件 内容的实际长度,为0表示没有内容,为nSize-2表示内存大小不够 编码 Ini操作类 根据section取所有key和值 读取INI文件中指定INI文件中的所有节点名称(Section) 所有节点,没有内容返回string[0] 读取INI文件 段，格式[] 键 返回byte类型的section组或键值组 根据section取所有key 写入ini 写入ini 写入ini 写入ini 写入ini 写入Ini 读取Ini 读取Ini 读取Ini 读取Ini 写入ini 删除Ini的Key 删除Ini节点 控件信息 id 控件对象 控件值类型 默认值 值类型 默认 取列表顺序值 取当前选择的列表值 取对象值 保存的设置类型 Ini XML 对象值 显示的文本 图片序号 id Tag值 显示文本值 星期数据 一周的开始时间 一周的结束时间 图片类型 Bmp图片 Jpeg图片 Png图片 Gif动态图片 Tiff图片 文件操作类 删除单个文件。 删除的文件名 指示是将文件放入回收站还是永久删除，true-放入回收站，false-永久删除 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认删除对话框，false-不显示确认删除对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框，true-显示，false-不显示。该参数当指定永久删除文件时有效 反馈错误消息的字符串 操作执行结果标识，删除文件成功返回0，否则，返回错误代码 删除单个文件。 删除的文件名 指示是将文件放入回收站还是永久删除，true-放入回收站，false-永久删除 操作执行结果标识，删除文件成功返回0，否则，返回错误代码 永久删除单个文件。 永久删除的文件名 操作执行结果标识，删除文件成功返回0，否则，返回错误代码 删除一组文件。 字符串数组，表示一组文件名 指示是将文件放入回收站还是永久删除，true-放入回收站，false-永久删除 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认删除对话框，false-不显示确认删除对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框，true-显示，false-不显示。该参数当指定永久删除文件时有效 反馈错误消息的字符串 操作执行结果标识，删除文件成功返回0，否则，返回错误代码 移动文件到指定路径下 要移动的文件名 移动到的目的路径 移动一个文件到指定路径下 要移动的文件名 移动到的目的路径 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框 指示当文件名重复时，是否自动为新文件加上后缀名 反馈错误消息的字符串 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码 移动一组文件到指定的路径下 要移动的文件名数组 移动到的目的路径 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框 指示当文件名重复时，是否自动为新文件加上后缀名 反馈错误消息的字符串 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码,-200:表示其他异常 复制文件到指定的文件名或路径 要复制的文件名 复制到的目的文件名或路径 复制文件到指定的文件名或路径 要复制的文件名 复制到的目的文件名或路径 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框 指示当文件名重复时，是否自动为新文件加上后缀名 返回错误信息 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码,-200:表示其他异常 复制一组文件到指定的路径 要复制的文件名数组 复制到的目的路径 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框 指示当文件名重复时，是否自动为新文件加上后缀名 返回错误信息 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码,-200:表示其他异常 大文件多次复制文件 true：复制成功 false：复制失败 原始文件路径 复制目标文件路径 复制文件或文件夹到目标路径,不支持进度事件,支持中途取消 源路径 目标路径 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 复制文件夹到目标文件夹(从3.0.2205.2601版本起已更换实现底层) 源文件夹 目标文件夹 返回复制操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，负数表示复制失败的文件数量。1表示源文件夹不存在 复制或剪切文件列表到剪切板 复制文件列表到剪切板 剪切文件列表到剪切板 重命名一个文件为新名称，建议您使用更方便的Microsoft.VisualBasic.FileSystem.ReName();替换该方法 要复制的文件名 复制到的目的文件名或路径 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 返回错误信息 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码,-200:表示其他异常 删除单个或多个文件 删除的文件名，如果是多个文件，文件名之间以字符串结尾符'\0'隔开 指示是将文件放入回收站还是永久删除，true-放入回收站，false-永久删除 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认删除对话框，false-不显示确认删除对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框，true-显示，false-不显示。该参数当指定永久删除文件时有效 反馈错误消息的字符串 操作执行结果标识，删除文件成功返回0，否则，返回错误代码 移动或复制一个或多个文件到指定路径下 操作类型，是移动操作还是复制操作 要移动或复制的文件名，如果是多个文件，文件名之间以字符串结尾符'\0'隔开 移动到的目的位置 指示是否显示确认对话框，true-显示确认对话框，false-不显示确认对话框 指示是否显示进度对话框 指示当文件名重复时，是否自动为新文件加上后缀名 反馈错误消息的字符串 返回移动操作是否成功的标识，成功返回0，失败返回错误代码 如果指定文件夹不存在，则创建文件夹 根据指定文件夹路径,生成一个随机不存在的文件名 扩展名,比如.jpg 前缀 获取一个文件的全名 文件名 返回生成文件的完整路径名 获取文件日期 文件名 返回生成文件的完整路径名 设置文件创建时间 设置文件修改时间 设置文件日期 文件名 要设置的时间,当时间小于等于1970年1月1日时,则不进行修改 返回是否设置成功 解释错误代码 代码号 返回关于错误代码的文字描述 运行文件 /运行文件 运行程序 以管理员方式打开 以管理员方式打开 打开文件 打开文件夹并定位文件 打开网址 判断是否为空的文件夹 文件或文件夹是否存在 判断文件名是否有效 转换到有效文件名 追加日志 追加文件 读取文件内容,可以自动识别文件编码 读取文件内容,可以自动识别文件编码 读取文件所有行,可以自动识别文件编码 读取文件所有行,可以自动识别文件编码 写入所有文本行到文件,如果文件夹不存在，会自动创建 写入所有文本到文件,如果文件夹不存在，会自动创建 以UTF-8格式写入所有文本到文件,如果文件夹不存在，会自动创建 从文件中加载图片,使用本方法，不会导致图片文件被占用。 获取指定文件夹下的文件列表,支持多个扩展名获取(子文件夹里的文件不会去获取)。如果 文件夹不存在,则获取空列表(本函数不会返回null值) 要获取的文件夹路径 要获取的扩展名列表(例如:*.mp3;*.wav) 获取文件大小 添加文件到指定文件夹,会进行自动重命名，并返回重命名后的文件名(含路径) 要添加的文件路径 要添加到的文件夹 是否根据时间进行重命名 返回是否成功执行 成功执行则返回路径，否则返回空 获取文件大小字符串 根据文件大小字符串获取长整型表示的文件大小 获取文件大小字符串 复制内容到剪切板 添加某个控件为支持拖放属性 使管理员方式运行时支持拖放 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 获取绝对路径 获取相对路径 获取图标 销毁图标 获取文件图标 获取文件图标 图片相关API 检测文件真实扩展名 检测文件真实扩展名 从文件或Url中加载图片,使用本方法，不会导致图片文件被占用。(如果是webp格式,需要引入OpenXmlPowerTools) 从文件或Url中加载图片,使用本方法，不会导致图片文件被占用。(如果是webp格式,需要引入OpenXmlPowerTools) 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 图片质量,0~100 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 图片质量,0~100 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 图片质量,0~100 保存高质量不失真照片 保存高质量不失真照片 以逆时针为方向对图像进行旋转 位图流 旋转角度[0,360](前台给的) 是否包括透明像素 操作失败 矩形边界 计算水印位置 写入水印 原图 水印图片 水印位置 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 写入水印 原图 水印图片 水印位置 x坐标偏移 y坐标偏移 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 写入水印 原图 水印图片 水印位置 x坐标偏移 y坐标偏移 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 计算最大字体大小 计算旋转矩形大小 写入水印文字 图片 水印文字 水印字体名字 字体颜色 字体大小 旋转角度 水印位置 x坐标偏移 y坐标偏移 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 写入水印文字 图片 水印文字 水印字体名字 字体颜色 字体大小 旋转角度 水印位置 x坐标偏移 y坐标偏移 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 写入水印文字 图片 水印文字 水印字体名字 字体颜色 字体大小 旋转角度 水印位置 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 往图片右下角写入水印文字 图片 水印文字 水印字体名字 字体颜色 字体大小 不透明度(0~1),越小越透明 往图片右下角写入水印文字 图片 水印文字 水印字体名字 字体颜色 字体大小 缩放 宽 高 插值算法 返回缩放后的图片 Image 不能为 null 操作失败 缩放 宽 高 返回缩放后的图片 Image 不能为 null 操作失败 根据原边长和新边长计算绘制的起始点坐标 获取缩放模式 是否裁剪图片 裁剪或填充 背景色 插值算法 Image 不能为 null 操作失败 裁剪 宽度 高度 返回裁剪后的图片 Image 不能为 null 新的图片尺寸的宽度和高度必须大于零 操作失败 调整宽度 根据最大宽度调整图片尺寸 最大宽度 返回调整后的图片 Image 不能为 null 最大宽度必须大于零 操作失败 根据最大高度调整图片尺寸 最大高度 返回调整后的图片 Image 不能为 null 最大宽度必须大于零 操作失败 根据最长边调整图片尺寸 设置最长边允许的值,当最长边大于这个值时,自动缩放 返回调整后的图片 Image 不能为 null 最大值必须大于零 操作失败 调整高度 调整图片大小 调整图片大小 调整图片大小 转换Image为Icon 要转换为图标的Image对象 当image为null时是否返回null。false则抛空引用异常 缩放模式 宽度优先(不裁剪宽) 高度优先(不裁剪高) 水印位置 左上角 中上 右上角 左中 居中 右中 左下角 中下 右下角 全屏平铺 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 存储类型 配置存储路径 设置XML内容 添加控件 设置值 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 读取配置 保存配置 音频播放类 临时音频文件 父窗口句柄 声音标签 play synchronously (default) play asynchronously silence (!default) if sound not found pszSound points to a memory file loop the sound until next sndPlaySound don’t stop any currently playing sound Stop Playing Wave don’t wait if the driver is busy name is a registry alias alias is a predefined id name is file name name is resource name or atom 音频播放类 embedded music file 临时保存的文件位置 父窗口句柄 音频播放类 要播放的音频位置 父窗口句柄 音频播放类 父窗口句柄 播放音频 播放音频 关闭音频 XML操作类 XML操作类 从XML文本中加载数据 从指定的XML文本中加载 XML文本 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 载入空的XML文档 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 从指定的文件中加载 XML文件路径 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 保存到指定文件中 文件路径 如为1，表示保存成功，为0为失败 判断节点是否存在 属性名 属性值 返回1，表示存在，其它表示不存在 定位节点 属性名 属性值 返回第一个符合要求的结果 定位节点,如果找不到节点，就新建一个节点 属性名 属性值 返回第一个符合要求的结果 根据用户的节点定位节点，输入节点时，一定要注意节点是属于类内部的，否则可能出错。 返回第一个符合要求的结果 定位设置节点 返回第一个符合要求的结果 在节点后插入数据 在节点前插入数据 获取节点数量 属性名 属性值 返回符合要求的结果数量 获取节点数量 返回符合要求的结果数量 获取节点数量 属性名 属性值 返回符合要求的结果数量 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 设置节点值 属性名 属性值 如为1，表示加载成功，为0为失败 读取指定节点的值(string) 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 获取属性值 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 读取所有的节点名称 读取指定节点的值(string) 读取指定节点的值(int) 读取指定节点的值(decimal) 读取指定节点的值 读取指定节点的值 获取XML文件的根元素 获取所有列表 如为1，表示获取成功，为0为失败 获取所有列表 如为1，表示获取成功，为0为失败 新增节点 新增节点并定位到新节点 新增设置节点并定位 在指定节点前新增节点并定位到新节点 获取当前节点 删除节点 获取XML文本 获取XML文本 获取文本 获取文本 文件时间 创建时间 最后修改时间 访问时间 用于取得一个文本文件的编码方式(Encoding)。 用于取得一个文本文件的编码方式(Encoding)。 取得一个文本文件的编码方式。如果无法在文件头部找到有效的前导符，Encoding.Default将被返回。 文件名。 取得一个文本文件流的编码方式。 文本文件流。 取得一个文本文件的编码方式。 文件名。 默认编码方式。当该方法无法从文件的头部取得有效的前导符时，将返回该编码方式。 取得一个文本文件流的编码方式。 文本文件流。 默认编码方式。当该方法无法从文件的头部取得有效的前导符时，将返回该编码方式。 通过给定的文件流，判断文件的编码类型 文件流 文件的编码类型 判断是否是不带 BOM 的 UTF8 格式 Read a WebP file WebP file to load Bitmap with the WebP image Decode a WebP image The data to uncompress Bitmap with the WebP image Decode a WebP image the data to uncompress Options for advanced decode Bitmap with the WebP image Get Thumbnail from webP in mode faster/low quality The data to uncompress Wanted width of thumbnail Wanted height of thumbnail Bitmap with the WebP thumbnail in 24bpp Thumbnail from webP in mode slow/high quality The data to uncompress Wanted width of thumbnail Wanted height of thumbnail Bitmap with the WebP thumbnail Save bitmap to file in WebP format Bitmap with the WebP image The file to write Between 0 (lower quality, lowest file size) and 100 (highest quality, higher file size) Lossy encoding bitmap to WebP (Simple encoding API) Bitmap with the image Between 0 (lower quality, lowest file size) and 100 (highest quality, higher file size) Compressed data Lossy encoding bitmap to WebP (Advanced encoding API) Bitmap with the image Between 0 (lower quality, lowest file size) and 100 (highest quality, higher file size) Between 0 (fastest, lowest compression) and 9 (slower, best compression) Compressed data Lossless encoding bitmap to WebP (Simple encoding API) Bitmap with the image Compressed data Lossless encoding image in bitmap (Advanced encoding API) Bitmap with the image Between 0 (fastest, lowest compression) and 9 (slower, best compression) Compressed data Near lossless encoding image in bitmap Bitmap with the image Between 0 (lower quality, lowest file size) and 100 (highest quality, higher file size) Between 0 (fastest, lowest compression) and 9 (slower, best compression) Compress data Get the libwebp version Version of library Get info of WEBP data The data of WebP width of image height of image Image has alpha channel Image is a animation Format of image: 0 = undefined (/mixed), 1 = lossy, 2 = lossless Compute PSNR, SSIM or LSIM distortion metric between two pictures. Warning: this function is rather CPU-intensive. Picture to measure Reference picture 0 = PSNR, 1 = SSIM, 2 = LSIM dB in the Y/U/V/Alpha/All order Encoding image using Advanced encoding API Bitmap with the image Config for encode True if need encode info. Compressed data Free memory This function will initialize the configuration according to a predefined set of parameters (referred to by 'preset') and a given quality factor. The WebPConfig struct Type of image Quality of compresion 0 if error Get info of WepP image Bytes[] of webp image Size of rawWebP Features of WebP image VP8StatusCode Activate the lossless compression mode with the desired efficiency. The WebPConfig struct between 0 (fastest, lowest compression) and 9 (slower, best compression) 0 in case of parameter errorr Check that 'config' is non-NULL and all configuration parameters are within their valid ranges. The WebPConfig struct 1 if config are OK Init the struct WebPPicture ckecking the dll version The WebPPicture struct 1 if not error Colorspace conversion function to import RGB samples. The WebPPicture struct Point to BGR data stride of BGR data Returns 0 in case of memory error. Colorspace conversion function to import RGB samples. The WebPPicture struct Point to BGRA data stride of BGRA data Returns 0 in case of memory error. Colorspace conversion function to import RGB samples. The WebPPicture struct Point to BGR data stride of BGR data Returns 0 in case of memory error. The writer type for output compress data Data returned Size of data returned Picture struct Compress to webp format The config struct for compresion parameters 'picture' hold the source samples in both YUV(A) or ARGB input Returns 0 in case of error, 1 otherwise. In case of error, picture->error_code is updated accordingly. Release the memory allocated by WebPPictureAlloc() or WebPPictureImport*() Note that this function does _not_ free the memory used by the 'picture' object itself. Besides memory (which is reclaimed) all other fields of 'picture' are preserved. Picture struct Validate the WebP image header and retrieve the image height and width. Pointers *width and *height can be passed NULL if deemed irrelevant Pointer to WebP image data This is the size of the memory block pointed to by data containing the image data The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 1 if success, otherwise error code returned in the case of (a) formatting error(s). Decode WEBP image pointed to by *data and returns BGR samples into a pre-allocated buffer Pointer to WebP image data This is the size of the memory block pointed to by data containing the image data Pointer to decoded WebP image Size of allocated buffer Specifies the distance between scanlines output_buffer if function succeeds; NULL otherwise Decode WEBP image pointed to by *data and returns BGR samples into a pre-allocated buffer Pointer to WebP image data This is the size of the memory block pointed to by data containing the image data Pointer to decoded WebP image Size of allocated buffer Specifies the distance between scanlines output_buffer if function succeeds; NULL otherwise Initialize the configuration as empty. This function must always be called first, unless WebPGetFeatures() is to be called. Configuration struct False in case of mismatched version. Decodes the full data at once, taking 'config' into account. WebP raw data to decode Size of WebP data Configuration struct VP8_STATUS_OK if the decoding was successful Free any memory associated with the buffer. Must always be called last. Doesn't free the 'buffer' structure itself. WebPDecBuffer Lossy encoding images Pointer to BGR image data The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 Specifies the distance between scanlines Ranges from 0 (lower quality) to 100 (highest quality). Controls the loss and quality during compression output_buffer with WebP image Size of WebP Image or 0 if an error occurred Lossy encoding images Pointer to BGRA image data The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 Specifies the distance between scanlines Ranges from 0 (lower quality) to 100 (highest quality). Controls the loss and quality during compression output_buffer with WebP image Size of WebP Image or 0 if an error occurred Lossless encoding images pointed to by *data in WebP format Pointer to BGR image data The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 Specifies the distance between scanlines output_buffer with WebP image Size of WebP Image or 0 if an error occurred Lossless encoding images pointed to by *data in WebP format Pointer to BGR image data The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 The range is limited currently from 1 to 16383 Specifies the distance between scanlines output_buffer with WebP image Size of WebP Image or 0 if an error occurred Releases memory returned by the WebPEncode Pointer to memory Get the webp version library 8bits for each of major/minor/revision packet in integer. E.g: v2.5.7 is 0x020507 Compute PSNR, SSIM or LSIM distortion metric between two pictures. Picture to measure Reference picture 0 = PSNR, 1 = SSIM, 2 = LSIM dB in the Y/U/V/Alpha/All order False in case of error (src and ref don't have same dimension, ...) Enumerate some predefined settings for WebPConfig, depending on the type of source picture. These presets are used when calling WebPConfigPreset(). Default preset. Digital picture, like portrait, inner shot. Outdoor photograph, with natural lighting. Hand or line drawing, with high-contrast details. Small-sized colorful images. Text-like. Encoding error conditions. No error. Memory error allocating objects. Memory error while flushing bits. A pointer parameter is NULL. Configuration is invalid. Picture has invalid width/height. Partition is bigger than 512k. Partition is bigger than 16M. Error while flushing bytes. File is bigger than 4G. Abort request by user. List terminator. always last. Enumeration of the status codes. No error. Memory error allocating objects. Configuration is invalid. Configuration is invalid. Abort request by user. Image characteristics hint for the underlying encoder. Default preset. Digital picture, like portrait, inner shot Outdoor photograph, with natural lighting Discrete tone image (graph, map-tile etc). list terminator. always last. Describes the byte-ordering of packed samples in memory. Byte-order: R,G,B,R,G,B,... Byte-order: R,G,B,A,R,G,B,A,... Byte-order: B,G,R,B,G,R,... Byte-order: B,G,R,A,B,G,R,A,... Byte-order: A,R,G,B,A,R,G,B,... Byte-order: RGB-565: [a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 r5 r4 r3], [r2 r1 r0 g4 g3 g2 g1 g0], ... WEBP_SWAP_16BITS_CSP is defined, Byte-order: RGB-565: [a4 a3 a2 a1 a0 b5 b4 b3], [b2 b1 b0 g4 g3 g2 g1 g0], ... Byte-order: RGB-565: [r4 r3 r2 r1 r0 g5 g4 g3], [g2 g1 g0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0], ... WEBP_SWAP_16BITS_CSP is defined, Byte-order: [b3 b2 b1 b0 a3 a2 a1 a0], [r3 r2 r1 r0 g3 g2 g1 g0], ... RGB-premultiplied transparent modes (alpha value is preserved) RGB-premultiplied transparent modes (alpha value is preserved) RGB-premultiplied transparent modes (alpha value is preserved) RGB-premultiplied transparent modes (alpha value is preserved) yuv 4:2:0 yuv 4:2:0 MODE_LAST -> 13 Decoding states. State normally flows as: WEBP_HEADER->VP8_HEADER->VP8_PARTS0->VP8_DATA->DONE for a lossy image, and WEBP_HEADER->VP8L_HEADER->VP8L_DATA->DONE for a lossless image. If there is any error the decoder goes into state ERROR. Features gathered from the bitstream Width in pixels, as read from the bitstream. Height in pixels, as read from the bitstream. True if the bitstream contains an alpha channel. True if the bitstream is an animation. 0 = undefined (/mixed), 1 = lossy, 2 = lossless Padding for later use. Compression parameters. Lossless encoding (0=lossy(default), 1=lossless). Between 0 (smallest file) and 100 (biggest) Quality/speed trade-off (0=fast, 6=slower-better) Hint for image type (lossless only for now). If non-zero, set the desired target size in bytes. Takes precedence over the 'compression' parameter. If non-zero, specifies the minimal distortion to try to achieve. Takes precedence over target_size. Maximum number of segments to use, in [1..4] Spatial Noise Shaping. 0=off, 100=maximum. Range: [0 = off .. 100 = strongest] Range: [0 = off .. 7 = least sharp] Filtering type: 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if filter_strength > 0 or autofilter > 0) Auto adjust filter's strength [0 = off, 1 = on] Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = compressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1. Predictive filtering method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1: fast, 2: best. Default if 1. Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless). Default is 100. Number of entropy-analysis passes (in [1..10]). If true, export the compressed picture back. In-loop filtering is not applied. Preprocessing filter (0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering) Log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3] Default is set to 0 for easier progressive decoding. Quality degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on prediction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum possible degradation). If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Generally, the output size will be similar but the degradation will be lower. If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding. If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use). Near lossless encoding [0 = max loss .. 100 = off (default)]. If non-zero, preserve the exact RGB values under transparent area. Otherwise, discard this invisible RGB information for better compression. The default value is 0. Reserved for future lossless feature if needed, use sharp (and slow) RGB->YUV conversion Padding for later use. Main exchange structure (input samples, output bytes, statistics) Main flag for encoder selecting between ARGB or YUV input. Recommended to use ARGB input (*argb, argb_stride) for lossless, and YUV input (*y, *u, *v, etc.) for lossy colorspace: should be YUV420 for now (=Y'CbCr). Value = 0 Width of picture (less or equal to WEBP_MAX_DIMENSION) Height of picture (less or equal to WEBP_MAX_DIMENSION) Pointer to luma plane. Pointer to chroma U plane. Pointer to chroma V plane. Luma stride. Chroma stride. Pointer to the alpha plane stride of the alpha plane Padding for later use. Pointer to argb (32 bit) plane. This is stride in pixels units, not bytes. Padding for later use. Byte-emission hook, to store compressed bytes as they are ready. Can be used by the writer. 1: intra type, 2: segment, 3: quant, 4: intra-16 prediction mode, 5: chroma prediction mode, 6: bit cost, 7: distortion if not NULL, points to an array of size ((width + 15) / 16) * ((height + 15) / 16) that will be filled with a macroblock map, depending on extra_info_type. Pointer to side statistics (updated only if not NULL) Error code for the latest error encountered during encoding If not NULL, report progress during encoding. this field is free to be set to any value and used during callbacks (like progress-report e.g.). Padding for later use. Row chunk of memory for yuva planes row chunk of memory for argb planes Padding for later use. Structure for storing auxiliary statistics (mostly for lossy encoding). Final size Peak-signal-to-noise ratio for Y Peak-signal-to-noise ratio for U Peak-signal-to-noise ratio for V Peak-signal-to-noise ratio for All Peak-signal-to-noise ratio for Alpha Number of intra4 Number of intra16 Number of skipped macroblocks Approximate number of bytes spent for header Approximate number of bytes spent for mode-partition #0 Approximate number of bytes spent for DC coefficients for segment 0. Approximate number of bytes spent for AC coefficients for segment 0. Approximate number of bytes spent for uv coefficients for segment 0. Approximate number of bytes spent for DC coefficients for segment 1. Approximate number of bytes spent for AC coefficients for segment 1. Approximate number of bytes spent for uv coefficients for segment 1. Approximate number of bytes spent for DC coefficients for segment 2. Approximate number of bytes spent for AC coefficients for segment 2. Approximate number of bytes spent for uv coefficients for segment 2. Approximate number of bytes spent for DC coefficients for segment 3. Approximate number of bytes spent for AC coefficients for segment 3. Approximate number of bytes spent for uv coefficients for segment 3. Number of macroblocks in segments 0 Number of macroblocks in segments 1 Number of macroblocks in segments 2 Number of macroblocks in segments 3 Quantizer values for segment 0 Quantizer values for segment 1 Quantizer values for segment 2 Quantizer values for segment 3 Filtering strength for segment 0 [0..63] Filtering strength for segment 1 [0..63] Filtering strength for segment 2 [0..63] Filtering strength for segment 3 [0..63] Size of the transparency data Size of the enhancement layer data bit0:predictor bit1:cross-color transform bit2:subtract-green bit3:color indexing Number of precision bits of histogram Precision bits for transform Number of bits for color cache lookup Number of color in palette, if used Final lossless size Lossless header (transform, huffman etc) size Lossless image data size Padding for later use. Immutable bitstream features (optional) Output buffer (can point to external mem) Decoding options Output buffer Colorspace. Width of image. Height of image. If non-zero, 'internal_memory' pointer is not used. If value is '2' or more, the external memory is considered 'slow' and multiple read/write will be avoided. Output buffer parameters. padding for later use. padding for later use. padding for later use. padding for later use. Internally allocated memory (only when is_external_memory is 0). Should not be used externally, but accessed via WebPRGBABuffer. Union of buffer parameters Pointer to luma samples Pointer to chroma U samples Pointer to chroma V samples Pointer to alpha samples luma stride chroma U stride chroma V stride alpha stride luma plane size chroma plane U size chroma plane V size alpha plane size Generic structure for describing the output sample buffer. pointer to RGBA samples. stride in bytes from one scanline to the next. total size of the rgba buffer. Decoding options if true, skip the in-loop filtering. if true, use faster pointwise upsampler. if true, cropping is applied _first_ left position for cropping. Will be snapped to even values. top position for cropping. Will be snapped to even values. width of the cropping area height of the cropping area if true, scaling is applied _afterward_ final width final height if true, use multi-threaded decoding dithering strength (0=Off, 100=full) flip output vertically alpha dithering strength in [0..100] padding for later use. padding for later use. padding for later use. padding for later use. padding for later use. 数据库操作扩展 判断DataSet是否包含数据 获取首行数据,如果没有数据,则返回null 获取第一行第一列的值 获取第一张表的指定行数据 指定第几行 获取第一张表的行数 发送邮件 通知管理类 获取SMTP配置 显示SMTP配置 选择通知用户 默认选中的ID列表 选择的Id列表 根据id列表来获取具体用户信息列表 根据用户信息列表来获取用户名称列表 根据id列表来获取用户名称列表 通知指定用户 通知用户信息 获取和设置aapt.exe的完整路径 获取和设置adb.exe的完整路径 获取和设置缓存文件夹 是否开启深度分析,深度分析需要解压apk进行分析，会更耗时。 运行命令并等待结果 读取adb内容 app名称 包名 版本号 版本字符串 权限 最小SDK 应用图标,需开启DeepAnaly_On开关，否则无法获取 文件名 文件路径 文件创建时间 文件修改时间 错误信息 对鼠标或键盘的自动化操作 鼠标左键 鼠标中键 鼠标右键 模拟键盘按键 按下还是抬起 鼠标滚轮 鼠标移动 自定义鼠标按下或抬起 左键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标x(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 坐标y(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 左键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 右键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标x(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 坐标y(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 右键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 中键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标x(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 坐标y(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 中键单击鼠标(支持后台单击) 指定要发送单击命令的句柄 坐标(句柄内的坐标,非屏幕坐标) 左键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标x(屏幕坐标) 坐标y(屏幕坐标) 左键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标(屏幕坐标) 右键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标x(屏幕坐标) 坐标y(屏幕坐标) 右键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标(屏幕坐标) 中键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标x(屏幕坐标) 坐标y(屏幕坐标) 中键单击鼠标(不支持后台单击) 坐标(屏幕坐标) 粘贴文本 获取指定句柄的大小及位置 设置指定句柄的大小 判断鼠标位置是不是在指定的矩形中 判断2张图是否相似度超90 /获取2种颜色的相似度,范围为0~100 新模态窗体 设置窗体返回的结果值，并关闭窗体。 当前窗体 模态变量 防止 窗体返回的结果事件 当打开的窗体返回结果时激发 窗体返回的状态 实例化类 父窗体,如果为null,则取桌面为父窗体 获取最顶级的父窗口 显示新模态窗体,会暂时禁用父窗体,关闭当前窗体后,父窗体会恢复。 只运行一个实例,打开后,所有窗体都依然有效。 显示窗体 显示的位置 显示在父窗体中间 窗体显示位置 右上角 顶部中间 顶部右边 中间 左下角 底部中间 右下角 父窗体居中 线程信息 是否取消本线程 设置线程数量 已完成计算的线程数量 线程里任务每次执行时间间隔(单位毫秒) 当前已使用的时间 线程数量 多线程计算时激发 在所有线程执行完毕后发生 在线程执行完毕后发生,最后一个执行完毕的线程将不收到本事件通知 线程信息 开始的序号 结束的序号 设置线程数量 要计算的总数量 每个线程要计算的数量 已完成计算的线程数量 当前已使用的时间 线程数量 要计算的事务数量 多线程计算时激发 在所有线程执行完毕后发生 在线程执行完毕后发生,最后一个执行完毕的线程将不收到本事件通知 进程相关接口 获取进程路径 获取进程路径 获取进程路径 获取命令行 获取命令行 结束指定文件夹下除自身外的所有进程(文件夹下子目录的进程也会被结束) 按进程id来结束进程 按进程文件名来结束进程(自身不会被结束) 按父进程PID来结束该进程下的子进程(不会结束自身) 获取父进程PID 运行库检测类 获取产品状态 判断是否已安装VC运行库 判断是否已安装VC运行库 安装状态 组件禁用 配置数据已损坏 安装已暂停或正在进行 从源运行，源不可用 返回缓冲区溢出 无效的参数传递给该函数。 不公布或者未安装该产品。 损坏 该产品已公布但尚未安装。 正在移除的组件（操作状态，不可设置） 不同的用户安装该产品。 安装在本地驱动器上 从源代码、CD或网络运行 为当前用户安装该产品。 安装的版本,是x86还是x64，还是全部安装了 判断32位和64位运行库是否已安装 判断32位运行库是否已安装 判断64位运行库是否已安装 判断是否已安装VC2005运行库 判断是否已安装VC2005SP1运行库 判断是否已安装VC2008运行库 判断是否已安装VC2008SP1运行库 判断是否已安装VC2010运行库 判断是否已安装VC2010SP1运行库 判断是否已安装VC2012运行库 判断是否已安装VC2013运行库 判断是否已安装VC2015或以上运行库 判断是否已安装VC2017运行库或以上运行库 判断是否已安装VC2019运行库或以上运行库 判断是否已安装VC2022运行库或以上运行库 判断当前系统是否安装了WebView2组件 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 3.5 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 4.8 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 6 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 7 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 8 判断当前系统是否安装了.NET 9 日期时间的操作类 获取当前是周几,周一到周日，分别是1-7. 获取当前是周几,1-7，分别是返回一到日. 获取当前是周几,输入日期，根据周几，分别是返回一到日. 获取一周的开始和结束,开始时间为第一天的0点，结束时间以最后一天的0点为结束时间 获取2个日期相差几周 获取2个日期相差几个月 获取一个月的开始 判断是否在同一个星期。 判断是否在同一个月。 判断是否在同一天 计算两个日期的时间间隔,返回的是时间间隔的日期差的绝对值. 第一个日期和时间 第二个日期和时间 计算两个日期的时间间隔,返回的是时间间隔的日期差的绝对值. 第一个日期和时间 第二个日期和时间 是否显示秒 将秒数显示成中文表达式 显示秒 计算一个时间与当前本地日期和时间的时间间隔,返回的是时间间隔的日期差的绝对值. 一个日期和时间 将c# DateTime时间格式转换为Unix时间戳格式 时间 long 时间戳转为C#格式时间 时间戳转为C#格式时间 将c# DateTime时间格式转换为js时间戳格式 时间 long JS时间戳转为C#格式时间 JS时间戳转为C#格式时间 根据年月日转换成日期 根据日期和时间转换成日期时间 将时间转换成当前分钟开始的时间 将时间转换成当前秒钟开始的时间 当前时间在这一天里的秒数 判断指定的日期时间是否在时间区间内(比如判断时间是否在17点到次日6点之间。) 时间起点(秒数表示时间,例如1点，就是3600) 时间终点(秒数表示时间,小于start就表示次日) 窗体操作类 设置Comobox的行间距 移除关闭按钮。返回值，非零表示成功，零表示失败。 窗口的句柄 是否成功 把窗体放到最前 显示窗体 设置窗体是否置顶 设置窗体为子窗体样式 设置窗体为子窗体样式 显示没有焦点的窗口 根据句柄获取窗口文本 根据句柄获取窗口类 获取当前活动的窗口句柄 获取当前前台的窗口句柄 设置为当前活动窗口 根据窗口句柄来获得进程id 显示在父窗体中间,如果没有父窗体,则显示在显示器中间 显示窗体 设置窗体父窗体为桌面,不会随着显示桌面而最小化,但无法设置窗体透明度 结束进程 打开窗体,只打开一个实例(非模态) 将窗体植入到容器控件中 作为窗体容器的控件 重新调整窗体大小以适配容器大小 作为窗体容器的控件 设置注册表操作,部分功能需要管理员权限 访问的注册表位置(64位还是32位) 访问的注册表节点 判断注册表项是否存在 删除注册表键(如果存在子键,子键将一并被删除) 删除注册表键值 获取注册表键值 设置注册表键值 设置注册表键值 设置是否开机启动 是否开机启动 开机启动名称 启动命令 设置是否开机启动 是否开机启动 开机启动名称 把指定文件设置为开机启动或取消开机启动 是否开机启动 开机启动名称 要开机启动的文件路径 检查是否开机启动 开机启动名称 开机启动命令 检查是否开机启动 开机启动名称 判断指定文件是否是开机启动 开机启动名称 文件路径 判断当前程序是否是开机启动 开机启动名称 判断当前程序是否是开机启动 开机启动名称 启动命令行 设置指定文件的浏览器控件内核版本 文件名，要求不带路径 7000 表示IE7兼容视图模式;8000 表示IE8 标准模式 ;8888 表示IE8 强制标准模式，在渲染失败的情况下不尝试用兼容视图模式 设置文件关联 扩展名(如.apk) 文件路径 图标路径 设置文件关联 扩展名(如.apk) 映射的扩展名(如apkfile) app名称(建议用英文数字) 文件关联描述 文件路径 图标路径 设置文件关联 映射的扩展名(如apkfile) app名称(建议用英文数字) 文件关联描述 文件路径 图标路径 在指定文件格式右键菜单中增加菜单 扩展名(如.apk) app名称(建议用英文数字) 文件关联描述 文件路径 删除文件关联 映射的扩展名(如apkfile) app名称(建议用英文数字) 获取文件关联是否存在 映射的扩展名(如apkfile) app名称(建议用英文数字) 采用的IE模式 IE7兼容视图 IE8 标准模式 IE8 强制标准模式，在渲染失败的情况下不尝试用兼容视图模式 IE9 标准模式 IE9 强制标准模式，在渲染失败的情况下不尝试用兼容视图模式 IE10 标准模式 IE10 强制标准模式，在渲染失败的情况下不尝试用兼容视图模式 设置当前软件的浏览器控件内核版本 7000 表示IE7兼容视图模式;8000 表示IE8 标准模式 ;8888 表示IE8 强制标准模式，在渲染失败的情况下不尝试用兼容视图模式 设置指定文件的浏览器控件内核版本 文件名，要求不带路径 IE内核版本 设置当前软件的浏览器控件内核版本 IE内核版本 系统音量操作类 判断系统是否正处于静音(暂不支持XP或以下系统) 系统函数 红 绿 蓝 获取屏幕伽马值 设置屏幕伽马值 获取键盘和鼠标没有操作的时间 设置屏幕 Gamma值 设置屏幕亮度 获取系统名称,注意需要在app.manifest文件中设置兼容win10 SOURCE CODE FROM THE WEBSITE. LAST UPDATE:WWW.VJSDN.COM易学论坛,2009/08/03 by Jonny Sun Mutes the left hand channel and transfers audio fully to the right Mutes the right hand channel and transfers audio fully to the left 窗体操作类 构造函数 析构 设置让窗体支持移动 是否允许可调节大小 可调节窗体大小的宽度 提供一个任务调度程序，确保在ThreadPool之上运行时具有最大并发级别。 Whether the current thread is processing work items. The list of tasks to be executed. The maximum concurrency level allowed by this scheduler. Whether the scheduler is currently processing work items. Initializes an instance of the LimitedConcurrencyLevelTaskScheduler class with the specified degree of parallelism. The maximum degree of parallelism provided by this scheduler. Queues a task to the scheduler. The task to be queued. Informs the ThreadPool that there's work to be executed for this scheduler. Attempts to execute the specified task on the current thread. The task to be executed. Whether the task could be executed on the current thread. Attempts to remove a previously scheduled task from the scheduler. The task to be removed. Whether the task could be found and removed. Gets the maximum concurrency level supported by this scheduler. Gets an enumerable of the tasks currently scheduled on this scheduler. An enumerable of the tasks currently scheduled. 开始截图 是否截取鼠标指针 自动排列控件 最大列数 开始排列的坐标 下一项的位置 下一项的右下角坐标 竖向间隔像素 横向间隔像素 最小保留右边距,只对ReDraw2有效 自动排列控件构造函数 自动排列控件构造函数 开始排列控件 开始排列控件,当列数超过显示空间时，自动换行 加入的控件列表 初始化添加,自动将容器设置为滚动条自动显示 添加控件 删除控件 删除控件 清空所有控件 根据XPath来获取属性值 属性名,为空则输出InnerText,-1则输出InnerHtml,-2则输出OuterHtml 根据当前节点生成HtmlDocument 根据XPath来获取属性值 属性名,为空则输出InnerText,-1则输出InnerHtml,-2则输出OuterHtml 根据XPath来查找节点 在当前节点下根据xpath来查找符合的第一个节点 在当前节点下根据xpath来查找所有符合的节点 获取当前节点的InnerText,并保留换行符 A utility class to compute CRC32. Compute a checksum for a given array of bytes. The array of bytes to compute the checksum for. The computed checksum. Compute a checksum for a given string. The string to compute the checksum for. The computed checksum. Represents an HTML attribute. Gets the line number of this attribute in the document. Gets the column number of this attribute in the document. Gets the stream position of the value of this attribute in the document, relative to the start of the document. Gets the length of the value. Gets the qualified name of the attribute. Name of attribute with original case Gets the HTML document to which this attribute belongs. Gets the HTML node to which this attribute belongs. Specifies what type of quote the data should be wrapped in Specifies what type of quote the data should be wrapped in (internal to keep backward compatibility) Gets the stream position of this attribute in the document, relative to the start of the document. Gets or sets the value of the attribute. Gets the DeEntitized value of the attribute. Gets a valid XPath string that points to this Attribute Compares the current instance with another attribute. Comparison is based on attributes' name. An attribute to compare with this instance. A 32-bit signed integer that indicates the relative order of the names comparison. Creates a duplicate of this attribute. The cloned attribute. Removes this attribute from it's parents collection An Enum representing different types of Quotes used for surrounding attribute values A single quote mark ' A double quote mark " No quote mark The initial value (current value) Represents a combined list and collection of HTML nodes. Gets the number of elements actually contained in the list. Gets readonly status of colelction Gets the attribute at the specified index. Gets a given attribute from the list using its name. Adds a new attribute to the collection with the given values Adds supplied item to collection Adds a range supplied items to collection. An IEnumerable<HtmlAttribute> of items to append to this. Adds a range supplied items to collection using a dictionary. A Dictionary<string,string> of items to append to this. Explicit clear Retreives existence of supplied item Copies collection to array Get Explicit enumerator Explicit non-generic enumerator Retrieves the index for the supplied item, -1 if not found Inserts given item into collection at supplied index Explicit collection remove Removes the attribute at the specified index. The index of the attribute to remove. Inserts the specified attribute as the last attribute in the collection. The attribute to insert. May not be null. The appended attribute. Creates and inserts a new attribute as the last attribute in the collection. The name of the attribute to insert. The appended attribute. Creates and inserts a new attribute as the last attribute in the collection. The name of the attribute to insert. The value of the attribute to insert. The appended attribute. Checks for existance of attribute with given name Inserts the specified attribute as the first node in the collection. The attribute to insert. May not be null. The prepended attribute. Removes a given attribute from the list. The attribute to remove. May not be null. Removes an attribute from the list, using its name. If there are more than one attributes with this name, they will all be removed. The attribute's name. May not be null. Remove all attributes in the list. Returns all attributes with specified name. Handles case insentivity Name of the attribute Removes all attributes from the collection Clears the attribute collection Represents an HTML comment. Gets or Sets the comment text of the node. Gets or Sets the HTML between the start and end tags of the object. In the case of a text node, it is equals to OuterHtml. Gets or Sets the object and its content in HTML. Represents a complete HTML document. True to disable, false to enable the behavior tag p. Default builder to use in the HtmlDocument constructor Action to execute before the Parse is executed Defines the max level we would go deep into the html document The HtmlDocument Text. Careful if you modify it. True to stay backward compatible with previous version of HAP. This option does not guarantee 100% compatibility. Adds Debugging attributes to node. Default is false. Defines if closing for non closed nodes must be done at the end or directly in the document. Setting this to true can actually change how browsers render the page. Default is false. Defines if non closed nodes will be checked at the end of parsing. Default is true. Defines if a checksum must be computed for the document while parsing. Default is false. Defines if SelectNodes method will return null or empty collection when no node matched the XPath expression. Setting this to true will return empty collection and false will return null. Default is false. True to disable, false to enable the server side code. Defines the default stream encoding to use. Default is System.Text.Encoding.Default. Force to take the original comment instead of creating it Defines if source text must be extracted while parsing errors. If the document has a lot of errors, or cascading errors, parsing performance can be dramatically affected if set to true. Default is false. Defines the maximum length of source text or parse errors. Default is 100. Defines if LI, TR, TH, TD tags must be partially fixed when nesting errors are detected. Default is false. Defines if output must conform to XML, instead of HTML. Default is false. If used together with and enabled, Xml namespaces in element names are preserved. Default is false. Defines if attribute value output must be optimized (not bound with double quotes if it is possible). Default is false. Defines the global attribute value quote. When specified, it will always win. Defines if name must be output with it's original case. Useful for asp.net tags and attributes. Default is false. Defines if name must be output in uppercase. Default is false. Defines if declared encoding must be read from the document. Declared encoding is determined using the meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html;charset=XXXXX" html node. Default is true. Defines the name of a node that will throw the StopperNodeException when found as an end node. Default is null. Defines if the 'id' attribute must be specifically used. Default is true. Defines if empty nodes must be written as closed during output. Default is false. The max number of nested child nodes. Added to prevent stackoverflow problem when a page has tens of thousands of opening html tags with no closing tags Creates an instance of an HTML document. Gets the parsed text. The parsed text. Defines the max level we would go deep into the html document. If this depth level is exceeded, and exception is thrown. Gets the document CRC32 checksum if OptionComputeChecksum was set to true before parsing, 0 otherwise. Gets the document's declared encoding. Declared encoding is determined using the meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html;charset=XXXXX" html node (pre-HTML5) or the meta charset="XXXXX" html node (HTML5). Gets the root node of the document. Gets the document's output encoding. Gets a list of parse errors found in the document. Gets the remaining text. Will always be null if OptionStopperNodeName is null. Gets the offset of Remainder in the original Html text. If OptionStopperNodeName is null, this will return the length of the original Html text. Gets the document's stream encoding. Gets a valid XML name. Any text. A string that is a valid XML name. Applies HTML encoding to a specified string. The input string to encode. May not be null. The encoded string. Determines if the specified character is considered as a whitespace character. The character to check. true if if the specified character is considered as a whitespace character. Creates an HTML attribute with the specified name. The name of the attribute. May not be null. The new HTML attribute. Creates an HTML attribute with the specified name. The name of the attribute. May not be null. The value of the attribute. The new HTML attribute. Creates an HTML comment node. The new HTML comment node. Creates an HTML comment node with the specified comment text. The comment text. May not be null. The new HTML comment node. Creates an HTML element node with the specified name. The qualified name of the element. May not be null. The new HTML node. Creates an HTML text node. The new HTML text node. Creates an HTML text node with the specified text. The text of the node. May not be null. The new HTML text node. Detects the encoding of an HTML stream. The input stream. May not be null. The detected encoding. Detects the encoding of an HTML stream. The input stream. May not be null. The html is checked. The detected encoding. Detects the encoding of an HTML text provided on a TextReader. The TextReader used to feed the HTML. May not be null. The detected encoding. Detects the encoding of an HTML text. The input html text. May not be null. The detected encoding. Gets the HTML node with the specified 'id' attribute value. The attribute id to match. May not be null. The HTML node with the matching id or null if not found. Loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. Loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. Loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. Loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. The minimum buffer size. Loads the HTML document from the specified TextReader. The TextReader used to feed the HTML data into the document. May not be null. Loads the HTML document from the specified string. String containing the HTML document to load. May not be null. Saves the HTML document to the specified stream. The stream to which you want to save. Saves the HTML document to the specified stream. The stream to which you want to save. May not be null. The character encoding to use. May not be null. Saves the HTML document to the specified StreamWriter. The StreamWriter to which you want to save. Saves the HTML document to the specified TextWriter. The TextWriter to which you want to save. May not be null. Saves the HTML document to the specified XmlWriter. The XmlWriter to which you want to save. Detects the encoding of an HTML document from a file first, and then loads the file. The complete file path to be read. Detects the encoding of an HTML document from a file first, and then loads the file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. true to detect encoding, false otherwise. Detects the encoding of an HTML file. Path for the file containing the HTML document to detect. May not be null. The detected encoding. Loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. Loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. The character encoding to use. May not be null. Loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. The character encoding to use. May not be null. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. May not be null. The character encoding to use. May not be null. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. The minimum buffer size. Saves the mixed document to the specified file. The location of the file where you want to save the document. Saves the mixed document to the specified file. The location of the file where you want to save the document. May not be null. The character encoding to use. May not be null. Creates a new XPathNavigator object for navigating this HTML document. An XPathNavigator object. The XPathNavigator is positioned on the root of the document. Flags that describe the behavior of an Element node. The node is a CDATA node. The node is empty. META or IMG are example of such nodes. The node will automatically be closed during parsing. The node can overlap. A utility class to replace special characters by entities and vice-versa. Follows HTML 4.0 specification found at http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/sgml/entities.html Follows Additional specification found at https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_XML_and_HTML_character_entity_references See also: https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/named-characters.html#named-character-references A collection of entities indexed by name. A collection of entities indexed by value. Replace known entities by characters. The source text. The result text. Clone and entitize an HtmlNode. This will affect attribute values and nodes' text. It will also entitize all child nodes. The node to entitize. An entitized cloned node. Replace characters above 127 by entities. The source text. The result text. Replace characters above 127 by entities. The source text. If set to false, the function will not use known entities name. Default is true. The result text. Replace characters above 127 by entities. The source text. If set to false, the function will not use known entities name. Default is true. If set to true, the [quote], [ampersand], [lower than] and [greather than] characters will be entitized. The result text Represents an HTML node. Gets the name of a comment node. It is actually defined as '#comment'. Gets the name of the document node. It is actually defined as '#document'. Gets the name of a text node. It is actually defined as '#text'. Gets a collection of flags that define specific behaviors for specific element nodes. The table contains a DictionaryEntry list with the lowercase tag name as the Key, and a combination of HtmlElementFlags as the Value. Initialize HtmlNode. Builds a list of all tags that have special allowances Initializes HtmlNode, providing type, owner and where it exists in a collection Gets the collection of HTML attributes for this node. May not be null. Gets all the children of the node. Gets a value indicating if this node has been closed or not. Gets the collection of HTML attributes for the closing tag. May not be null. Gets the closing tag of the node, null if the node is self-closing. Gets the first child of the node. Gets a value indicating whether the current node has any attributes. Gets a value indicating whether this node has any child nodes. Gets a value indicating whether the current node has any attributes on the closing tag. Gets or sets the value of the 'id' HTML attribute. The document must have been parsed using the OptionUseIdAttribute set to true. Gets or Sets the HTML between the start and end tags of the object. Gets the text between the start and end tags of the object. Gets direct inner text. The direct inner text. Gets the last child of the node. Gets the line number of this node in the document. Gets the column number of this node in the document. Gets the stream position of the area between the opening and closing tag of the node, relative to the start of the document. Gets the stream position of the area of the beginning of the tag, relative to the start of the document. Gets the length of the area between the opening and closing tag of the node. Gets the length of the entire node, opening and closing tag included. Gets or sets this node's name. Gets the HTML node immediately following this element. Gets the type of this node. The original unaltered name of the tag Gets or Sets the object and its content in HTML. Gets the to which this node belongs. Gets the parent of this node (for nodes that can have parents). Gets the node immediately preceding this node. Gets the stream position of this node in the document, relative to the start of the document. Gets a valid XPath string that points to this node The depth of the node relative to the opening root html element. This value is used to determine if a document has to many nested html nodes which can cause stack overflows Determines if an element node can be kept overlapped. The name of the element node to check. May not be null. true if the name is the name of an element node that can be kept overlapped, false otherwise. Creates an HTML node from a string representing literal HTML. The HTML text. The newly created node instance. Creates an HTML node from a string representing literal HTML. The HTML text. The HTML Document builder. The newly created node instance. Determines if an element node is a CDATA element node. The name of the element node to check. May not be null. true if the name is the name of a CDATA element node, false otherwise. Determines if an element node is closed. The name of the element node to check. May not be null. true if the name is the name of a closed element node, false otherwise. Determines if an element node is defined as empty. The name of the element node to check. May not be null. true if the name is the name of an empty element node, false otherwise. Determines if a text corresponds to the closing tag of an node that can be kept overlapped. The text to check. May not be null. true or false. Returns a collection of all ancestor nodes of this element. Get Ancestors with matching name Returns a collection of all ancestor nodes of this element. Gets all anscestor nodes and the current node Adds the specified node to the end of the list of children of this node. The node to add. May not be null. The node added. Sets child nodes identifier. The chil node. Adds the specified node to the end of the list of children of this node. The node list to add. May not be null. Gets all Attributes with name Creates a duplicate of the node Creates a duplicate of the node and changes its name at the same time. The new name of the cloned node. May not be null. The cloned node. Creates a duplicate of the node and changes its name at the same time. The new name of the cloned node. May not be null. true to recursively clone the subtree under the specified node; false to clone only the node itself. The cloned node. Creates a duplicate of the node. true to recursively clone the subtree under the specified node; false to clone only the node itself. The cloned node. Creates a duplicate of the node and the subtree under it. The node to duplicate. May not be null. Creates a duplicate of the node. The node to duplicate. May not be null. true to recursively clone the subtree under the specified node, false to clone only the node itself. Gets all Descendant nodes for this node and each of child nodes The depth level of the node to parse in the html tree the current element as an HtmlNode Returns a collection of all descendant nodes of this element, in document order Gets all Descendant nodes in enumerated list Gets all Descendant nodes in enumerated list Get all descendant nodes with matching name Returns a collection of all descendant nodes of this element, in document order Gets all descendant nodes including this node Gets first generation child node matching name Gets matching first generation child nodes matching name Gets data attribute. The key. The data attribute. Gets the data attributes in this collection. An enumerator that allows foreach to be used to process the data attributes in this collection. Gets the attributes in this collection. An enumerator that allows foreach to be used to process the attributes in this collection. Gets the attributes in this collection. A variable-length parameters list containing attribute names. An enumerator that allows foreach to be used to process the attributes in this collection. Helper method to get the value of an attribute of this node. If the attribute is not found, the default value will be returned. The name of the attribute to get. May not be null. The default value to return if not found. The value of the attribute if found, the default value if not found. Helper method to get the value of an attribute of this node. If the attribute is not found, the default value will be returned. The name of the attribute to get. May not be null. The default value to return if not found. The value of the attribute if found, the default value if not found. Helper method to get the value of an attribute of this node. If the attribute is not found, the default value will be returned. The name of the attribute to get. May not be null. The default value to return if not found. The value of the attribute if found, the default value if not found. Helper method to get the value of an attribute of this node. If the attribute is not found, the default value will be returned. The name of the attribute to get. May not be null. The default value to return if not found. The value of the attribute if found, the default value if not found. Inserts the specified node immediately after the specified reference node. The node to insert. May not be null. The node that is the reference node. The newNode is placed after the refNode. The node being inserted. Inserts the specified node immediately before the specified reference node. The node to insert. May not be null. The node that is the reference node. The newChild is placed before this node. The node being inserted. Adds the specified node to the beginning of the list of children of this node. The node to add. May not be null. The node added. Adds the specified node list to the beginning of the list of children of this node. The node list to add. May not be null. Removes node from parent collection Removes all the children and/or attributes of the current node. Removes all the children of the current node. Removes all id for node described by node. The node. Move a node already associated and append it to this node instead. The child node to move. Move a children collection already associated and append it to this node instead. The children collection already associated to move to another node. Removes the children collection for this node. The old children collection to remove. Removes the specified child node. The node being removed. May not be null. The node removed. Removes the specified child node. The node being removed. May not be null. true to keep grand children of the node, false otherwise. The node removed. Replaces the child node oldChild with newChild node. The new node to put in the child list. The node being replaced in the list. The node replaced. Helper method to set the value of an attribute of this node. If the attribute is not found, it will be created automatically. The name of the attribute to set. May not be null. The value for the attribute. The corresponding attribute instance. Saves all the children of the node to the specified TextWriter. The TextWriter to which you want to save. Identifies the level we are in starting at root with 0 Saves all the children of the node to a string. The saved string. Saves the current node to the specified TextWriter. The TextWriter to which you want to save. identifies the level we are in starting at root with 0 Saves the current node to the specified XmlWriter. The XmlWriter to which you want to save. Saves the current node to a string. The saved string. Sets the parent Html node and properly determines the current node's depth using the parent node's depth. Adds one or more classes to this node. The node list to add. May not be null. Adds one or more classes to this node. The node list to add. May not be null. true to throw Error if class name exists, false otherwise. Removes the class attribute from the node. Removes the class attribute from the node. true to throw Error if class name doesn't exist, false otherwise. Removes the specified class from the node. The class being removed. May not be null. Removes the specified class from the node. The class being removed. May not be null. true to throw Error if class name doesn't exist, false otherwise. Replaces the class name oldClass with newClass name. The new class name. The class being replaced. Replaces the class name oldClass with newClass name. The new class name. The class being replaced. true to throw Error if class name doesn't exist, false otherwise. Gets the CSS Class from the node. The CSS Class from the node Check if the node class has the parameter class. The class. True if node class has the parameter class, false if not. Fill an object and go through it's properties and fill them too. Type of object to want to fill. It should have atleast one property that defined XPath. Returns an object of type T including Encapsulated data. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Fill an object and go through it's properties and fill them too. Type of object to want to fill. It should have atleast one property that defined XPath. If htmlDocument includes data , leave this parameter null. Else pass your specific htmldocument. Returns an object of type T including Encapsulated data. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Fill an object and go through it's properties and fill them too. Type of object to want to fill. It should have atleast one property that defined XPath. If htmlDocument includes data , leave this parameter null. Else pass your specific htmldocument. Returns an object of type targetType including Encapsulated data. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Why it's thrown. Creates a new XPathNavigator object for navigating this HTML node. An XPathNavigator object. The XPathNavigator is positioned on the node from which the method was called. It is not positioned on the root of the document. Creates an XPathNavigator using the root of this document. Selects a list of nodes matching the expression. The XPath expression. An containing a collection of nodes matching the query, or null if no node matched the XPath expression. Selects a list of nodes matching the expression. The XPath expression. An containing a collection of nodes matching the query, or null if no node matched the XPath expression. Selects the first XmlNode that matches the XPath expression. The XPath expression. May not be null. The first that matches the XPath query or a null reference if no matching node was found. Selects a list of nodes matching the expression. The XPath expression. An containing a collection of nodes matching the query, or null if no node matched the XPath expression. Includes tools that GetEncapsulatedData method uses them. Determine if a type define an attribute or not , supporting both .NetStandard and .NetFramework2.0 Type you want to test it. Attribute that type must have or not. If true , The type parameter define attributeType parameter. Retrive properties of type that defined . Type that you want to find it's XPath-Defined properties. IEnumerable of property infos of a type , that defined specific attribute. Determine if a has implemented BUT is considered as NONE-IEnumerable ! The property info you want to test. True if property info is IEnumerable. Returns T type(first generic type) of or . IEnumerable-Implemented property List of generic types. Find and Return a mehtod that defined in a class by it's name. Type of class include requested method. Name of requested method as string. Method info of requested method. Create of given type. Type that you want to make a List of it. Returns IList of given type. Returns the part of value of you want as . A htmlNode instance. Attribute that includes ReturnType String that choosen from HtmlNode as result. Returns parts of values of you want as . that you want to retrive each value. A instnce incules . Type of IList generic you want. Simulate Func method to use in Lambada Expression. This method works like Where method in LINQ. Check if the type can instantiated. Returns count of elements stored in IEnumerable of T Specify which part of is requested. The text between the start and end tags of the object. The HTML between the start and end tags of the object The object and its content in HTML Just mark and flag classes to show they have properties that defined . Includes XPath and . XPath for finding html tags and for specify which part of you want to return. XPath Expression that is used to find related html node. Html Attribute name The methode of output Specify Xpath to find related Html Node. Specify Xpath to find related Html Node. Specify you want the output include html text too. Specify Xpath and Attribute to find related Html Node and its attribute value. Tagging a property with this Attribute make Encapsulator to ignore that property if it causes an error. Exception that often occures when there is no way to bind a XPath to a Html Tag. Exception that often occures when there is no way to bind a XPath to a HtmlTag Attribute. Exception that often occures when there is no property that assigned with XPath Property in Class. Represents a combined list and collection of HTML nodes. Initialize the HtmlNodeCollection with the base parent node The base node of the collection Gets the parent node associated to the collection. Gets a given node from the list. Get node with tag name Gets the number of elements actually contained in the list. Is collection read only Gets the node at the specified index. Add node to the collection Add node to the collection Clears out the collection of HtmlNodes. Removes each nodes reference to parentnode, nextnode and prevnode Gets existence of node in collection Copy collection to array Get Enumerator Get Explicit Enumerator Get index of node Insert node at index Remove node Remove at index Get first instance of node in supplied collection Add node to the end of the collection Get first instance of node with name Get index of node Add node to the beginning of the collection Remove node at index Replace node at index Get all node descended from this collection Get all node descended from this collection with matching name Gets all first generation elements in collection Gets all first generation elements matching name All first generation nodes in collection Represents an HTML navigator on an HTML document seen as a data store. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the stream. The minimum buffer size. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a TextReader. The TextReader used to feed the HTML data into the document. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Initializes a new instance of the HtmlNavigator and loads an HTML document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. The minimum buffer size. Gets the base URI for the current node. Always returns string.Empty in the case of HtmlNavigator implementation. Gets the current HTML document. Gets the current HTML node. Gets a value indicating whether the current node has child nodes. Gets a value indicating whether the current node has child nodes. Gets a value indicating whether the current node is an empty element. Gets the name of the current HTML node without the namespace prefix. Gets the qualified name of the current node. Gets the namespace URI (as defined in the W3C Namespace Specification) of the current node. Always returns string.Empty in the case of HtmlNavigator implementation. Gets the associated with this implementation. Gets the type of the current node. Gets the prefix associated with the current node. Always returns string.Empty in the case of HtmlNavigator implementation. Gets the text value of the current node. Gets the xml:lang scope for the current node. Always returns string.Empty in the case of HtmlNavigator implementation. Creates a new HtmlNavigator positioned at the same node as this HtmlNavigator. A new HtmlNavigator object positioned at the same node as the original HtmlNavigator. Gets the value of the HTML attribute with the specified LocalName and NamespaceURI. The local name of the HTML attribute. The namespace URI of the attribute. Unsupported with the HtmlNavigator implementation. The value of the specified HTML attribute. String.Empty or null if a matching attribute is not found or if the navigator is not positioned on an element node. Returns the value of the namespace node corresponding to the specified local name. Always returns string.Empty for the HtmlNavigator implementation. The local name of the namespace node. Always returns string.Empty for the HtmlNavigator implementation. Determines whether the current HtmlNavigator is at the same position as the specified HtmlNavigator. The HtmlNavigator that you want to compare against. true if the two navigators have the same position, otherwise, false. Moves to the same position as the specified HtmlNavigator. The HtmlNavigator positioned on the node that you want to move to. true if successful, otherwise false. If false, the position of the navigator is unchanged. Moves to the HTML attribute with matching LocalName and NamespaceURI. The local name of the HTML attribute. The namespace URI of the attribute. Unsupported with the HtmlNavigator implementation. true if the HTML attribute is found, otherwise, false. If false, the position of the navigator does not change. Moves to the first sibling of the current node. true if the navigator is successful moving to the first sibling node, false if there is no first sibling or if the navigator is currently positioned on an attribute node. Moves to the first HTML attribute. true if the navigator is successful moving to the first HTML attribute, otherwise, false. Moves to the first child of the current node. true if there is a first child node, otherwise false. Moves the XPathNavigator to the first namespace node of the current element. Always returns false for the HtmlNavigator implementation. An XPathNamespaceScope value describing the namespace scope. Always returns false for the HtmlNavigator implementation. Moves to the node that has an attribute of type ID whose value matches the specified string. A string representing the ID value of the node to which you want to move. This argument does not need to be atomized. true if the move was successful, otherwise false. If false, the position of the navigator is unchanged. Moves the XPathNavigator to the namespace node with the specified local name. Always returns false for the HtmlNavigator implementation. The local name of the namespace node. Always returns false for the HtmlNavigator implementation. Moves to the next sibling of the current node. true if the navigator is successful moving to the next sibling node, false if there are no more siblings or if the navigator is currently positioned on an attribute node. If false, the position of the navigator is unchanged. Moves to the next HTML attribute. Moves the XPathNavigator to the next namespace node. Always returns falsefor the HtmlNavigator implementation. An XPathNamespaceScope value describing the namespace scope. Always returns false for the HtmlNavigator implementation. Moves to the parent of the current node. true if there is a parent node, otherwise false. Moves to the previous sibling of the current node. true if the navigator is successful moving to the previous sibling node, false if there is no previous sibling or if the navigator is currently positioned on an attribute node. Moves to the root node to which the current node belongs. Represents the type of a node. The root of a document. An HTML element. An HTML comment. A text node is always the child of an element or a document node. Represents a parsing error found during document parsing. Gets the type of error. Gets the line number of this error in the document. Gets the column number of this error in the document. Gets a description for the error. Gets the the full text of the line containing the error. Gets the absolute stream position of this error in the document, relative to the start of the document. Represents the type of parsing error. A tag was not closed. A tag was not opened. There is a charset mismatch between stream and declared (META) encoding. An end tag was not required. An end tag is invalid at this position. Represents an HTML text node. Gets or Sets the HTML between the start and end tags of the object. In the case of a text node, it is equals to OuterHtml. Gets or Sets the object and its content in HTML. Gets or Sets the text of the node. A utility class to get HTML document from HTTP. Represents the method that will handle the PostResponse event. Represents the method that will handle the PreHandleDocument event. Represents the method that will handle the PreRequest event. Occurs after an HTTP request has been executed. Occurs before an HTML document is handled. Occurs before an HTTP request is executed. Gets or Sets a value indicating if document encoding must be automatically detected. Gets or sets the Encoding used to override the response stream from any web request Gets or Sets a value indicating whether to get document only from the cache. If this is set to true and document is not found in the cache, nothing will be loaded. Gets or Sets a value indicating whether to get document from the cache if exists, otherwise from the web A value indicating whether to get document from the cache if exists, otherwise from the web Gets or Sets the cache path. If null, no caching mechanism will be used. Gets a value indicating if the last document was retrieved from the cache. Gets the last request duration in milliseconds. Gets the URI of the Internet resource that actually responded to the request. Gets the last request status. Gets or Sets the size of the buffer used for memory operations. Gets or Sets a value indicating if cookies will be stored. Gets or sets a value indicating whether redirect should be captured instead of the current location. True if capture redirect, false if not. Gets or Sets the User Agent HTTP 1.1 header sent on any webrequest Gets or Sets a value indicating whether the caching mechanisms should be used or not. Gets the MIME content type for a given path extension. The input path extension. The default content type to return if any error occurs. The path extension's MIME content type. Gets the path extension for a given MIME content type. The input MIME content type. The default path extension to return if any error occurs. The MIME content type's path extension. Creates an instance of the given type from the specified Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The requested type. An newly created instance. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified file. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The location of the file where you want to save the document. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified file. - Proxy aware The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The location of the file where you want to save the document. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified file. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The location of the file where you want to save the document. The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified file. Understands Proxies The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The location of the file where you want to save the document. The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. Gets the cache file path for a specified url. The url fo which to retrieve the cache path. May not be null. The cache file path. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". A new HTML document. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested Uri, such as new Uri("http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp"). A new HTML document. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". Host to use for Proxy Port the Proxy is on User Id for Authentication Password for Authentication A new HTML document. Gets an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested Uri, such as new Uri("http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp"). Host to use for Proxy Port the Proxy is on User Id for Authentication Password for Authentication A new HTML document. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. A new HTML document. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested URL, such as new Uri("http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp"). The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. A new HTML document. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. Proxy to use with this request Credentials to use when authenticating A new HTML document. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource. The requested Uri, such as new Uri("http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp"). The HTTP method used to open the connection, such as GET, POST, PUT, or PROPFIND. Proxy to use with this request Credentials to use when authenticating A new HTML document. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified XmlTextWriter. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The XmlTextWriter to which you want to save to. Gets or sets the web browser timeout. Gets or sets the web browser delay. Loads HTML using a WebBrowser and Application.DoEvents. Thrown when an exception error condition occurs. The requested URL, such as "http://html-agility-pack.net/". A new HTML document. Loads HTML using a WebBrowser and Application.DoEvents. Thrown when an exception error condition occurs. The requested URL, such as "http://html-agility-pack.net/". (Optional) Check if the browser script has all been run and completed. A new HTML document. Loads HTML using a WebBrowser and Application.DoEvents. Thrown when an exception error condition occurs. The requested URL, such as "http://html-agility-pack.net/". (Optional) Check if the browser script has all been run and completed. A new HTML document. Creates an instance of the given type from the specified Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The URL that specifies the XSLT stylesheet to load. An containing the namespace-qualified arguments used as input to the transform. The requested type. An newly created instance. Creates an instance of the given type from the specified Internet resource. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The URL that specifies the XSLT stylesheet to load. An containing the namespace-qualified arguments used as input to the transform. The requested type. A file path where the temporary XML before transformation will be saved. Mostly used for debugging purposes. An newly created instance. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified XmlTextWriter, after an XSLT transformation. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". The URL that specifies the XSLT stylesheet to load. An XsltArgumentList containing the namespace-qualified arguments used as input to the transform. The XmlTextWriter to which you want to save. Loads an HTML document from an Internet resource and saves it to the specified XmlTextWriter, after an XSLT transformation. The requested URL, such as "http://Myserver/Mypath/Myfile.asp". May not be null. The URL that specifies the XSLT stylesheet to load. An XsltArgumentList containing the namespace-qualified arguments used as input to the transform. The XmlTextWriter to which you want to save. A file path where the temporary XML before transformation will be saved. Mostly used for debugging purposes. Represents an exception thrown by the HtmlWeb utility class. Creates an instance of the HtmlWebException. The exception's message. Represents a document with mixed code and text. ASP, ASPX, JSP, are good example of such documents. Gets or sets the token representing code end. Gets or sets the token representing code start. Gets or sets the token representing code directive. Gets or sets the token representing response write directive. Creates a mixed code document instance. Gets the code represented by the mixed code document seen as a template. Gets the list of code fragments in the document. Gets the list of all fragments in the document. Gets the encoding of the stream used to read the document. Gets the list of text fragments in the document. Create a code fragment instances. The newly created code fragment instance. Create a text fragment instances. The newly created text fragment instance. Loads a mixed code document from a stream. The input stream. Loads a mixed code document from a stream. The input stream. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads a mixed code document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Loads a mixed code document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads a mixed code document from a stream. The input stream. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. The minimum buffer size. Loads a mixed code document from a file. The complete file path to be read. Loads a mixed code document from a file. The complete file path to be read. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads a mixed code document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Loads a mixed code document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. Loads a mixed code document from a file. The complete file path to be read. The character encoding to use. Indicates whether to look for byte order marks at the beginning of the file. The minimum buffer size. Loads the mixed code document from the specified TextReader. The TextReader used to feed the HTML data into the document. Loads a mixed document from a text The text to load. Saves the mixed document to the specified stream. The stream to which you want to save. Saves the mixed document to the specified stream. The stream to which you want to save. The character encoding to use. Saves the mixed document to the specified file. The location of the file where you want to save the document. Saves the mixed document to the specified file. The location of the file where you want to save the document. The character encoding to use. Saves the mixed document to the specified StreamWriter. The StreamWriter to which you want to save. Saves the mixed document to the specified TextWriter. The TextWriter to which you want to save. Represents a fragment of code in a mixed code document. Gets the fragment code text. Represents a base class for fragments in a mixed code document. Gets the fragement text. Gets the type of fragment. Gets the line number of the fragment. Gets the line position (column) of the fragment. Gets the fragment position in the document's stream. Represents a list of mixed code fragments. Gets the Document Gets the number of fragments contained in the list. Gets a fragment from the list using its index. Gets an enumerator that can iterate through the fragment list. Appends a fragment to the list of fragments. The fragment to append. May not be null. Gets an enumerator that can iterate through the fragment list. Prepends a fragment to the list of fragments. The fragment to append. May not be null. Remove a fragment from the list of fragments. If this fragment was not in the list, an exception will be raised. The fragment to remove. May not be null. Remove all fragments from the list. Remove a fragment from the list of fragments, using its index in the list. The index of the fragment to remove. Represents a fragment enumerator. Gets the current element in the collection. Gets the current element in the collection. Advances the enumerator to the next element of the collection. true if the enumerator was successfully advanced to the next element; false if the enumerator has passed the end of the collection. Sets the enumerator to its initial position, which is before the first element in the collection. Represents the type of fragment in a mixed code document. The fragment contains code. The fragment contains text. Represents a fragment of text in a mixed code document. Gets the fragment text. 给控件增加拖放功能的类 拖放实例 高级拖放事件 使管理员方式运行时支持拖放 使支持拖放属性 获取WMI内容 获取WMI内容 获取内存信息 获取显卡信息 获取显卡信息 获取显卡信息 获取硬盘信息 获取主板信息 是否显示中文名字 获取CPU ID 获取处理器信息 获取主要硬件信息 获取主要硬件信息 是否获取XML格式 网络操作类 通过NetworkInterface读取网卡Mac 通过NetworkInterface读取网卡Mac 根据mac字符串来获取最终的mac地址,可以是各种MAC地址格式,非法的内容将返回null 远程唤醒 远程唤醒 一个强类型的资源类，用于查找本地化的字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存的 ResourceManager 实例。 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性，对 使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找执行重写。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 一个强类型的资源类，用于查找本地化的字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存的 ResourceManager 实例。 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性，对 使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找执行重写。 查找类似 Docking 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Docking Notification 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Performance 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Property Changed 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 (Float) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Determines if end user drag and drop docking is allowed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The size to display the content in auto hide mode. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value >= 1 to specify the size in pixel. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Enable/Disable the close button of the content. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Shows or hides the close button of the content. This property does not function with System MDI Document Style. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The form must be of type IDockContent. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Gets or sets a value indicating in which area of the DockPanel the content allowed to show. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when the value of DockState property changed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Indicates the content will be hidden instead of being closed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The desired docking state when first showing. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The tab text displayed in the dock pane. If not set, the Text property will be used. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The text displayed when mouse hovers over the tab. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The provided value is out of range. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Value: The value of DockAreas conflicts with current DockState. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The pane is invalid. Check the IsFloat and DockPanel properties of this dock pane. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid value, conflicts with DockableAreas property. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The dock state is invalid. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The dock panel is null. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid beforeContent, it must be contained by the pane. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid DockState: Content can not be showed as "Unknown" or "Hidden". 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The previous pane is invalid. It can not be null, and its docking state must not be auto-hide. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel can not be null. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The Pane can not be null. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid value, check DockableAreas property. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Context menu displayed for the dock pane tab strip. 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 Press SHIFT for docking to full side. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Content: ActiveContent must be one of the visible contents, or null if there is no visible content. 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 Invalid argument: Content can not be "null". 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid argument: The content's DockPanel can not be "null". 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 The specified container conflicts with the IsFloat property. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The previous pane does not exist in the nested docking pane collection. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The container can not be null. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The previous pane can not be null when the nested docking pane collection is not empty. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The previous pane can not be itself. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 FloatWindow property can not be set to "null" when DockState is DockState.Float. 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 Invalid Content: Content not within the collection. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Index: The index is out of range. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The state for the dock pane is invalid. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Auto Hide 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Close 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Window Position 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Content: The content must be auto-hide state and associates with this DockPanel. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when the value of the AutoHideWindow's ActiveContent changed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when the value of ActiveContentProperty changed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when the value of ActiveDocument property changed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when the value of ActivePane property changed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Determines if the drag and drop docking is allowed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Determines if the drag and drop nested docking is allowed. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when a content added to the DockPanel. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Occurs when a content removed from the DockPanel. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The default size of float window. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Provides Visual Studio .Net style docking. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the bottom docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the left docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The visual skin to use when displaying the docked windows. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the right docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the top docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The style of the document window. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Determines where the tab strip for Document style content is drawn. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The DockPanel has already been initialized. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The configuration file's version is invalid. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The XML file format is invalid. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid parent form. When using DockingMdi or SystemMdi document style, the DockPanel control must be the child control of the main MDI container form. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel configuration file. Author: Weifen Luo, all rights reserved. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 !!! AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED FILE. DO NOT MODIFY !!! 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Indicates whether the control layout is right-to-left when the RightToLeft property is set to Yes. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Index: The index is out of range. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Shows the hidden autohide content when hovering over the tab. When disabled, the tab must be clicked to show the content. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Show close button on each tab 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Determines if the document icon will be displayed in the tab strip. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Support deeply nested controls. Disabling this setting may improve resize performance but may cause heavily nested content not to resize. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Close 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Window List 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 Invalid argument: DockPanel can not be "null". 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Index: The index is out of range. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Invalid Pane: DockPane not within the collection. 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找类似 Invalid DockPanel. 的本地化字符串。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Byte[] 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Byte[] 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Byte[] 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 在发生页码变化时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 得到真实渲染区域 容器区域 动画区域 连接左边 连接右边 获取边距 区域 边距 边框 将窗体作为某个控件的弹出窗体(弹出的窗体将不会获得焦点,如果包含文本框,文本框可能将无法输入文字) 是否设为子样式,这将不会使控件所在窗体失去焦点,但是弹出的窗体里的文本框将可能无法编辑 是否隐藏焦点 是否点击外面关闭窗体 是否移动到控件子控件关闭窗体 目标区域 该函数将指定的消息发送到一个或多个窗口。 此函数为指定的窗口调用窗口程序直到窗口程序处理完消息再返回。 而函数PostMessage不同，将一个消息寄送到一个线程的消息队列后立即返回。 return 返回值 : 指定消息处理的结果，依赖于所发送的消息。 要接收消息的那个窗口的句柄 消息的标识符 具体取决于消息 具体取决于消息 一个分层窗口的句柄。分层窗口在用CreateWindowEx函数创建窗口时应指定WS_EX_LAYERED扩展样式。 Windows 8： WS_EX_LAYERED扩展样式支持顶级窗口和子窗口。之前的Windows版本中WS_EX_LAYERED扩展样式仅支持顶级窗口 屏幕的设备上下文(DC)句柄。如果指定为NULL，那么将会在调用函数时自己获得。它用来在窗口内容更新时与调色板颜色匹配。如果hdcDst为NULL，将会使用默认调色板。如果hdcSrc指定为NULL，那么hdcDst必须指定为NULL。 指向分层窗口相对于屏幕的位置的POINT结构的指针。如果保持当前位置不变，pptDst可以指定为NULL。 指向分层窗口的大小的SIZE结构的指针。如果窗口的大小保持不变，psize可以指定为NULL。如果hdcSrc指定为NULL，psize必须指定为NULL。 分层窗口绘图表面的设备上下文句柄。这个句柄可以通过调用函数CreateCompatibleDC获得。如果窗口的形状和可视范围保持不变，hdcSrc可以指定为NULL。 指向分层窗口绘图表面在设备上下文位置的POINT结构的指针。如果hdcSrc指定为NULL，pptSrc就应该指定为NULL。 指定合成分层窗口时使用的颜色值。要生成一个类型为COLORREF的值，使用RGB宏。 指向指定合成分层窗口时使用的透明度结构的指针。 可以是以下值之一。如果hdcSrc指定为NULL，dwFlags应该指定为0。 选中日期时间 重载字体变更 参数 在弹出下拉框时激发 控件边框颜色 圆角弧度大小 圆角风格 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 日期输入框 日期输入框 选中日期时间 文本区域 是否可编辑 显示的文本 格式化字符串 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 一个强类型的资源类，用于查找本地化的字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存的 ResourceManager 实例。 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性，对 使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找执行重写。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 查找 System.Drawing.Bitmap 类型的本地化资源。 一个强类型的资源类，用于查找本地化的字符串等。 返回此类使用的缓存的 ResourceManager 实例。 重写当前线程的 CurrentUICulture 属性，对 使用此强类型资源类的所有资源查找执行重写。 查找类似 停靠 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 停靠通知 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Performance 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 属性已更改 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 (Float) 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 确定是否允许最终用户拖放停靠 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 The size to display the content in auto hide mode. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value >= 1 to specify the size in pixel. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 启用/禁用DockContent的关闭按钮。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 显示或隐藏DockContent的关闭按钮。此属性不适用于系统MDI文档样式。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 窗体的类型必须为IDockContent。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 获取或设置一个值，该值指示允许在DockPanel的哪个区域显示内容。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 当DockState属性的值更改时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 指示DockContent将隐藏而不是关闭。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 首次显示时所需的停靠状态。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 显示停靠窗格选项卡条的上下文菜单。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 停靠窗格中显示的选项卡文本。如果未设置，将使用Text属性。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 鼠标悬停在选项卡上时显示的文本。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 提供的值超出范围。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效值：DockAreas的值与当前DockState冲突。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Pane无效。检查此DockPane的IsFloat和DockPanel属性。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Pane无效。检查此DockPane的IsFloat和DockPanel属性。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效值，与DockableAreas属性冲突。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 停靠状态无效。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel 为 null 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 beforeContent无效，它必须包含在pane中。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockState无效：DockContent不能显示为“未知”或“隐藏”。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 上一个Pane无效。它不能为null，其停靠状态不能自动隐藏。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel不能为null。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Pane不能为null。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效值，请检查DockableAreas属性。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 显示DockPanel选项卡条的上下文菜单。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 按SHIFT键以停靠到完全侧。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效内容：ActiveContent必须是可见内容之一，如果没有可见内容，则为null。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效参数：DockContent不能为“null”。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效参数：DockContent的DockPanel不能为“null”。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 指定的容器与IsFloat属性冲突。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 嵌套DockPanel集合中不存在上一个Pane。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 容器不能为空。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 当嵌套DockPanel集合不为空时，上一个Pane不能为空。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 上一个Pane不能是其本身。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 当DockState为DockState.Float时，FloatWindow属性不能设置为“null”。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效内容：内容不在集合中。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效索引：索引超出范围。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel的状态无效。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 自动隐藏 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 关闭 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 属性 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效DockContent：DockContent必须为自动隐藏状态并与此DockPanel关联。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 当AutoHideWindow的ActiveContent值更改时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 ActiveContentProperty值更改时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 ActiveDocument属性的值更改时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 ActivePane属性的值更改时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 确定是否允许拖放停靠。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 确定是否允许拖放嵌套停靠。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 当DockContent添加到DockPanel时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 从DockPanel中删除DockContent时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 浮动窗口的默认大小。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 提供Visual Studio.Net样式的停靠。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the bottom docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the left docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 显示停靠窗口时要使用的视觉外观。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the right docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 Size of the top docking window. Value < 1 to specify the size in portion; value > 1 to specify the size in pixels. 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 在停靠面板中拖动文档或Pane时发生。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 文档窗口的样式。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 确定绘制文档样式内容的选项卡栏的位置。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel已初始化。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 配置文件的版本无效。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 XML文件格式无效。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 父窗体无效。使用DockingMdi或SystemMdi文档样式时，DockPanel控件必须是主MDI容器窗体的子控件。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 DockPanel配置文件。作者：罗伟芬，版权所有。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 !!! 自动生成的文件。不要修改！！！ 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 指示当RightToLeft属性设置为“是”时，控件布局是否从右向左。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效索引：索引超出范围。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效Pane：DockPane不在集合中。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 悬停在选项卡上时显示隐藏的自动隐藏内容。禁用时，必须单击选项卡才能显示内容。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 在每个选项卡上显示关闭按钮 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 确定是否在选项卡栏中显示文档图标。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 支持深度嵌套控件。禁用此设置可能会提高调整大小的性能，但可能会导致嵌套严重的内容无法调整大小。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 关闭 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 窗口列表 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效参数：DockPanel不能为“null”。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效索引：索引超出范围。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效Pane：DockPane不在集合中。 的本地化字符串。 查找类似 无效DockPanel. 的本地化字符串。 消息服务器 消息事件 大小改变事件 即将关闭事件 当收到消息时激发 消息处理类 发送消息,采用单线程发送 要发送到的句柄 编号 消息内容 发送消息，采用多线程发送 要发送到的句柄 编号 消息内容 消息类 是否取消 来源句柄 消息文本 需要回复的内容 消息客户端类 判断当前消息主服务器是否创建成功 最后一次接收消息的时间,可用来判断服务端是否有响应 主句柄 当收到消息时激发 连接上主服务器时触发 收到服务端关闭通知 收到服务端关闭通知，即将关闭 服务端大小改变时激发 实例化客户端 服务端ID 当前客户端ID,会向服务器报告当前ID 客户端 断开服务端连接 发送消息,采用多线程发送 向服务端发送心跳包 判断服务端句柄是否存在。 消息服务端类 判断当前消息主服务器是否创建成功 当收到消息时激发 当收到自定义消息时(非系统消息)激发 有消息客户端发起连接请求时激发 有消息客户端连接成功时激发 有消息客户端断开连接时激发 服务端ID,需要唯一性,共客户端识别 服务端 释放资源 判断是否包含指定客户端 设置客户端大小 根据客户端ID,获取客户端对象 根据客户端句柄,获取客户端对象 关闭所有客户端 关闭指定客户端 关闭指定客户端 向所有客户端发送消息，单线程 向指定客户端发送消息 关闭在指定时间前失去响应的子客户端 客户端信息 客户端句柄 客户端ID 客户端连接时间 心跳时间 共享内存 写共享内存 需要映射的文件的字节数量 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 写共享内存 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 删除内存映射 写共享内存 需要映射的文件的字节数量 映射对象（简单类型、结构体等） 文件映射对象的名称 发送消息的窗口句柄 发送消息 读共享内存 读共享内存 读共享内存 读共享内存 需要映射的文件的字节数量 类型 文件映射对象的名称 返回读到的映射对象 读共享内存 需要映射的文件的字节数量 类型 文件映射对象的名称 返回读到的映射字节数据 数据库引擎 数据库枚举类型 Odbc引擎 OleDb引擎 Oracle引擎 MSSQL引擎 SQLite引擎 MySql引擎 判断DataSet是否包含数据 获取首行数据 获取第一行第一列的值 将DataSet类型转换为RyQuickSQL列表类型 将DataSet类型转换为RyQuickSQL列表类型 建立访问数据库的实例 数据库枚举类型 数据库操作接口 连接数据库 数据库是否已连接 断开数据库 获取数量 获取分页语句 获取分页语句 获取分页语句 获取分页语句 添加Parameter参数 清空Parameter参数 获取Parameter值 根据RyQuickSQL类来获取Parameter值 开始执行事务 提交事务 判断是否包含数据 返回-1000表示该数据库不支持本接口 读取数据 读取数据 读取数据 根据id号获取数据 根据id号获取数据 执行SQL语句 执行SQL语句 执行SQL语句 只针对IsAdd为false才生效，where 以后的sql语句 是新增还是更新 插入数据库 更新数据库 where 以后的sql语句 执行SQL语句 根据id号删除数据 根据id号删除数据 创建数据库 释放资源 最后一个错误信息 连接数据库 数据库连接字符串 连接数据库 数据源 数据库名称 用户id 用户密码 连接数据库 数据库是否已连接,为1则表示已连接,0表示未连接,负数表示连接出错 关闭数据库 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回DefFristValue，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 清空指定表的所有数据 表名 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 判断指定值是否存在 表名 指定值所属字段 指定值 当前id，如果是新增记录，请填写-1 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 获取最后一次错误信息 数据库是否已连接,为1则表示已连接,0表示未连接,负数表示连接出错 执行SQL语句 只针对IsAdd为false才生效，where 以后的sql语句 是新增还是更新 插入数据库 更新数据库 where 以后的sql语句 连接数据库 数据库连接字符串 连接数据库 数据源 数据库名称 用户id 用户密码 连接数据库 关闭数据库 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回DefFristValue，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 清空指定表的所有数据 表名 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 判断指定值是否存在 表名 指定值所属字段 指定值 当前id，如果是新增记录，请填写-1 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 获取最后一次错误信息 数据库是否已连接,为1则表示已连接,0表示未连接,负数表示连接出错 执行SQL语句 只针对IsAdd为false才生效，where 以后的sql语句 是新增还是更新 插入数据库 更新数据库 where 以后的sql语句 SQL字段类型 SQL字段类型 SQL字段类型 SQL字段名 SQL字段值 SQL字段长度 不是真的值，而是用于计算的值 SQL快速操作类 SQL快速操作类 表名 操作字段列表 清理使用资源 清理使用资源 清理使用资源 操作参数列表 操作参数列表 添加字符串字段 添加null值字段 添加日期字段 添加int字段 添加double字段 添加decimal字段 添加byte[]字段 添加bool字段 添加用于计算的值 添加Int64字段 移除字段 清空内容 数量 是否将时间类型转为时间戳 输出多条件搜索。 字段名,多个字段请用逗号分隔。 多个条件之间请用空格隔开 根据输入的内容,生成Post数据 根据输入的内容,生成Json数据 获取插入SQL语句 获取更新SQL语句 添加参数 获取Ole参数 获取SQL参数 数据库路径 数据库密码 数据库路径 连接数据库 获取最后一次错误信息 设置路径和密码 连接数据库 连接或创建数据库，如果数据库不存在，就创建，否则连接 连接或创建数据库，如果数据库不存在，就创建，否则连接 关闭数据库 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回null，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 运行SQL命令,并返回结果 SQL语句 数组第一个默认的值 运行失败，则返回DefFristValue，否则返回以数组显示的字符串 清空指定表的所有数据 表名 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 清空指定表的所有数据 表名 运行失败，则返回-1，否则返回影响的行数 判断指定值是否存在 表名 指定值所属字段 指定值 当前id，如果是新增记录，请填写-1 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 SQL命令参数 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 判断SQL语句是否有结果返回 SQL语句 运行失败，则返回-1；存在结果，返回1；不存在结果，返回0 创建数据库 SQL语句 根据内置例子创建数据库 保存信息，如果Name不存在，系统会自动创建 返回1，表示成功，0表示失败 获取信息 获取信息 获取最后一次错误信息 数据库是否已连接,为1则表示已连接,0表示未连接,负数表示连接出错 执行SQL语句 只针对IsAdd为false才生效，where 以后的sql语句 是新增还是更新 插入数据库 更新数据库 where 以后的sql语句 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Http连接操作帮助类 根据相传入的数据，得到相应页面数据 参数类对象 返回HttpResult类型 获取数据的并解析的方法 设置编码 HttpItem HttpResult byte[] 提取网页Byte 为请求准备参数 参数列表 设置证书 设置多个证书 设置Cookie Http参数 设置Post数据 Http参数 设置代理 参数对象 回调验证证书问题 流对象 证书 X509Chain SslPolicyErrors bool 通过设置这个属性，可以在发出连接的时候绑定客户端发出连接所使用的IP地址。 Http请求参考类 请求URL必须填写 请求方式默认为GET方式,当为POST方式时必须设置Postdata的值 默认请求超时时间 默认写入Post数据超时间 设置Host的标头信息 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否与 Internet 资源建立持久性连接默认为true。 请求标头值 默认为text/html, application/xhtml+xml, */* 请求返回类型默认 text/html 客户端访问信息默认Mozilla/5.0 (compatible; MSIE 9.0; Windows NT 6.1; Trident/5.0) 返回数据编码默认为NUll,可以自动识别,一般为utf-8,gbk,gb2312 Post的数据类型 Post请求时要发送的字符串Post数据 Post请求时要发送的Byte类型的Post数据 Cookie对象集合 请求时的Cookie 来源地址，上次访问地址 证书绝对路径 设置代理对象，不想使用IE默认配置就设置为Null，而且不要设置ProxyIp 是否设置为全文小写，默认为不转化 获取或设置要在 HTTP 请求中使用的 Date HTTP 标头值。默认不填写 支持跳转页面，查询结果将是跳转后的页面，默认是不跳转 最大连接数 代理Proxy 服务器用户名 代理 服务器密码 代理 服务IP,如果要使用IE代理就设置为ieproxy 设置返回类型String和Byte header对象 获取或设置用于请求的 HTTP 版本。返回结果:用于请求的 HTTP 版本。默认为 System.Net.HttpVersion.Version11。 获取或设置一个 System.Boolean 值，该值确定是否使用 100-Continue 行为。如果 POST 请求需要 100-Continue 响应，则为 true；否则为 false。默认值为 true。 设置509证书集合 设置或获取Post参数编码,默认的为Default编码 Cookie返回类型,默认的是只返回字符串类型 获取或设置请求的身份验证信息。 设置请求将跟随的重定向的最大数目 获取和设置IfModifiedSince，默认为当前日期和时间 设置本地的出口ip和端口 ] item.IPEndPoint = new IPEndPoint(IPAddress.Parse("192.168.1.1"),80); 是否重置request,response的值，默认不重置，当设置为True时request,response将被设置为Null Http返回参数类 Http请求返回的Cookie Cookie对象集合 返回的String类型数据 只有ResultType.String时才返回数据，其它情况为空 返回的Byte数组 只有ResultType.Byte时才返回数据，其它情况为空 header对象 返回状态说明 返回状态码,默认为OK 最后访问的URl 获取重定向的URl 返回类型 表示只返回字符串 只有Html有数据 表示返回字符串和字节流 ResultByte和Html都有数据返回 Post的数据格式默认为string 字符串类型，这时编码Encoding可不设置 Byte类型，需要设置PostdataByte参数的值编码Encoding可设置为空 传文件，Postdata必须设置为文件的绝对路径，必须设置Encoding的值 Cookie返回类型 只返回字符串类型的Cookie CookieCollection格式的Cookie集合同时也返回String类型的cookie Http服务器类 当收到Get事件时激发 当收到Post事件时激发 当收到错误时激发 监听的主机,默认是localhost 最后一次错误信息 在此端口建立Http服务类 端口号 是否直接启动服务 端口号 开始服务 退出服务 超时时间 以post方式获取网页源码 以post方式提交json内容 以post方式提交json内容 以post方式提交json内容 头信息 以post方式获取网页源码 以post方式获取网页源码 获取网址对应的文件大小 获取网址对应的文件大小 获取网址对应的文件大小 代理 代理用户名 代理密码 是否自动跳转 获取网页源码 获取网页源码 获取网页源码 获取网页源码 获取网页源码 将相对网址转换成绝对网址 相对网址 当前页面地址 转换后的绝对网址 清空 加载Url或Post数据 将表达式保存到字符串中 获取数据 获取数据 获取数据 获取数据 获取数据 获取数据 获取数据 设置数据 设置数据 设置数据 设置数据 设置数据 设置数据 WebDav接口 WebDav初始化 删除文件 相对路径,不包括域名 下载文件 下载文件 上传文件 上传文件 新建文件夹 新建文件夹 文件夹路径 新建文件夹 将文件或目录列出来 定义每个文件或目录的属性 文件名 是否是文件夹 网址 最后修改时间 url解密 url解密,按UTF8方式解密 Url加密 Url加密,按UTF8方式加密 解密 加密 url加密,Unicode Html解码,将html里未转义成功的重新转义。 将url里的字段分解成表单字典 根据表单字段名获取值 AES加密解密类 AES加密算法 明文字符串 密钥 返回加密后的密文字节数组 AES解密 密文字节数组 密钥 返回解密后的字符串 加密 解码 转换密钥到合法密钥 Base64编码类 编码 把字符串编码成Base64字符串 解码 MD5和SHA1操作类 计算文件MD5。 通过MD5CryptoServiceProvider类中的ComputeHash方法直接传入一个FileStream类实现计算MD5 操作简单，代码少，调用即可 文件地址 MD5Hash 计算文件MD5。 通过HashAlgorithm的TransformBlock方法对流进行叠加运算获得MD5 实现稍微复杂，但可使用与传输文件或接收文件时同步计算MD5值 可自定义缓冲区大小，计算速度较快 文件地址 MD5Hash 获取MD5 获取MD5 获取SHA1 获取SHA1 获取HmacSHA1 获取SHA256 获取HmacSHA256 获取SHA224 获取SHA512 获取HmacSHA512 使用using代替lock操作的对象,可指定写入和读取锁定模式 利用IDisposable的using语法糖方便的释放锁定操作 内部类 读写锁对象 是否为写入模式 利用IDisposable的using语法糖方便的释放锁定操作 构造函数 读写锁 写入模式为true,读取模式为false 释放对象时退出指定锁定模式 空的可释放对象,免去了调用时需要判断是否为null的问题 内部类 空的可释放对象 空的释放方法 读写锁 保存数据 使用using代替lock操作的对象,可指定写入和读取锁定模式 构造函数 使用using代替lock操作的对象,可指定写入和读取锁定模式 构造函数 为Data属性设置初始值 获取或设置当前对象中保存数据的值 获取数据时未进入读取或写入锁定模式 设置数据时未进入写入锁定模式 是否启用,当该值为false时,Read()和Write()方法将返回 Disposable.Empty 进入读取锁定模式,该模式下允许多个读操作同时进行 退出读锁请将返回对象释放,建议使用using语块 Enabled为false时,返回Disposable.Empty; 在读取或写入锁定模式下重复执行,返回Disposable.Empty; 进入写入锁定模式,该模式下只允许同时执行一个写操作 退出写锁请将返回对象释放,建议使用using语块 Enabled为false时,返回Disposable.Empty; 在写入锁定模式下重复执行,返回Disposable.Empty; 读取模式下不能进入写入锁定状态 获得桌面 Shell 获得桌面 Shell 获取路径 获取显示名称 根据 PIDL 获取显示名称 获取特殊文件夹的路径 根据路径获取 IShellFolder 和 PIDL 根据路径获取 IShellFolder 弹出系统右键菜单 中国农历类,最大支持公元0-9999年 日期：2019-02-09 作者：http://www.cnblogs.com/zjfree/ 日历类型 无效 Julian 日历 Gregorian 日历 有效 公历节日 农历节日 某个月第n个星期几 获取农历 获取农历 获得某农历年的闰月，返回 1~12 对应一月到十二月，返回 0 表示无闰月 农历搜索方向 无效 向上 向下 {* 日月食类型， 无， 日食， 月全食， 月偏食 } 无 日食 月全食 月偏食 {* 月相， 无， 朔， 望} 无 朔 望 获得某公历年月日的农历日数和该日月相以及日月食类型和时刻 获得某公历年月日的农历月数 获取阳历日期对应的农历日期 获得某公历年月日的农历月日和是否闰月的信息 获得等效标准日数对应的某公历日，倒推而来 比较两个农历日期（包括闰月信息），1 大于2返回1、1等于2返回0、1小于2返回-1 获得某农历年月日（加是否闰月）的公历年月日 该函数采用反向二分法查找 获取农历某一个月的总天数 获取农历年份，范围约1901-2101年 获取农历年份，范围约0-9999年 获取农历月份，范围约1901-2101年 获取农历月份，范围约0-9999年 获取中文表示的农历月份 获取农历日，范围约1901-2101年 获取农历日，范围约0-9999年 获取农历日，范围约0-9999年 获取节气，范围约1901-2101年 获取节气，范围约0-9999年 返回y年第n个节气（如小寒为1）的日差天数值（pd取值真假，分别表示平气和定气） pd取值真假，分别表示平气和定气 获取等效标准日数 取本月天数，不考虑 1582 年 10 月的特殊情况 获取节气，范围约1901-2101年 获取节气，范围约0-9999年 获取节气 获取公历节日 获取公历节日 获取指定月份的第n个星期几的节日 返回星座，范围约1901-2101年 返回星座，范围约0-9999年 获取农历节日 获取农历节日 判断y年m月(1,2,..,12,下同)d日是Gregorian历还是Julian历（opt=1,2,3分别表示标准日历,Gregorge历和Julian历）,是则返回1，是Julian历则返回0，若是Gregorge历所删去的那10天则返回-1 返回阳历y年m月d日的日差天数（在y年年内所走过的天数，如2000年3月1日为61） 返回阳历y年日差天数为x时所对应的月日数（如y=2000，x=274时，返回1001(表示10月1日，即返回100*m+d)） 获取指定日期的节气。 要获取的年 要获取的月 立春：立是开始的意思，春是蠢动，表示万物开始有生气，这一天春天开始。 雨水：降雨开始，雨水将多。 惊蛰：春雷响动，惊动蛰伏地下冬眠的生物，它们将开始出土活动。 春分：这是春季九十天的中分点，这一天昼夜相等，所以古代曾称春分秋分为昼夜分。 清明：明洁晴朗，气候温暖，草木开始萌发繁茂。 谷雨：雨生百谷的意思。雨水增多，适时的降雨对谷物生长很为有利。 立夏：夏天开始，万物渐将随温暖的气候而生长。 小满：满指籽粒饱满，麦类等夏热作物这时开始结籽灌浆，即将饱满。 芒种：有芒作物开始成熟，此时也是秋季作物播种的最繁忙时节。 夏至：白天最长，黑夜最短，这一天中午太阳位置最高，日影短至终极，古代又称这一天为日北至或长日至。 小暑：暑是炎热，此时还未到达最热。 大暑：炎热的程度到达高峰。 立秋：秋天开始，植物快成熟了。 处暑：处是住的意思，表示暑气到此为止。 白露：地面水气凝结为露，色白，是天气开始转凉了。 秋分：秋季九十天的中间，这一天昼夜相等，同春分一样，太阳从正东升起正西落下。 寒露：水露先白而后寒，是气候将逐渐转冷的意思。 霜降：水气开始凝结成霜。 立冬：冬是终了，作物收割后要收藏起来的意思，这一天起冬天开始。 小雪：开始降雪，但还不多。 大雪：雪量由小增大。 冬至：这一天中午太阳在天空中位置最低，日影最长，白天最短， 黑夜最长，古代又称短日至或日南至。 小寒：冷气积久而为寒，此时尚未冷到顶点。 大寒：天候达到最寒冷的程度 获取年柱。 获得月柱 获取日柱。 返回甲子数x对应的天干数（如33为3） 返回甲子数x对应的地支数（如33为9） 获取日的天干地支 返回甲子数x对应的天干字符串 返回甲子数x对应的地支字符串 返回甲子数x对应的干支字符串 获取三伏开始时间 0表示1伏，1表示2伏，2表示3伏 节气 节气的时间。 节气名。 热键转换类 功能键。 修改键。 转换功能键到谷歌浏览器专用 将chrome功能键转换为普通功能键 按键值。 初始化类 的新实例。 The modifiers. The key code. 初始化类 的新实例。 加载热键 加载热键 加载热键 判断是否是热键 获取当前热键 已重载，返回“Ctrl+Alt+A”格式的字符串。 类似“Ctrl+Alt+A”格式的字符串 返回“Ctrl+Alt+A”格式的字符串。 类似“Ctrl+Alt+A”格式的字符串 功能键 无 Alt键 Ctrl键 Alt+Ctrl键 Shift键 Shift+Alt键 Shift+Ctrl键 Alt+Shift+Ctrl键 Win键 热键类 热键类 热键注销 热键是否有效 释放热键 获取热键Tag 获取热键id 获取热键id 判断热键id是否存在 判断热键Tag是否存在 判断热键是否存在 注册热键 注册热键 注册热键 获取热键数量 删除热键 删除所有热键 删除所有热键 热键事件 当使用热键时发生的事件 热键消息过滤 热键类型 热键id 热键Tag 功能键 普通键 热键类型 热键类型 热键类型 Win32 API WM_COPYDATA消息的主要目的是允许在进程间传递只读数据。 系统通道ID 用户通道ID 获取消息 发送消息 设置父窗口 删除一个逻辑笔、画笔、字体、位图、区域或者调色板，释放所有与该对象有关的系统资源，在对象被删除之后，指定的句柄也就失效了。 选择一对象到指定的设备上下文环境中，该新对象替换先前的相同类型的对象。 创建一个与指定设备兼容的内存设备上下文环境（DC）。 为一个设备创建设备上下文环境。 删除指定的设备上下文环境（Dc）。 结束进程 / / / 模拟鼠标点击 模拟按键 返回hWnd参数所指定的窗口的设备环境。 移动窗口 将消息信息传送给指定的窗口过程的函数。使用函数CallWindowsProc可进行窗口子分类。 通常来说，同一类的所有窗口共享一个窗口过程。子类是一个窗口或者相同类的一套窗口， 在其消息被传送到该类的窗口过程之前，这些消息是由另一个窗口过程进行解释和处理的。 用来改变指定窗口的属性．函数也将指定的一个32位值设置在窗口的额外存储空间的指定偏移位置。 用来改变指定窗口的属性．函数也将指定的一个32位值设置在窗口的额外存储空间的指定偏移位置。 设置弹出式窗口，层叠窗口或子窗口的父窗口 获得一个指定子窗口的父窗口句柄 Handle to the window whose parent window handle is to be retrieved. If the window is a child window, the return value is a handle to the parent window. If the window is a top-level window, the return value is a handle to the owner window. If the window is a top-level unowned window or if the function fails, the return value is NULL. 获取系统菜单的句柄 拥有窗口菜单拷贝的窗口的句柄 标志位，指定将执行的操作 获取系统菜单的句柄 拥有窗口菜单拷贝的窗口的句柄 标志位，指定将执行的操作。 如果此参数为FALSE，GetSystemMenu返回当前使用窗口菜单的拷贝的句柄。该拷贝初始时与窗口菜单相同，但可以被修改。 如果此参数为TRUE，GetSystemMenu重置窗口菜单到缺省状态。如果存在先前的窗口菜单，将被销毁。 如果参数bRevert为FALSE，返回值是窗口菜单的拷贝的句柄：如果参数bRevert为TRUE，返回值是NULL。 从指定菜单删除一个菜单项或分离一个子菜单。 备注：只要一个菜单被修改，无论它是否在显示窗口里，应用程序都必须调用函数DrawMenuBar。 将被修改的菜单的句柄。 指定将被删除的菜单项，其含义由参数wFlags决定。 如果函数调用成功，返回非零值；如果函数调用失败，返回值是零。若想获得更多的错误信息，请调用GetLastError函数。 设置前台窗口 获取当前前台窗口句柄 获得当前活动窗体 活动窗口的句柄。如没有窗口处于活动状态或处于活动状态的窗口非当前线程创建，则返回零。 设置活动窗体 获取类名 获取当前线程对应的进程ID 判断指定句柄是否是一个窗口 获取窗口标题 发送消息 发送消息 发送消息 发送消息 发送消息 从文件中载入指针 判断窗口是否可见 查找窗口 The FindWindowEx function retrieves a handle to a window whose class name and window name match the specified strings. The function searches child windows, beginning with the one following the specified child window. Handle to the parent window whose child windows are to be searched. Handle to a child window. Specifies class name. Pointer to a null-terminated string that specifies the window name (the window's title). If the function succeeds, the return value is a handle to the window that has the specified class and window names.If the function fails, the return value is NULL. The InvalidateRect function adds a rectangle to the specified window's update region. Handle to window. Rectangle coordinates. Erase state. If the function succeeds, the return value is true.If the function fails, the return value is false. The ValidateRect function validates the client area within a rectangle by removing the rectangle from the update region of the specified window. Handle to window. Validation rectangle coordinates. If the function succeeds, the return value is true.If the function fails, the return value is false. 获取指定窗口的有关信息，也可用于获取窗口内存中指定偏移的32位度整型值。 检索一指定窗口的客户区域或整个屏幕的显示设备上下文环境的句柄，以后可以在GDI函数中使用该句柄来在设备上下文环境中绘图。 释放设备上下文环境（DC）供其他应用程序使用。函数的效果与设备上下文环境类型有关。它只释放公用的和设备上下文环境，对于类或私有的则无效。 获取桌面句柄 获取窗口客户区的大小。注意一下：窗口的客户区为窗口中除标题栏、菜单栏之外的地方。 返回指定窗口的边框矩形的尺寸。该尺寸以相对于屏幕坐标左上角的屏幕坐标给出。 更新一个分层窗口的位置，大小，形状，内容和半透明度 改变一个子窗口，弹出式窗口或顶层窗口的尺寸，位置和Z序。 子窗口，弹出式窗口，及顶层窗口根据它们在屏幕上出现的顺序排序、顶层窗口设置的级别最高，并且被设置为Z序的第一个窗口。 A handle to the window. A handle to the window to precede the positioned window in the Z order. This parameter must be a window handle or one of the following values. Specifies the new position of the left side of the window, in client coordinates. Specifies the new position of the top of the window, in client coordinates. Specifies the new width of the window, in pixels. Specifies the new height of the window, in pixels. Specifies the window sizing and positioning flags. This parameter can be a combination of the following values. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero, if the function fails, the return value is zero. 改变一个子窗口，弹出式窗口或顶层窗口的尺寸，位置和Z序。 子窗口，弹出式窗口，及顶层窗口根据它们在屏幕上出现的顺序排序、顶层窗口设置的级别最高，并且被设置为Z序的第一个窗口。 A handle to the window. A handle to the window to precede the positioned window in the Z order. This parameter must be a window handle or one of the following values. Specifies the new position of the left side of the window, in client coordinates. Specifies the new position of the top of the window, in client coordinates. Specifies the new width of the window, in pixels. Specifies the new height of the window, in pixels. Specifies the window sizing and positioning flags. This parameter can be a combination of the following values. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero, if the function fails, the return value is zero. 改变一个子窗口，弹出式窗口或顶层窗口的尺寸，位置和Z序。 子窗口，弹出式窗口，及顶层窗口根据它们在屏幕上出现的顺序排序、顶层窗口设置的级别最高，并且被设置为Z序的第一个窗口。 设置指针位置 使用的数据库接口 使用的数据库连接字符串 测试FTP连接时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 测试FTP连接时激发 使用的数据库接口 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. FTP数据管理类(不含上传下载功能) 获取指定id的FTP信息 获取指定name的FTP信息 打开FTP管理界面 测试FTP连接时激发 打开FTP管理界面 创建SQLite数据库表 FTP信息 id 名称 IP 端口 用户名 密码 远程目录 加密方式 添加时间 备注 添加时间字符串 设置 部门列表 远程文件信息 升级地址 隔多久后再次检查更新 本地保存的配置信息 当前安装的软件版本 当前安装的软件修正版本 当前安装的数据库版本 获取当前更新的类型 每隔n小时检测一次更新 读取版本信息完成后激发 没有版本更新时激发 发现新版本时激发 发生错误后激发 更新进度变化后激发 开始检测新版本 初始化升级函数 为null,则表示事件运行在多线程模式下，否则,事件是在窗体所在线程下 获取版本信息 开始下载 开始下载 下载,不使用多线程 结束下载 设置升级 是否是在线更新 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 提示文本 更新日期 更新版本 更新描述 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 更新类型,soft或者data 更新描述Url 更新描述 版本 版本类型 更新日期 更新地址 在下载升级包前首先要下载的内容 升级程序要使用的设置xml 错误字符串 错误id 当前登陆用户 没有版本更新时激发 取消更新。 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 获取或设置是否捕获鼠标 获取或设置是否显示图像信息 获取或设置操作框点的颜色 获取或设置操作框边框颜色 获取或设置放大图形的原始尺寸 获取或设置放大图像的倍数 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 获取或设置用于被操作的图像 获取或设置操作框点的颜色 获取或设置操作框线条的颜色 获取当前选中的区域 获取或设置放大图像的原图大小尺寸 获取或设置图像放大的倍数 获取或设置是否绘制操作框点 获取或设置是否限制鼠标操作区域 获取或设置是否绘制信息展示 获取或设置是否根据图像大小自动调整控件尺寸 获取当前是否绘制的有区域 获取当前是否开始绘制 获取当前操作框是否正在移动 获取或设置操作框是否锁定 响应四个按键实现精确移动 绘制操作框 绘制图像放大信息 清空所有操作 手动设置一个块选中区域 要选中区域 手动设置一个块选中区域 要选中区域的坐标 要选中区域的大小 手动设置一个块选中区域 要选中区域的x坐标 要选中区域的y坐标 要选中区域的宽度 要选中区域的高度 手动设置信息显示的位置 要显示的位置 手动设置信息显示的位置 要显示位置的x坐标 要显示位置的y坐标 获取操作框内的图像 结果图像 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 鼠标结构信息 设置Hook 卸载Hook 鼠标状态枚举值 事件参数 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Martin Lottering : 2007-10-27 -------------------------------- This is a usefull control in Filters. Allows you to save space and can replace a Grouped Box of CheckBoxes. Currently used on the TasksFilter for TaskStatusses, which means the user can select which Statusses to include in the "Search". This control does not implement a CheckBoxListBox, instead it adds a wrapper for the normal ComboBox and Items. See the CheckBoxItems property. ---------------- ALSO IMPORTANT: In Data Binding when setting the DataSource. The ValueMember must be a bool type property, because it will be binded to the Checked property of the displayed CheckBox. Also see the DisplayMemberSingleItem for more information. ---------------- Extends the CodeProject PopupComboBox "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp" by Lukasz Swiatkowski. The checkbox list control. The public CheckBoxItems property provides a direct reference to its Items. In DataBinding operations, this property will be used as the DisplayMember in the CheckBoxComboBoxListBox. The normal/existing "DisplayMember" property is used by the TextBox of the ComboBox to display a concatenated Text of the items selected. This concatenation and its formatting however is controlled by the Binded object, since it owns that property. Builds a CSV string of the items selected. A direct reference to the Items of CheckBoxComboBoxListControl. You can use it to Get or Set the Checked status of items manually if you want. But do not manipulate the List itself directly, e.g. Adding and Removing, since the list is synchronised when shown with the ComboBox.Items. So for changing the list contents, use Items instead. The DataSource of the combobox. Refreshes the CheckBox wrappers when this is set. The ValueMember of the combobox. Refreshes the CheckBox wrappers when this is set. In DataBinding operations, this property will be used as the DisplayMember in the CheckBoxComboBoxListBox. The normal/existing "DisplayMember" property is used by the TextBox of the ComboBox to display a concatenated Text of the items selected. This concatenation however is controlled by the Binded object, since it owns that property. Made this property Browsable again, since the Base Popup hides it. This class uses it again. Gets an object representing the collection of the items contained in this System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox. A System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox.ObjectCollection representing the items in the System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox. Will add an invisible item when the style is DropDownList, to help maintain the correct text in main TextBox. A function to clear/reset the list. (Ubiklou : http://www.codeproject.com/KB/combobox/extending_combobox.aspx?msg=2526813#xx2526813xx) Uncheck all items. The properties that will be assigned to the checkboxes as default values. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. A container control for the ListControl to ensure the ScrollBar on the ListControl does not Paint over the Size grip. Setting the Padding or Margin on the Popup or host control does not work as I expected. Prescribed by the Popup class to ensure Resize operations work correctly. This ListControl that pops up to the User. It contains the CheckBoxComboBoxItems. The items are docked DockStyle.Top in this control. Simply a reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A Typed list of ComboBoxCheckBoxItems. Prescribed by the Popup control to enable Resize operations. Maintains the controls displayed in the list by keeping them in sync with the actual items in the combobox. (e.g. removing and adding as well as ordering) The CheckBox items displayed in the Popup of the ComboBox. A reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A reference to the item in the ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. A reference to the CheckBoxComboBox. A reference to the Item in ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. A reference to the Item in ComboBox.Items that this object is extending. When using Data Binding operations via the DataSource property of the ComboBox. This adds the required Bindings for the CheckBoxes. Added this handler because the control doesn't seem to initialize correctly until shown for the first time, which also means the summary text value of the combo is out of sync initially. A Typed List of the CheckBox items. Simply a wrapper for the CheckBoxComboBox.Items. A list of CheckBoxComboBoxItem objects. This List is automatically synchronised with the Items of the ComboBox and extended to handle the additional boolean value. That said, do not Add or Remove using this List, it will be lost or regenerated from the ComboBox.Items. Returns the item with the specified displayName or Text. Called when any property changes. CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". CodeProject.com Simple pop-up control http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp. Represents a pop-up window. Gets the content of the pop-up. Gets a value indicating whether the PopupControl.Popup uses the fade effect. true if pop-up uses the fade effect; otherwise, false. To use the fade effect, the FocusOnOpen property also has to be set to true. Gets or sets a value indicating whether to focus the content after the pop-up has been opened. true if the content should be focused after the pop-up has been opened; otherwise, false. If the FocusOnOpen property is set to false, then pop-up cannot use the fade effect. Gets or sets a value indicating whether presing the alt key should close the pop-up. true if presing the alt key does not close the pop-up; otherwise, false. Gets or sets a value indicating whether this PopupControl.Popup is resizable. true if resizable; otherwise, false. Gets or sets the size that is the lower limit that can specify. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the size that is the upper limit that can specify. An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets parameters of a new window. An object of type used when creating a new window. Initializes a new instance of the PopupControl.Popup class. The content of the pop-up. Pop-up will be disposed immediately after disposion of the content control. is null. Processes a dialog box key. One of the values that represents the key to process. true if the key was processed by the control; otherwise, false. Updates the pop-up region. Shows pop-up window below the specified control. The control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below the specified control, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Shows pop-up window below the specified area of specified control. The control used to compute screen location of specified area. The area of control below which the pop-up will be shown. When there is no space below specified area, the pop-up control is shown above it. is null. Adjusts the size of the owner to accommodate the if the owner is currently displayed, or clears and resets active child controls of the if the is not currently displayed. true if the owner is currently displayed; otherwise, false. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. Processes the resizing messages. The message. true, if the WndProc method from the base class shouldn't be invoked. Paints the size grip. The instance containing the event data. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. CodeProject.com "Simple pop-up control" "http://www.codeproject.com/cs/miscctrl/simplepopup.asp". Represents a Windows combo box control with a custom popup control attached. Initializes a new instance of the PopupControl.PopupComboBox class. The pop-up wrapper for the dropDownControl. Made PROTECTED instead of PRIVATE so descendent classes can set its Resizable property. Note however the pop-up properties must be set after the dropDownControl is assigned, since this popup wrapper is recreated when the dropDownControl is assigned. Gets or sets the drop down control. The drop down control. Shows the drop down. Hides the drop down. Processes Windows messages. The Windows to process. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. This property is not relevant for this class. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Maintains an additional "Selected" and "Count" value for each item in a List. Useful in the CheckBoxComboBox. It holds a reference to the List[Index] Item and whether it is selected or not. It also caters for a Count, if needed. No property on the object is specified for display purposes, so simple ToString() operation will be performed. And no Counts will be displayed No property on the object is specified for display purposes, so simple ToString() operation will be performed. A Display "Name" property is specified. ToString() will not be performed on items. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, or where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. If a PropertyDescriptor is not found, a Property will be used. A Display "Name" property is specified. ToString() will not be performed on items. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, or where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. If a PropertyDescriptor is not found, a Property will be used. Is a Count indicator used. The original List of values wrapped. A "Selected" and possibly "Count" functionality is added. Used to indicate NOT to use ToString(), but read this property instead as a display value. When specified, indicates that ToString() should not be performed on the items. This property will be read instead. This is specifically useful on DataTable implementations, where PropertyDescriptors are used to read the values. Builds a concatenation list of selected items in the list. Indicates whether the Item display value (Name) should include a count. Reset all counts to zero. Creates a ObjectSelectionWrapper item. Note that the constructor signature of sub classes classes are important. Used together with the ListSelectionWrapper in order to wrap data sources for a CheckBoxComboBox. It helps to ensure you don't add an extra "Selected" property to a class that don't really need or want that information. Used as a count indicator for the item. Not necessarily displayed. Is this item selected. A reference to the wrapped item. The containing list for these selections. An indicator of how many items with the specified status is available for the current filter level. Thaught this would make the app a bit more user-friendly and help not to miss items in Statusses that are not often used. A reference to the item wrapped. The item display value. If ShowCount is true, it displays the "Name [Count]". The textbox display value. The names concatenated. Indicates whether the item is selected. 控件的状态。 正常 鼠标经过 鼠标按下 鼠标的当前位置 美化按钮 普通按钮矩形位置 美化按钮 分割按钮的宽度 是否启用分割按钮 优先使用默认皮肤 按钮基础背景色 按钮字体颜色 图片宽度,默认值为18px，最小12px 圆角的位置,默认全部都是圆角 设置圆角半径 背景色是否渐变 图片高度 图片与文字之间的间距 当鼠标按下时图片和文字是否产生偏移 鼠标进入时 鼠标离开 鼠标按下 鼠标弹起 鼠标当前所在位置 获取图像以及文字的位置 ListBox增强版 重绘选中时背景 重载鼠标移动事件 鼠标参数 设置和获取撤消操作允许的最大步数 清空Undo、Redo操作信息 判断是否可以进行Undo操作 判断是否可以进行Redo操作 撤消操作 重复操作 绘制边框 消息 在搜索时激发 文本变化时激发 文本变化时激发 双击时激发 文本不选中 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 鼠标移上时,显示提示 优先使用默认皮肤 背景色是否渐变 按钮基础背景色 按钮圆角部分背景颜色 重新设置大小 点击搜索按钮 最大弹窗宽度,如果为0,则表示自适配。 最大弹窗高度,如果为0,则表示自适配。 当前选中的项 当前选中的项序号 当前选中的项 当前选中的项序号 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 弹出框项 图标 文本 值1 int值1 long值1 Tag 添加菜单分隔线 添加菜单 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强版Label(禁用了双击Label会自动复制文本到剪切板的功能) 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强富文本控件 开始更新 结束更新 RichTextBox 获取或设置一个值,该值指示是否将Url作为超链接处理 获取或设置一个值,该值指示是否启用自动选择字词 是否自动换行 在自带菜单弹出前激发 根据标签获得菜单项 只允许输入文本(只对设置之后的人工输入有效) 按下按键 鼠标按下 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 添加菜单分隔线 添加菜单 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 消息列表控件 最大高度 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 增强时间控件 增强时间控件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 选择文本框 选择文本框 按钮基础背景色 优先使用默认皮肤 选择的id 选择的名称 选择的名称 字体 重新设置大小 在选择时激发 点击选择 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 建立圆角路径的样式。 四个角都不是圆角。 四个角都为圆角。 左边两个角为圆角。 右边两个角为圆角。 上边两个角为圆角。 下边两个角为圆角。 左下角为圆角。 右下角为圆角。 画图相关API 建立带有圆角样式的路径。 用来建立路径的矩形。 圆角的大小。 圆角的样式。 是否把矩形长宽减 1,以便画出边框。 建立的路径。 窗体皮肤 窗体皮肤 标题属性 是否使用父窗口的图标 点击最小化按钮是最小化还是隐藏 最大化按钮 最小化按钮 标题栏关闭按钮是否显示 当窗口位于后台时，是否标注显示。 标题栏字体颜色 标题栏不处于活动状态时的字体颜色 标题栏背景颜色 标题栏不处于活动状态时的背景颜色 是否允许拖拉窗体边缘来改变窗体大小 画边框 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 热键文本框 热键文本框 清除按钮位置 热键文本位置 在控件大小变化时发生 此属性无效 载入热键配置 保存热键 是否含义热键 读取或设置热键 功能键 热键按键 KeyDown事件 KeyDown事件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 可以改变文本行距（行间距）的Label 行间距 可以改变文本行距（行间距）的Label 字体高度 文本 图标列表控件 图标列表控件 图标大小 文本显示高度(从底部算起) 默认图标 是否显示图标 是否显示网格线 角标图标合集 画项 选择项的背景开始颜色 选择项的背景结束颜色 选择项的边框颜色 选择项的字体颜色 获取第一个可见项的序号 重绘选中时背景 重绘图标 区域大小 重绘文本 获取文本对齐 水平滚动条滚动事件 垂直滚动条滚动事件 列表项 图标 角标图片序号,为-1表示无角标 最大高度 标题 是否显示时间 添加时间 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 最大高度 标题 是否显示时间 添加时间 内容 网址 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 计算两个日期的时间间隔,返回的是日期值+ 时间值,将显示在返回的值里 参照时间 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 控件边框颜色 控件背景颜色 圆角弧度大小 圆角风格 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 图标 标题 悬浮提示 标题颜色 设置按钮 判断和设置是否选择 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 类说明：CContextMenuStrip控件的实现用来代替系统的ContextMenuStrip控件 重写OnCreateControl 重写OnPaint事件 CreateRoundedRectanglePath Rectangle 系统热键数据类。 系统热键数据类 使多行属性失效掉 使只读属性失效掉 获取热键文本 功能键 热键按键 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 在搜索时激发 文本变化时激发 文本变化时激发 双击时激发 文本不选中 有内容时的显示效果 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 字体 优先使用默认皮肤 背景色是否渐变 按钮基础背景色 按钮圆角部分背景颜色 重新设置大小 点击搜索按钮 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 使用公共皮肤 按钮颜色 皮肤公共类 是否使用默认皮肤 按钮皮肤 按钮皮肤类 背景颜色 字体颜色 是否颜色渐变 类说明：帮助类 修改控件或窗体的边框，例如Textbox或是Form窗体 消息 控件对象 边框像素 边框颜色 超级图片控件,支持加载工程内部图片、异步加载网络图片 超级图片控件,支持加载工程内部图片、异步加载网络图片 图片所在上级域名 图片资源所在上级文件夹 根据不同前缀，加载不同格式图片。i:表示工程内置图片;s:表示T_ImageDomain域名下的图片,u:表示指定url的图片;f:表示本地图片 加载本地图片,加载完毕不会占用本地图片 加载指定url图片 url位置 是否异步 是否含引用页 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 多标签控件 选项发生变化时激发 标签选择的序号 选择的颜色 多标签控件颜色 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 多标签控件 获取对应的标签 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 The on text changed overrided. 设置和获取撤消操作允许的最大步数 清空Undo、Redo操作信息 判断是否可以进行Undo操作 判断是否可以进行Redo操作 撤消操作 重复操作 是否只能输入数字 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 美化文本框控件 到达一定时间没更新内容时激发 文本变化时激发 文本变化时激发 双击时激发 指定毫秒没更新内容,为0表示不激发此事件 是否只能输入数字 是否多行 是否在显示不下时换行 最大长度 背景颜色 右键菜单 字体颜色 选择的开始位置 选择的长度 选择的文本 提示文本 选择全部 密码 是否只读 字体 当文本框为空时,显示的内容。 选择文本框中的文本范围 文本框中当前选定文本的第一个字符的位置。 要选择的字符数 上次文本更新的时间 设置和获取撤消操作允许的最大步数 清空Undo、Redo操作信息 判断是否可以进行Undo操作 判断是否可以进行Redo操作 撤消操作 重复操作 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 Define some Windows message constants This class adds to the functionality provided in System.Windows.Forms.MenuStrip. It allows you to "ClickThrough" to the MenuStrip so that you don't have to click once to bring the form into focus and once more to take the desired action It also implements a SuppressHighlighting property to turn off the highlighting that occures on mouseover when the form is not active Gets or sets whether the control honors item clicks when its containing form does not have input focus. Default value is false, which is the same behavior provided by the base ToolStrip class. Gets or sets whether the control shows highlighting on mouseover Default value is true, which is the same behavior provided by the base MenuStrip class. This method overrides the procedure that responds to Windows messages. It intercepts the WM_MOUSEMOVE message and ignores it if SuppressHighlighting is on and the TopLevelControl does not contain the focus. Otherwise, it calls the base class procedure to handle the message. It also intercepts the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and replaces an "Activate and Eat" result with an "Activate" result if ClickThrough is enabled. This class adds to the functionality provided in System.Windows.Forms.ToolStrip. It allows you to "ClickThrough" to the MenuStrip so that you don't have to click once to bring the form into focus and once more to take the desired action It also implements a SuppressHighlighting property to turn off the highlighting that occures on mouseover when the form is not active Gets or sets whether the control honors item clicks when its containing form does not have input focus. Default value is false, which is the same behavior provided by the base ToolStrip class. Gets or sets whether the control shows highlighting on mouseover Default value is true, which is the same behavior provided by the base MenuStrip class. This method overrides the procedure that responds to Windows messages. It intercepts the WM_MOUSEMOVE message and ignores it if SuppressHighlighting is on and the TopLevelControl does not contain the focus. Otherwise, it calls the base class procedure to handle the message. It also intercepts the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and replaces an "Activate and Eat" result with an "Activate" result if ClickThrough is enabled. 还原 移动 大小 最小化 最大化 关闭 透明图片控件 是否使用透明,默认为True 设置透明度 要绑定的控件 透明图片控件 图片 初始化加载控件 透明度 是否显示加载图片 图片 显示加载 隐藏加载 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 日历控件 单击事件 单击某个日期事件 日历控件 放假数据表 单项大小 设置日期 日历控件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 日历控件,不含月份和年份选择 选择的日期变化时激发 单项大小 放假数据表 当前选择的时间 阳历天字体 农历天字体 标头高度(星期高度) 列间距 行间距 星期字体 节日颜色 模式(0表示日模式,1表示月份展示模式,2表示年份展示模式) 左边距 顶部边距 单击某个日期事件 是否处于设计模式 0表示日模式,1表示月份展示模式,2表示年份展示模式 显示的位置 是否是节假日 休息状态,1为休息,-1为上班 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 设置管理类,快速添加设置。 存储类型 配置存储路径 设置XML内容 添加控件 设置值 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 添加控件 读取配置 保存配置 类 名:ColorHSL 功 能:H 色相 \ S 饱和度(纯度) \ L 亮度 颜色模型 日 期:2015-02-08 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 HSL颜色 色相 饱和度(纯度) 饱和度 类 名:ColorHSV 功 能:H 色相 \ S 饱和度(纯度) \ V 明度 颜色模型 日 期:2015-01-22 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 构造方法 色相 饱和度(纯度) 明度 类 名:ColorRGB 功 能:R 红色 \ G 绿色 \ B 蓝色 颜色模型 所有颜色模型的基类,RGB是用于输出到屏幕的颜色模式,所以所有模型都将转换成RGB输出 日 期:2015-01-22 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 构造方法 红色 绿色 蓝色 获取实际颜色 类 名:ColorHelper 功 能:提供从RGB到HSV/HSL色彩空间的相互转换 日 期:2015-02-08 修 改:2015-03-20 作 者:ls9512 RGB转换HSV HSV转换RGB RGB转换HSL HSL转换RGB H, S and L input range = 0 -1.0 RGB转CMYK RGB转CMYK CMYK转RGB Standard-RGB → XYZ,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源. XYZ → Standard-RGB,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源. XYZ → Adobe-RGB,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源.RGB Adobe 1998 Adobe-RGB → XYZ,X、Y、Z 使用 D65/2°标准光源.RGB Adobe 1998 Yxy转RGB RGB转Yxy Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 超级颜色选择控件 分页控件 获取网页颜色 超级颜色选择控件 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 自定义事件参数类 Chrome风格的多标签控件 设置选项卡处于选中状态时第一背景色. 是否画Tab边框 设置选项卡处于选中状态时第二背景色. 设置选项卡处于非选中状态时第一背景色. 设置选项卡处于非选中状态时第二背景色. 设置鼠标移动到非选中状态选项卡时第一背景色. 设置鼠标移动到非选中状态选项卡时第二背景色. 设置选项卡工作区背景色. 设置选项卡工作区背景图. 是否显示关闭按钮 是否显示新增按钮 是否允许拖拽标签 标签最大宽度 标签右键菜单 鼠标按下标签时激发 鼠标放开标签时激发 Chrome风格的多标签控件 获取或设置调整控件的选项卡大小的方式。 设置圆角半径 Tab文字左边距离 画标签文字 画标签图标 画关闭按钮 获取所有选项卡合起来的宽度 点击Tab新增按钮,如果没有该事件,点击新增按钮,会自动新增页面,如果设置了该事件,需要用户手动处理新增页面 点击Tab关闭按钮 添加新标签 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 是否显示关闭按钮 显示Tab图标 The position is not over a tab. The position is over a tab's icon. The position is over a tab's text. The position is over a tab but not over its icon or its text. For owner-drawn tab controls, this value is specified if the position is anywhere over a tab. TCHT_ONITEM is a bitwise-OR operation on TCHT_ONITEMICON and TCHT_ONITEMLABEL. Specifies values from SetWindowPosZ enumeration. Specified HWND_TOP enumeration value. Specified HWND_BOTTOM enumeration value. Specified HWND_TOPMOST enumeration value. Specified HWND_NOTOPMOST enumeration value. Invalidates the rectangle or region that you specify in lprcUpdate or hrgnUpdate. You can set only one of these parameters to a non-NULL value. If both are NULL, RDW_INVALIDATE invalidates the entire window. Causes the OS to post a WM_PAINT message to the window regardless of whether a portion of the window is invalid. Causes the window to receive a WM_ERASEBKGND message when the window is repainted. Specify this value in combination with the RDW_INVALIDATE value; otherwise, RDW_ERASE has no effect. Validates the rectangle or region that you specify in lprcUpdate or hrgnUpdate. You can set only one of these parameters to a non-NULL value. If both are NULL, RDW_VALIDATE validates the entire window. This value does not affect internal WM_PAINT messages. Suppresses any pending WM_ERASEBKGND messages. Excludes child windows, if any, from the repainting operation. Includes child windows, if any, in the repainting operation. Causes the affected windows, which you specify by setting the RDW_ALLCHILDREN and RDW_NOCHILDREN values, to receive WM_ERASEBKGND and WM_PAINT messages before the RedrawWindow returns, if necessary. Causes the affected windows, which you specify by setting the RDW_ALLCHILDREN and RDW_NOCHILDREN values, to receive WM_ERASEBKGND messages before RedrawWindow returns, if necessary. The affected windows receive WM_PAINT messages at the ordinary time. Specifies values from Msgs enumeration. Specified WM_NULL enumeration value. Specified WM_CREATE enumeration value. Specified WM_DESTROY enumeration value. Specified WM_MOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_ACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETFOCUS enumeration value. Specified WM_KILLFOCUS enumeration value. Specified WM_ENABLE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETREDRAW enumeration value. Specified WM_SETTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETTEXTLENGTH enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_CLOSE enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYENDSESSION enumeration value. Specified WM_QUIT enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYOPEN enumeration value. Specified WM_ERASEBKGND enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_ENDSESSION enumeration value. Specified WM_SHOWWINDOW enumeration value. Specified WM_WININICHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETTINGCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_DEVMODECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_ACTIVATEAPP enumeration value. Specified WM_FONTCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_TIMECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_CANCELMODE enumeration value. Specified WM_SETCURSOR enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_CHILDACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_QUEUESYNC enumeration value. Specified WM_GETMINMAXINFO enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINTICON enumeration value. Specified WM_ICONERASEBKGND enumeration value. Specified WM_NEXTDLGCTL enumeration value. Specified WM_SPOOLERSTATUS enumeration value. Specified WM_DRAWITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_MEASUREITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_DELETEITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_VKEYTOITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_CHARTOITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_SETFONT enumeration value. Specified WM_GETFONT enumeration value. Specified WM_SETHOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_GETHOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYDRAGICON enumeration value. Specified WM_COMPAREITEM enumeration value. Specified WM_GETOBJECT enumeration value. Specified WM_COMPACTING enumeration value. Specified WM_COMMNOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_POWER enumeration value. Specified WM_COPYDATA enumeration value. Specified WM_CANCELJOURNAL enumeration value. Specified WM_NOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST enumeration value. Specified WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_TCARD enumeration value. Specified WM_HELP enumeration value. Specified WM_USERCHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_NOTIFYFORMAT enumeration value. Specified WM_CONTEXTMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_STYLECHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_STYLECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_DISPLAYCHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_GETICON enumeration value. Specified WM_SETICON enumeration value. Specified WM_NCCREATE enumeration value. Specified VK_RMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_NCCALCSIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_NCHITTEST enumeration value. Specified WM_NCPAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_NCACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_GETDLGCODE enumeration value. Specified WM_SYNCPAINT enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMOUSEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCLBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCRBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_NCMBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_NCXBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_NCXBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_CHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_DEADCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSKEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSKEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSDEADCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_KEYLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_STARTCOMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_ENDCOMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_COMPOSITION enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_INITDIALOG enumeration value. Specified WM_COMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_SYSCOMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_TIMER enumeration value. Specified WM_HSCROLL enumeration value. Specified WM_VSCROLL enumeration value. Specified WM_INITMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_INITMENUPOPUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUSELECT enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUCHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERIDLE enumeration value. Specified WM_MENURBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUDRAG enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUGETOBJECT enumeration value. Specified WM_UNINITMENUPOPUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MENUCOMMAND enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORMSGBOX enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLOREDIT enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORLISTBOX enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORBTN enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORDLG enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORSCROLLBAR enumeration value. Specified WM_CTLCOLORSTATIC enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEWHEEL enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONUP enumeration value. Specified WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK enumeration value. Specified WM_PARENTNOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERMENULOOP enumeration value. Specified WM_EXITMENULOOP enumeration value. Specified WM_NEXTMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZING enumeration value. Specified WM_CAPTURECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_MOVING enumeration value. Specified WM_DEVICECHANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDICREATE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIDESTROY enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIACTIVATE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIRESTORE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDINEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIMAXIMIZE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDITILE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDICASCADE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIICONARRANGE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIGETACTIVE enumeration value. Specified WM_MDISETMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_EXITSIZEMOVE enumeration value. Specified WM_DROPFILES enumeration value. Specified WM_MDIREFRESHMENU enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_SETCONTEXT enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_NOTIFY enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_CONTROL enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_COMPOSITIONFULL enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_SELECT enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_CHAR enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_REQUEST enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYDOWN enumeration value. Specified WM_IME_KEYUP enumeration value. Specified WM_MOUSEHOVER enumeration value. Specified WM_UNDO enumeration value. Specified WM_RENDERFORMAT enumeration value. Specified WM_RENDERALLFORMATS enumeration value. Specified WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_DRAWCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_PAINTCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_VSCROLLCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_SIZECLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_ASKCBFORMATNAME enumeration value. Specified WM_CHANGECBCHAIN enumeration value. Specified WM_HSCROLLCLIPBOARD enumeration value. Specified WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE enumeration value. Specified WM_PALETTEISCHANGING enumeration value. Specified WM_PALETTECHANGED enumeration value. Specified WM_HOTKEY enumeration value. Specified WM_PRINT enumeration value. Specified WM_PRINTCLIENT enumeration value. Specified WM_HANDHELDFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_HANDHELDLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_AFXFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_AFXLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_PENWINFIRST enumeration value. Specified WM_PENWINLAST enumeration value. Specified WM_APP enumeration value. Specified WM_USER enumeration value. Specified WM_REFLECT enumeration value. Specified WM_THEMECHANGED enumeration value. 关键词 密码 权限用户id 返回关键词 树形控件，用于分类用 显示在第一位的名称 是否显示菜单 树形控件 判断指定节点是否是目标节点的子节点 判断当前节点，当前用户是否有权限访问 权限事件 选择权限用户时发生 数据变化时发生 数据变化前发生 操作事件 在添加分组前发生 在修改分组前发生 在删除分组前发生 在设置密码前发生 在设置权限前发生 获取新的关键词分类 根据id获取节点 根据节点获取节点信息 设置节点信息 设置节点关键词和密码 设置节点密码 设置节点关键词 设置节点用户 RecursionTreeControl:表示将XML文件的内容显示在TreeView控件中 将要加载的XML文件中的节点元素 将要加载的XML文件中的节点集合 把XML文本载入到列表中 把XML文件载入到列表中 将列表保存为xml文本 改变所有子节点的状态 反选子节点 根据关键词来选中列表 根据关键词来选中列表 格式化关键字(会去除重复项)，以便存入数据库 去除掉重复项 获取当前选中项以及所有父项的关键词组合 获取选中的 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 是否为添加 选择的文本 选择的Tag 选择的图片序号 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 旧密码 新密码 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 控件状态 无 获得焦点 失去焦点 鼠标指针进入控件 Toolbar控件 获取或设置控件显示的图片 重写控件焦点属性 自定义绘制 焦点进入 失去焦点 禁止调整大小 只响应单击鼠标左键事件 按比例缩放图片 图片缩放 源图片 缩放图片的宽度 缩放图片的高度 缩放的图片 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 绘图对像 绘图对像 图片 绘置的图片大小、坐标 绘置的图片边界 当前状态 状态总数 绘图对像 绘图对像 图片对像 绘置的图片大小、坐标 当前状态 状态总数 得到要绘置的图片对像 图像在程序集中的地址 得到要绘置的图片对像 图像在程序集中的路径 图像在程序集中的地址 获取资源图标 得到图程序集中的图片对像 图像在程序集中的地址 得到图程序集中的图片对像 图像在程序集中的路径 图像在程序集中的地址 颜色标签 行间距 颜色标签 更新 字体高度 控件高 控件文本 获取过滤掉颜色的字 改变字体 分页控件 首页文本 上一页文本 下一页文本 末页文本 跳页文本 页面信息文本 存储SQL参数 最后一页的页码 在发生页码变化时激发 在发生页码变化前激发 设置/返回每页显示的量大小 设置/返回记录总数 设置/返回分页SQL语句,{pagecount}表示页数,{recordcount}表示记录总数,{pagesize}表示页面大小, {pageindex}表示当前页数,{recordnum}表示当前页记录数,{pageendnum}表示当前页最后一条记录的记录数 设置/返回当{recordnum}小于等于0时的分页SQL语句(比如第一页),如果为空，则默认使用SQLText值。{pagecount}表示页数, {recordcount}表示记录总数,{pagesize}表示页面大小,{pageindex}表示当前页数,{recordnum}表示当前页记录数,{pageendnum}表示当前页最后一条记录的记录数 设置/返回获取记录总数(RecordCount)的SQL语句,如果为空,则使用RecordCount 获取当前页码 设置分页语句 数据库类型 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 获取数据库指定条件的记录总数 数据库类型 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 设置分页语句为MySQL分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取MySQL数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 设置分页语句为MSSQL分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 获取MSSQL数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 设置分页语句为SQLite分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,以及不包含排序语句;,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 排序语句，必须包含Order By;,如果不存在排序语句，请为空 设置分页语句为SQLite分页语句 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,可包含order by,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 获取SQLite数据库指定条件的记录总数 表名 条件判断sql语句，注意不包含where,可包含order by,如果不存在条件判断语句，请为空 返回分页SQL语句 分页控件 是否采用多线程模式 是否正在加载分页 如果为空,则不使用自己去计算 设置当前页为指定页 下一页 上一页 末页 首页 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 密码控件 密码 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 This enum represents the possible browser commands Used when no commans are available Used in the new navigation events The URL to navigate to The name of the frame to navigate to The flags when opening a new window The pointer to ppDisp Creates a new instance of WebBrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs Pointer to the automation object of the browser The URL to go to The name of the frame The new window flags Used in the new navigation events 查看源码 复制当前选中区 粘贴当前选中区 剪切当前选中区 全选 清除当前选中区的选中状态。 从当前选中区中删除全部超级链接。 从当前选中区中删除全部书签。 删除当前选中区 重做 撤销 从当前选中区中删除格式化标签。 点击节点 点击节点 点击元素 节点名 属性 属性值 等待毫秒数 第几个符合的元素,从1开始 等待多时毫秒 Represents event information for the main form, when the command state of the active browser changes Creates a new instance of the class A list of commands that are available Gets a list of commands that are available An extended version of the control. 在页面弹出消息对话框时激发 打开页面并等待页面加载完毕 要打开的页面地址 小于等于0,则表示一直等待,否则表示等待指定秒后，如果依然没有加载完毕，就直接返回 等待页面加载完毕 小于等于0,则表示一直等待,否则表示等待指定秒后，如果依然没有加载完毕，就直接返回 等待指定毫秒 等待指定毫秒 获取网页源代码,可以自动去除乱码 加载html文本到浏览器中 加载html文本到浏览器中 强制用本窗体打开新链接 This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Called by the control when the underlying ActiveX control is created. This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Called by the control when the underlying ActiveX control is discarded. Returns the automation object for the web browser This method will be called to give you a chance to create your own event sink Detaches the event sink 在文档下载开始时激发 Raises the event Empty You could start an animation or a notification that downloading is starting 下载完成后触发 Here you could start monitoring for script errors. Raises the event Empty 在开始浏览新网页时激发. 在打开新的网页窗口时激发 Raises the event Thrown when BrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs is null Raises the event Thrown when BrowserExtendedNavigatingEventArgs is null 新窗口事件,只限Window XP SP2或以上系统支持 / Overridden The send to this procedure A list of all the available window messages Raises the event 在网页窗口关闭时激发 Do not confuse this with DWebBrowserEvents2.Quit... That's something else. Flags used by INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow. These values are taken into account in the decision of whether to display a pop-up window. No information Present The page is unloading. This flag is set in response to the onbeforeunload and onunload events. Some pages load pop-up windows when you leave them rather than when you enter. This flag is used to identify those situations. The call to INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is the result of a user-initiated action (a mouse click or key press). Use this flag in conjunction with the NWMF_FIRST_USERINITED flag to determine whether the call is a direct or indirect result of the user-initiated action. When NWMF_USERINITED is present, this flag indicates that the call to INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is the first query that results from this user-initiated action. Always use this flag in conjunction with NWMF_USERINITED. The override key (ALT) was pressed. The override key is used to bypass the pop-up manager梐llowing all pop-up windows to display梐nd must be held down at the time that INewWindowManager::EvaluateNewWindow is called. The new window attempting to load is the result of a call to the showHelp method. Help is sometimes displayed in a separate window, and this flag is valuable in those cases. The new window is a dialog box that displays HTML content. Indicates that the EvaluateNewWindow method is being called through a marshalled Component Object Model (COM) proxy from another thread. In this situation, the method should make a decision and return immediately without performing blocking operations such as showing modal user interface (UI). Lengthy operations will cause the calling thread to appear unresponsive. HRESULT constants a form that supports custom theme 标签新建按钮事件 标签关闭按钮事件 标签创建时事件 标签激活前事件 标签激活后事件 在标签栏创建时激发 内边距 默认内边距 标题 皮肤/主题 是否可拖动改变窗体大小 窗体边界大小，鼠标移动到该边界将变成指针形状，拖动可改变窗体大小 窗体边框大小 标题栏高度 窗体圆角程度 窗体圆角样式 控制按钮相对于右上角的偏移量 关闭/最大化/最小化按钮之间的距离，可以设置成负值使它们重叠 标题栏图标尺寸 窗体图标,如果设置本项,将不使用Icon属性 标题栏图标与窗体左边框的距离 标题距离左边的距离 窗体关闭按钮的尺寸 窗体最大化/还原按钮的大小 窗体最小化按钮的大小 是否显示阴影 窗体阴影宽度 使用阴影来缩放 窗体阴影颜色 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置深色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置浅色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 表示去掉自画的边框及标题栏后，剩下的可用的客户区区域，坐标相对于窗体左上角 表示去掉自画的边框及标题栏后，剩下的可用的客户区大小 表示MDI标签栏的区域，包括bottom-region MGdUI皮肤 获取子窗体 通过sendmessage方式激活子窗体以避免闪烁 当子窗体关闭时激发 子窗体可视化变化 获取当前的子窗体列表 判断所接收到的 wm_nc-calc-size 消息是否指示窗体即将最小化 判断所接收到的 wm_nc-calc-size 消息是否指示窗体即将最大化 to make the client area to have 3D view 双击事件 消息 画UI 在画背景时激发 重写该方法解决在VS设计器中，每次保存一个新的尺寸，再打开尺寸会变大的问题 创建控件时激发 窗体可见变化时激发 大小改变时激发 在位置变化时激发 窗体激活 窗体关闭后激发 加载时 在子窗体激活时激发 标签菜单 窗体上移动鼠标时激发 获取当前点击的标签项 在窗体上按下鼠标时激发 在窗体上放开鼠标时激发 在鼠标离开窗体时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 该类处理mdi-bar的绘制及鼠标事件管理 use left,top,right to location the bar in owner form, the margin is from Form.ClientRectangle 整个标签栏高度,包含标签栏底部区域、标签、标签顶部空隙 标签栏底部区域的高度 是否显示标签栏边框 是否显示标签栏背景 标签栏左内边距 标签栏右内边距 标签高度 激活的标签高度 tab顶部与bar顶部的空间,这个值用来计算 BarHeight 每个标签的左右边界可以不是垂直的，而是都有一个斜度 tab与tab之间的距离，用负值可以使tab有重叠的效果 标签是否显示图标 是否显示标签关闭按钮 标签图标大小 标签图标距离左边的距离 标签文字距离左边的距离 标签关闭按钮的大小 标签关闭按钮距离右边的距离 是否显示新建标签按钮 新建标签按钮的大小 新建标签距离左边的距离 按钮与Bar底部的距离 一个tab允许的最小宽度 一个tab允许的最大显示宽度 标签正常宽度 同步_listTabItems与mdi主窗体实际存在的子form 为每个tab分配空间，如果tab数目太多，则有些会被隐藏 重绘整个标签栏 处理鼠标事件。该方法会触发一些click事件，重刷一些按钮等 该类表示一个单独的标签项 该标签所对应的窗体 最终分配到的整个tab的宽度 表示所对应的form是否仍未被关闭 是否因空间不足而被隐藏 返回全部显示该标签文本所需的长度 返回显示全部文本时该tab所需的宽度,该宽度不超过bar-container 规定的tabmaxwidth 居左 显示在最后一个标签后面 该类封装设置一个主题所需的信息，可以继承该类实现不同的主题 主题名称，用于标识主题，对主题进行简单描述 窗体边界大小，鼠标移动到该边界将变成指针形状，拖动可改变窗体大小 窗体边框大小 窗体标题栏高度 标题栏图标与窗体左边框的距离 标题栏图标尺寸 标题栏文本左边距 控制按钮（关闭按钮）相对于窗体右上角的偏移量 窗体关闭按钮的尺寸 窗体最大化/还原按钮的大小 窗体最小化按钮的大小 关闭/最大化/最小化按钮之间的距离，可以设置成负值使它们重叠 窗体圆角程度 Tab圆角程度 窗体圆角样式 是否使用默认的圆角样式，该样式为左上角和右上角圆角， 最好在窗体边框较粗时才使用该样式 是否在标题栏上绘制图标 是否在标题栏上绘制文本 是否显示窗体阴影 窗体阴影大小 拖动窗体阴影是否可以改变窗体大小 阴影的颜色，可以设置成其他颜色而不一定是黑色 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置深色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 阴影从里到外是逐渐变浅的，这个值设置浅色部分的透明度，ARGB中的A值 是否在客户区边界画线使其看起来有立体感 窗体标题栏文字是否居中显示 窗体边框最外一像素的颜色 窗体边框第二最外像素的颜色 窗体边框其他部分颜色，如果窗体边框大小大于2，则其他像素将用此颜色画出 标题栏颜色是从上到下渐变的，这个值设置上边的颜色值 标题栏颜色是从上到下渐变的，这个值设置下边的颜色值 标题栏文字颜色 窗体背景颜色，该值将覆盖窗体自带的BackColor属性值 窗体关闭按钮的颜色集合 窗体最大化/还原按钮的颜色集合 窗体最小化按钮的颜色集合 默认状态下关闭按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时关闭按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时关闭按钮背景图片 默认状态下最大化按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时最大化按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时最大化按钮背景图片 默认状态下恢复按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时恢复按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时恢复按钮背景图片 默认状态下最小化按钮背景图片 鼠标移过去时最小化按钮背景图片 鼠标按下时最小化按钮背景图片 是否用SendMessage的方式切换子窗体，以避免子窗体切换时产生的闪烁 Mdi-Bar与窗体左、上、右边界的距离，只用到这三个值，Bottom值没用到。 用这三个值来确定Mdi-Bar的宽度及其在窗体中的位置 内部左边空白，第一个标签将从这个空白距离之后开始 标签栏内部右边空白 标签栏背景颜色 标签栏边框颜色 标签栏背景图片 是否显示标签栏边框 标签栏下边区域的背景颜色 标签栏下边区域的高度 标签高度 被选中的标签高度，可以设置成与TabHeight不一样的值，以突出显示被选中状态 标签之间的距离，设成负值可以使标签有重叠的效果 标签的最大宽度，任何情况下标签都不能超过这个宽度 标签正常宽度，如果标签需要很短的宽度（比如20像素）就可以显示完上面的文字， 但是Mdi-Bar上有足够的空间时，标签会以正常宽度（比如100像素）显示 标签最小宽度，当标签小于这个宽度时将被隐藏 标签梯度大小，标签可以不以矩形方式显示，而是有一个梯度/斜度。 标签顶部空白，这个值用于参与计算Mdi-Bar高度，计算方式为： Mdi-Bar Height = BottomRegionHeight + TabHeight + TabTopSpace 标签上是否显示子窗体图标 标签上是否显示子窗体关闭图标 选中状态的标签的上部背景色，与下部背景色不同时，标签背景色就有渐变效果 选中状态的标签的下部背景色，与上部背景色不同时，标签背景色就有渐变效果 标签激活时字体颜色 非选中状态的标签的字体颜色 非选中状态的标签的上部背景色 非选中状态的标签的下部背景色 标签外边框颜色 标签内边框颜色，这个颜色一般具有一定的透明度 是否显示标签边框 是否显示默认的新建标签按钮(NewTabBtn) NewTabBtn与下边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的Y坐标 新建标签按钮与左边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的X坐标 新建标签按钮大小 按钮颜色集合 是否一直显示ListAllBtn，即使在没有标签被隐藏的情况下 《显示全部标签》按钮的位置 《显示全部标签》按钮与下边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的Y坐标 《显示全部标签》按钮与左边框的距离，这个值用来定位按钮的X坐标 《显示全部标签》按钮的颜色 《显示全部标签》按钮的大小 皮肤主题 设置百分比 引发 ValueChanged 事件 引发 ThemeChanged 事件 指示鼠标位于哪个区域 控件Value值发生变化后引发 控件绘制MainLine前引发, 可以设置Cancel参数来取消默认的绘制 控件绘制Button前引发 引发 ValueChanged 事件 引发 BeforePaintMainLine 事件 引发 BeforePaintButton 事件 将Value值加一个LargeChange量 将Value值减一个LargeChange量 将Value值加一个SmallChange量 将Value值减一个SmallChange量 提供产生各种路径的静态方法，比如圆角路径、关闭按钮上的x路径、+号路径 圆角样式 无 所有 上 下 左 右 SimpleObject指的是只有一种状态（不像普通按钮一样有三种状态），并且其上的元素 布局比较简单的Object DevExpress风格皮肤 DevExpress风格皮肤 新风格皮肤 新风格皮肤 基础皮肤 VS2013风格皮肤 this theme is just for chrome one quarter style for diamond ring style only Location of cursor hot spot returnet in WM_NCHITTEST. On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows (same as HTNOWHERE, except that the DefWindowProc function produces a system beep to indicate an error). In a window currently covered by another window in the same thread (the message will be sent to underlying windows in the same thread until one of them returns a code that is not HTTRANSPARENT). On the screen background or on a dividing line between windows. In a client area. In a title bar. In a window menu or in a Close button in a child window. In a size box (same as HTSIZE). In a menu. In a horizontal scroll bar. In the vertical scroll bar. In a Minimize button. In a Maximize button. In the left border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally). In the right border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window horizontally). In the upper-horizontal border of a window. In the upper-left corner of a window border. In the upper-right corner of a window border. In the lower-horizontal border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window vertically). In the lower-left corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally). In the lower-right corner of a border of a resizable window (the user can click the mouse to resize the window diagonally). In the border of a window that does not have a sizing border. In a Close button. In a Help button. Contains the new coordinates of a window that has been moved or resized, that is, it is the proposed new window coordinates. Contains the coordinates of the window before it was moved or resized. Contains the coordinates of the window's client area before the window was moved or resized. Pointer to a WINDOWPOS structure that contains the size and position values specified in the operation that moved or resized the window. 是否在这个按钮上按下了鼠标未释放 是否可见 画两次可以加深颜色 用于在click事件中传回数据 获取或设置是否将绘制完全限制在指定的区域内 Adapter for WinForms brushes objects for core. The actual WinForms brush instance. If to dispose the brush when is called.
Ignore dispose for cached brushes. Init. The actual WinForms brush instance. Adapter for WinForms context menu for core. the underline win forms context menu Init. Adapter for WinForms Control for core. the underline win forms control. Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. Init. Get the underline win forms control Adapter for WinForms Font object for core. the underline win-forms font. a handle to this Font. the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Cached font height. Cached font whitespace width. Init. the underline win-forms font. Get the handle to this Font. Set font metrics to be cached for the font for future use. the full height of the font the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Adapter for WinForms Font family object for core. the underline win-forms font. Init. the underline win-forms font family. Adapter for WinForms Graphics for core. used for calculation. used for calculation. Used for GDI+ measure string. The string format to use for measuring strings for GDI+ text rendering The string format to use for rendering strings for GDI+ text rendering The wrapped WinForms graphics object Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. the initialized HDC used if to release the graphics object on dispose If text alignment was set to RTL Init static resources. Init. the win forms graphics object to use Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text optional: if to release the graphics object on dispose (default - false) Release current HDC to be able to use methods. Init HDC for the current graphics object to be used to call GDI directly. Set a resource (e.g. a font) for the specified device context. WARNING: Calling Font.ToHfont() many times without releasing the font handle crashes the app. Set the text color of the device context. Change text align to Left-to-Right or Right-to-Left if required. Special draw logic to draw transparent text using GDI.
1. Create in-memory DC
2. Copy background to in-memory DC
3. Draw the text to in-memory DC
4. Copy the in-memory DC to the proper location with alpha blend
 Change text align to Left-to-Right or Right-to-Left if required. Adapter for WinForms graphics path object for core. The actual WinForms graphics path instance. the last point added to the path to begin next segment from The actual WinForms graphics path instance. Get arc start angle for the given corner. Adapter for WinForms Image object for core. the underline win-forms image. Initializes a new instance of the class. the underline win-forms image. Adapter for WinForms pens objects for core. The actual WinForms brush instance. Init. The actual WinForms brush instance. Adapter for WinForms platforms. Singleton instance of global adapter. Init installed font families and set default font families mapping. Singleton instance of global adapter. Low level handling of Html Renderer logic, this class is used by , , and .
 The internal core html container Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text. Init. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout). There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. 在html渲染过程中发生错误时引发。
 不能保证事件会在主线程上引发，它可以在线程池线程上引发。 当样式表即将通过文件路径或链接元素的URI加载时引发。
此事件允许手动提供样式表或提供新的源（文件或Uri）进行加载。
如果没有提供替代数据，将使用原始来源。
 当图像即将按文件路径或URI加载时引发。
此事件允许手动提供图像，如果不处理，图像将从文件加载或从URI下载。 returns page list returns page list count The internal core html container Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免对背景和边框等几何体进行抗锯齿处理（默认值为false）。 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免图像异步加载（默认值为false）。
True-在html解析过程中同步加载图像。
错误-从URL下载或从磁盘加载时，图像会异步加载到html解析中。
 异步图像加载允许在使用IO从磁盘下载或加载图像时取消阻止html渲染 端口以实现更好的性能
当渲染过程中必须提供完整的html内容时，如渲染为图像，应避免异步加载图像。 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免仅在可见时加载图像（默认值为false）。
True-解析html后立即加载图像。
False-由于滚动位置而不可见的图像在滚动到之前不会加载。 /// 如果页面包含可见滚动区域之外的图像，特别是当图像较大时，延迟加载可以提高性能 由于所有图像加载延迟（下载并加载到内存中）
延迟加载图像可能会影响布局和实际大小，因为没有设置大小的图像在加载之前不会有实际大小 导致用户滚动期间的布局改变.
如果当前滚动位置上方没有已知大小的图像在加载时被加载，则早期图像加载也可能影响布局 将向下推html元素。 是否为渲染的html启用了内容选择（默认值为true）。
如果设置为“false”，则呈现的html将是静态的，只能单击链接。 内置上下文菜单是否启用，并将在鼠标右键单击时显示（默认值为true） The scroll offset of the html.
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
 Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered as it will be at -100 therefore outside the client rectangle. The top-left most location of the rendered html.
This will offset the top-left corner of the rendered html. The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can be exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrappable line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width\height separately).
 The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. Init with optional document and stylesheet. the html to init with, init empty if not given optional: the stylesheet to init with, init default if not given Get html from the current DOM tree with style if requested. Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated (default: ) generated html Get attribute value of element at the given x,y location by given key.
If more than one element exist with the attribute at the location the inner most is returned. the location to find the attribute at the attribute key to get value by found attribute value or null if not found Get all the links in the HTML with the element rectangle and href data. collection of all the links in the HTML Get css link href at the given x,y location. the location to find the link at css link href if exists or null Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively. Device context to draw Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Render the html using the given printer device. the printer device to use to render Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate mouse event args Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the mouse event args Handle mouse leave to handle hover cursor. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Handle key down event for selection and copy. the control hosting the html to invalidate the pressed key Create HtmlRenderer mouse event from win forms mouse event. Create HtmlRenderer key event from win forms key event. Provides HTML rendering using the text property.
WinForms control that will render html content in it's client rectangle.
Using and client can control how the html content effects the size of the label. Either case scrollbars are never shown and html content outside of client bounds will be clipped. and with AutoSize can limit the max/min size of the control
The control will handle mouse and keyboard events on it to support html text selection, copy-paste and mouse clicks.
The major differential to use HtmlPanel or HtmlLabel is size and scrollbars.
If the size of the control depends on the html content the HtmlLabel should be used.
If the size is set by some kind of layout then HtmlPanel is more suitable, also shows scrollbars if the html contents is larger than the control client rectangle.

AutoSize:

AutoSize = AutoSizeHeightOnly = false
The label size will not change by the html content. MaximumSize and MinimumSize are ignored.

AutoSize = true
The width and height is adjustable by the html content, the width will be longest line in the html, MaximumSize.Width will restrict it but it can be lower than that.

AutoSizeHeightOnly = true
The width of the label is set and will not change by the content, the height is adjustable by the html content with restrictions to the MaximumSize.Height and MinimumSize.Height values.

LinkClicked event

Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link.

StylesheetLoad event:

Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.

ImageLoad event:

Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI.

RenderError event:

Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Underline html container instance. The current border style of the control the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the panel the current html text set in the control is to handle auto size of the control height only If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. Creates a new HTML Label Raised when the BorderStyle property value changes. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. 是否使用操作系统定义的鼠标指针或NET指针 获取或设置边框样式 The border style. 是否为渲染的html启用了内容选择（默认值为true）。
如果设置为“false”，则呈现的html将是静态的，只能单击链接。 内置上下文菜单是否启用，并将在鼠标右键单击时显示（默认值为true） Set base stylesheet to be used by html rendered in the panel. 根据内容大小自动设置标签的大小 根据内容高度自动设置标签的高度（宽度不受影响）。 Gets or sets the max size the control get be set by or . An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. Gets or sets the min size the control get be set by or . An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. 获取或设置本控件的文本 获取html中当前选定的文本段 使用样式复制当前选定的html段 使用内联样式从当前DOM树中获取html generated html 获取html布局计算出的html元素的矩形。
如果通过id（html元素上的id属性）找到元素。
注意：要获得屏幕矩形，您需要通过宿主控件进行调整。
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Override to support border for the control. Perform the layout of the html in the control. Perform paint of the html in the control. Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. Handle mouse down to handle selection. Handle mouse leave to handle cursor change. Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. Raises the event. Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Handle html renderer invalidate and re-layout as requested. Override the proc processing method to set OS specific hand cursor. The Windows to process. Release the html container resources. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Provides HTML rendering using the text property.
WinForms control that will render html content in it's client rectangle.
If is true and the layout of the html resulted in its content beyond the client bounds of the panel it will show scrollbars (horizontal/vertical) allowing to scroll the content.
If is false html content outside the client bounds will be clipped.
The control will handle mouse and keyboard events on it to support html text selection, copy-paste and mouse clicks.
The major differential to use HtmlPanel or HtmlLabel is size and scrollbars.
If the size of the control depends on the html content the HtmlLabel should be used.
If the size is set by some kind of layout then HtmlPanel is more suitable, also shows scrollbars if the html contents is larger than the control client rectangle.

AutoScroll:

Allows showing scrollbars if html content is placed outside the visible boundaries of the panel.

LinkClicked event:

Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link.

StylesheetLoad event:

Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.

ImageLoad event:

Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI.

RenderError event:

Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Underline html container instance. The current border style of the control the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the control the current html text set in the control If to use cursors defined by the operating system or .NET cursors The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. The last position of the scrollbars to know if it has changed to update mouse Creates a new HtmlPanel and sets a basic css for it's styling. 当BorderStyle属性值更改时引发。 Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免对背景和边框等几何体进行抗锯齿处理（默认值为false）。 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免仅在可见时加载图像（默认值为false）。
True-解析html后立即加载图像。
False-由于滚动位置而不可见的图像在滚动到之前不会加载。 如果页面包含可见滚动区域之外的图像，特别是当图像较大时，延迟加载可以提高性能 由于所有图像加载延迟（下载并加载到内存中）
延迟加载图像可能会影响布局和实际大小，因为没有设置大小的图像在加载之前不会有实际大小 导致用户滚动期间的布局改变.
如果当前滚动位置上方没有已知大小的图像在加载时被加载，则早期图像加载也可能影响布局 将向下推html元素。 Use GDI+ text rendering to measure/draw text.
 GDI+ text rendering is less smooth than GDI text rendering but it natively supports alpha channel thus allows creating transparent images. While using GDI+ text rendering you can control the text rendering using , note that using doesn't work well with transparent background. The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. 是否使用操作系统定义的鼠标指针或NET指针。 获取或设置边框样式。 The border style. 是否为渲染的html启用了内容选择（默认值为true）。
如果设置为“false”，则呈现的html将是静态的，只能单击链接。 内置上下文菜单是否启用，并将在鼠标右键单击时显示（默认值为true） Set base stylesheet to be used by html rendered in the panel. 获取或设置一个值，该值指示容器是否允许用户滚动到其可见边界之外的任何控件。 获取或设置此面板的文本 获取html中当前选定的文本段。 使用样式复制当前选定的html段。 使用内联样式从当前DOM树中获取html。 generated html 获取html布局计算出的html元素的矩形。
如果通过id（html元素上的id属性）找到元素。
注意：要获得屏幕矩形，您需要通过宿主控件进行调整。
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found 根据给定的id调整html元素上面板的滚动条。
html元素矩形的顶部将位于面板的顶部，如果没有足够的高度滚动到顶部，则滚动将达到最大。
 the id of the element to scroll to Override to support border for the control. Perform the layout of the html in the control. Perform html container layout by the current panel client size. Perform paint of the html in the control. Set focus on the control for keyboard scrollbars handling. Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. Handle mouse leave to handle cursor change. Handle mouse down to handle selection. Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. Handle key down event for selection, copy and scrollbars handling. Raises the event. Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Handle html renderer invalidate and re-layout as requested. On html renderer scroll request adjust the scrolling of the panel to the requested location. Adjust the scrolling of the panel to the requested location. the location to adjust the scroll to call mouse move to handle paint after scroll or html change affecting mouse cursor. Used to add arrow keys to the handled keys in . Override the proc processing method to set OS specific hand cursor. The Windows to process. Release the html container resources. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Not applicable. Standalone static class for simple and direct HTML rendering.
For WinForms UI prefer using HTML controls: or .
For low-level control and performance consider using .
 GDI vs. GDI+ text rendering
Windows supports two text rendering technologies: GDI and GDI+.
GDI is older, has better performance and looks better on standard monitors but doesn't support alpha channel for transparency.
GDI+ is newer, device independent so work better for printers but is slower and looks worse on monitors.
HtmlRender supports both GDI and GDI+ text rendering to accommodate different needs, GDI+ text rendering methods have "GdiPlus" suffix in their name where GDI do not.
 Rendering to image
See https://htmlrenderer.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Image%20generation
Because of GDI text rendering issue with alpha channel clear type text rendering rendering to image requires special handling.
Solid color background - generate an image where the background is filled with solid color and all the html is rendered on top of the background color, GDI text rendering will be used. (RenderToImage method where the first argument is html string)
Image background - render html on top of existing image with whatever currently exist but it cannot have transparent pixels, GDI text rendering will be used. (RenderToImage method where the first argument is Image object)
Transparent background - render html to empty image using GDI+ text rendering, the generated image can be transparent. Text rendering can be controlled using , note that doesn't render well on transparent background. (RenderToImageGdiPlus method)
 Overwrite stylesheet resolution
Exposed by optional "stylesheetLoad" delegate argument.
Invoked when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Overwrite image resolution
Exposed by optional "imageLoad" delegate argument.
Invoked when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
Note: Cannot use asynchronous scheme overwrite scheme.
 Simple rendering
HtmlRender.Render(g, "Hello World]]>");
HtmlRender.Render(g, "Hello World]]>", 10, 10, 500, CssData.Parse("body {font-size: 20px}")");
 Image rendering
HtmlRender.RenderToImage("Hello World]]>", new Size(600,400));
HtmlRender.RenderToImage("Hello World]]>", 600);
HtmlRender.RenderToImage(existingImage, "Hello World]]>");
 Adds a font family to be used in html rendering.
The added font will be used by all rendering function including and all WinForms controls. The given font family instance must be remain alive while the renderer is in use.
If loaded to then the collection must be alive.
If loaded from file then the file must not be deleted. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 This fonts mapping can be used as a fallback in case the requested font is not installed in the client system. the font family to replace the font family to replace with Parse the given stylesheet to object.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. the stylesheet source to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the parsed css data Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given max width restriction.
If no max width restriction is given the layout will use the maximum possible width required by the content, it can be the longest text line or full image width.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect. Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given max width restriction.
If no max width restriction is given the layout will use the maximum possible width required by the content, it can be the longest text line or full image width.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering. Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max width restriction.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render optional: the left most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: the top most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI text rendering, note has no effect.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render optional: the left most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: the top most location to start render the html at (default - 0) optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
Use GDI+ text rending, use to control text rendering.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML on top of the given image.
will contain the rendered html in it on top of original content.
must not contain transparent pixels as it will corrupt the rendered html text.
The HTML will be layout by the given image size but may be clipped if cannot fit.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 the image to render the html on HTML source to render optional: the top-left most location to start render the html at (default - 0,0) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic Renders the specified HTML on top of the given image.
will contain the rendered html in it on top of original content.
must not contain transparent pixels as it will corrupt the rendered html text.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 the image to render the html on HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic Renders the specified HTML into a new image of the requested size.
The HTML will be layout by the given size but will be clipped if cannot fit.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render The size of the image to render into, layout html by width and clipped by height optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render optional: the max width of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the max height of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by min/max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
If (Width/Height) is above zero the rendered image will not be smaller than the given min size.

Limitation: The image cannot have transparent background, by default it will be white.
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .

 HTML source to render optional: the min size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the max size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the color to fill the image with (default - white) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html if is . Renders the specified HTML into a new image of the requested size.
The HTML will be layout by the given size but will be clipped if cannot fit.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render The size of the image to render into, layout html by width and clipped by height optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render optional: the max width of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: the max height of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Renders the specified HTML into a new image of unknown size that will be determined by min/max width/height and HTML layout.
If is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
If (Width/Height) is above zero the rendered image will not be smaller than the given min size.
The generated image have transparent background that the html is rendered on.
GDI+ text rending can be controlled by providing .
See "Rendering to image" remarks section on .
 HTML source to render optional: the min size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: the max size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) optional: (default - SingleBitPerPixelGridFit) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the generated image of the html Measure the size (width and height) required to draw the given html under given width and height restrictions.
 Device to use for measure HTML source to render optional: bound the width of the html to render in (default - 0, unlimited) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the size required for the html Measure the size of the html by performing layout under the given restrictions. the html to calculate the layout for the minimal size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) the maximum size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) return: the size of the html to be rendered within the min/max limits Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Clip the graphics so the html will not be rendered outside the max height bound given.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Renders the specified HTML source on the specified location and max size restriction.
If .Width is zero the html will use all the required width, otherwise it will perform line wrap as specified in the html
If .Height is zero the html will use all the required height, otherwise it will clip at the given max height not rendering the html below it.
Returned is the actual width and height of the rendered html.
 Device to render with HTML source to render the top-left most location to start render the html at the max size of the rendered html (if height above zero it will be clipped) optional: the style to use for html rendering (default - use W3 default style) true - use GDI+ text rendering, false - use GDI text rendering optional: can be used to overwrite stylesheet resolution logic optional: can be used to overwrite image resolution logic the actual size of the rendered html Copy all the bitmap bits from memory bitmap buffer to the given image. the source memory bitmap buffer to copy from the destination bitmap image to copy to Provides HTML rendering on the tooltips. the container to render and handle the html shown in the tooltip the raw base stylesheet data used in the control the base stylesheet data used in the panel The text rendering hint to be used for text rendering. The CSS class used for tooltip html root div the control that the tooltip is currently showing on.
Used for link handling. timer used to handle mouse move events when mouse is over the tooltip.
Used for link handling. the handle of the actual tooltip window used to know when the tooltip is hidden
Used for link handling. If to handle links in the tooltip (default: false).
When set to true the mouse pointer will change to hand when hovering over a tooltip and if clicked the event will be raised although the tooltip will be closed. Init. Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 Raised when aa stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. 使用GDI+文本渲染来测量/绘制文本.
 GDI+文本渲染不如GDI文本渲染平滑，但它本身支持alpha通道, 从而允许创建透明图像。 在使用GDI+文本渲染时，您可以使用,控制文本渲染，请注意 使用 在透明背景下效果不佳。 用于文本呈现的文本呈现提示。 设置面板中呈现的html使用的基本样式表。 用于工具提示html根div的CSS类（默认值：htmltooltip）
在工具提示上将清除基础样式设置为“null”。
设置中的自定义类以更改工具提示的基本样式。 如果要在工具提示中处理链接（默认值：false）。
当设置为true时，鼠标指针将在悬停在工具提示和 如果单击，将引发 事件，但工具提示将关闭。 获取或设置工具提示的最大大小。 An ordered pair of type representing the width and height of a rectangle. On tooltip appear set the html by the associated control, layout and set the tooltip size by the html size. Draw the html using the tooltip graphics. Adjust the location of the tooltip window to the location of the mouse and handle if the tooltip window will try to appear outside the boundaries of the control. the control the tooltip is appearing on the size of the tooltip window Propagate the LinkClicked event from root container. Propagate the Render Error event from root container. Propagate the stylesheet load event from root container. Propagate the image load event from root container. Raised on link handling timer tick, used for: 1. Know when the tooltip is hidden by checking the visibility of the tooltip window. 2. Call HandleMouseMove so the mouse cursor will react if over a link element. 3. Call HandleMouseDown and HandleMouseUp to simulate click on a link if one was clicked. Unsubscribe from events and dispose of . Helper to encode and set HTML fragment to clipboard.
See http://theartofdev.wordpress.com/2012/11/11/setting-html-and-plain-text-formatting-to-clipboard/.
. The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2014 Arthur Teplitzki. The string contains index references to other spots in the string, so we need placeholders so we can compute the offsets.
The _ strings are just placeholders. We'll back-patch them actual values afterwards.
The string layout () also ensures that it can't appear in the body of the html because the
character must be escaped.
html comment to point the beginning of html fragment html comment to point the end of html fragment Used to calculate characters byte count in UTF-8 Create with given html and plain-text ready to be used for clipboard or drag and drop.
Handle missing ]]> tags, specified start\end segments and Unicode characters. Windows Clipboard works with UTF-8 Unicode encoding while .NET strings use with UTF-16 so for clipboard to correctly decode Unicode string added to it from .NET we needs to be re-encoded it using UTF-8 encoding. Builds the CF_HTML header correctly for all possible HTMLs
If given html contains start/end fragments then it will use them in the header: hello world]]> If given html contains html/body tags then it will inject start/end fragments to exclude html/body tags: hello world]]> If given html doesn't contain html/body tags then it will inject the tags and start/end fragments properly: world]]> In all cases creating a proper CF_HTML header:
hello world ]]> See format specification here: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/workshop/networking/clipboard/htmlclipboard.asp a html fragment the plain text Clears clipboard and sets the given HTML and plain text fragment to the clipboard, providing additional meta-information for HTML.
See for HTML fragment details.
 ClipboardHelper.CopyToClipboard("Hello World", "Hello World"); a html fragment the plain text Clears clipboard and sets the given plain text fragment to the clipboard.
 the plain text Generate HTML fragment data string with header that is required for the clipboard. the html to generate for the resulted string Calculates the number of bytes produced by encoding the string in the string builder in UTF-8 and not .NET default string encoding. the string builder to count its string optional: the start index to calculate from (default - start of string) optional: the end index to calculate to (default - end of string) the number of bytes required to encode the string in UTF-8 Utilities for converting WinForms entities to HtmlRenderer core entities. Convert from WinForms point to core point. Convert from WinForms point to core point. Convert from core point to WinForms point. Convert from core point to WinForms point. 从WinForms大小转换为核心大小。 从核心大小转换为WinForms大小。 从核心大小转换为WinForms大小。 从WinForms矩形转换为核心矩形。 Convert from core rectangle to WinForms rectangle. 从核心矩形转换为WinForms矩形。 从WinForms颜色转换为核心颜色。 从核心颜色转换为WinForms颜色。 Utility for Win32 API. Const for BitBlt copy raster-operation code. Const for BitBlt paint raster-operation code. Create a compatible memory HDC from the given HDC.
The memory HDC can be rendered into without effecting the original HDC.
The returned memory HDC and must be released using . the HDC to create memory HDC from the width of the memory HDC to create the height of the memory HDC to create returns used bitmap memory section that must be released when done with memory HDC memory HDC Release the given memory HDC and dib section created from . Memory HDC to release bitmap section to release Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. In conformance with conventions for the RECT structure, the bottom-right coordinates of the returned rectangle are exclusive. In other words, the pixel at (right, bottom) lies immediately outside the rectangle. A handle to the window. A pointer to a RECT structure that receives the screen coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the window. If the function succeeds, the return value is nonzero. Retrieves the dimensions of the bounding rectangle of the specified window. The dimensions are given in screen coordinates that are relative to the upper-left corner of the screen. In conformance with conventions for the RECT structure, the bottom-right coordinates of the returned rectangle are exclusive. In other words, the pixel at (right, bottom) lies immediately outside the rectangle. A handle to the window. RECT structure that receives the screen coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners of the window. Represents an ARGB (alpha, red, green, blue) color. Represents a color that is null. 1 Gets a system-defined color. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FF000000. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFFFFFFF. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFF5F5F5. Gets a system-defined color that has an ARGB value of #FFD3D3D3. Gets the red component value of this structure. Gets the green component value of this structure. Gets the blue component value of this structure. Gets the alpha component value of this structure. Specifies whether this structure is uninitialized. This property returns true if this color is uninitialized; otherwise, false. 1 Tests whether two specified structures are equivalent. true if the two structures are equal; otherwise, false. The that is to the left of the equality operator. The that is to the right of the equality operator. 3 Tests whether two specified structures are different. true if the two structures are different; otherwise, false. The that is to the left of the inequality operator. The that is to the right of the inequality operator. 3 Creates a structure from the four ARGB component (alpha, red, green, and blue) values. Although this method allows a 32-bit value to be passed for each component, the value of each component is limited to 8 bits. The that this method creates. The alpha component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The red component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The green component. Valid values are 0 through 255. The blue component. Valid values are 0 through 255. , , , or is less than 0 or greater than 255. 1 Creates a structure from the specified 8-bit color values (red, green, and blue). The alpha value is implicitly 255 (fully opaque). Although this method allows a 32-bit value to be passed for each color component, the value of each component is limited to 8 bits. The that this method creates. The red component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. The green component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. The blue component value for the new . Valid values are 0 through 255. , , or is less than 0 or greater than 255. 1 Tests whether the specified object is a structure and is equivalent to this structure. true if is a structure equivalent to this structure; otherwise, false. The object to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies the hash code for this . 1 Converts this structure to a human-readable string. Specifies the style of dashed lines drawn with a object. 自定义 Specifies style information applied to text. Even class for handling keyboard events in . is control is pressed is 'A' key is pressed is 'C' key is pressed Init. is control is pressed is 'A' key is pressed is 'C' key is pressed Even class for handling keyboard events in . Is the left mouse button participated in the event Init. Is the left mouse button participated in the event Represents an ordered pair of floating-point x- and y-coordinates that defines a point in a two-dimensional plane. Represents a new instance of the class with member data left uninitialized. 1 Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified coordinates. The horizontal position of the point. The vertical position of the point. Gets a value indicating whether this is empty. true if both and are 0; otherwise, false. 1 Gets or sets the x-coordinate of this . The x-coordinate of this . 1 Gets or sets the y-coordinate of this . The y-coordinate of this . 1 Translates the by the specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to add to the x- and y-coordinates of the . Translates a by the negative of a specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to subtract from the coordinates of . Compares two structures. The result specifies whether the values of the and properties of the two structures are equal. true if the and values of the left and right structures are equal; otherwise, false. A to compare. A to compare. 3 Determines whether the coordinates of the specified points are not equal. true to indicate the and values of and are not equal; otherwise, false. A to compare. A to compare. 3 Translates a given by a specified . The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to add to the coordinates of . Translates a by the negative of a specified size. The translated . The to translate. The that specifies the numbers to subtract from the coordinates of . Specifies whether this contains the same coordinates as the specified . This method returns true if is a and has the same coordinates as this . The to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies a hash value for this structure. 1 Converts this to a human readable string. A string that represents this . 1 Stores a set of four floating-point numbers that represent the location and size of a rectangle. Represents an instance of the class with its members uninitialized. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified location and size. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle. The width of the rectangle. The height of the rectangle. Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified location and size. A that represents the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. A that represents the width and height of the rectangular region. Gets or sets the coordinates of the upper-left corner of this structure. A that represents the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the size of this . A that represents the width and height of this structure. Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of this structure. Gets or sets the width of this structure. The width of this structure. Gets or sets the height of this structure. The height of this structure. Gets the x-coordinate of the left edge of this structure. The x-coordinate of the left edge of this structure. Gets the y-coordinate of the top edge of this structure. The y-coordinate of the top edge of this structure. Gets the x-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. The x-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. Gets the y-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. The y-coordinate that is the sum of and of this structure. Tests whether the or property of this has a value of zero. This property returns true if the or property of this has a value of zero; otherwise, false. Tests whether two structures have equal location and size. This operator returns true if the two specified structures have equal , , , and properties. The structure that is to the left of the equality operator. The structure that is to the right of the equality operator. Tests whether two structures differ in location or size. This operator returns true if any of the , , , or properties of the two structures are unequal; otherwise false. The structure that is to the left of the inequality operator. The structure that is to the right of the inequality operator. Creates a structure with upper-left corner and lower-right corner at the specified locations. The new that this method creates. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangular region. The x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the rectangular region. The y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the rectangular region. Tests whether is a with the same location and size of this . This method returns true if is a and its X, Y, Width, and Height properties are equal to the corresponding properties of this ; otherwise, false. The to test. Determines if the specified point is contained within this structure. This method returns true if the point defined by and is contained within this structure; otherwise false. The x-coordinate of the point to test. The y-coordinate of the point to test. Determines if the specified point is contained within this structure. This method returns true if the point represented by the parameter is contained within this structure; otherwise false. The to test. Determines if the rectangular region represented by is entirely contained within this structure. This method returns true if the rectangular region represented by is entirely contained within the rectangular region represented by this ; otherwise false. The to test. Inflates this structure by the specified amount. The amount to inflate this structure horizontally. The amount to inflate this structure vertically. Inflates this by the specified amount. The amount to inflate this rectangle. Creates and returns an inflated copy of the specified structure. The copy is inflated by the specified amount. The original rectangle remains unmodified. The inflated . The to be copied. This rectangle is not modified. The amount to inflate the copy of the rectangle horizontally. The amount to inflate the copy of the rectangle vertically. Replaces this structure with the intersection of itself and the specified structure. The rectangle to intersect. Returns a structure that represents the intersection of two rectangles. If there is no intersection, and empty is returned. A third structure the size of which represents the overlapped area of the two specified rectangles. A rectangle to intersect. A rectangle to intersect. Determines if this rectangle intersects with . This method returns true if there is any intersection. The rectangle to test. Creates the smallest possible third rectangle that can contain both of two rectangles that form a union. A third structure that contains both of the two rectangles that form the union. A rectangle to union. A rectangle to union. Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The amount to offset the location. Adjusts the location of this rectangle by the specified amount. The amount to offset the location horizontally. The amount to offset the location vertically. Gets the hash code for this structure. For information about the use of hash codes, see Object.GetHashCode. The hash code for this Converts the Location and Size of this to a human-readable string. A string that contains the position, width, and height of this structure for example, "{X=20, Y=20, Width=100, Height=50}". Stores an ordered pair of floating-point numbers, typically the width and height of a rectangle. Gets a structure that has a and value of 0. A structure that has a and value of 0. 1 Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified existing structure. The structure from which to create the new structure. Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified structure. The structure from which to initialize this structure. Initializes a new instance of the structure from the specified dimensions. The width component of the new structure. The height component of the new structure. Gets a value that indicates whether this structure has zero width and height. This property returns true when this structure has both a width and height of zero; otherwise, false. 1 Gets or sets the horizontal component of this structure. The horizontal component of this structure, typically measured in pixels. 1 Gets or sets the vertical component of this structure. The vertical component of this structure, typically measured in pixels. 1 Converts the specified structure to a structure. The structure to which this operator converts. The structure to be converted Adds the width and height of one structure to the width and height of another structure. A structure that is the result of the addition operation. The first structure to add. The second structure to add. 3 Subtracts the width and height of one structure from the width and height of another structure. A that is the result of the subtraction operation. The structure on the left side of the subtraction operator. The structure on the right side of the subtraction operator. 3 Tests whether two structures are equal. This operator returns true if and have equal width and height; otherwise, false. The structure on the left side of the equality operator. The structure on the right of the equality operator. 3 Tests whether two structures are different. This operator returns true if and differ either in width or height; false if and are equal. The structure on the left of the inequality operator. The structure on the right of the inequality operator. 3 Adds the width and height of one structure to the width and height of another structure. A structure that is the result of the addition operation. The first structure to add. The second structure to add. Subtracts the width and height of one structure from the width and height of another structure. A structure that is a result of the subtraction operation. The structure on the left side of the subtraction operator. The structure on the right side of the subtraction operator. Tests to see whether the specified object is a structure with the same dimensions as this structure. This method returns true if is a and has the same width and height as this ; otherwise, false. The to test. 1 Returns a hash code for this structure. An integer value that specifies a hash value for this structure. 1 Converts a structure to a structure. Returns a structure. Creates a human-readable string that represents this structure. A string that represents this structure. 1 Platform adapter to bridge platform specific objects to HTML Renderer core library.
Core uses abstract renderer objects (RAdapter/RControl/REtc...) to access platform specific functionality, the concrete platforms implements those objects to provide concrete platform implementation. Those allowing the core library to be platform agnostic. Platforms: WinForms, WPF, Metro, PDF renders, etc.
Objects: UI elements(Controls), Graphics(Render context), Colors, Brushes, Pens, Fonts, Images, Clipboard, etc.
 It is best to have a singleton instance of this class for concrete implementation!
This is because it holds caches of default CssData, Images, Fonts and Brushes. cache of brush color to brush instance cache of pen color to pen instance cache of all the font used not to create same font again and again default CSS parsed data singleton image used to draw loading image icon image used to draw error image icon Init. Get the default CSS stylesheet data. Resolve color value from given color name. the color name color value Get cached pen instance for the given color. the color to get pen for pen instance Get cached solid brush instance for the given color. the color to get brush for brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Convert image object returned from to . the image returned from load event converted image or null Create an object from the given stream. the stream to create image from new image instance Check if the given font exists in the system by font family name. the font name to check true - font exists by given family name, false - otherwise Adds a font family to be used. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 the font family to replace the font family to replace with Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get image to be used while HTML image is loading. Get image to be used if HTML image load failed. Get data object for the given html and plain text data.
The data object can be used for clipboard or drag-drop operation.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the html data the plain text data drag-drop data object Set the given text to the clipboard
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the text to set Set the given html and plain text data to clipboard.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the html data the plain text data Set the given image to clipboard.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the image object to set to clipboard Create a context menu that can be used on the control
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. new context menu Save the given image to file by showing save dialog to the client.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the image to save the name of the image for save dialog the extension of the image for save dialog optional: the control to show the dialog on Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get font instance by given font family instance, size and style.
Used to support custom fonts that require explicit font family instance to be created. the font family instance font size font style font instance Resolve color value from given color name. the color name color value Get cached pen instance for the given color. the color to get pen for pen instance Get cached solid brush instance for the given color. the color to get brush for brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Convert image object returned from to . the image returned from load event converted image or null Create an object from the given stream. the stream to create image from new image instance Get font instance by given font family name, size and style. the font family name font size font style font instance Get font instance by given font family instance, size and style.
Used to support custom fonts that require explicit font family instance to be created. the font family instance font size font style font instance Get data object for the given html and plain text data.
The data object can be used for clipboard or drag-drop operation. the html data the plain text data drag-drop data object Set the given text to the clipboard the text to set Set the given html and plain text data to clipboard. the html data the plain text data Set the given image to clipboard. Create a context menu that can be used on the control new context menu Save the given image to file by showing save dialog to the client. the image to save the name of the image for save dialog the extension of the image for save dialog optional: the control to show the dialog on Adapter for platform specific brush objects - used to fill graphics (rectangles, polygons and paths).
The brush can be solid color, gradient or image. Adapter for platform specific context menu - used to create and show context menu at specific location.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. The total number of items in the context menu Add divider item to the context menu.
The divider is a non clickable place holder used to separate items. Add item to the context menu with the given text that will raise the given event when clicked. the text to set on the new context menu itemif to set the item as enabled or disabledthe event to raise when the item is clicked Remove the last item from the context menu iff it is a divider Show the context menu in the given parent control at the given location. the parent control to show inthe location to show at relative to the parent control Adapter for platform specific control object - used to handle updating the control that the html is rendered on.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. The platform adapter. Init control with platform adapter. The platform adapter. Is the left mouse button is currently in pressed state Is the right mouse button is currently in pressed state Get the current location of the mouse relative to the control Set the cursor over the control to default cursor Set the cursor over the control to hand cursor Set the cursor over the control to I beam cursor Do drag-drop copy operation for the given data object. the drag-drop data object Measure the width of string under max width restriction calculating the number of characters that can fit and the width those characters take.
 the string to measure the font to measure string with the max width to calculate fit characters the number of characters that will fit under maxWidth restriction the width that only the characters that fit into max width take Invalidates the entire surface of the control and causes the control to be redrawn. Adapter for platform specific font object - used to render text using specific font. Gets the em-size of this Font measured in the units specified by the Unit property. The line spacing, in pixels, of this font. Get the vertical offset of the font underline location from the top of the font. Get the left padding, in pixels, of the font. Adapter for platform specific font family object - define the available font families to use.
Required for custom fonts handling: fonts that are not installed on the system. Gets the name of this Font Family. Adapter for platform specific graphics rendering object - used to render graphics and text in platform specific context.
The core HTML Renderer components use this class for rendering logic, extending this class in different platform: WinForms, WPF, Metro, PDF, etc. the global adapter Te clipping bound stack as clips are pushed/poped to/from the graphics Init. Get color pen. the color to get the pen for pen instance Get solid color brush. the color to get the brush for solid color brush instance Get linear gradient color brush from to . the rectangle to get the brush for the start color of the gradient the end color of the gradient the angle to move the gradient from start color to end color in the rectangle linear gradient color brush instance Gets a Rectangle structure that bounds the clipping region of this Graphics. A rectangle structure that represents a bounding rectangle for the clipping region of this Graphics. Pop the latest clip push. Push the clipping region of this Graphics to interception of current clipping rectangle and the given rectangle. Rectangle to clip to. Push the clipping region of this Graphics to exclude the given rectangle from the current clipping rectangle. Rectangle to exclude clipping in. Set the graphics smooth mode to use anti-alias.
Use to return back the mode used. the previous smooth mode before the change Return to previous smooth mode before anti-alias was set as returned from . the previous mode to set Get TextureBrush object that uses the specified image and bounding rectangle. The Image object with which this TextureBrush object fills interiors. A Rectangle structure that represents the bounding rectangle for this TextureBrush object. The dimension by which to translate the transformation Get GraphicsPath object. graphics path instance Measure the width and height of string when drawn on device context HDC using the given font . the string to measure the font to measure string with the size of the string Measure the width of string under max width restriction calculating the number of characters that can fit and the width those characters take.
Not relevant for platforms that don't render HTML on UI element. the string to measure the font to measure string with the max width to calculate fit characters the number of characters that will fit under maxWidth restriction the width that only the characters that fit into max width take Draw the given string using the given font and foreground color at given location. the string to draw the font to use to draw the string the text color to set the location to start string draw (top-left) used to know the size of the rendered text for transparent text support is to render the string right-to-left (true - RTL, false - LTR) Draws a line connecting the two points specified by the coordinate pairs. Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the line. The x-coordinate of the first point. The y-coordinate of the first point. The x-coordinate of the second point. The y-coordinate of the second point. Draws a rectangle specified by a coordinate pair, a width, and a height. A Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the rectangle. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to draw. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to draw. The width of the rectangle to draw. The height of the rectangle to draw. Fills the interior of a rectangle specified by a pair of coordinates, a width, and a height. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to fill. The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the rectangle to fill. Width of the rectangle to fill. Height of the rectangle to fill. Draws the specified portion of the specified at the specified location and with the specified size. Image to draw. Rectangle structure that specifies the location and size of the drawn image. The image is scaled to fit the rectangle. Rectangle structure that specifies the portion of the object to draw. Draws the specified Image at the specified location and with the specified size. Image to draw. Rectangle structure that specifies the location and size of the drawn image. Draws a GraphicsPath. Pen that determines the color, width, and style of the path. GraphicsPath to draw. Fills the interior of a GraphicsPath. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. GraphicsPath that represents the path to fill. Fills the interior of a polygon defined by an array of points specified by Point structures. Brush that determines the characteristics of the fill. Array of Point structures that represent the vertices of the polygon to fill. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Adapter for platform specific graphics path object - used to render (draw/fill) path shape. Start path at the given point. Add stright line to the given point from te last point. Add circular arc of the given size to the given point from the last point. Release path resources. The 4 corners that are handled in arc rendering. Adapter for platform specific image object - used to render images. Get the width, in pixels, of the image. Get the height, in pixels, of the image. Adapter for platform specific pen objects - used to draw graphics (lines, rectangles and paths) Gets or sets the width of this Pen, in units of the Graphics object used for drawing. Gets or sets the style used for dashed lines drawn with this Pen. Holds parsed stylesheet css blocks arranged by media and classes.
 To learn more about CSS blocks visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#block used to return empty array dictionary of media type to dictionary of css class name to the cssBlocks collection with all the data. Init. Parse the given stylesheet to object.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. Platform adapter the stylesheet source to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the parsed css data dictionary of media type to dictionary of css class name to the cssBlocks collection with all the data Check if there are css blocks for the given class selector. the class selector to check for css blocks by optional: the css media type (default - all) true - has css blocks for the class, false - otherwise Get collection of css blocks for the requested class selector.
the can be: class name, html element name, html element and class name (elm.class), hash tag with element id (#id).
returned all the blocks that word on the requested class selector, it can contain simple selector or hierarchy selector. the class selector to get css blocks by optional: the css media type (default - all) collection of css blocks, empty collection if no blocks exists (never null) Add the given css block to the css data, merging to existing block if required. If there is no css blocks for the same class it will be added to data collection.
If there is already css blocks for the same class it will check for each existing block if the hierarchical selectors match (or not exists). if do the two css blocks will be merged into one where the new block properties overwrite existing if needed. if the new block doesn't mach any existing it will be added either to the beginning of the list if it has no hierarchical selectors or at the end.
Css block without hierarchical selectors must be added to the beginning of the list so more specific block can overwrite it when the style is applied. the media type to add the CSS to the css block to add Combine this CSS data blocks with CSS blocks for each media.
Merge blocks if exists in both. the CSS data to combine with Create deep copy of the css data with cloned css blocks. cloned object CSS Specification's Default Style Sheet for HTML 4 http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/sample.html Border types Represents a CSS Box of text or replaced elements. The Box can contains other boxes, that's the way that the CSS Tree is composed. To know more about boxes visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/box.html the parent css box of this css box in the hierarchy the root container for the hierarchy the html tag that is associated with this css box, null if anonymous box the inner text of the box Do not use or alter this flag Flag that indicates that CssTable algorithm already made fixes on it. handler for loading background image Init. optional: the parent of this css box in html optional: the html tag associated with this css box Gets the HtmlContainer of the Box. WARNING: May be null. Gets or sets the parent box of this box Gets the children boxes of this box Is the box is of "br" element. is the box "Display" is "Inline", is this is an inline box and not block. is the box "Display" is "Block", is this is an block box and not inline. Is the css box clickable (by default only "a" element is clickable) Get the href link of the box (by default get "href" attribute) Gets the containing block-box of this box. (The nearest parent box with display=block) Gets the HTMLTag that hosts this box Gets if this box represents an image Tells if the box is empty or contains just blank spaces Gets or sets the inner text of the box Gets the line-boxes of this box (if block box) Gets the linebox(es) that contains words of this box (if inline) Gets the rectangles where this box should be painted Gets the BoxWords of text in the box Gets the first word of the box Gets or sets the first linebox where content of this box appear Gets or sets the last linebox where content of this box appear Create new css box for the given parent with the given html tag.
 the html tag to define the box the box to add the new box to it as child the new box Create new css box for the given parent with the given optional html tag and insert it either at the end or before the given optional box.
If no html tag is given the box will be anonymous.
If no before box is given the new box will be added at the end of parent boxes collection.
If before box doesn't exists in parent box exception is thrown.
 To learn more about anonymous inline boxes visit: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html#anonymous the box to add the new box to it as child optional: the html tag to define the box optional: to insert as specific location in parent box the new box Create new css block box. the new block box Create new css block box for the given parent with the given optional html tag and insert it either at the end or before the given optional box.
If no html tag is given the box will be anonymous.
If no before box is given the new box will be added at the end of parent boxes collection.
If before box doesn't exists in parent box exception is thrown.
 To learn more about anonymous block boxes visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html#anonymous-block-level the box to add the new block box to it as child optional: the html tag to define the box optional: to insert as specific location in parent box the new block box Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions. Device context to use Paints the fragment Device context to use Prints the fragment Device context to use Set this box in Move all child boxes from to this box. the box to move all its child boxes from Splits the text into words and saves the result Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions.
 Device context to use Assigns words its width and height Get the parent of this css properties instance. Gets the index of the box to be used on a (ordered) list Creates the Searches for the first word occurrence inside the box, on the specified linebox Gets the specified Attribute, returns string.Empty if no attribute specified Attribute to retrieve Attribute value or string.Empty if no attribute specified Gets the value of the specified attribute of the source HTML tag. Attribute to retrieve Value to return if attribute is not specified Attribute value or defaultValue if no attribute specified Gets the minimum width that the box can be.
The box can be as thin as the longest word plus padding.
The check is deep thru box tree.
 the min width of the box Gets the longest word (in width) inside the box, deeply. Get the total margin value (left and right) from the given box to the given end box.
 the box to start calculation from. the total margin Gets the maximum bottom of the boxes inside the startBox Get the and width of the box content.
 The minimum width the content must be so it won't overflow (largest word + padding). The total width the content can take without line wrapping (with padding). Get the and of the box words content and .
 the box to calculate for the width that allows for each word to fit (width of the longest word) the max width a single line of words can take without wrapping the total amount of padding the content has Gets if this box has only inline siblings (including itself) Gets the rectangles where inline box will be drawn. See Remarks for more info. Rectangles where content should be placed Inline boxes can be split across different LineBoxes, that's why this method Delivers a rectangle for each LineBox related to this box, if inline. Inherits inheritable values from parent. Gets the result of collapsing the vertical margins of the two boxes the previous box under the same parent Resulting top margin Calculate the actual right of the box by the actual right of the child boxes if this box actual right is not set. the calculated actual right value Gets the result of collapsing the vertical margins of the two boxes Resulting bottom margin Deeply offsets the top of the box and its contents Paints the fragment the device to draw to Prints the fragment the device to draw to Paints the background of the box the device to draw into the bounding rectangle to draw in is it the first rectangle of the element is it the last rectangle of the element Paint all the words in the box. the device to draw into the current scroll offset to offset the words Paints the text decoration (underline/strike-through/over-line) the device to draw into Offsets the rectangle of the specified linebox by the specified gap, and goes deep for rectangles of children in that linebox. Resets the array On image load process complete with image request refresh for it to be painted. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call Get brush for the text depending if there is selected text color set. Get brush for selection background depending if it has external and if alpha is required for images. used for images so they will have alpha effect ToString override. CSS box for iframe element.
If the iframe is of embedded YouTube or Vimeo video it will show image with play. the image word of this image box is the iframe is of embeded video the title of the video the url of the video thumbnail image link to the video on the site handler used for image loading by source is image load is finished, used to know if no image is found Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Is the css box clickable ("a" element is clickable) Get the href link of the box (by default get "href" attribute) is the iframe is of embeded video Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Load YouTube video data (title, image, link) by calling YouTube API. Parse YouTube API response to get video data (title, image, link). Load Vimeo video data (title, image, link) by calling Vimeo API. Parse Vimeo API response to get video data (title, image, link). Handle error occurred during video data load to handle if the video was not found. the exception that occurred during data load web request the name of the video source (YouTube/Vimeo/Etc.) Create image handler for downloading video image if found and release the WebClient instance used for API call. Paints the fragment the device to draw to Draw video image over the iframe if found. Draw video title on top of the iframe if found. Draw play over the iframe if we found link url. Assigns words its width and height the device to use Set error image border on the image box. On image load process is complete with image or without update the image box. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call CSS box for hr element. Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively.
Performs layout of the DOM structure creating lines by set bounds restrictions. Device context to use Paints the fragment the device to draw to CSS box for image element. the image word of this image box handler used for image loading by source is image load is finished, used to know if no image is found Init. the parent box of this box the html tag data of this box Get the image of this image box. Paints the fragment the device to draw to Assigns words its width and height the device to use Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Set error image border on the image box. On image load process is complete with image or without update the image box. the image loaded or null if failed the source rectangle to draw in the image (empty - draw everything) is the callback was called async to load image call Base class for css box to handle the css properties.
Has field and property for every css property that can be set, the properties add additional parsing like setting the correct border depending what border value was set (single, two , all four).
Has additional fields to control the location and size of the box and 'actual' css values for some properties that require additional calculations and parsing.
 Gets or sets the location of the box Gets or sets the size of the box the width of whitespace between words Gets or sets the location of the box Gets or sets the size of the box Gets the bounds of the box Gets the width available on the box, counting padding and margin. Gets the right of the box. When setting, it will affect only the width of the box. Gets or sets the bottom of the box. (When setting, alters only the Size.Height of the box) Gets the left of the client rectangle (Where content starts rendering) Gets the top of the client rectangle (Where content starts rendering) Gets the right of the client rectangle Gets the bottom of the client rectangle Gets the client rectangle Gets the actual height Gets the actual height Gets the actual top's padding Gets the actual padding on the left Gets the actual Padding of the bottom Gets the actual padding on the right Gets the actual top's Margin The margin top value if was effected by margin collapse. Gets the actual Margin on the left Gets the actual Margin of the bottom Gets the actual Margin on the right Gets the actual top border width Gets the actual Left border width Gets the actual Bottom border width Gets the actual Right border width Gets the actual top border Color Gets the actual Left border Color Gets the actual Bottom border Color Gets the actual Right border Color Gets the actual length of the north west corner Gets the actual length of the north east corner Gets the actual length of the south east corner Gets the actual length of the south west corner Gets a value indicating if at least one of the corners of the box is rounded Gets the actual width of whitespace between words. Gets the actual color for the text. Gets the actual background color of the box Gets the second color that creates a gradient for the background Gets the actual angle specified for the background gradient Gets the actual font of the parent Gets the font that should be actually used to paint the text of the box Gets the line height Gets the text indentation (on first line only) Gets the actual horizontal border spacing for tables Gets the actual vertical border spacing for tables Get the parent of this css properties instance. Gets the height of the font in the specified units Ensures that the specified length is converted to pixels if necessary Set the style/width/color for all 4 borders on the box.
if null is given for a value it will not be set. optional: the style to set optional: the width to set optional: the color to set Measures the width of whitespace between words (set ). Inherits inheritable values from specified box. Set to true to inherit all CSS properties instead of only the ineritables Box to inherit the properties Helps on CSS Layout. Measure image box size by the width\height set on the box and the actual rendered image size.
If no image exists for the box error icon will be set. the image word to measure Creates line boxes for the specified blockbox Applies special vertical alignment for table-cells Recursively flows the content of the box using the inline model Device Info Blockbox that contains the text flow Current box to flow its content Maximum reached right Space to use between rows of text x starting coordinate for when breaking lines of text Current linebox being used Current x coordinate that will be the left of the next word Current y coordinate that will be the top of the next word Maximum right reached so far Maximum bottom reached so far Adjust the position of absolute elements by letf and top margins. Recursively creates the rectangles of the blockBox, by bubbling from deep to outside of the boxes in the rectangle structure Applies vertical and horizontal alignment to words in lineboxes Applies right to left direction to words Applies RTL direction to all the words on the line. the line to apply RTL to Applies RTL direction to specific box words on the line. Applies vertical alignment to the linebox Applies centered alignment to the text on the linebox Applies centered alignment to the text on the linebox Applies right alignment to the text on the linebox Simplest alignment, just arrange words. Layout engine for tables executing the complex layout of tables with rows/columns/headers/etc. the main box of the table collection of all rows boxes collection of all columns boxes Init. Get the table cells spacing for all the cells in the table.
Used to calculate the spacing the table has in addition to regular padding and borders. the table box to calculate the spacing for the calculated spacing Analyzes the Table and assigns values to this CssTable object. To be called from the constructor Get the table boxes into the proper fields. Insert EmptyBoxes for vertical cell spanning. Determine Row and Column Count, and ColumnWidths While table width is larger than it should, and width is reductable.
If table max width is limited by we need to lower the columns width even if it will result in clipping
 Check for minimum sizes (increment widths if necessary) Layout the cells by the calculated table layout Gets the spanned width of a cell (With of all columns it spans minus one). Gets the cell column index checking its position and other cells colspans Gets the cells width, taking colspan and being in the specified column Gets the colspan of the specified box Gets the rowspan of the specified box Recursively measures words inside the box the box to measure Device to use Tells if the columns widths can be reduced, by checking the minimum widths of all cells Tells if the specified column can be reduced, by checking its minimum width Gets the available width for the whole table. It also sets the value of WidthSpecified The table's width can be larger than the result of this method, because of the minimum size that individual boxes. Gets the available width for the whole table. It also sets the value of WidthSpecified The table's width can be larger than the result of this method, because of the minimum size that individual boxes. Calculate the min and max width for each column of the table by the content in all rows.
the min width possible without clipping content
the max width the cell content can take without wrapping
 if to measure only columns that have no calculated width return the min width for each column - the min width possible without clipping content return the max width for each column - the max width the cell content can take without wrapping Gets the width available for cells It takes away the cell-spacing from Gets the current sum of column widths Gets the span attribute of the tag of the specified box Gets the minimum width of each column Gets the actual horizontal spacing of the table Gets the actual horizontal spacing of the table Gets the actual vertical spacing of the table Represents and gets info about a CSS Length http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#length-units Creates a new CssLength from a length specified on a CSS style sheet or fragment Length as specified in the Style Sheet or style fragment Gets the number in the length Gets if the length has some parsing error Gets if the length represents a precentage (not actually a length) Gets if the length is specified in relative units Gets the unit of the length Gets the length as specified in the string If length is in Ems, returns its value in points Em size factor to multiply Points size of this em If length has an error or isn't in ems If length is in Ems, returns its value in pixels Pixel size factor to multiply Pixels size of this em If length has an error or isn't in ems Returns the length formatted ready for CSS interpreting. Represents a line of text. To learn more about line-boxes see CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/visuren.html Creates a new LineBox Gets a list of boxes related with the linebox. To know the words of the box inside this linebox, use the method. Gets the words inside the linebox Gets the owner box Gets a List of rectangles that are to be painted on this linebox Get the height of this box line (the max height of all the words) Get the bottom of this box line (the max bottom of all the words) Lets the linebox add the word an its box to their lists if necessary. Return the words of the specified box that live in this linebox Updates the specified rectangle of the specified box. Copies the rectangles to their specified box Sets the baseline of the words of the specified box to certain height Device info box to check words baseline Check if the given word is the last selected word in the line.
It can either be the last word in the line or the next word has no selection. the word to check Returns the words of the linebox Represents a word inside an inline box Because of performance, words of text are the most atomic element in the project. It should be characters, but come on, imagine the performance when drawing char by char on the device.
It may change for future versions of the library. the CSS box owner of the word Rectangle If the word is selected this points to the selection handler for more data Init. the CSS box owner of the word Gets the Box where this word belongs. Gets or sets the bounds of the rectangle Left of the rectangle Top of the rectangle Width of the rectangle Get the full width of the word including the spacing. Gets the actual width of whitespace between words. Height of the rectangle Gets or sets the right of the rectangle. When setting, it only affects the Width of the rectangle. Gets or sets the bottom of the rectangle. When setting, it only affects the Height of the rectangle. If the word is selected this points to the selection handler for more data was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Gets the image this words represents (if one exists) Gets if the word represents an image. Gets a bool indicating if this word is composed only by spaces. Spaces include tabs and line breaks Gets if the word is composed by only a line break Gets the text of the word is the word is currently selected the selection start index if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end index if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection start offset if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end offset if the word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) Gets or sets an offset to be considered in measurements Represents this word for debugging purposes Represents a word inside an inline box the image object if it is image word (can be null if not loaded) the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event Creates a new BoxWord which represents an image the CSS box owner of the word Gets the image this words represents (if one exists) Gets if the word represents an image. the image rectange restriction as returned from image load event Represents this word for debugging purposes Represents a word inside an inline box The word text was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Init. the CSS box owner of the word the word chars was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace before the word chars (before trim) was there a whitespace after the word chars (before trim) Gets a bool indicating if this word is composed only by spaces. Spaces include tabs and line breaks Gets if the word is composed by only a line break Gets the text of the word Represents this word for debugging purposes Used to make space on vertical cell combination the index of the row where box starts the index of the row where box ends Gets the index of the row where box starts Gets the index of the row where box ends Represents the possible units of the CSS lengths http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#length-units CSS boxes that have ":hover" selector on them. the box that has :hover css on the :hover style block data Init. the box that has :hover css on the :hover style block data the name of the html tag if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag; collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Init. the name of the html tag if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag; collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Gets the name of this tag Gets collection of attributes and their value the html tag has Gets if the tag is single placed; in other words it doesn't have a separate closing tag;
e.g. <br> is the html tag has attributes. true - has attributes, false - otherwise Gets a boolean indicating if the attribute list has the specified attribute attribute name to check if exists true - attribute exists, false - otherwise Get attribute value for given attribute name or null if not exists. attribute name to get by optional: value to return if attribute is not specified attribute value or null if not found Represents a block of CSS property values.
Contains collection of key-value pairs that are CSS properties for specific css class.
Css class can be either custom or html tag name. To learn more about CSS blocks visit CSS spec: http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/syndata.html#block the name of the css class of the block the CSS block properties and values additional selectors to used in hierarchy (p className1 > className2) is the css block has :hover pseudo-class Creates a new block from the block's source the name of the css class of the block the CSS block properties and values optional: additional selectors to used in hierarchy optional: is the css block has :hover pseudo-class the name of the css class of the block additional selectors to used in hierarchy (p className1 > className2) Gets the CSS block properties and its values is the css block has :hover pseudo-class Merge the other block properties into this css block.
Other block properties can overwrite this block properties. the css block to merge with Create deep copy of the CssBlock. new CssBlock with same data Check if the two css blocks are the same (same class, selectors and properties). the other block to compare to true - the two blocks are the same, false - otherwise Check if the selectors of the css blocks is the same. the other block to compare to true - the selectors on blocks are the same, false - otherwise Check if the two css blocks are the same (same class, selectors and properties). the other block to compare to true - the two blocks are the same, false - otherwise Serves as a hash function for a particular type. A hash code for the current . Returns a that represents the current . Holds single class selector in css block hierarchical selection (p class1 > div.class2) the name of the css class of the block is the selector item has to be direct parent Creates a new block from the block's source the name of the css class of the block the name of the css class of the block is the selector item has to be direct parent Returns a that represents the current . Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated. styles are not generated at all style are inserted in style attribute for each html tag style section is generated in the head of the html Callback used in to allow setting image externally and async.
The callback can provide path to image file path, URL or the actual image to use.
If is given (not ) then only the specified rectangle will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) the image to use optional: limit to specific rectangle in the loaded image Invoked when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from. Can also use the asynchronous image overwrite not to block HTML rendering is applicable.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 use to cancel the image loading by html renderer, the provided image will be used. the source of the image (file path or uri) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element Callback used to allow setting image externally and async. Init. the source of the image (file path or Uri) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element Callback used to allow setting image externally and async. the source of the image (file path, URL or inline data) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element or CSS style Indicate the image load is handled asynchronously. Cancel this image loading and overwrite the image asynchronously using callback method.
 Callback to overwrite the loaded image with error image.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
 Callback to overwrite the loaded image with image to load from given URI.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) Callback to overwrite the loaded image with image to load from given URI.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
Only the specified rectangle (x,y,width,height) will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the path to the image to load (file path or URL) Callback to overwrite the loaded image with given image object.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
If imageRectangle is given (not ) then only the specified rectangle will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the image to load Callback to overwrite the loaded image with given image object.
Can be called directly from delegate handler or asynchronously after setting to True.
Only the specified rectangle (x,y,width,height) will be used from the loaded image and not all of it, also the rectangle will be used for size and not the actual image size.
 the image to load Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html. the link href that was clicked collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element use to cancel the execution of the link Init. the link href that was clicked the link href that was clicked collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element use to cancel the execution of the link Exception thrown when client code subscribed to LinkClicked event thrown exception. Initializes a new instance of the class. Initializes a new instance of the class with a specified error message. The message that describes the error. Initializes a new instance of the class with a specified error message and a reference to the inner exception that is the cause of this exception. The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception, or a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no inner exception is specified. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout).
It can happen if some async event has occurred that requires re-paint and re-layout of the html.
Example: async download of image is complete. is re-layout is required for the refresh Init. is re-layout is required for the refresh is re-layout is required for the refresh Raised when an error occurred during html rendering. error type that is reported the error message the exception that occurred (can be null) Init. the type of error to report the error message optional: the exception that occurred error type that is reported the error message the exception that occurred (can be null) Enum of possible error types that can be reported. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. the location to scroll to Init. the location to scroll to the x location to scroll to the x location to scroll to Invoked when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 the source of the stylesheet as found in the HTML (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element provide the new source (file path or URL) to load stylesheet from provide the stylesheet to load provide the stylesheet data to load Init. the source of the image (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the image element the source of the stylesheet as found in the HTML (file path or URL) collection of all the attributes that are defined on the link element provide the new source (file path or URL) to load stylesheet from provide the stylesheet to load provide the stylesheet data to load Holds data on link element in HTML.
Used to expose data outside of HTML Renderer internal structure. the id of the link element if present the href data of the link the rectangle of element as calculated by html layout Init. the id of the link element if present the href data of the link the rectangle of element as calculated by html layout Is the link is directed to another element in the html Return the id of the element this anchor link is referencing. Contains all the paint code to paint different background images. Draw the background image of the given box in the given rectangle.
Handle background-repeat and background-position values. the device to draw into the box to draw its background image the handler that loads image to draw the rectangle to draw image in Get top-left location to start drawing the image at depending on background-position value. the background-position value the rectangle to position image in the size of the image the top-left location Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the X axis.
Adjust location to left if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or right). Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the Y axis.
Adjust location to top if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or bottom). Draw the background image at the required location repeating it over the X and Y axis.
Adjust location to left-top if starting location doesn't include all the range (adjusted to center or bottom/right). Contains all the complex paint code to paint different style borders. used for all border paint to use the same points and not create new array each time. Draws all the border of the box with respect to style, width, etc. the device to draw into the box to draw borders for the bounding rectangle to draw in is it the first rectangle of the element is it the last rectangle of the element Draw simple border. Desired border the device to draw to Box which the border corresponds the brush to use the bounding rectangle to draw in Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Draw specific border (top/bottom/left/right) with the box data (style/width/rounded).
 desired border to draw the box to draw its borders, contain the borders data the device to draw into the rectangle the border is enclosing Specifies if the border is for a starting line (no bevel on left) Specifies if the border is for an ending line (no bevel on right) Set rectangle for inset/outset border as it need diagonal connection to other borders. Desired border Box which the border corresponds the rectangle the border is enclosing Specifies if the border is for a starting line (no bevel on left) Specifies if the border is for an ending line (no bevel on right) Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Makes a border path for rounded borders.
To support rounded dotted/dashed borders we need to use arc in the border path.
Return null if the border is not rounded.
 the device to draw into Desired border Box which the border corresponds the rectangle the border is enclosing Beveled border path, null if there is no rounded corners Get pen to be used for border draw respecting its style. Get the border color for the given box border. Get the border width for the given box border. Get the border style for the given box border. Makes the specified color darker for inset/outset borders. Handle context menu. select all text copy selected text copy the link source open link (as left mouse click) copy the source of the image copy image to clipboard save image to disk open video in browser copy video url to browser the selection handler linked to the context menu handler the html container the handler is on the last context menu shown the control that the context menu was shown on the css rectangle that context menu shown on the css link box that context menu shown on Init context menu items strings. Init. the selection handler linked to the context menu handler the html container the handler is on Show context menu clicked on given rectangle. the parent control to show the context menu on the rectangle that was clicked to show context menu the link that was clicked to show context menu on Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Dispose of the last used context menu. Handle link click. Copy the href of a link to clipboard. Open save as dialog to save the image Copy the image source to clipboard. Copy image object to clipboard. Copy selected text. Select all text. Utilities for fonts and fonts families handling. Allow to map not installed fonts to different collection of all installed and added font families to check if font exists cache of all the font used not to create same font again and again Init. Check if the given font family exists by name the font to check true - font exists by given family name, false - otherwise Adds a font family to be used. The font family to add. Adds a font mapping from to iff the is not found.
When the font is used in rendered html and is not found in existing fonts (installed or added) it will be replaced by .
 the font family to replace the font family to replace with Get cached font instance for the given font properties.
Improve performance not to create same font multiple times. cached font instance Get cached font if it exists in cache or null if it is not. create font (try using existing font family to support custom fonts) Handler for all loading image logic.

Loading by .
Loading by file path.
Loading by URI.

 Supports sync and async image loading. If the image object is created by the handler on calling dispose of the handler the image will be released, this makes release of unused images faster as they can be large.
Disposing image load handler will also cancel download of image from the web. the container of the html to handle load image for callback raised when image load process is complete with image or without the web client used to download image from URL (to cancel on dispose) Must be open as long as the image is in use the image instance of the loaded image the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event to know if image load event callback was sync or async raised flag to indicate if to release the image object on box dispose (only if image was loaded by the box) is the handler has been disposed Init. the container of the html to handle load image for callback raised when image load process is complete with image or without the image instance of the loaded image the image rectangle restriction as returned from image load event Set image of this image box by analyzing the src attribute.
Load the image from inline base64 encoded string.
Or from calling property/method on the bridge object that returns image or URL to image.
Or from file path
Or from URI. File path and URI image loading is executed async and after finishing calling on the main thread and not thread-pool. the source of the image to load the collection of attributes on the element to use in event the image object (null if failed) Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Set the image using callback from load image event, use the given data. the path to the image to load (file path or uri) the image to load optional: limit to specific rectangle of the image and not all of it Load the image from inline base64 encoded string data. the source that has the base64 encoded image Extract image object from inline base64 encoded data in the src of the html img element. the source that has the base64 encoded image image from base64 data string or null if failed Load image from path of image file or URL. the file path or uri to load image from Load the image file on thread-pool thread and calling after. the file path to get the image from Load the image file on thread-pool thread and calling after.
Calling on the main thread and not thread-pool. the file path to get the image from Load image from the given URI by downloading it.
Create local file name in temp folder from the URI, if the file already exists use it as it has already been downloaded. If not download the file using . Download the requested file in the URI to the given file path.
Use async sockets API to download from web, . Download the requested file in the URI to the given file path.
Use async sockets API to download from web, . key value pair of URL and file info to download the file to On download image complete to local file use to load the image file.
If the download canceled do nothing, if failed report error. On download image complete to local file use to load the image file.
If the download canceled do nothing, if failed report error. Flag image load complete and request refresh for re-layout and invalidate. Release the image and client objects. Handler for text selection in the html. the root of the handled html tree handler for showing context menu on right click the mouse location when selection started used to ignore small selections the starting word of html selection
where the user started the selection, if the selection is backwards then it will be the last selected word. the ending word of html selection
where the user ended the selection, if the selection is backwards then it will be the first selected word. the selection start index if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end index if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection start offset if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) the selection end offset if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected) is the selection goes backward in the html, the starting word comes after the ending word in DFS traversing.
 used to ignore mouse up after selection current selection process is after double click (full word selection) used to know if selection is in the control or started outside so it needs to be ignored used to handle drag and drop is the cursor on the control has been changed by the selection handler used to know if double click selection is requested used to know if drag and drop was already started not to execute the same operation over Init. the root of the handled html tree Select all the words in the html. the control hosting the html to invalidate Select the word at the given location if found. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location to select word at Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse on the html Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate is the left mouse button has been released is the mouse up should be ignored Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse on the html On mouse leave change the cursor back to default. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Copy the currently selected html segment to clipboard.
Copy rich html text and plain text. Get the currently selected text segment in the html.
 Copy the currently selected html segment with style.
 The selection start index if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection start index for data value or -1 if not applicable The selection end index if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection end index for The selection start offset if the first selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection start offset for The selection end offset if the last selected word is partially selected (-1 if not selected or fully selected)
if the given word is not starting or ending selection word -1 is returned as full word selection is in place. Handles backward selecting by returning the selection end data instead of start. the word to return the selection end offset for Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Handle html text selection by mouse move over the html with left mouse button pressed.
Calculate the words in the selected range and set their selected property. the control hosting the html to invalidate the mouse location true - partial word selection allowed, false - only full words selection Clear the current selection. Clear the selection from all the words in the css box recursively. the css box to selectionStart clear at Start drag and drop operation on the currently selected html segment. the control to start the drag and drop on Select all the words that are under DOM hierarchy.
 the box to start select all at Check if the current selection is non empty, has some selection data. true - partial word selection allowed, false - only full words selection true - is non empty selection, false - empty selection Select all the words that are between word and word in the DOM hierarchy.
 the root of the DOM sub-tree the selection is in selection start word limit selection end word limit Select all the words that are between word and word in the DOM hierarchy. the current traversal node selection start word limit selection end word limit used to know the traversal is currently in selected range Calculate the character index and offset by characters for the given word and given offset.
. used to create graphics to measure string the word to calculate its index and offset the location to calculate for to set the starting or ending char and offset data Calculate the character index and offset by characters for the given word and given offset.
If the location is below the word line then set the selection to the end.
If the location is to the right of the word then set the selection to the end.
If the offset is to the left of the word set the selection to the beginning.
Otherwise calculate the width of each substring to find the char the location is on. used to create graphics to measure string the word to calculate its index and offset the location to calculate for is to include the first character in the calculation return the index of the char under the location return the offset of the char under the location Check if the selection direction is forward or backward.
Is the selection start word is before the selection end word in DFS traversal. Handler for loading a stylesheet data. Load stylesheet data from the given source.
The source can be local file or web URI.
First raise event to allow the client to overwrite the stylesheet loading.
If the stylesheet is downloaded from URI we will try to correct local URIs to absolute.
 the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the source of the element to load the stylesheet by the attributes of the link element return the stylesheet string that has been loaded (null if failed or is given) return stylesheet data object that was provided by overwrite (null if failed or is given) Load stylesheet string from given source (file path or uri). the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the file path or uri to load the stylesheet from the stylesheet string Load the stylesheet from local file by given path. the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the stylesheet file to load the loaded stylesheet string Load the stylesheet from uri by downloading the string. the container of the html to handle load stylesheet for the uri to download from the loaded stylesheet string Make relative URLs absolute in the stylesheet using the URI of the stylesheet. the stylesheet to correct the stylesheet uri to use to create absolute URLs Corrected stylesheet Low level handling of Html Renderer logic.
Allows html layout and rendering without association to actual control, those allowing to handle html rendering on any graphics object.
Using this class will require the client to handle all propagation's of mouse/keyboard events, layout/paint calls, scrolling offset, location/size/rectangle handling and UI refresh requests.
 MaxSize and ActualSize:
The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrap-able line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width/height separately).
 ScrollOffset:
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered at -100, therefore outside the client rectangle. LinkClicked event
Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link to overwrite by custom logic.
If error occurred in event handler it will propagate up the stack. StylesheetLoad event:
Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URL in 'link' element.
Allows to overwrite the loaded stylesheet by providing the stylesheet data manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: The stylesheet 'href' can be non-valid URI string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to pre-loaded stylesheet object
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 ImageLoad event:
Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path, URL or inline data in 'img' element or background-image CSS style.
Allows to overwrite the loaded image by providing the image object manually, or different source (file or URL) to load from.
Example: image 'src' can be non-valid string that is interpreted in the overwrite delegate by custom logic to resource image object
Example: image 'src' in the html is relative - the overwrite intercepts the load and provide full source URL to load the image from
Example: image download requires authentication - the overwrite intercepts the load, downloads the image to disk using custom code and provide file path to load the image from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Refresh event:
Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout).
There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. RenderError event:
Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 parser for CSS data the root css box of the parsed html list of all css boxes that have ":hover" selector on them Handler for text selection in the html. the text fore color use for selected text the back-color to use for selected text the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html Is content selection is enabled for the rendered html (default - true).
If set to 'false' the rendered html will be static only with ability to click on links. Is the build-in context menu enabled (default - true) Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders Gets or sets a value indicating if image asynchronous loading should be avoided (default - false).
 Gets or sets a value indicating if image loading only when visible should be avoided (default - false).
 the top-left most location of the rendered html the max width and height of the rendered html, effects layout, actual size cannot exceed this values.
Set zero for unlimited.
 Gets or sets the scroll offset of the document for scroll controls The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Init. parser for CSS data Raised when the user clicks on a link in the html.
Allows canceling the execution of the link. Raised when html renderer requires refresh of the control hosting (invalidation and re-layout). There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when Html Renderer request scroll to specific location.
This can occur on document anchor click. Raised when an error occurred during html rendering.
 There is no guarantee that the event will be raised on the main thread, it can be raised on thread-pool thread. Raised when a stylesheet is about to be loaded by file path or URI by link element.
This event allows to provide the stylesheet manually or provide new source (file or Uri) to load from.
If no alternative data is provided the original source will be used.
 Raised when an image is about to be loaded by file path or URI.
This event allows to provide the image manually, if not handled the image will be loaded from file or download from URI. the parsed stylesheet data used for handling the html Gets or sets a value indicating if anti-aliasing should be avoided for geometry like backgrounds and borders (default - false). Gets or sets a value indicating if image asynchronous loading should be avoided (default - false).
True - images are loaded synchronously during html parsing.
False - images are loaded asynchronously to html parsing when downloaded from URL or loaded from disk.
 Asynchronously image loading allows to unblock html rendering while image is downloaded or loaded from disk using IO ports to achieve better performance.
Asynchronously image loading should be avoided when the full html content must be available during render, like render to image. 获取或设置一个值，该值指示是否应避免仅在可见时加载图像（默认值为false）。
True-解析html后立即加载图像。
False-由于滚动位置而不可见的图像在滚动到之前不会加载。 /// 如果页面包含可见滚动区域之外的图像，特别是当图像较大时，延迟加载可以提高性能 由于所有图像加载延迟（下载并加载到内存中）
延迟加载图像可能会影响布局和实际大小，因为没有设置大小的图像在加载之前不会有实际大小 导致用户滚动期间的布局改变.
如果当前滚动位置上方没有已知大小的图像在加载时被加载，则早期图像加载也可能影响布局 将向下推html元素。 是否为渲染的html启用了内容选择（默认值为true）。
如果设置为“false”，则呈现的html将是静态的，只能单击链接。 内置上下文菜单是否启用，并将在鼠标右键单击时显示（默认值为true） The scroll offset of the html.
This will adjust the rendered html by the given offset so the content will be "scrolled".
 Element that is rendered at location (50,100) with offset of (0,200) will not be rendered as it will be at -100 therefore outside the client rectangle. The top-left most location of the rendered html.
This will offset the top-left corner of the rendered html. The max width and height of the rendered html.
The max width will effect the html layout wrapping lines, resize images and tables where possible.
The max height does NOT effect layout, but will not render outside it (clip).
can be exceed the max size by layout restrictions (unwrapable line, set image size, etc.).
Set zero for unlimited (width\height separately).
 The actual size of the rendered html (after layout) Get the currently selected text segment in the html. Copy the currently selected html segment with style. the root css box of the parsed html the text fore color use for selected text the back-color to use for selected text Init with optional document and stylesheet. the html to init with, init empty if not given optional: the stylesheet to init with, init default if not given Clear the content of the HTML container releasing any resources used to render previously existing content. Get html from the current DOM tree with style if requested. Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated (default: ) generated html Get attribute value of element at the given x,y location by given key.
If more than one element exist with the attribute at the location the inner most is returned. the location to find the attribute at the attribute key to get value by found attribute value or null if not found Get all the links in the HTML with the element rectangle and href data. collection of all the links in the HTML Get css link href at the given x,y location. the location to find the link at css link href if exists or null Get the rectangle of html element as calculated by html layout.
Element if found by id (id attribute on the html element).
Note: to get the screen rectangle you need to adjust by the hosting control.
 the id of the element to get its rectangle the rectangle of the element or null if not found Measures the bounds of box and children, recursively. Device context to draw Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Render the html using the given device. the device to use to render Handle mouse down to handle selection. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse up to handle selection and link click. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse the mouse event data Handle mouse double click to select word under the mouse. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse move to handle hover cursor and text selection. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate the location of the mouse Handle mouse leave to handle hover cursor. the control hosting the html to set cursor and invalidate Handle key down event for selection and copy. the control hosting the html to invalidate the pressed key Raise the stylesheet load event with the given event args. the event args Raise the image load event with the given event args. the event args Request invalidation and re-layout of the control hosting the renderer. is re-layout is required for the refresh Report error in html render process. the type of error to report the error message optional: the exception that occured Handle link clicked going over event and using if not canceled. the control hosting the html to invalidate the location of the mouse the link that was clicked Add css box that has ":hover" selector to be handled on mouse hover. the box that has the hover selector the css block with the css data with the selector Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. 2 Adjust the offset of the given location by the current scroll offset. the location to adjust the adjusted location Check if the mouse is currently on the html container.
Relevant if the html container is not filled in the hosted control (location is not zero and the size is not the full size of the control). Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. General utilities. Measure the size of the html by performing layout under the given restrictions. the graphics to use the html to calculate the layout for the minimal size of the rendered html (zero - not limit the width/height) the maximum size of the rendered html, if not zero and html cannot be layout within the limit it will be clipped (zero - not limit the width/height) return: the size of the html to be rendered within the min/max limits Perform the layout of the html container by given size restrictions returning the final size.
The layout can be effected by the HTML content in the if or is set to true.
Handle minimum and maximum size restrictions.
Handle auto size and auto size for height only. if is true is ignored.
 the graphics used for layout the html container to layout the current size the min size restriction - can be empty for no restriction the max size restriction - can be empty for no restriction if to modify the size (width and height) by html content layout if to modify the height by html content layout Parser to parse CSS stylesheet source string into CSS objects. split CSS rule Utility for value parsing. The chars to trim the css class name by Init. Parse the given stylesheet source to CSS blocks dictionary.
The CSS blocks are organized into two level buckets of media type and class name.
Root media type are found under 'all' bucket.
If is true the parsed css blocks are added to the default css data (as defined by W3), merged if class name already exists. If false only the data in the given stylesheet is returned. raw css stylesheet to parse true - combine the parsed css data with default css data, false - return only the parsed css data the CSS data with parsed CSS objects (never null) Parse the given stylesheet source to CSS blocks dictionary.
The CSS blocks are organized into two level buckets of media type and class name.
Root media type are found under 'all' bucket.
The parsed css blocks are added to the given css data, merged if class name already exists. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects raw css stylesheet to parse Parse single CSS block source into CSS block instance. the name of the css class of the block the CSS block to parse the created CSS block instance Parse a complex font family css property to check if it contains multiple fonts and if the font exists.
returns the font family name to use or 'inherit' if failed. the font-family value to parse parsed font-family value Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, red, rgb(255,0,0), rgb(100%, 0, 0) color string value to parse color value Remove comments from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet to remove comments from stylesheet without comments Parse given stylesheet for CSS blocks
This blocks are added under the "all" keyword. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects the stylesheet to parse Parse given stylesheet for media CSS blocks
This blocks are added under the specific media block they are found. the CSS data to fill with parsed CSS objects the stylesheet to parse Feeds the style with a block about the specific media.
When no media is specified, "all" will be used. the CSS block to handle optional: the media (default - all) Parse single CSS block source into CSS block instance. the name of the css class of the block the CSS block to parse the created CSS block instance Parse css block selector to support hierarchical selector (p class1 > class2). the class selector to parse return the main class the css block is on returns the hierarchy of classes or null if single class selector Parse the properties of the given css block into a key-value dictionary. the raw css block to parse dictionary with parsed css block properties Add the given property to the given properties collection, if the property is complex containing multiple css properties then parse them and add the inner properties. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse length property to add only valid lengths. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse color property to add only valid color. the name of the css property to add the value of the css property to add the properties collection to add to Parse a complex font property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to the value of the property to parse parsed value Parse a complex font family css property to check if it contains multiple fonts and if the font exists.
returns the font family name to use or 'inherit' if failed. the value of the property to parse parsed font-family value Parse a complex border property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the left, top, right or bottom direction of the border to parse the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex margin property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border style property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border width property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex border color property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Parse a complex padding property value that contains multiple css properties into specific css properties. the value of the property to parse to specific values the properties collection to add the specific properties to Split multi direction value into the proper direction values (left, top, right, bottom). Split the value by the specified separator; e.g. Useful in values like 'padding:5 4 3 inherit' Value to be splitted Splitted and trimmed values Parse the given substring to extract border width substring. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse the given substring to extract border style substring.
Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse the given substring to extract border style substring.
Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 found border width value or null Parse CSS properties values like numbers, Urls, etc. Init. Check if the given substring is a valid double number. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - valid double number, false - otherwise Check if the given substring is a valid double number. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - valid int number, false - otherwise Check if the given string is a valid length value. the string value to check true - valid, false - invalid Evals a number and returns it. If number is a percentage, it will be multiplied by hundredPercent Number to be parsed Number that represents the 100% if parsed number is a percentage Parsed number. Zero if error while parsing. Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage if the length is in pixels and the length is font related it needs to use 72/96 factor the parsed length value with adjustments Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage the parsed length value with adjustments Parses a length. Lengths are followed by an unit identifier (e.g. 10px, 3.1em) Specified length Equivalent to 100 percent when length is percentage if the length is in pixels and the length is font related it needs to use 72/96 factor Allows the return double to be in points. If false, result will be pixels the parsed length value with adjustments Get the unit to use for the length, use default if no unit found in length string. Check if the given color string value is valid. color string value to parse true - valid, false - invalid Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, red, rgb(255,0,0), rgb(100%, 0, 0) color string value to parse Color value Parses a color value in CSS style; e.g. #ff0000, RED, RGB(255,0,0), RGB(100%, 0, 0) color substring value to parse substring start idx substring length return the parsed color true - valid color, false - otherwise Parses a border value in CSS style; e.g. 1px, 1, thin, thick, medium Get color by parsing given hex value color string (#A28B34). true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by parsing given RGB value color string (RGB(255,180,90)) true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by parsing given RGBA value color string (RGBA(255,180,90,180)) true - valid color, false - otherwise Get color by given name, including .NET name. true - valid color, false - otherwise Parse the given decimal number string to positive int value.
Start at given , ignore whitespaces and take as many digits as possible to parse to int. the string to parse the index to start parsing at parsed int or 0 Parse the given decimal number string to positive int value. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 int value, -1 if not valid Parse the given hex number string to positive int value. Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 int value, -1 if not valid Handle css DOM tree generation from raw html and stylesheet. Parser for CSS Init. Generate css tree by parsing the given html and applying the given css style data on it. the html to parse the html container to use for reference resolve the css data to use the root of the generated tree Read styles defined inside the dom structure in links and style elements.
If the html tag is "style" tag parse it content and add to the css data for all future tags parsing.
If the html tag is "link" that point to style data parse it content and add to the css data for all future tags parsing.
 the box to parse style data in the html container to use for reference resolve the style data to fill with found styles check if the css data has been modified by the handled html not to change the base css data Applies style to all boxes in the tree.
If the html tag has style defined for each apply that style to the css box of the tag.
If the html tag has "class" attribute and the class name has style defined apply that style on the tag css box.
If the html tag has "style" attribute parse it and apply the parsed style on the tag css box.
 the box to apply the style to the style data for the html Set the selected text style (selection text color and background color). the style data Assigns the given css classes to the given css box checking if matching.
Support multiple classes in single attribute separated by whitespace. the css box to assign css to the css data to use to get the matching css blocks Assigns the given css style blocks to the given css box checking if matching. the css box to assign css to the css data to use to get the matching css blocks the class selector to search for css blocks Check if the given css block is assignable to the given css box.
the block is assignable if it has no hierarchical selectors or if the hierarchy matches.
Special handling for ":hover" pseudo-class.
 the box to check assign to the block to check assign of true - the block is assignable to the box, false - otherwise Check if the given css block is assignable to the given css box by validating the selector.
 the box to check assign to the block to check assign of true - the block is assignable to the box, false - otherwise Assigns the given css style block properties to the given css box. the css box to assign css to the css block to assign Check if the given style is allowed to be set on the given css box.
Used to prevent invalid CssBoxes creation like table with inline display style. the css box to assign css to the style key to cehck the style value to check true - style allowed, false - not allowed Clone css data if it has not already been cloned.
Used to preserve the base css data used when changed by style inside html. Converts an HTML length into a Css length Cascades to the TD's the border spacified in the TABLE tag. Cascades to the TD's the border spacified in the TABLE tag. Execute action on all the "td" cells of the table.
Handle if there is "theader" or "tbody" exists. the table element the action to execute Go over all the text boxes (boxes that have some text that will be rendered) and remove all boxes that have only white-spaces but are not 'preformatted' so they do not effect the rendered html. the current box to correct its sub-tree Go over all image boxes and if its display style is set to block, put it inside another block but set the image to inline. the current box to correct its sub-tree Correct the DOM tree recursively by replacing "br" html boxes with anonymous blocks that respect br spec.
If the "br" tag is after inline box then the anon block will have zero height only acting as newline, but if it is after block box then it will have min-height of the font size so it will create empty line. the current box to correct its sub-tree used to know if the br is following a box so it should create an empty line or not so it only move to a new line Correct DOM tree if there is block boxes that are inside inline blocks.
Need to rearrange the tree so block box will be only the child of other block box. the current box to correct its sub-tree Rearrange the DOM of the box to have block box with boxes before the inner block box and after. the box that has the problem Split bad box that has inline and block boxes into two parts, the left - before the block box and right - after the block box. the parent box that has the problem the box to split into different boxes the left block box that is created for the split Makes block boxes be among only block boxes and all inline boxes have block parent box.
Inline boxes should live in a pool of Inline boxes only so they will define a single block.
At the end of this process a block box will have only block siblings and inline box will have only inline siblings. the current box to correct its sub-tree Check if the given box contains only inline child boxes in all subtree. the box to check true - only inline child boxes, false - otherwise Check if the given box contains inline and block child boxes. the box to check true - has variant child boxes, false - otherwise Parses the source html to css boxes tree structure. the html source to parse Add html text anon box to the current box, this box will have the rendered text
Adding box also for text that contains only whitespaces because we don't know yet if the box is preformatted. At later stage they will be removed if not relevant. the html source to parse the start of the html part the index of the next html tag the current box in html tree parsing Parse the html part, the part from prev parsing index to the beginning of the next html tag.
 the html source to parse the index of the next html tag the current box in html tree parsing the end of the parsed part, the new start index Parse raw html tag source to object.
Extract attributes found on the tag. the html source to parse the start index of the tag in the source the length of the tag from the start index in the source return the name of the html tag return the dictionary of tag attributes true - the tag is closing tag, false - otherwise Extract html tag attributes from the given sub-string. the html source to parse the start index of the tag attributes in the source the length of the tag attributes from the start index in the source return the dictionary of tag attributes Collection of regular expressions used when parsing Extracts the media types from a media at-rule; e.g. @media print, 3d, screen { Extracts defined blocks in CSS. WARNING: Blocks will include blocks inside at-rules. Extracts a number; e.g. 5, 6, 7.5, 0.9 Extracts css percentages from the string; e.g. 100% .5% 5.4% Extracts CSS lengths; e.g. 9px 3pt .89em Extracts line-height values (normal, numbers, lengths, percentages) Extracts font-family values Extracts CSS font-styles; e.g. normal italic oblique Extracts CSS font-variant values; e.g. normal, small-caps Extracts font-weight values; e.g. normal, bold, bolder... Exracts font sizes: xx-small, larger, small, 34pt, 30%, 2em Gets the font-size[/line-height]? on the font shorthand property. Check http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-shorthand the regexes cache that is used by the parser so not to create regex each time Get CSS at rule from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet data to retrieve the rule from the index to start the search for the rule, on return will be the value of the end of the found rule the found at rule or null if not exists Extracts matches from the specified source Regular expression to extract matches Source to extract matches Collection of matches Searches the specified regex on the source Searches the specified regex on the source Get regex instance for the given regex string. the regex string to use the regex instance Static class that contains argument-checking methods Validate given condition is true, otherwise throw exception. Exception type to throw. Condition to assert. Exception message in-case of assert failure. Validate given argument isn't Null. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null Validate given argument isn't . argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Validate given argument isn't Null or empty. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null or empty Validate given argument isn't Null. Type expected of arg argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null arg cast as T Validate given argument isn't Null or empty AND argument value is the path of existing file. argument to validate Name of the argument checked if is Null or empty if arg file-path not exist Utility methods for general stuff. Table to convert numbers into roman digits Check if the given char is of Asian range. the character to check true - Asian char, false - otherwise Check if the given char is a digit character (0-9) and (0-9, a-f for HEX) the character to check optional: is hex digit check true - is digit, false - not a digit Convert the given char to digit. the character to check optional: is hex digit check true - is digit, false - not a digit Get size that is max of and for width and height separately. Get Uri object for the given path if it is valid uri path. the path to get uri for uri or null if not valid Get the first value in the given dictionary. the type of dictionary key the type of dictionary value the dictionary optional: the default value to return of no elements found in dictionary first element or default value Get file info object for the given path if it is valid file path. the path to get file info for file info or null if not valid Get web client response content type. the web client to get the response content type from response content type or null Gets the representation of the online uri on the local disk. The online image uri. The path of the file on the disk. Get substring seperated by whitespace starting from the given idex. the string to get substring in the index to start substring search from return the length of the found string the index of the substring, -1 if no valid sub-string found Compare that the substring of is equal to Assume given substring is not empty and all indexes are valid!
 true - equals, false - not equals Replaces invalid filename chars to '_' The possibly-not-valid filename A valid filename. Convert number to alpha numeric system by the requested style (UpperAlpha, LowerRoman, Hebrew, etc.). the number to convert the css style to convert by converted string Convert the given integer into alphabetic numeric format (D, AU, etc.) the number to convert is to use lowercase the roman number string Convert the given integer into alphabetic numeric format (alpha, AU, etc.) the number to convert the roman number string Convert the given integer into roman numeric format (II, VI, IX, etc.) the number to convert if to use lowercase letters for roman digits the roman number string Convert the given integer into given alphabet numeric system. the number to convert the alphabet system to use the number string Convert the given integer into given alphabet numeric system. the number to convert the alphabet system to use the number string String constants to avoid typing errors. Centimeters Millimeters Pixels Inches Em - The font size of the relevant font The 'x-height' of the relevan font Points Picas Default font size in points. Change this value to modify the default font size. Default font used for the generic 'serif' family Utility method for handling CSS stuff. Brush for selection background Brush for selection background Gets the white space width of the specified box Get CSS box property value by the CSS name.
Used as a mapping between CSS property and the class property. the CSS box to get it's property value the name of the CSS property the value of the property, null if no such property exists Set CSS box property value by the CSS name.
Used as a mapping between CSS property and the class property. the CSS box to set it's property value the name of the CSS property the value to set Utility class for traversing DOM structure and execution stuff on it. Check if the given location is inside the given box deep.
Check inner boxes and all lines that the given box spans to. the box to check the location to check true - location inside the box, false - otherwise Check if the given box contains only inline child boxes. the box to check true - only inline child boxes, false - otherwise Recursively searches for the parent with the specified HTML Tag name Gets the previous sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first Gets the previous sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first fix word space for first word in inline tag. the box to check Gets the next sibling of this box. Box before this one on the tree. Null if its the first Get attribute value by given key starting search from given box, search up the tree until attribute found or root. the box to start lookup at the attribute to get the value of the attribute or null if not found Get css box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location, get the inner most.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box by Optional: if to get only visible boxes (default - true) css link box if exists or null Collect all link boxes found in the HTML tree. the box to start search from collection to add all link boxes to Get css link box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box by css link box if exists or null Get css box under the given sub-tree with the given id.
 the box to start search from the id to find the box by css box if exists or null Get css line box under the given sub-tree at the given y location or the nearest line from the top.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Get css word box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the box to start search from the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Get css word box under the given sub-tree at the given x,y location.
the location must be in correct scroll offset. the line box to search in the location to find the box at css word box if exists or null Find the css line box that the given word is in. the word to search for it's line box line box that the word is in Get selected plain text of the given html sub-tree. the DOM box to get selected text from its sub-tree the selected plain text string Generate html from the given DOM tree.
Generate all the style inside the html, in header or for every tag depending on value. the box of the html generate html from Optional: controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Optional: true - generate only selected html subset, false - generate all (default - false) generated html Generate textual tree representation of the css boxes tree starting from the given root.
Used for debugging html parsing. the root to generate tree from generated tree Get selected plain text of the given html sub-tree.
Append all the selected words. the builder to append the selected text to the DOM box to get selected text from its sub-tree the index of the last word appended Collect the boxes that have at least one word down the hierarchy that is selected recursively.
 the box to check its sub-tree the collection to add the selected tags to Collect the boxes that have at least one word down the hierarchy that is selected recursively.
Use to handle boxes that are between selected words but don't have selected word inside.
 the box to check its sub-tree the hash to add the selected boxes to used to handle boxes that are between selected words but don't have selected word inside is the current box is in selected sub-tree find the box the is the root of selected boxes (the first box to contain multiple selected boxes) the root of the boxes tree the selected boxes to find selection root in the box that is the root of selected boxes Check if the given box has a names child box (has html tag) recursively. the box to check true - in sub-tree there is a named box, false - otherwise Write the given html DOM sub-tree into the given string builder.
If are given write html only from those tags. used to parse CSS data the string builder to write html into the html sub-tree to write Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Control if to generate only selected boxes, if given only boxes found in hash will be generated the box the is the root of selected boxes (the first box to contain multiple selected boxes) Write the given html tag with all its attributes and styles. used to parse CSS data the string builder to write html into the css box with the html tag to write Controls the way styles are generated when html is generated Clean the given style collection by removing default styles so only custom styles remain.
Return new collection where the old remains unchanged. the box the styles apply to, used to know the default style the collection of styles to clean new cleaned styles collection 将样式表数据内联到html中。 用于编写样式表的字符串生成器 the css data to write to the head 从部分选定单词中获取选定单词。 the word to append is to get selected text or all the text in the word Generate textual tree representation of the css boxes tree starting from the given root.
Used for debugging html parsing. the box to generate for the string builder to generate to the current indent level to set indent of generated text Defines HTML strings List of html tags that don't have content the html encode\decode pairs the html decode only pairs Init. Is the given html tag is single tag or can have content. the tag to check (must be lower case) true - is single tag, false - otherwise Decode html encoded string to regular string.
Handles <, >, "&. the string to decode decoded string Encode regular string into html encoded string.
Handles <, >, "&. the string to encode encoded string Decode html special charecters encoded using char entity code (€) the string to decode decoded string Decode html special charecters encoded using char entity name the string to decode decoded string Provides some drawing functionality Check if the given color is visible if painted (has alpha and color values) the color to check true - visible, false - not visible Clip the region the graphics will draw on by the overflow style of the containing block.
Recursively travel up the tree to find containing block that has overflow style set to hidden. if not block found there will be no clipping and null will be returned. the graphics to clip the box that is rendered to get containing blocks true - was clipped, false - not clipped Draw image loading icon. the device to draw into the rectangle to draw icon in Draw image failed to load icon. the device to draw into the rectangle to draw icon in Creates a rounded rectangle using the specified corner radius
NW-----NE | | | | SW-----SE the device to draw into Rectangle to round Radius of the north east corner Radius of the north west corner Radius of the south east corner Radius of the south west corner GraphicsPath with the lines of the rounded rectangle ready to be painted Represents sub-string of a full string starting at specific location with a specific length. the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at Init sub-string that is the full string. the full string that this sub-string is part of Init. the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at is null the full string that this sub-string is part of the start index of the sub-string the length of the sub-string starting at Get string char at specific index. the idx to get the char at char at index Is the sub-string is empty string. true - empty string, false - otherwise Is the sub-string is empty string or contains only whitespaces. true - empty or whitespace string, false - otherwise Is the sub-string contains only whitespaces (at least one). true - empty or whitespace string, false - otherwise Get a string of the sub-string.
This will create a new string object! new string that is the sub-string represented by this instance Retrieves a substring from this instance. The substring starts at a specified character position and has a specified length. The zero-based starting character position of a substring in this instance. The number of characters in the substring. A String equivalent to the substring of length length that begins at startIndex in this instance, or Empty if startIndex is equal to the length of this instance and length is zero. Collection of regular expressions used when parsing Extracts CSS style comments; e.g. /* comment */ Extracts the media types from a media at-rule; e.g. @media print, 3d, screen { Extracts defined blocks in CSS. WARNING: Blocks will include blocks inside at-rules. Extracts a number; e.g. 5, 6, 7.5, 0.9 Extracts css percentages from the string; e.g. 100% .5% 5.4% Extracts CSS lengths; e.g. 9px 3pt .89em Extracts CSS colors; e.g. black white #fff #fe98cd rgb(5,5,5) rgb(45%, 0, 0) Extracts line-height values (normal, numbers, lengths, percentages) Extracts CSS border styles; e.g. solid none dotted Extracts CSS border widthe; e.g. 1px thin 3em Extracts font-family values Extracts CSS font-styles; e.g. normal italic oblique Extracts CSS font-variant values; e.g. normal, small-caps Extracts font-weight values; e.g. normal, bold, bolder... Exracts font sizes: xx-small, larger, small, 34pt, 30%, 2em Gets the font-size[/line-height]? on the font shorthand property. Check http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-shorthand Extracts HTML tags Extracts attributes from a HTML tag; e.g. att=value, att="value" the regexes cache that is used by the parser so not to create regex each time Get CSS at rule from the given stylesheet. the stylesheet data to retrieve the rule from the index to start the search for the rule, on return will be the value of the end of the found rule the found at rule or null if not exists Extracts matches from the specified source Regular expression to extract matches Source to extract matches Collection of matches Searches the specified regex on the source Searches the specified regex on the source Get regex instance for the given regex string. the regex string to use the regex instance 线条图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 画值 画布 X轴数据 走势图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 初始化参数 返回或设置X轴间隔 标题 返回图片的宽度 返回或设置图片的高度 X轴的间距 Y轴的间距 标题的颜色 标题的字体 背景颜色 X轴的颜色 Y轴的颜色 返回X轴数据的最大值(供给Painter调用) 返回图片数据 画布 作图器 释放内容资源 获取X轴中的最大值 获取所有X轴列中的最大值 初始化图片 X轴的数据 画一条走势图 画多条走势图 作图器的基础类 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 返回此作图器的相关链走势图 获取某值在Y轴上的位置 当前点的值 点坐标 画XY轴线 画布 X轴的数据 画标题 画走势线 画布 X轴数据 方块图 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 画值 画布 X轴数据 走势图的X轴数据 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 标题 值 标题的颜色 标题的字体 值的颜色 值的字体 绘制颜色 值是否可见 克隆自身 定义X轴的数据集合 作者: Kingthy 日期: 2007-09-11 MSN: Kingthy@gmail.com 转载请注明原作者,当你有更新修改时如果方便的希望能发一份给我.谢谢 添加一批数据 轴的标题 添加一批数据 轴的标题 轴的值 重置轴的值 轴的值 克隆数据 Indicates the behavior of a key when a cell "on the edge" is being edited. and the normal behavior of that key would exceed the edge. For example, for a key that normally moves one column to the left, the "edge" would be the left most column, since the normal action of the key cannot be taken (since there are no more columns to the left). 按键将被忽略 按键将导致单元格编辑环绕到相对边缘的单元格。 按键将Wrap，但该列将更改为相应的相邻列。这只对正常操作为ChangeRow的键有意义。 按键将Wrap，但该行将更改为相应的相邻行。这只对正常操作为ChangeColumn的键有意义. 该键将导致当前编辑操作结束。 Indicates the normal behaviour of a key when used during a cell edit operation. The key press will be ignored The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the next editable cell to the left. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the next editable cell to the right. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the row above. The key press will end the current edit and begin an edit operation on the row below The key press will cancel the current edit The key press will finish the current edit operation Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Custom verb that can be used for specialized actions. Instances of this class handle key presses during a cell edit operation. 设置给定键的行为 处理按键操作 True if the key was completely handled. Gets or sets the ObjectListView on which the current key is being handled. This cannot be null. Gets the row of the cell that is currently being edited Gets the index of the column of the cell that is being edited Gets or sets the map that remembers the normal behaviour of keys Gets or sets the map that remembers the desired behaviour of keys on edge cases. Setup the default key mapping Handle the end edit command Handle the cancel edit command Placeholder that subclasses can override to handle any custom verbs Handle a change row command Handle a change column command Start editing the indicated cell if that cell is not already being edited The row to edit The cell within that row to edit Gets the adjacent item to the given item in the given direction. If that item is disabled, continue in that direction until an enabled item is found. The row whose neighbour is sought The direction of the adjacentness An OLVListView adjacent to the given item, or null if there are no more enabled items in that direction. Gets the adjacent item to the given item in the given direction, wrapping if needed. The row whose neighbour is sought The direction of the adjacentness An OLVListView adjacent to the given item, or null if there are no more items in that direction. Gets a collection of columns that are editable in the order they are shown to the user These items allow combo boxes to remember a value and its description. Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 This editor shows and auto completes values from the given listview column. Create an AutoCompleteCellEditor This combo box is specialised to allow editing of an enum. This editor simply shows and edits integer values. Gets or sets the value shown by this editor This editor simply shows and edits unsigned integer values. This class can't be made public because unsigned int is not a CLS-compliant type. If you want to use, just copy the code to this class into your project and use it from there. This editor simply shows and edits boolean values. This editor simply shows and edits boolean values using a checkbox Gets or sets the value shown by this editor Gets or sets how the checkbox will be aligned This editor simply shows and edits floating point values. You can intercept the CellEditStarting event if you want to change the characteristics of the editor. For example, by increasing the number of decimal places. Gets or sets the value shown by this editor A delegate that creates an editor for the given value The model from which that value came The column for which the editor is being created A representative value of the type to be edited. This value may not be the exact value for the column/model combination. It could be simply representative of the appropriate type of value. A control which can edit the given value An editor registry gives a way to decide what cell editor should be used to edit the value of a cell. Programmers can register non-standard types and the control that should be used to edit instances of that type. All ObjectListViews share the same editor registry. Create an EditorRegistry Register that values of 'type' should be edited by instances of 'controlType'. The type of value to be edited The type of the Control that will edit values of 'type' ObjectListView.EditorRegistry.Register(typeof(Color), typeof(MySpecialColorEditor)); Register the given delegate so that it is called to create editors for values of the given type The type of value to be edited The delegate that will create a control that can edit values of 'type' ObjectListView.EditorRegistry.Register(typeof(Color), CreateColorEditor); ... public Control CreateColorEditor(Object model, OLVColumn column, Object value) { return new MySpecialColorEditor(); } Register a delegate that will be called to create an editor for values that have not been handled. The delegate that will create a editor for all other types Register a delegate that will be given a chance to create a control before any other option is considered. The delegate that will create a control Remove the registered handler for the given type Does nothing if the given type doesn't exist The type whose registration is to be removed Create and return an editor that is appropriate for the given value. Return null if no appropriate editor can be found. The model involved The column to be edited The value to be edited. This value may not be the exact value for the column/model combination. It could be simply representative of the appropriate type of value. A Control that can edit the given type of values Create and return an editor that will edit values of the given type A enum type A DataListView is a ListView that can be bound to a datasource (which would normally be a DataTable or DataView). This listview keeps itself in sync with its source datatable by listening for change events. The DataListView will automatically create columns to show all of the data source's columns/properties, if there is not already a column showing that property. This allows you to define one or two columns in the designer and then have the others generated automatically. If you don't want any column to be auto generated, set to false. These generated columns will be only the simplest view of the world, and would look more interesting with a few delegates installed. This listview will also automatically generate missing aspect getters to fetch the values from the data view. Changing data sources is possible, but error prone. Before changing data sources, the programmer is responsible for modifying/resetting the column collection to be valid for the new data source. Internally, a CurrencyManager controls keeping the data source in-sync with other users of the data source (as per normal .NET behavior). This means that the model objects in the DataListView are DataRowView objects. If you write your own AspectGetters/Setters, they will be given DataRowView objects. Make a DataListView Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. The DataSource should implement either , , or . Some common examples are the following types of objects: When binding to a list container (i.e. one that implements the interface, such as ) you must also set the property in order to identify which particular list you would like to display. You may also set the property even when DataSource refers to a list, since can also be used to navigate relations between lists. When a DataSource is set, the control will create OLVColumns to show any data source columns that are not already shown. If the DataSource is changed, you will have to remove any previously created columns, since they will be configured for the previous DataSource. . Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. Adaptors cannot be shared between controls. Each DataListView needs its own adapter. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Insert the given collection of objects before the given position Where to insert the objects The objects to be inserted This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Remove the given collection of model objects from this control. This is a no-op for data lists, since the data is controlled by the DataSource. Manipulate the data source rather than this view of the data source. Change the Unfreeze behaviour Handles parent binding context changes Unused EventArgs. A DataTreeListView is a TreeListView that calculates its hierarchy based on information in the data source. Like a , a DataTreeListView sources all its information from a combination of and . can be a DataTable, DataSet, or anything that implements . To function properly, the DataTreeListView requires: the table to have a column which holds a unique for the row. The name of this column must be set in . the table to have a column which holds id of the hierarchical parent of the row. The name of this column must be set in . a value which identifies which rows are the roots of the tree (). The hierarchy structure is determined finding all the rows where the parent key is equal to . These rows become the root objects of the hierarchy. Like a TreeListView, the hierarchy must not contain cycles. Bad things will happen if the data is cyclic. Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. The DataSource should implement either , , or . Some common examples are the following types of objects: When binding to a list container (i.e. one that implements the interface, such as ) you must also set the property in order to identify which particular list you would like to display. You may also set the property even when DataSource refers to a list, since can also be used to navigate relations between lists. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the name of the property/column that uniquely identifies each row. The value contained by this column must be unique across all rows in the data source. Odd and unpredictable things will happen if two rows have the same id. Null cannot be a valid key value. Gets or sets the name of the property/column that contains the key of the parent of a row. The test condition for deciding if one row is the parent of another is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateParentRow[this.KeyAspectName], row[this.ParentKeyAspectName]) Unlike key value, parent keys can be null but a null parent key can only be used to identify root objects. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. When the ParentKey of a row equals the RootKeyValue, that row will be treated as root of the TreeListView. The test condition for deciding a root object is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateRow[this.ParentKeyAspectName], this.RootKeyValue) The RootKeyValue can be null. Actually, it can be any value that can be compared for equality against a basic type. If this is set to the wrong value (i.e. to a value that no row has in the parent id column), the list will be empty. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. . The RootKeyValue can be of any type, but the IDE cannot sensibly represent a value of any type, so this is a typed wrapper around that property. If you want the root value to be something other than a string, you will have set it yourself. Gets or sets whether or not the key columns (id and parent id) should be shown to the user. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. An IDragSource controls how drag out from the ObjectListView will behave A drag operation is beginning. Return the data object that will be used for data transfer. Return null to prevent the drag from starting. The data object will normally include all the selected objects. The returned object is later passed to the GetAllowedEffect() and EndDrag() methods. What ObjectListView is being dragged from. Which mouse button is down? What item was directly dragged by the user? There may be more than just this item selected. The data object that will be used for data transfer. This will often be a subclass of DataObject, but does not need to be. What operations are possible for this drag? This controls the icon shown during the drag The data object returned by StartDrag() A combination of DragDropEffects flags The drag operation is complete. Do whatever is necessary to complete the action. The data object returned by StartDrag() The value returned from GetAllowedEffects() A do-nothing implementation of IDragSource that can be safely subclassed. See IDragSource documentation See IDragSource documentation See IDragSource documentation A reasonable implementation of IDragSource that provides normal drag source functionality. It creates a data object that supports inter-application dragging of text and HTML representation of the dragged rows. It can optionally force a refresh of all dragged rows when the drag is complete. Subclasses can override GetDataObject() to add new data formats to the data transfer object. Construct a SimpleDragSource Construct a SimpleDragSource that refreshes the dragged rows when the drag is complete Gets or sets whether the dragged rows should be refreshed when the drag operation is complete. Create a DataObject when the user does a left mouse drag operation. See IDragSource for further information. Which operations are allowed in the operation? By default, all operations are supported. All opertions are supported The drag operation is finished. Refreshe the dragged rows if so configured. Create a data object that will be used to as the data object for the drag operation. Subclasses can override this method add new formats to the data object. The ObjectListView that is the source of the drag A data object for the drag Objects that implement this interface can acts as the receiver for drop operation for an ObjectListView. Gets or sets the ObjectListView that is the drop sink Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. This value is returned to the originator of the drag. A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. The drag has left the bounds of this control The drag is moving over this control. This is where any drop target should be calculated. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Should the drag be allowed to continue? This is a do-nothing implementation of IDropSink that is a useful base class for more sophisticated implementations. Gets or sets the ObjectListView that is the drop sink Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. This value is returned to the originator of the drag. A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. The drag has left the bounds of this control The drag is moving over this control. This is where any drop target should be calculated. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. You only need to override this if you want non-standard cursors. The standard cursors are supplied automatically. Should the drag be allowed to continue? You only need to override this if you want the user to be able to end the drop in some non-standard way, e.g. dragging to a certain point even without releasing the mouse, or going outside the bounds of the application. This is called when the mouse leaves the drop region and after the drop has completed. The enum indicates which target has been found for a drop operation No applicable target has been found The list itself is the target of the drop An item is the target Between two items (or above the top item or below the bottom item) can be the target. This is not actually ever a target, only a value indicate that it is valid to drop between items Above an item is the target Below an item is the target A subitem is the target of the drop On the right of an item is the target (not currently used) On the left of an item is the target (not currently used) This class represents a simple implementation of a drop sink. Actually, it should be called CleverDropSink -- it's far from simple and can do quite a lot in its own right. Make a new drop sink Get or set the locations where a drop is allowed to occur (OR-ed together) Gets or sets whether this sink allows model objects to be dragged from other lists. Defaults to true. Gets or sets whether the ObjectListView should scroll when the user drags something near to the top or bottom rows. Defaults to true. AutoScroll does not scroll horizontally. Gets the billboard overlay that will be used to display feedback messages during a drag operation. Set this to null to stop the feedback. Get or set whether a drop can occur between items of the list Get or set whether a drop can occur on the listview itself Get or set whether a drop can occur on items in the list Get or set whether a drop can occur on a subitem in the list Gets or sets whether the drop sink should draw feedback onto the given list during the drag operation. Defaults to true. If this is false, you will have to give the user feedback in some other fashion, like cursor changes Get or set the index of the item that is the target of the drop Get the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the location of the target of the drop Get or set the index of the subitem that is the target of the drop Get or set the color that will be used to provide drop feedback Get whether the alt key was down during this drop event Get whether any modifier key was down during this drop event Get whether the control key was down during this drop event Get whether the left mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the right mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the right mouse button was down during this drop event Get whether the shift key was down during this drop event Get or set the state of the keys during this drop event Gets or sets whether the drop sink will automatically use cursors based on the drop effect. By default, this is true. If this is set to false, you must set the Cursor yourself. Triggered when the sink needs to know if a drop can occur. Handlers should set Effect to indicate what is possible. Handlers can change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when the drop is made. Triggered when the sink needs to know if a drop can occur AND the source is an ObjectListView Handlers should set Effect to indicate what is possible. Handlers can change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when the drop is made. AND the source is an ObjectListView Cleanup the drop sink when the mouse has left the control or the drag has finished. Draw any feedback that is appropriate to the current drop state. Any drawing is done over the top of the ListView. This operation should disturb the Graphic as little as possible. Specifically, do not erase the area into which you draw. A Graphic for drawing The contents bounds of the ListView (not including any header) The user has released the drop over this control A drag has entered this control. Implementators should set args.Effect to the appropriate DragDropEffects. Change the cursor to reflect the current drag operation. The drag is moving over this control. Trigger the Dropped events Trigger CanDrop Trigger Dropped Trigger ModelCanDrop Trigger ModelDropped Handle the timer tick event, which is sent when the listview should scroll When the mouse is at the given point, what should the target of the drop be? This method should update the DropTarget* members of the given arg block The mouse point, in client co-ordinates What sort of action is possible when the mouse is at the given point? Based solely on the state of the modifier keys, what drop operation should be used? The drop operation that matches the state of the keys Should the listview be made to scroll when the mouse is at the given point? Update the state of our sink to reflect the information that may have been written into the drop event args. Draw the feedback that shows that the background is the target Draw the feedback that shows that an item (or a subitem) is the target DropTargetItem and DropTargetSubItemIndex tells what is the target Draw the feedback that shows the drop will occur before target Draw the feedback that shows the drop will occur after target Return a GraphicPath that is round corner rectangle. Calculate the target rectangle when the given item (and possible subitem) is the target of the drop. Draw a "between items" line at the given co-ordinates This drop sink allows items within the same list to be rearranged, as well as allowing items to be dropped from other lists. This class can only be used on plain ObjectListViews and FastObjectListViews. The other flavours have no way to implement the insert operation that is required. This class does not work with grouping. This class works when the OLV is sorted, but it is up to the programmer to decide what rearranging such lists "means". Example: if the control is sorting students by academic grade, and the user drags a "Fail" grade student up amonst the "A+" students, it is the responsibility of the programmer to makes the appropriate changes to the model and redraw/rebuild the control so that the users action makes sense. Users of this class should listen for the CanDrop event to decide if models from another OLV can be moved to OLV under this sink. Create a RearrangingDropSink Create a RearrangingDropSink Trigger OnModelCanDrop Trigger OnModelDropped Do the work of processing the dropped items When a drop sink needs to know if something can be dropped, or to notify that a drop has occured, it uses an instance of this class. Create a OlvDropEventArgs Get the original drag-drop event args Get the data object that is being dragged Get the drop sink that originated this event Get or set the index of the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the location of the target of the drop Get or set the index of the subitem that is the target of the drop Get the item that is the target of the drop Get or set the drag effect that should be used for this operation Get or set if this event was handled. No further processing will be done for a handled event. Get or set the feedback message for this operation If this is not null, it will be displayed as a feedback message during the drag. Get the ObjectListView that is being dropped on Get the location of the mouse (in target ListView co-ords) Get the drop action indicated solely by the state of the modifier keys These events are triggered when the drag source is an ObjectListView. Create a ModelDropEventArgs Gets the model objects that are being dragged. Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the dragged objects. Get the model object that is being dropped upon. This is only value for TargetLocation == Item Refresh all the objects involved in the operation A data transfer object that knows how to transform a list of model objects into a text and HTML representation. Create a data object from the selected objects in the given ObjectListView The source of the data object Create a data object which operates on the given model objects in the given ObjectListView The source of the data object The model objects to be put into the data object Gets or sets whether hidden columns will also be included in the text and HTML representation. If this is false, only visible columns will be included. Gets or sets whether column headers will also be included in the text and HTML representation. Gets the ObjectListView that is being used as the source of the data Gets the model objects that are to be placed in the data object Put a text and HTML representation of our model objects into the data object. Create an exporter for the data contained in this object Make a HTML representation of our model objects Convert the fragment of HTML into the Clipboards HTML format. The HTML format is found here http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa767917.aspx The HTML to put onto the clipboard. It must be valid HTML! A string that can be put onto the clipboard and will be recognized as HTML A FastDataListView virtualizes the display of data from a DataSource. It operates on DataSets and DataTables in the same way as a DataListView, but does so much more efficiently. A FastDataListView still has to load all its data from the DataSource. If you have SQL statement that returns 1 million rows, all 1 million rows will still need to read from the database. However, once the rows are loaded, the FastDataListView will only build rows as they are displayed. 获取或设置在设置DataSource时是否自动生成列以显示列。 必须在设置DataSource之前设置此设置。之后就没有效果了。 获取或设置将在此列表视图中显示的VirtualListDataSource。 VirtualListDataSource应实现 , , 或 . 以下是一些常见的对象类型 绑定到列表容器时 (即，实现 接口, 比如 ) 您还必须实现 属性，以便标识要显示的特定列表。您也可以设置 属性， 即使当VirtualListDataSource引用列表时也是如此, 因为 还可以用于导航列表之间的关系. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets or sets the DataSourceAdaptor that does the bulk of the work needed for data binding. Create the DataSourceAdapter that this control will use. A DataSourceAdapter configured for this list Subclasses should override this to create their own specialized adapters Change the Unfreeze behaviour A FastObjectListView trades function for speed. On my mid-range laptop, this view builds a list of 10,000 objects in 0.1 seconds, as opposed to a normal ObjectListView which takes 10-15 seconds. Lists of up to 50,000 items should be able to be handled with sub-second response times even on low end machines. A FastObjectListView is implemented as a virtual list with many of the virtual modes limits (e.g. no sorting) fixed through coding. There are some functions that simply cannot be provided. Specifically, a FastObjectListView cannot: use Tile view show groups on XP Make a FastObjectListView Gets the collection of objects that survive any filtering that may be in place. Get/set the collection of objects that this list will show The contents of the control will be updated immediately after setting this property. This method preserves selection, if possible. Use SetObjects() if you do not want to preserve the selection. Preserving selection is the slowest part of this code and performance is O(n) where n is the number of selected rows. This method is not thread safe. Move the given collection of objects to the given index. This operation only makes sense on non-grouped ObjectListViews. 删除任何排序并恢复到模型对象的给定顺序 To be really honest, Unsort() doesn't work on FastObjectListViews since the original ordering of model objects is lost when Sort() is called. So this method effectively just turns off sorting. 为FastObjectListView提供数据源 This class isn't intended to be used directly, but it is left as a public class just in case someone wants to subclass it. Create a FastObjectListDataSource Get n'th object How many items are in the data source Get the index of the given model Remove the given collection of models from this source. Update/replace the nth object with the given object Apply the given filters to this data source. One or both may be null. Gets the full list of objects being used for this fast list. This list is unfiltered. Gets the list of objects from ObjectList which survive any installed filters. Rebuild the map that remembers which model object is displayed at which line Build our filtered list from our full list. Concrete implementation of the ICluster interface. Create a cluster The key for the cluster Return a string representation of this cluster Gets or sets how many items belong to this cluster Gets or sets the label that will be shown to the user to represent this cluster Gets or sets the actual data object that all members of this cluster have commonly returned. Return an indication of the ordering between this object and the given one This class provides a useful base implemention of a clustering strategy where the clusters are grouped around the value of a given column. This field is the text that will be shown to the user when a cluster key is null. It is exposed so it can be localized. This field is the text that will be shown to the user when a cluster key is empty (i.e. a string of zero length). It is exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the format that will be used by default for clusters that only contain 1 item. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster (always 1 in this case) Gets or sets the format that will be used by default for clusters that contain 0 or two or more items. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster Create a clustering strategy Gets or sets the column upon which this strategy is operating Gets or sets the format that will be used when the cluster contains only 1 item. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster (always 1 in this case) If this is not set, the value from ClusteringStrategy.DefaultDisplayLabelFormatSingular will be used Gets or sets the format that will be used when the cluster contains 0 or two or more items. The format string must accept two placeholders: - {0} is the cluster key converted to a string - {1} is the number of items in the cluster If this is not set, the value from ClusteringStrategy.DefaultDisplayLabelFormatPlural will be used Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Create a cluster to hold the given cluster key Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. Create a label that combines the string representation of the cluster key with a format string that holds an "X [N items in cluster]" type layout. This class calculates clusters from the groups that the column uses. This is the default strategy for all non-date, filterable columns. This class does not strictly mimic the groups created by the given column. In particular, if the programmer changes the default grouping technique by listening for grouping events, this class will not mimic that behaviour. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use This enum is used to indicate various portions of a datetime Year Month Day of the month Hour Minute Second This class implements a strategy where the model objects are clustered according to some portion of the datetime value in the configured column. To create a strategy that grouped people who were born in the same month, you would create a strategy that extracted just the month, and formatted it to show just the month's name. Like this: someColumn.ClusteringStrategy = new DateTimeClusteringStrategy(DateTimePortion.Month, "MMMM"); Create a strategy that clusters by month/year Create a strategy that clusters around the given parts Gets or sets the format string will will be used to create a user-presentable version of the cluster key. The format should use the date/time format strings, as documented in the Windows SDK. Both standard formats and custom format will work. "D" - long date pattern "MMMM, yyyy" - "January, 1999" Gets or sets the parts of the DateTime that will be extracted when determining the clustering key for an object. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Convert the given date into a user presentable string Instances of this class know how to build a Filter menu. It is responsible for clustering the values in the target column, build a menu that shows those clusters, and then constructing a filter that will enact the users choices. Almost all of the methods in this class are declared as "virtual protected" so that subclasses can provide alternative behaviours. Gets or sets the string that labels the Apply button. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that labels the Clear All menu item. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that labels the Filtering menu as a whole.. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the string that represents Select All values. If this is set to null or empty, no Select All option will be included. Exposed so it can be localized. Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to the Clear Filtering menu item Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to all "Apply" menu items on the filtering menu Gets or sets whether null should be considered as a valid data value. If this is true (the default), then a cluster will null as a key will be allow. If this is false, object that return a cluster key of null will ignored. Gets or sets the maximum number of objects that the clustering strategy will consider. This should be large enough to collect all unique clusters, but small enough to finish in a reasonable time. The default value is 10,000. This should be perfectly acceptable for almost all lists. Create a Filter menu on the given tool tip for the given column in the given ObjectListView. This is the main entry point into this class. The strip that should be shown to the user Create a collection of clusters that should be presented to the user Order the given list of clusters in the manner in which they should be presented to the user. Do the work of making a menu that shows the clusters to the users Wrap a protected section around the real HandleItemChecked method, so that if that method tries to change a "checkedness" of an item, we don't get a recursive stack error. Effectively, this ensure that HandleItemChecked is only called in response to a user action. Handle a user-generated ItemCheck event Handle any checking/unchecking of the Select All option, and keep its checkedness in sync with everything else that is checked. Clear all the filters that are applied to the given column The column from which filters are to be removed Apply the selected values from the given list as a filter on the given column A list in which the checked items should be used as filters The column for which a filter should be generated Interface for model-by-model filtering Should the given model be included when this filter is installed The model object to consider Returns true if the model will be included by the filter Interface for whole list filtering Return a subset of the given list of model objects as the new contents of the ObjectListView The collection of model objects that the list will possibly display The filtered collection that holds the model objects that will be displayed. Base class for model-by-model filters Should the given model be included when this filter is installed The model object to consider Returns true if the model will be included by the filter This filter calls a given Predicate to decide if a model object should be included Create a filter based on the given predicate The function that will filter objects Gets or sets the predicate used to filter model objects Should the given model object be included? A CompositeFilter joins several other filters together. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create an empty filter Create a composite filter from the given list of filters A list of filters Gets or sets the filters used by this composite Get the sub filters that are text match filters Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter True if the object is included by the filter Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter A CompositeAllFilter joins several other filters together. A model object must satisfy all filters to be included. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create a filter Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter A CompositeAllFilter joins several other filters together. A model object must only satisfy one of the filters to be included. If there are no filters, all model objects are included Create a filter from the given filters Decide whether or not the given model should be included by the filter Filters is guaranteed to be non-empty when this method is called The model object under consideration True if the object is included by the filter Instances of this class extract a value from the model object and compare that value to a list of fixed values. The model object is included if the extracted value is in the list If there is no delegate installed or there are no values to match, no model objects will be matched Create a filter that will use the given delegate to extract values Create a filter that will extract values using the given delegate and compare them to the values in the given list. Gets or sets the delegate that will be used to extract values from model objects Gets or sets the list of values that the value extracted from the model object must match in order to be included. Should the given model object be included? Decides if the given property is a match for the values in the PossibleValues collection Instances of this class match a property of a model objects against a list of bit flags. The property should be an xor-ed collection of bits flags. Both the property compared and the list of possible values must be convertible to ulongs. Create an instance Gets or sets the collection of values that will be matched. These must be ulongs (or convertible to ulongs). Decides if the given property is a match for the values in the PossibleValues collection Base class for whole list filters Return a subset of the given list of model objects as the new contents of the ObjectListView The collection of model objects that the list will possibly display The filtered collection that holds the model objects that will be displayed. Instance of this class implement delegate based whole list filtering A delegate that filters on a whole list Create a ListFilter Gets or sets the delegate that will filter the list Do the actual work of filtering Filter the list so only the last N entries are displayed Create a no-op tail filter Create a filter that includes on the last N model objects Gets or sets the number of model objects that will be returned from the tail of the list Return the last N subset of the model objects Instances of this class cluster model objects on the basis of a property that holds an xor-ed collection of bit flags. Create a clustering strategy that operates on the flags of the given enum Create a clustering strategy around the given collections of flags and their display labels. There must be the same number of elements in both collections. The list of flags. Gets the value that will be xor-ed to test for the presence of a particular value. Gets the labels that will be used when the corresponding Value is XOR present in the data. Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. A cluster is a like collection of objects that can be usefully filtered as whole using the filtering UI provided by the ObjectListView. Gets or sets how many items belong to this cluster Gets or sets the label that will be shown to the user to represent this cluster Gets or sets the actual data object that all members of this cluster have commonly returned. Implementation of this interface control the selecting of cluster keys and how those clusters will be presented to the user Gets or sets the column upon which this strategy will operate Get the cluster key by which the given model will be partitioned by this strategy If the returned value is an IEnumerable, the given model is considered to belong to multiple clusters Create a cluster to hold the given cluster key Gets the display label that the given cluster should use Create a filter that will include only model objects that match one or more of the given values. Instances of this class include only those rows of the listview that match one or more given strings. This class can match strings by prefix, regex, or simple containment. There are factory methods for each of these matching strategies. Create a text filter that will include rows where any cell matches any of the given regex expressions. Any string that is not a valid regex expression will be ignored. Create a text filter that includes rows where any cell begins with one of the given strings Create a text filter that includes rows where any cell contains any of the given strings. Create a TextFilter Create a TextFilter that finds the given string Create a TextFilter that finds the given string using the given comparison Gets or sets which columns will be used for the comparisons? If this is null, all columns will be used Gets or sets additional columns which will be used in the comparison. These will be used in addition to either the Columns property or to all columns taken from the control. Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for contains matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets whether or not this filter has any search criteria Gets or set the ObjectListView upon which this filter will work You cannot really rebase a filter after it is created, so do not change this value. It is included so that it can be set in an object initializer. Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for prefix matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets or sets the options that will be used when compiling the regular expression. This is only used when doing Regex matching (obviously). If this is not set specifically, the appropriate options are chosen to match the StringComparison setting (culture invariant, case sensitive). Gets or sets the collection of strings that will be used for regex pattern matching. Setting this replaces all previous texts of any kind. Gets or sets how the filter will match text Loop over the columns that are being considering by the filter Do the actual work of filtering Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings Is the given column one of the columns being used by this filter? Base class for the various types of string matching that TextMatchFilter provides Gets how the filter will match text Gets the text filter to which this component belongs Gets or sets the text that will be matched Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy This component provides text contains matching strategy. Create a text contains strategy Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This component provides text begins with matching strategy. Create a text begins strategy Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This component provides regex matching strategy. Creates a regex strategy Gets or sets the options that will be used when compiling the regular expression. Gets or sets a compilex regular expression, based on our current Text and RegexOptions. If Text fails to compile as a regular expression, this will return a Regex object that will match all strings. Gets whether or not our current regular expression is a valid regex Does the given text match the filter this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search Return true if the given cellText matches our strategy Find all the ways in which this filter matches the given string. This is used by the renderer to decide which bits of the string should be highlighted. this.Text will not be null or empty when this is called. The text of the cell we want to search A list of character ranges indicating the matched substrings This attribute is used to mark a property of a model class that should be noticed by Generator class. All the attributes of this class match their equivilent properties on OLVColumn. Create a new OLVColumnAttribute Create a new OLVColumnAttribute with the given title The title of the column An array of IComparables that mark the cutoff points for values when grouping on this column. Properties marked with [OLVChildren] will be used as the children source in a TreeListView. Properties marked with [OLVIgnore] will not have columns generated for them. ColumnComparer is the workhorse for all comparison between two values of a particular column. If the column has a specific comparer, use that to compare the values. Otherwise, do a case insensitive string compare of the string representations of the values. This class inherits from both IComparer and its generic counterpart so that it can be used on untyped and typed collections. This is used by normal (non-virtual) ObjectListViews. Virtual lists use ModelObjectComparer Gets or sets the method that will be used to compare two strings. The default is to compare on the current culture, case-insensitive Create a ColumnComparer that will order the rows in a list view according to the values in a given column The column whose values will be compared The ordering for column values Create a ColumnComparer that will order the rows in a list view according to the values in a given column, and by a secondary column if the primary column is equal. The column whose values will be compared The ordering for column values The column whose values will be compared for secondary sorting The ordering for secondary column values Compare two rows row1 row2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 Compare two rows row1 row2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 Compare the actual values to be used for sorting The aspect extracted from the first row The aspect extracted from the second row An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 This comparer sort list view groups. OLVGroups have a "SortValue" property, which is used if present. Otherwise, the titles of the groups will be compared. Create a group comparer The ordering for column values Compare the two groups. OLVGroups have a "SortValue" property, which is used if present. Otherwise, the titles of the groups will be compared. group1 group2 An ordering indication: -1, 0, 1 This comparer can be used to sort a collection of model objects by a given column This is used by virtual ObjectListViews. Non-virtual lists use ColumnComparer Gets or sets the method that will be used to compare two strings. The default is to compare on the current culture, case-insensitive Create a model object comparer Create a model object comparer with a secondary sorting column Compare the two model objects Compare the actual values A helper class that translates DataSource events for an ObjectListView Make a DataSourceAdapter Finalize this object Release all the resources used by this instance Release all the resources used by this instance Gets or sets whether or not columns will be automatically generated to show the columns when the DataSource is set. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Get or set the DataSource that will be displayed in this list view. Gets or sets the name of the list or table in the data source for which the DataListView is displaying data. If the data source is not a DataSet or DataViewManager, this property has no effect Gets the ObjectListView upon which this adaptor will operate Gets or sets the currency manager which is handling our binding context Our data source has changed. Figure out how to handle the new source Our data source has changed. Figure out how to handle the new source The data source for this control has changed. Reconfigure the control for the new source Take the contents of the currently bound list and put them into the control Create columns for the listview based on what properties are available in the data source This method will create columns if there is not already a column displaying that property. Decide if a new column should be added to the control to display the given property Configure the given column to show the given property. The title and aspect name of the column are already filled in. Generate aspect getters and putters for any columns that are missing them (and for which we have enough information to actually generate a getter) CurrencyManager ListChanged event handler. Deals with fine-grained changes to list items. It's actually difficult to deal with these changes in a fine-grained manner. If our listview is grouped, then any change may make a new group appear or an old group disappear. It is rarely enough to simply update the affected row. Handle PropertyDescriptor* events Handle ItemMoved event Handle the ItemDeleted event Handle an ItemAdded event. Handle the Reset event Handle ItemChanged event. This is triggered when a single item has changed, so just refresh that one item. Even in this simple case, we should probably rebuild the list. For example, the change could put the item into its own new group. The CurrencyManager calls this if the data source looks different. We just reload everything. CHECK: Do we need this if we are handle ListChanged metadata events? Called by the CurrencyManager when the currently selected item changes. We update the ListView selection so that we stay in sync with any other controls bound to the same source. Change the control's position (which is it's currently selected row) to the nth row in the dataset The index of the row to be selected Handle the selection changing in our ListView. We need to tell our currency manager about the new position. Handle the frozenness of our ListView changing. Handle a change to the BindingContext of our ListView. These delegates are used to extract an aspect from a row object These delegates are used to put a changed value back into a model object These delegates can be used to convert an aspect value to a display string, instead of using the default ToString() These delegates are used to get the tooltip for a cell These delegates are used to the state of the checkbox for a row object. For reasons known only to someone in Microsoft, we can only set a boolean on the ListViewItem to indicate it's "checked-ness", but when we receive update events, we have to use a tristate CheckState. So we can be told about an indeterminate state, but we can't set it ourselves. As of version 2.0, we can now return indeterminate state. These delegates are used to get the state of the checkbox for a row object. These delegates are used to put a changed check state back into a model object These delegates are used to put a changed check state back into a model object These delegates are used to get the renderer for a particular cell The callbacks for RightColumnClick events This delegate will be used to own draw header column. This delegate is called when a group has been created but not yet made into a real ListViewGroup. The user can take this opportunity to fill in lots of other details about the group. These delegates are used to retrieve the object that is the key of the group to which the given row belongs. These delegates are used to convert a group key into a title for the group These delegates are used to get the tooltip for a column header These delegates are used to fetch the image selector that should be used to choose an image for this column. These delegates are used to draw a cell These delegates are used to fetch a row object for virtual lists These delegates are used to format a listviewitem before it is added to the control. These delegates can be used to return the array of texts that should be searched for text filtering These delegates are used to sort the listview in some custom fashion These delegates are used to order two strings. x cannot be null. y can be null. An ObjectListView is a much easier to use, and much more powerful, version of the ListView. An ObjectListView automatically populates a ListView control with information taken from a given collection of objects. It can do this because each column is configured to know which bit of the model object (the "aspect") it should be displaying. Columns similarly understand how to sort the list based on their aspect, and how to construct groups using their aspect. Aspects are extracted by giving the name of a method to be called or a property to be fetched. These names can be simple names or they can be dotted to chain property access e.g. "Owner.Address.Postcode". Aspects can also be extracted by installing a delegate. An ObjectListView can show a "this list is empty" message when there is nothing to show in the list, so that the user knows the control is supposed to be empty. Right clicking on a column header should present a menu which can contain: commands (sort, group, ungroup); filtering; and column selection. Whether these parts of the menu appear is controlled by ShowCommandMenuOnRightClick, ShowFilterMenuOnRightClick and SelectColumnsOnRightClick respectively. The groups created by an ObjectListView can be configured to include other formatting information, including a group icon, subtitle and task button. Using some undocumented interfaces, these groups can even on virtual lists. ObjectListView supports dragging rows to other places, including other application. Special support is provide for drops from other ObjectListViews in the same application. In many cases, an ObjectListView becomes a full drag source by setting to true. Similarly, to accept drops, it is usually enough to set to true, and then handle the and events (or the and events, if you only want to handle drops from other ObjectListViews in your application). For these classes to build correctly, the project must have references to these assemblies: System System.Data System.Design System.Drawing System.Windows.Forms (obviously) How does a user indicate that they want to edit cells? 列表将不支持编辑(同时F2按键无效) 单击 单元格 将编辑值. 选择该行，就像正常选择行一样。用户必须按F2键才能编辑主列。 双击子项或主列将编辑该单元格。 F2键将编辑主列。 按F2键是编辑单元格的唯一方法。一旦主列被编辑， 行中的其他单元格可以通过按Tab键进行编辑。 只需单击任意单元格即可编辑值，即使是主列也是如此。 这些值指定向用户显示列选择的方式 不会显示任何列选择 这些列将显示在主菜单中 这些列将显示在子菜单中 将显示一个模式对话框，允许用户选择列 Triggered after a ObjectListView has been searched by the user typing into the list Triggered after a ObjectListView has been sorted Triggered before a ObjectListView is searched by the user typing into the list Set Cancelled to true to prevent the searching from taking place. Changing StringToFind or StartSearchFrom will change the subsequent search. Triggered before a ObjectListView is sorted Set Cancelled to true to prevent the sort from taking place. Changing ColumnToSort or SortOrder will change the subsequent sort. Triggered after a ObjectListView has created groups Triggered before a ObjectListView begins to create groups Set Groups to prevent the default group creation process Triggered just before a ObjectListView creates groups You can make changes to the groups, which have been created, before those groups are created within the listview. Triggered when a button in a cell is left clicked. This event is triggered when the user moves a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler. Handlers for this event should set the Effect argument and optionally the InfoMsg property. They can also change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. Triggered when a cell has finished being edited. Triggered when a cell is about to finish being edited. If Cancel is already true, the user is cancelling the edit operation. Set Cancel to true to prevent the value from the cell being written into the model. You cannot prevent the editing from finishing within this event -- you need the CellEditValidating event for that. Triggered when a cell is about to be edited. Set Cancel to true to prevent the cell being edited. You can change the the Control to be something completely different. Triggered when a cell editor needs to be validated If this event is cancelled, focus will remain on the cell editor. Triggered when a cell is left clicked. Triggered when the mouse is above a cell. Triggered when a cell is right clicked. This event is triggered when a cell needs a tool tip. This event is triggered when a checkbox is checked/unchecked on a subitem Triggered when a column header is right clicked. This event is triggered when the user releases a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler. This event is triggered when the control needs to filter its collection of objects. This event is triggered when a cell needs to be formatted. This event is triggered when the frozeness of the control changes. This event is triggered when a row needs to be formatted. This event is triggered when a group is about to collapse or expand. This can be cancelled to prevent the expansion. This event is triggered when a group changes state. This event is triggered when a header checkbox is changing value This event is triggered when a header needs a tool tip. Triggered when the "hot" item changes Triggered when a hyperlink cell is clicked. Triggered when the task text of a group is clicked. Is the value in the given cell a hyperlink. Some new objects are about to be added to an ObjectListView. The contents of the ObjectListView has changed. The contents of the ObjectListView is about to change via a SetObjects call Set Cancelled to true to prevent the contents of the list changing. This does not work with virtual lists. Some objects are about to be removed from an ObjectListView. This event is triggered when the user moves a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler, and when the source control for the drag was an ObjectListView. Handlers for this event should set the Effect argument and optionally the InfoMsg property. They can also change any of the DropTarget* setttings to change the target of the drop. This event is triggered when the user releases a drag over an ObjectListView that has a SimpleDropSink installed as the drop handler and when the source control for the drag was an ObjectListView. This event is triggered once per user action that changes the selection state of one or more rows. This event is triggered when the contents of the ObjectListView has scrolled. Tell the world when a cell is about to be edited. Tell the world when a cell is about to finish being edited. Tell the world when a cell is about to finish being edited. Tell the world when a cell has finished being edited. 创建一个 ObjectListView Dispose of any resources this instance has been using 获取鼠标左键是否在此时按下。 获取该程序是否在Vista或更高版本上运行 获取该程序是否在Win7或更高版本上运行 Gets or sets how what smoothing mode will be applied to graphic operations. Gets or sets how should text be renderered. 获取或设置当组Key为Null时将用于标题组的字符串。将其公开以使其可以本地化。 Convert the given enumerable into an ArrayList as efficiently as possible The source collection If true, this method will always create a new collection. An ArrayList with the same contents as the given collection. When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Return the count of items in the given enumerable When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Return whether or not the given enumerable is empty. A string is regarded as an empty collection. True if the given collection is null or empty When we move to .NET 3.5, we can use LINQ and not need this method. Gets or sets whether all ObjectListViews will silently ignore missing aspect errors. By default, if an ObjectListView is asked to display an aspect (i.e. a field/property/method) that does not exist from a model, it displays an error message in that cell, since that condition is normally a programming error. There are some use cases where this is not an error -- in those cases, set this to true and ObjectListView will simply display an empty cell. Be warned: if you set this to true, it can be very difficult to track down typing mistakes or name changes in AspectNames. Gets or sets whether the control will draw a rectangle in each cell showing the cell padding. This can help with debugging display problems from cell padding. As with all cell padding, this setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets the style that will be used by default to format disabled rows Gets the style that will be used by default to format hot rows Gets or sets an model filter that is combined with any column filtering that the end-user specifies. This is different from the ModelFilter property, since setting that will replace any column filtering, whereas setting this will combine this filter with the column filtering Get or set all the columns that this control knows about. Only those columns where IsVisible is true will be seen by the user. If you want to add new columns programmatically, add them to AllColumns and then call RebuildColumns(). Normally, you do not have to deal with this property directly. Just use the IDE. If you do add or remove columns from the AllColumns collection, you have to call RebuildColumns() to make those changes take effect. 获取或设置每隔一行的背景色 获取已设置的交替行背景色或默认颜色 此属性强制ObjectListView始终按给定列对项进行分组。 如果AlwaysGroupByColumn不为空，则此属性将用于确定如何对这些组进行排序。 如果此属性的值为SortOrder.None，则排序顺序将根据用户上次单击的标题切换。 Give access to the image list that is actually being used by the control Normally, it is preferable to use SmallImageList. Only use this property if you know exactly what you are doing. 获取或设置编辑单元格的方式 Columns can also be marked as editable. 编辑单元格时，是否应该使用整个单元格(减去复选框或图像使用的任何空间)？ 默认值为 true. This is always treated as true when the control is NOT owner drawn. When this is false and the control is owner drawn, ObjectListView will try to calculate the width of the cell's actual contents, and then size the editing control to be just the right width. If this is true, the whole width of the cell will be used, regardless of the cell's contents. Each column can have a different value for property. This value from the control is only used when a column is not specified one way or another. Regardless of this setting, developers can specify the exact size of the editing control by listening for the CellEditStarting event. Gets or sets the engine that will handle key presses during a cell edit operation. Settings this to null will reset it to default value. 获取当前用于编辑单元格的控件。 This will obviously be null if no cell is being edited. 获取或设置编辑控件左边缘或右边缘的单元格时Tab键的行为。 如果为False(默认值)，则按Tab键将换行到同一行的另一侧。 如果为True，编辑最右边的单元格时按Tab键将前进到下一行， 编辑最左边的单元格时按Shift-Tab组合键将更改为上一行。 获取或设置编辑单元格时Enter键的行为。 如果为False(默认值)，则按Enter键将简单地完成编辑操作。 如果为True，则Enter将完成编辑操作，并在当前单元格下方的单元格上启动新的编辑操作，在位于底部单元格时换行到下一行的顶部。 获取显示单元格提示的工具提示控件 获取或设置该项的每个单元格周围将留空的像素数。单元格内容在考虑填充后对齐。 Each value of the given rectangle will be treated as an inset from the corresponding side. The width of the rectangle is the padding for the right cell edge. The height of the rectangle is the padding for the bottom cell edge. So, this.olv1.CellPadding = new Rectangle(1, 2, 3, 4); will leave one pixel of space to the left of the cell, 2 pixels at the top, 3 pixels of space on the right edge, and 4 pixels of space at the bottom of each cell. This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. This setting only affects the contents of the cell. The background is not affected. If you set this to a foolish value, your control will appear to be empty. 获取或设置默认情况下单元格垂直对齐的方式。 This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. It will only be noticable when RowHeight has been set such that there is some vertical space in each row. Should this list show checkboxes? 返回选中行的模型对象；如果未选中行或选中多行，则返回NULL Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivilent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. .NET's CheckedItems property is not helpful. It is just a short-hand for iterating through the list looking for items that are checked. The performance of the get method is O(n), where n is the number of items in the control. The performance of the set method is O(n + m) where m is the number of objects being checked. Be careful on long lists. 获取或设置可枚举对象中的选中对象。 Useful for checking all objects in the list. this.olv1.CheckedObjectsEnumerable = this.olv1.Objects; Gets Columns for this list. We hide the original so we can associate a specialised editor with it. 获取/设置当列表切换到TileView(平铺视图)时应使用的列的列表。 按向用户显示的顺序返回可见列 获取显示列表的控件区域，减去任何标题控件 获取或设置当用户按Ctrl+C组合键时是否应将选定行复制到剪贴板 获取或设置按Ctrl+C键复制到剪贴板功能是否应使用安装的DragSource创建放置到剪贴板上的数据对象。 This is normally what is desired, unless a custom DragSource is installed that does some very specialized drag-drop behaviour. Gets the list of decorations that will be drawn the ListView Do not modify the contents of this list directly. Use the AddDecoration() and RemoveDecoration() methods. A decoration scrolls with the list contents. An overlay is fixed in place. 所有者绘制时，此渲染器将绘制未指定特定渲染器的列 如果尝试将其设置为NULL，则它将恢复为HighlightTextRenende 获取用于绘制给定单元格的渲染器。 The row model for the row The column to be drawn The renderer used for drawing a cell. Must not return null. 获取或设置将应用于禁用项的样式。 If this is not set explicitly, will be used. 获取或设置已禁用的模型对象的列表。无法选择或激活已禁用的对象。 判断此给定模型对象是否已禁用 禁用给定的模型对象。禁用的对象无法选择或激活。 Must not be null 禁用所有给定的模型对象 启用给定的模型对象，以便可以再次选择并激活它。 Must not be null 启用所有给定的模型对象 忽略所有禁用的对象。这不会触发重绘或重建 Gets or sets the object that controls how drags start from this control Gets or sets the object that controls how drops are accepted and processed by this ListView. If the given sink is an instance of SimpleDropSink, then events from the drop sink will be automatically forwarded to the ObjectListView (which means that handlers for those event can be configured within the IDE). If this is set to null, the control will not accept drops. This registry decides what control should be used to edit what cells, based on the type of the value in the cell. All instances of ObjectListView share the same editor registry. 获取或设置在此列表视图中没有项时应显示的文本。 If the EmptyListMsgOverlay has been changed to something other than a TextOverlay, this property does nothing 获取或设置绘制列表空消息时应使用的字体 If the EmptyListMsgOverlay has been changed to something other than a TextOverlay, this property does nothing 返回“列表为空”消息的字体或合理的默认值 Gets or sets the overlay responsible for drawing the List Empty msg. 获取在筛选中幸存下来的对象的集合。 This collection is the result of filtering the current list of objects. It is not a snapshot of the filtered list that was last used to build the control. Normal warnings apply when using this with virtual lists. It will work, but it may take a while. 获取或设置将用于生成筛选器菜单的策略对象 如果为NULL，则不会生成筛选器菜单。 获取或设置具有键盘焦点的行 Setting an object to be focused does *not* select it. If you want to select and focus a row, use . This property is not generally used and is only useful in specialized situations. 隐藏Groups集合，使其在“属性”网格中不可见。 获取或设置分组使用的ImageList 如果未设置此选项，则分组标题将不会显示任何图像。 获取在组为空或包含多个项目时应如何设置组标签的格式 给定的格式字符串必须有两个占位符： {0} - 原来的组标题 {1} - 组中的项目数 "[{0} [{1} 项]" 返回this.GroupWithItemCountFormat或合理的默认值 获取在组仅包含单个项目时应如何设置组标签的格式 给定的格式字符串必须有两个占位符： {0} - 原来的组标题 {1} - 组中的项目数 (总是1) "[{0} [{1} 项]" 获取GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat或合理的默认值 获取或设置此ObjectListView中的组是否应可折叠。 此特性只支持Vista或之后的系统. 获取当前列表是否存在当列表为空时显示的文本 获取是否有要绘制的叠加层 获取ListView的列头控件 获取或设置列标题文本的绘制字体 单个列可以通过其HeaderFormatStyle属性重写此设置。 获取或设置将用于绘制列表视图的列标题的样式 仅当HeaderUsesThemes为false时才使用此选项。 单个列可以通过其HeaderFormatStyle属性重写此设置。 获取或设置标题的最大高度。-1表示没有最大值。 获取或设置标题的最小高度。-1表示没有最小值。 获取或设置是否严格按照操作系统的主题绘制标题。 如果设置为true，则列头将完全由系统呈现，不需要ObjectListViews的任何特殊处理。 页眉中将没有图像、没有过滤器指示符、没有文字换行、没有页眉样式、没有复选框。 如果将其设置为False，ObjectListView将以其认为最好的方式呈现标题。 如果不需要特殊功能，则ObjectListView会将渲染委托给操作系统。 否则，ObjectListView将根据配置设置绘制标题。 没有主题的效果会因操作系统不同而不同。至少，分类指示器不会是标准的。 获取或设置列头标题中的文本是否自动换行。 将在单词之间应用换行符。过长的单词仍将被省略。 与所有使列头看起来不同的设置一样，HeaderUsesThemes必须设置为false，否则操作系统将负责绘制列头，并且不允许自动换行文本。 获取显示列标题提示的工具提示 获取鼠标当前所在行的索引。 获取鼠标当前所在列的索引 获取鼠标当前所在的项/子项的一部分 Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse is currently over 获取鼠标所在的组。 处于“热”状态的项的索引，即在光标下方。-1表示没有项目。 获取和设置对游标下的行应用哪种格式 这仅在UseHotItem为true时生效。 如果样式具有叠加层，则必须对其进行设置。*之前* 将其分配给此属性。之后添加它将被忽略。 获取已安装的热点项样式或合理的默认值。 获取和设置应将哪种格式应用于超链接 获取和设置所选行的背景应该使用什么颜色 返回应用于选定行的背景颜色或合理的默认值 获取和设置所选行的字体应该使用什么颜色 返回应用于选定行的字体颜色或合理的默认值 使用 SelectedBackColor 代替 使用 SelectedBackColorOrDefault 代替 使用 SelectedForeColor 代替 使用 SelectedForeColorOrDefault 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedBackColor 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedBackColorOrDefault 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedForeColor 代替 使用 UnfocusedSelectedForeColorOrDefault 代替 获取或设置是否应将隐藏列包括在复制或拖动到其他应用程序的行的文本表示形式中。 如果为False(默认值)，则仅包括可见列。 获取或设置复制行时，列标题是否在文本中。 如果为False(默认值)，在文本中将不会显示列标题。 如果当前正在进行单元格编辑操作，则返回TRUE 如果在开发环境中使用ObjectListView，则返回true。 获取当前列表是否正在筛选其内容 当用户在列表中键入内容时，是否应该搜索当前排序列中的值以查找匹配项？ 如果为False，则无论排序列是什么，都将始终使用主列。 When this is true, the behavior is like that of ITunes. 获取或设置此控件是否将使用SimpleDropSink接收拖动 此设置将替换任何以前的DropSink。 将其设置为true后，SimpleDropSink仍需要配置为说明它何时可以接受拖动， 以及在拖动某些内容时应该执行什么操作。需要执行这些操作使此属性几乎毫无用处 :( 获取或设置此控件是否将使用SimpleDragSource来启动拖动 此设置将替换之前的任何DragSource 隐藏Items集合，使其在“属性”网格中不可见。 当列表中的项目处于非详细视图中时，此渲染器会绘制项目。在详细信息视图中，负责个体列的呈现器。 获取或设置最后一次排序的列 这是PrimarySortColumn的别名 获取或设置最后一次排序的方向 这是 PrimarySortOrder的别名 获取或设置应用于整个对象列表的筛选器。 列表将立即更新以反映此筛选器。 获取或设置应用于列表中每个模型对象的筛选器 您可能需要考虑使用 而不是此属性， 因为AdditionalFilter在运行时与列筛选相结合。 设置此属性只是替换用户可能已给出的任何列筛选器。 The list is updated immediately to reflect this filter. Gets the hit test info last time the mouse was moved. Useful for hot item processing. 获取或设置列表显示的组列表。 此属性与.NET Groups属性的工作方式不同，应将其视为只读属性。 对列表所做的更改不会反映在ListView本身中。 在此列表中添加或删除组是没有意义的，这样的修改不会起到任何作用。 要执行此类操作，必须侦听BeforeCreatingGroups或AboutToCreateGroups事件， 并更改这些事件中的组列表。 获取或设置折叠的OLVGroups的集合。 Gets or sets whether the user wants to owner draw the header control themselves. If this is false (the default), ObjectListView will use custom drawing to render the header, if needed. If you listen for the DrawColumnHeader event, you need to set this to true, otherwise your event handler will not be called. 获取/设置此列表将显示的对象集合 设置此属性后，控件的内容将立即更新。 如果可能，此方法将保留所选内容。使用 if 如果您不想保留所选内容，请执行以下操作。 保留选择是该代码中最慢的部分，性能为O(N)，其中n是选定的行数。 此方法不是线程安全的。 该属性确实适用于虚拟列表：设置是没有问题的，但如果您尝试获取它， 并且列表有1000万个对象，则可能需要一些时间才能返回。 此集合未经过筛选。使用 只访问那些在任何已安装的筛选器中幸存下来的对象。 获取当前控件所有对象组成的列表 获取创建群集时将考虑的对象集合。 (用于生成类似Excel的列筛选器) 获取或设置将在ListView顶部绘制的图像 获取或设置将在ListView顶部绘制的文本 获取或设置所有覆盖图的透明度。0表示完全透明，255表示完全不透明。 这已经过时了，请在每个覆盖上使用Transparency。 获取将在ListView顶部绘制的覆盖列表 You can add new overlays and remove overlays that you have added, but don't mess with the overlays that you didn't create. Gets or sets whether the ObjectListView will be owner drawn. Defaults to true. When this is true, all of ObjectListView's neat features are available. We have to reimplement this property, even though we just call the base property, in order to change the [DefaultValue] to true. 获取或设置主复选框是否在列表重新生成和筛选操作中保持其值。 此属性仅在未显式设置CheckStateGetter/Putter时才有用。 如果您使用CheckStateGetter/Putter，那么这些方法已经持久化了行的检查性。 此默认值为true。如果为False，则在重新生成或筛选列表时，复选框将丢失其值。 如果在虚拟列表中将其设置为false，则必须安装CheckStateGetter/Putters。 获取或设置记住模型对象的复选框状态的字典 当PersistentCheckBoxs值为TRUE时，此选项用于虚拟列表. 获取或设置最后一次排序的列 获取或设置最后一次排序的方向 获取或设置不可编辑复选框是否绘制为禁用。默认是false。 这仅在所有者描述模式(owner drawn mode)下有效。 以像素为单位指定控件中每行的高度。 列表视图中的行高通常由字体大小和小图像列表大小决定。 此设置允许覆盖该计算(原因是：您仍然不能将行高设置为小于控件中使用的字体的行高)。 将其设置为-1表示使用正常计算方法。 此功能是体验功能！如果您使用此功能，您的程序可能会发生意想不到的事情。 获取每行有多少像素高 获取此控件的每页上显示多少行 获取/设置将用于解析排序时相等的比较的列(第二排序列)。 此设置没有用户界面。它必须以编程方式设置。 获取或设置当使用Second darySortColumn时，它将以什么顺序比较结果 获取或设置当用户按Ctrl+A组合键时是否应选择所有行 获取或设置当用户右键单击列标题时，是否应该显示一个菜单，允许用户选择视图中将显示哪些列 这只是SelectColumnsOnRightClickBehaviour的兼容性包装属性. 获取或设置当右键单击标题时用户如何能够选择列 当列选择菜单打开时，是否应在选择项目后保持打开状态？保持打开状态允许用户一次打开或关闭多个列。 SelectColumnsOnRightClickBehaviour设置为InlineMenu时才有效。当行为设置为SubMenu菜单时，该选项不起作用。 获取或设置选定列 如果TintSortColumn为true，则排序列将自动成为选定列。 色调的颜色由SelectedColumnTint控制。 Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn on all selected rows 获取或设置应该使用什么颜色来给选定的列着色 色调颜色必须是Alpha可混合的，因此如果给定的颜色是纯色(即Alpha=255)，则会将其更改为具有合理的Alpha值。 获取或设置当前选定行的索引。 获取索引时，如果没有选择任何行，或者选择了多个行，则返回-1。 获取或设置当前选定的ListViewItem。如果未选择任何行，或者选择了多个行，则返回NULL。 如果只选择了一行，则从当前选定的行获取模型对象。 如果未选择任何行，或选择了多个行，则返回NULL。 设置时，这将选择显示给定模型对象的行，并将焦点放在该行上，取消选择所有其他行。 从当前选定的行中获取模型对象。 如果未选中任何行，则返回的列表为空。 设置此值时，请选择显示给定模型对象的行，取消选择所有其他行。 获取或设置当用户右键单击列标题时，是否应该显示一个菜单，允许他们选择要在列表视图上执行的常见任务 获取或设置当右键单击标题控件时，此ObjectListView是否像筛选菜单一样显示表格 获取或设置是否应按组显示其项目 列表视图是否应该在列标题中显示位图以显示排序方向 The only reason for not wanting to have sort indicators is that, on pre-XP versions of Windows, having sort indicators required the ListView to have a small image list, and as soon as you give a ListView a SmallImageList, the text of column 0 is bumped 16 pixels to the right, even if you never used an image. 列表视图是否应该显示子项上的图像 虚拟列表必须是所有者绘制的，才能在子项上显示图像 此属性控制分组标签是否显示该分组项目数量 后缀的格式由GroupWithItemCountFormat/GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat属性控制 获取或设置控件是在所有视图中显示列标题(True)，还是仅在详细信息视图中显示列标题(False) 此属性工作不正常。JPP 2010/04/06。 如果它是在创建控件之前设置的，则可以正常工作。 但是，如果在创建控件后将其关闭，则控件将丢失其复选框(奇怪！) 要在创建控件后更改此设置，事情会很复杂。 如果它是关闭的，而我们想要打开它，我们必须更改视图，标题就会出现。 如果它当前处于打开状态，而我们想要将其关闭，则必须更改视图并重新创建控制柄。 重新创建句柄是一个问题，因为它会使我们的复选框样式消失。 该属性不能工作在 Win XP 系统. 重写SmallImageList属性，以便我们可以正确地隐藏其操作。 如果使用RowHeight属性指定行高，则必须在设置/更改RowHeight之前完全初始化SmallImageList。 如果在设置行高之后将新图像添加到图像列表，则必须再次将图像列表分配给控件。像这样简单的事情会奏效的： listView1.SmallImageList = listView1.SmallImageList; 返回小图像列表中图像的大小或合理的默认值 当列表视图分组时，项是否应该按主列排序？如果为False，则项目将按分组时的同一列进行排序。 当列表视图分组时，一个组的末尾和下一个组的开头之间应该有多少像素 排序列是否应该显示轻微的色调？ 获取或设置是否使用三态复选框？ 如果为True，用户可以选择第三种状态(通常是不确定的)。 否则，用户在选中和取消选中之间交替单击。 当此设置为False时，CheckStateGetter仍可以返回不确定。 获取或设置列表顶部项目的索引 此属性仅在列表视图处于详细信息视图中且不显示组时才起作用。 显示组时不起作用的原因是，当启用组时，无论滚动位置如何， Windows msg LVM_GETTOPINDEX总是返回0。 获取或设置将鼠标移到标题上是否会触发CellOver事件。 默认为true。 将鼠标移动到标题上之前不会触发CellOver事件，因为Header被视为单独的控件。 如果此行为更改导致您的应用程序出现问题，请将其设置为False。 如果您想知道鼠标何时在标题上移动，请将此属性设置为true(默认值)。 通过拖动分隔线调整列的大小时，是否应在每次鼠标移动时调整填充空格的列的大小？ 如果为False，则释放鼠标时将更新填充栏。 如果空间填充列位于正在调整大小的列的左侧，这看起来会很奇怪：该列的右边缘将被拖动，但由于空间填充列正在收缩，其左边缘将会移动。 这是合乎逻辑的行为--只是看起来不对。 考虑到上述行为，如果空间填充列不是最右边的列，最好关闭该属性。 当控件没有焦点时，应该使用什么颜色作为选定行的背景 当控件没有焦点或合理的默认值时，返回应用于选定行的背景的颜色 当控件没有焦点时，应该使用什么颜色作为选定行的字体颜色。 当控件没有焦点或合理的默认值时，返回应用于选定行的字体颜色 获取或设置列表是否每隔一行提供不同的背景色？默认值为false。 交替行的颜色由AlternateRowBackColor提供。 在.NET中，列表视图在非整行选择模式下有一个“功能”，在这种模式下，所选行不会使用正确的背景色绘制。 是否应该为控件中的每个单元格调用FormatCell事件？ 在许多情况下，不执行单元格级格式设置。 如果除非需要，ObjectListView不会为每个单元格触发Format Cell事件，则它的运行速度会稍快一些。 因此，默认情况下，它不会为每个单元格引发事件。 ObjectListView*确实*在每次重新生成行时引发FormatRow事件。各行可以决定是否对行中的每个单元格引发FormatCell事件。 无论此设置如何，只有当ObjectListView处于详细视图中时才会引发FormatCell事件。 所选行是否应使用非标准前景色和背景色绘制？ V2.9不再需要此属性 获取或设置此ObjectListView是否将使用与Vista资源管理器相同的热项和选择机制。 此属性有许多缺陷： 这仅适用于Vista及更高版本 它不能很好地与AlternateRowBackColors配合使用。 它不能很好地与HotItemStyles配合使用。 如果FullRowSelect为false，这看起来有点傻。 当列表是所有者绘制的时，它根本不起作用(因为所有的绘制都是由渲染器完成的)。 因此，它不能与TreeListView一起工作，因为它们“必须”是所有者绘制的。你仍然可以设置它，但它不会生效。 但如果你一定要看起来像Vista/Win7，这是你的权限。如果这项设置搞砸了其他事情，请不要抱怨。 当此属性设置为True时，ObjectListView将不是所有者描述的。 这将禁用ObjectListView的许多漂亮的基于绘图的功能。 获取或设置列表是否应启用筛选 获取或设置列表是否应将指示符放入列的标题中，以表明它正在筛选该列 如果将其设置为true，HeaderUsesThemes将自动设置为false，因为我们只能在不使用主题标题时绘制筛选器指示器。 鼠标下方的控件(复选框或按钮)是否应该被绘制为“Hot” 如果为False，则当鼠标悬停在控件上时，控件的绘制方式不会有所不同。 如果为False，且UseHotItem和UseHyperLinks为False，则ObjectListView可以跳过鼠标移动的某些处理。这使得鼠标移动处理几乎不使用CPU。 光标下的项是否应以特殊方式设置格式？ 获取或设置此列表视图是否应在单元格中显示超链接。 此控件是否应显示覆盖(Overlays) 覆盖(Overlays)在默认情况下是启用的，只有在它们在您的开发环境中造成问题时才需要禁用。 是否应将此控件配置为在子项上显示复选框？ 如果将其设置为True，则将为该控件提供一个SmallImageList(如果它还没有一个SmallImageList)。 此外，如果它是一个虚拟列表，它将被设置为所有者描述的，因为虚拟列表不能在没有所有者描述的情况下绘制复选框。 获取或设置ObjectListView是否将使用类似Vista的半透明选择机制。 与UseExplorerTheme不同的是，这个类似Vista的方案可以在XP上运行，并且既适用于所有者描述的列表，也适用于非所有者描述的列表。 这将替换任何已安装的SelectedRowDecory。 如果您不喜欢用于选择的颜色，请忽略此属性， 只需创建您自己的RowBorderDecory并将其分配给SelectedRowDecory， 就像此属性设置器所做的那样。 获取或设置ObjectListView是否将使用类似于Vista的半透明热行突出显示机制。 设置此项将替换任何已安装的HotItemStyle。 如果您不喜欢热项目使用的颜色，请忽略此属性， 只需创建您自己的HotItemStyle，填充所需的值， 并将其分配给HotItemStyle属性，就像此属性设置器所做的那样。 获取/设置此列表视图正在使用的视图样式 切换到平铺(Tile)或详细信息(Details)视图会安装适合该视图的列。令人困惑的是，在平铺视图中，每列都显示为一行信息。 此委托仅将对象的检查性作为布尔值获取。 如果您永远不想担心不确定状态(这是相当常见的)，请使用此选项。 这是CheckStateGetter属性的便捷包装。 This delegate sets the checkedness of an object as a boolean only. It must return true or false indicating if the object was checked or not. Use this if you never want to worry about the Indeterminate state (which is fairly common). This is a convenience wrapper around the CheckStatePutter property. 获取此列表视图是否能够显示组 获取或设置ObjectListView是否可以依赖正在引发的Application.Idle事件。 在某些主机环境中(例如，在VisualStudio和Office中作为扩展运行时)，从不引发Application.Idle事件。 如果不会引发Idle事件，则将其设置为False，ObjectListView将自行引发这些事件。 This delegate fetches the renderer for a particular cell. If this returns null (or is not installed), the renderer for the column will be used. If the column renderer is null, then will be used. This is called every time any cell is drawn. It must be efficient! This delegate is called when the list wants to show a tooltip for a particular cell. The delegate should return the text to display, or null to use the default behavior (which is to show the full text of truncated cell values). Displaying the full text of truncated cell values only work for FullRowSelect listviews. This is MS's behavior, not mine. Don't complain to me :) 保存是否选中模型的属性(或字段)的名称。 该属性是可修改的。它必须具有bool(或bool？)返回类型。如果TriStateCheckBooks为真)。 设置此属性将替换任何已安装的CheckStateGetter或CheckStatePutter。 相反，稍后设置CheckStateGetter或CheckStatePutter属性将优先于此属性的行为。 只要ObjectListView需要知道与给定模型对象关联的行的检查状态，就会调用此委托。 .NET has no support for indeterminate values, but as of v2.0, this class allows indeterminate values. This delegate will be called whenever the user tries to change the check state of a row. The delegate should return the state that was actually set, which may be different to the state given. 此委托可用于以自定义方式对表进行排序。 委托必须在ObjectListView上安装ListViewItemSorter。 安装ItemSorter会执行对ListViewItems进行排序的实际工作。 有关ItemSorter必须执行的操作的示例，请参见代码中的ColumnCompeller。 请勿在VirtualObjectListView上安装CustomSorter。改为重写IVirtualListDataSource的SortObjects()方法。 This delegate is called when the list wants to show a tooltip for a particular header. The delegate should return the text to display, or null to use the default behavior (which is to not show any tooltip). Installing a HeaderToolTipGetter takes precedence over any text in OLVColumn.ToolTipText. This delegate can be used to format a OLVListItem before it is added to the control. The model object for the row can be found through the RowObject property of the OLVListItem object. All subitems normally have the same style as list item, so setting the forecolor on one subitem changes the forecolor of all subitems. To allow subitems to have different attributes, do this: myListViewItem.UseItemStyleForSubItems = false;. If UseAlternatingBackColors is true, the backcolor of the listitem will be calculated by the control and cannot be controlled by the RowFormatter delegate. In general, trying to use a RowFormatter when UseAlternatingBackColors is true does not work well. As it says in the summary, this is called before the item is added to the control. Many properties of the OLVListItem itself are not available at that point, including: Index, Selected, Focused, Bounds, Checked, DisplayIndex. 将给定的模型对象添加到此控件。 要显示的模型对象 See AddObjects() for more details 将给定的模型对象集合添加到此控件。 要显示的模型对象集合 如果排序处于活动状态(即，如果PrimarySortColumn不为空)，则添加的对象将出现在其正确的排序位置。否则，它们将出现在列表的末尾。 不执行任何检查以查看是否有任何对象已在ListView中。 空对象将被静默忽略。 将列的大小调整到页眉宽度和数据的最大值。 设置任何自动初始化的列宽(宽度为0或-1的列将分别调整为其内容或标题的宽度)。 显然，这只会起作用一次。一旦运行，列宽将更改为其他值(不是0或-1)，因此第二次运行时不会执行任何操作。 若要强制所有列更改其大小，请使用 。 根据最后一个排序列或第一列(如果没有最后一个排序列)将视图项组织到组中 根据给定列将视图项组织成组 如果AlwaysGroupByColumn属性不为Null，则列表视图项将按该列组织，并且将忽略‘Column’参数。 此方法触发排序事件：BeforeSorting和AfterSorting。 其值应用于排序的列。 根据给定列将视图项组织成组 将使用哪一列进行分组 组将使用什么顺序 其值应用于排序的列。不能为空 列中值的排序顺序 当‘column’中的值相等时，请使用此列提供的值 次级值将如何排序 此方法不会触发排序事件。使用BuildGroups()执行此操作 收集并返回影响组创建的所有变量 Make a list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters The list of groups to be created This should not change the state of the control. It is possible that the groups created will not be used. They may simply be discarded. 生成/重新生成列表中的所有列表视图项，尽可能多地保留状态 生成/重新生成列表中的所有列表视图项 If this is true, the control will try to preserve the selection, focused item, and the scroll position (see Remarks) Use this method in situations were the contents of the list is basically the same as previously. 清除此列表可能一直在使用的所有缓存信息 Apply all required extended styles to our control. Whenever .NET code sets an extended style, it erases all other extended styles that it doesn't use. So, we have to explicit reapply the styles that we have added. Normally, we would override CreateParms property and update the ExStyle member, but ListView seems to ignore all ExStyles that it doesn't already know about. Worse, when we set the LVS_EX_HEADERINALLVIEWS value, bad things happen (the control crashes!). Give the listview a reasonable size of its tiles, based on the number of lines of information that each tile is going to display. Rebuild this list for the given view 移除所有对象(线程安全) This method can safely be called from background threads. 重置已访问其URL的内存 将选定行的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 Be careful when using this with virtual lists. If the user has selected 10,000,000 rows, this method will faithfully try to copy all of them to the clipboard. From the user's point of view, your program will appear to have hung. 将给定对象的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 将所有对象的文本和HTML表示复制到剪贴板上。 返回给定对象的html表示形式 取消选择列表视图中的所有行 返回紧跟在给定项后面的ListViewItem。 如果给定项为空，则返回列表中的第一个项。 如果给定项是最后一项，则返回NULL。 The item that is before the item that is returned, or null A ListViewItem 按向用户显示的顺序返回最后一项。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 按向用户显示的顺序返回第n项(从0开始)。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 返回给定listviewitem索引的显示索引。 如果控件未分组，则显示顺序与排序的列表顺序相同。 但如果列表是分组的，则显示顺序不同。 返回紧接在给定项之前出现的ListViewItem。 如果给定项为空，则返回列表中的最后一项。 如果给定项是第一项，则返回NULL。 The item that is before the item that is returned A ListViewItem 在给定位置之前插入给定的对象集合 Where to insert the objects The objects to be inserted This operation only makes sense of non-sorted, non-grouped lists, since any subsequent sort/group operation will rearrange the list. This method only works on ObjectListViews and FastObjectListViews. 如果选择了表示给定模型的行，则返回TRUE The model object to look for Is the row selected 给定的URL是否已被访问 The string to be consider Has it been visited 按给定的值增量滚动ListView。 Horizontal delta Vertical delta Return a point that represents the current horizontal and vertical scroll positions 记住给定的URL已被访问 The url to be remembered This does not cause the control be redrawn 将给定的对象集合移动到给定的索引。 此操作仅对未分组的ObjectListViews有意义。 计算在给定点下的项目是什么？ 使用Windows控件的SUBITEMHITTEST消息执行点击测试。 这提供了标准ListView.HitTest()不提供的有关组点击的信息。 What is under the given point? This takes the various parts of a cell into accout, including any custom parts that a custom renderer might use An information block about what is under the point Perform a hit test when the control is not owner drawn Perform a hit test when the control is owner drawn. This hands off responsibility to the renderer. Pause (or unpause) all animations in the list true to pause, false to unpause Rebuild the columns based upon its current view and column visibility settings 从ListView中删除给定的模型对象 The model to be removed See RemoveObjects() for more details This method is thread-safe. 从控件中移除所有给定对象。 Collection of objects to be removed Nulls and model objects that are not in the ListView are silently ignored. This method is thread-safe. 选择列表视图中的所有行 在列表视图的右下角设置要固定的给定图像。 当列表视图滚动时，此图像不会滚动。 此方法使用ListView的原生功能显示背景图像。 它有几个限制： 它在owner drawn模式下不能很好地工作。在owner drawn绘制模式下， 每个单元格都会绘制自身，包括覆盖背景图像的背景。 启用网格线时看起来不是很好，因为网格线是在图像上绘制的。 它在XP上完全不起作用。 显然，当启用交替行背景色时，效果不佳。 如果你能忍受这些限制，原生水印就相当不错了。 它们是真实的背景，而不是像OverlayImage使用的半透明覆盖。 与覆盖相比，它们也有明显的优势，因为即使在MDI应用程序中，它们也可以正常工作。 设置此选项将清除所有背景图像。 The image to be drawn. If null, any existing image will be removed. 将给定的图像设置为ListView的背景，以便它在列表中以给定的百分比偏移量显示。 这具有与 中所述的相同限制. 在使用该方法之前，请确保了解这些限制。 这非常类似于 属性， 但标准Backround Image不能正确处理具有透明区域的图像--它将透明区域呈现为黑色。这种方法没有这个问题。 设置此选项将清除所有背景水印。 The image to be drawn. If null, any existing image will be removed. The horizontal percentage where the image will be placed. 0 is absolute left, 100 is absolute right. The vertical percentage where the image will be placed. 将给定图像设置为ListView的平铺背景。 这具有与 和 相同的限制. 在使用该方法之前，请确保了解这些限制。 要绘制的图像。如果为null，则将删除所有现有图像。 设置将在此列表视图中显示的对象集合。 可以从后台线程安全地调用此方法。 该列表将立即更新 The objects to be displayed 设置将在此列表视图中显示的对象集合。 可以从后台线程安全地调用此方法. 该列表将立即更新 The objects to be displayed 是否应尽可能保留列表的状态。 将给定的模型对象更新到ListView中。 如果该模型尚不存在，则会添加该模型。 The model to be updated See for more details 此方法是线程安全的。 此方法将导致重新排序列表。 此方法仅适用于ObjectListViews和FastObjectListViews。 更新与给定对象相等的预先存在的模型。 如果控件中不存在任何模型，则会添加它们。 Collection of objects to be updated/added 此方法将导致重新排序列表。 null值将被静默忽略。 此方法是线程安全的。 此方法仅适用于ObjectListViews和FastObjectListViews。 更改当前模型对象上对INotifyPropertyChanged事件的任何订阅， 以便我们不再侦听旧模型上的事件，而侦听给定集合上的事件。 This does nothing if UseNotifyPropertyChanged is false. 获取或设置ObjectListView是否应订阅它给定的模型对象上的INotifyPropertyChanged事件。 这应该在调用SetObjects()之前设置。如果将其设置为False，ObjectListView将取消订阅所有当前模型对象。 如果在虚拟列表上将其设置为true，ObjectListView将遍历列表中尝试订阅更改通知的所有对象。 如果您的虚拟列表中有10,000,000个项目，这可能需要一些时间。 Subscribe to INotifyPropertyChanges on the given collection of objects. Unsubscribe from INotifyPropertyChanges on the given collection of objects. If the given collection is null, unsubscribe from all current subscriptions Return a byte array that represents the current state of the ObjectListView, such that the state can be restored by RestoreState() The state of an ObjectListView includes the attributes that the user can modify: current view (i.e. Details, Tile, Large Icon...) sort column and direction column order column widths column visibility It does not include selection or the scroll position. A byte array representing the state of the ObjectListView Restore the state of the control from the given string, which must have been produced by SaveState() A byte array returned from SaveState() Returns true if the state was restored Instances of this class are used to store the state of an ObjectListView. The application is idle. Trigger a SelectionChanged event. The application is idle. Handle the column resizing event. Handle the BeginScroll listview notification True if the event was completely handled Handle the EndScroll listview notification True if the event was completely handled Handle the LinkClick listview notification True if the event was completely handled The cell tooltip control wants information about the tool tip that it should show. Allow the HeaderControl to call back into HandleHeaderToolTipShowing without making that method public The header tooltip control wants information about the tool tip that it should show. Event handler for the column click event Override the basic message pump for this control Handle the search for item m if possible. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled The user wants to see the context menu. The windows m A bool indicating if this m has been handled We want to ignore context menu requests that are triggered by right clicks on the header Handle the Custom draw series of notifications The message True if the message has been handled Handle the underlying control being destroyed Handle the search for item m if possible. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Find the first row after the given start in which the text value in the comparison column begins with the given text. The comparison column is column 0, unless IsSearchOnSortColumn is true, in which case the current sort column is used. The text to be prefix matched The index of the first row to consider Which direction should be searched? The index of the first row that matched, or -1 The text comparison is a case-insensitive, prefix match. The search will search the every row until a match is found, wrapping at the end if needed. Find the first row in the given range of rows that prefix matches the string value of the given column. 是否只匹配开头 The index of the matched row, or -1 Find the first row in the given range of rows that prefix matches the string value of the given column. The index of the matched row, or -1 Handle the Group Info series of notifications The message True if the message has been handled Handle a key down message True if the msg has been handled Toggle the checkedness of the selected rows Actually, this doesn't actually toggle all rows. It toggles the first row, and all other rows get the check state of that first row. This is actually a much more useful behaviour. If no rows are selected, this method does nothing. Catch the Left Button down event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a left mouse down at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the Left Button up event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Trigger a GroupExpandCollapse event and return true if the action was cancelled Catch the Right Button down event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a left mouse down at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the Left Button double click event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a mouse double click at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the right Button double click event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle a right mouse double click at the given hit test location Subclasses can override this to do something unique True if the message has been handled Catch the MouseMove event. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Handle notifications that have been reflected back from the parent window The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled In the notification messages, we handle attempts to change the width of our columns The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled Create a ToolTipControl to manage the tooltip control used by the listview control Update the handle used by our cell tooltip to be the tooltip used by the underlying Windows listview control. Handle the WM_PAINT event Return true if the msg has been handled and nothing further should be done Perform any steps needed before painting the control Perform any steps needed after painting the control Handle the window position changing. The m to be processed bool to indicate if the msg has been handled The user has right clicked on the column headers. Do whatever is required Return true if this event has been handle Show a menu that is appropriate when the given column header is clicked. The index of the header that was clicked. This can be -1, indicating that the header was clicked outside of a column Where should the menu be shown True if a menu was displayed Create the menu that should be displayed when the user right clicks on the given column header. Index of the column that was right clicked. This can be negative, which indicates a click outside of any header. The toolstrip that should be displayed The user has right clicked on the column headers. Do whatever is required Return true if this event has been handle Show a popup menu at the given point which will allow the user to choose which columns are visible on this listview Where should the menu be placed Show a popup menu at the given point which will allow the user to choose which columns are visible on this listview Where should the menu be placed 获取或设置要用于升序排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于降序排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于锁定分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于不锁定分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于关闭分组命令的文本 获取或设置要用于不排序命令的文本 获取或设置要用于列描述的文本 获取或设置要用于选择列描述的文本 Gets or sets the image that will be place next to the Sort Ascending command Gets or sets the image that will be placed next to the Sort Descending command Append the column selection menu items to the given menu strip. The menu to which the items will be added. Return the menu to which the items were added Append the column selection menu items to the given menu strip. The menu to which the items will be added. Return the menu to which the items were added Create the menu items that will allow columns to be choosen and add them to the given collection Create a Filtering menu Override the OnColumnReordered method to do what we want When the column widths are changing, resize the space filling columns When the column widths change, resize the space filling columns When the size of the control changes, we have to resize our space filling columns. Resize our space filling columns so they fill any unoccupied width in the control Resize our space filling columns so they fill any unoccupied width in the control Check all rows Check the checkbox in the given column header If the given columns header check box is linked to the cell check boxes, then checkboxes in all cells will also be checked. Mark the checkbox in the given column header as having an indeterminate value Mark the given object as indeterminate check state The model object to be marked indeterminate Mark the given object as checked in the list The model object to be checked Mark the given objects as checked in the list The model object to be checked Put a check into the check box at the given cell Put an indeterminate check into the check box at the given cell Return true of the given object is checked The model object whose checkedness is returned Is the given object checked? If the given object is not in the list, this method returns false. Return true of the given object is indeterminately checked The model object whose checkedness is returned Is the given object indeterminately checked? If the given object is not in the list, this method returns false. Is there a check at the check box at the given cell Get the checkedness of an object from the model. Returning null means the model does not know and the value from the control will be used. Record the change of checkstate for the given object in the model. This does not update the UI -- only the model The check state that was recorded and that should be used to update the control. Change the check state of the given object to be the given state. If the given model object isn't in the list, we still try to remember its state, in case it is referenced in the future. True if the checkedness of the model changed Toggle the checkedness of the given object. A checked object becomes unchecked; an unchecked or indeterminate object becomes checked. If the list has tristate checkboxes, the order is: unchecked -> checked -> indeterminate -> unchecked ... The model object to be checked Toggle the checkbox in the header of the given column Obviously, this is only useful if the column actually has a header checkbox. Toggle the check at the check box of the given cell Uncheck all rows Mark the given object as unchecked in the list The model object to be unchecked Mark the given objects as unchecked in the list The model object to be checked Uncheck the checkbox in the given column header Uncheck the check at the given cell 返回给定索引处的列 Index of the column to be returned An OLVColumn 返回给定标题处的列,如果有多个符合要求的标题,则默认只返回第一个 要返回的列的名称 An OLVColumn 返回给定视图可见的列的集合。只有Tile和Details有列；所有其他视图都有0列。 正在为哪个视图计算列？ A list of columns 返回列表中的项目数 列表中的项目数 如果安装了筛选器，这将返回与筛选器匹配的项目数。 返回给定索引处的项 Index of the item to be returned An OLVListItem 返回给定索引处的模型对象 Index of the model object to be returned A model object 找出在给定的坐标下的行和列 X 坐标 Y 坐标 给定点下的列项 在给定坐标点下的行项。可以为null。 返回给定索引/列的子项 Index of the item to be returned Index of the subitem to be returned An OLVListSubItem 滚动列表视图，使给定组位于顶部。 The group to be revealed 如果该组可见，如果可能，列表仍将滚动以将该组移至顶部。 这只在列表显示分组时才有效(显然)。 这在虚拟列表上不起作用，因为虚拟列表不使用ListViewGroups进行分组。使用 代替. 使给定的模型对象可见 The model object to be revealed 返回选定行的模型对象，如果没有选择或有多个选择，则返回null Model object or null 返回选定行的模型对象，如果没有选择，则返回空集合 ArrayList 返回选中行的模型对象；如果未选中行或选中多行，则返回NULL Model object or null 使用 CheckedObject 属性代替本方法 获取选中的模型对象的集合。 使用 CheckedObjects 属性代替本方法 在列表视图中查找给定的模型对象并返回其索引 The model object to be found The index of the object. -1 means the object was not present Rebuild the given ListViewItem with the data from its associated model. This method does not resort or regroup the view. It simply updates the displayed data of the given item Rebuild the data on the row that is showing the given object. This method does not resort or regroup the view. The given object is *not* used as the source of data for the rebuild. It is only used to locate the matching model in the collection, then that matching model is used as the data source. This distinction is only important in model classes that have overridden the Equals() method. If you want the given model object to replace the pre-existing model, use . Update the rows that are showing the given objects This method does not resort or regroup the view. This method can safely be called from background threads. 更新选定的行 This method does not resort or regroup the view. 除任何当前选择外，还选择显示给定模型对象的行。 The object to be selected Use the property to deselect all other rows 除任何当前选择外，还选择显示给定模型对象的行。 The object to be selected 对象是否也应该被聚焦 Use the property to deselect all other rows 选择显示任意给定模型对象的行。取消选择所有其他行。 A collection of model objects 获取或设置是否冻结列表视图。当列表视图被冻结时，它不会自我更新。 Frozen属性与Freeze()/UnFreeze()方法类似， 不同之处在于将Frozen属性设置为False会立即解冻控件， 而不管有多少未完成的Freeze()调用。 objectListView1.Frozen = false; // unfreeze the control now! 冻结列表视图，使其不再自我更新。 Freeze()/Unfreeze() calls nest correctly 解冻列表视图。如果此调用是最外层的unFreeze()，则将重新构建listview的内容。 Freeze()/Unfreeze() calls nest correctly 在冻结列表视图时执行所需的实际工作 解冻列表视图时执行所需的实际工作 如果选择事件当前挂起，则返回TRUE。在挂起选择事件时，不会引发SelectedIndexChanged或SelectionChanged事件。 Suspend selection events until a matching ResumeSelectionEvents() is called. Calls to this method nest correctly. Every call to SuspendSelectionEvents() must have a matching ResumeSelectionEvents(). Resume raising selection events. Returns a disposable that will disable selection events during a using() block. Implementation only class that suspends and resumes selection events on instance creation and disposal. 按最后一个排序列和顺序对项目进行排序 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列的名称 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列的索引 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 其值将用于排序的列 按给定列中的值和上次排序顺序对列表视图中的项进行排序 The column whose values will be used for the sorting. If null, the first column will be used. The ordering to be used for sorting. If this is None, this.Sorting and then SortOrder.Ascending will be used If ShowGroups is true, the rows will be grouped by the given column. If AlwaysGroupsByColumn is not null, the rows will be grouped by that column, and the rows within each group will be sorted by the given column. Put a sort indicator next to the text of the sort column Put a sort indicator next to the text of the given given column The column to be marked The sort order in effect on that column The name of the image used when a column is sorted ascending This image is only used on pre-XP systems. System images are used for XP and later The name of the image used when a column is sorted descending This image is only used on pre-XP systems. System images are used for XP and later If the sort indicator images don't already exist, this method will make and install them Remove any sorting and revert to the given order of the model objects Do the actual work of creating the given list of groups For some reason, UseItemStyleForSubItems doesn't work for the colors when owner drawing the list, so we have to specifically give each subitem the desired colors The item whose subitems are to be corrected Cells drawn via BaseRenderer don't need this, but it is needed when an owner drawn cell uses DrawDefault=true Fill in the given OLVListItem with values of the given row the OLVListItem that is to be stuff with values the model object from which values will be taken Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. Convert the given image selector to an index into our image list. Return -1 if that's not possible Index of the image in the imageList, or -1 Return the tooltip that should be shown when the mouse is hovered over the given column The column index whose tool tip is to be fetched A string or null if no tool tip is to be shown 返回当鼠标悬停在给定单元格上时应显示的工具提示 The column index whose tool tip is to be fetched The row index whose tool tip is to be fetched A string or null if no tool tip is to be shown 返回显示给定模型对象的OLVListItem The modelObject whose item is to be found The OLVListItem that displays the model, or null This method has O(n) performance. Do the work required after the items in a listview have been created Do the work required after one item in a listview have been created 准备列表视图以显示交替的行背景色 We cannot rely on lvi.Index in this method. In a straight list, lvi.Index is the display index, and can be used to determine whether the row should be colored. But when organised by groups, lvi.Index is not useable because it still refers to the position in the overall list, not the display order. Setup all subitem images on all rows 告诉基础列表控件针对子项显示哪些图像 the index at which the item occurs the item whose subitems are to be set Tell the underlying list control which images to show against the subitems the index at which the item occurs the item whose subitems are to be set will existing images be cleared if no new image is provided? Set the subitem image natively Take ownership of the 'objects' collection. This separats our collection from the source. This method separates the 'objects' instance variable from its source, so that any AddObject/RemoveObject calls will modify our collection and not the original colleciton. This method has the intentional side-effect of converting our list of objects to an ArrayList. 触发给定项目的FormatRow和可能的FormatCell事件 触发给定项目的FormatCell事件 Make the list forget everything -- all rows and all columns Use if you want to remove just the rows. Update our externally visible image list so it holds the same images as our shadow list, but sized correctly Return a copy of the given source image list, where each image has been resized to be height x height in size. If source is null, an empty image list of the given size is returned Height and width of the new images Height and width of the new images Source of the images (can be null) A new image list Return a bitmap of the given height x height, which shows the given image, centred. Height and width of new bitmap Height and width of new bitmap Image to be centred The background color A new bitmap Initialize the state image list with the required checkbox images The name of the image used when a check box is checked The name of the image used when a check box is unchecked The name of the image used when a check box is Indeterminate Setup this control so it can display check boxes on subitems (or primary checkboxes in virtual mode) This gives the ListView a small image list, if it doesn't already have one. Make sure the small image list for this control has checkbox images (used for sub-item checkboxes). This gives the ListView a small image list, if it doesn't already have one. ObjectListView has to manage checkboxes on subitems separate from the checkboxes on each row. The underlying ListView knows about the per-row checkboxes, and to make them work, OLV has to correctly configure the StateImageList. However, the ListView cannot do checkboxes in subitems, so ObjectListView has to handle them in a differnt fashion. So, per-row checkboxes are controlled by images in the StateImageList, but per-cell checkboxes are handled by images in the SmallImageList. Owner draw the column header Owner draw the item Owner draw a single subitem We need the click count in the mouse up event, but that is always 1. So we have to remember the click count from the preceding mouse down event. When the mouse leaves the control, remove any hot item highlighting When the mouse moves, we might need to change the hot item. Check to see if we need to start editing a cell Tell the world that a hyperlink was clicked and if the event isn't handled, do the default processing. Do the default processing for a hyperlink clicked event, which is to try and open the url. The user right clicked on the control This method is called every time a row is selected or deselected. This can be a pain if the user shift-clicks 100 rows. We override this method so we can trigger one event for any number of select/deselects that come from one user action Called when the handle of the underlying control is created This method is called after the control has been fully created. Should we start editing the cell in response to the given mouse button event? Handle a key press on this control. We specifically look for F2 which edits the primary column, or a Tab character during an edit operation, which tries to start editing on the next (or previous) cell. Start an editing operation on the first editable column of the given model. If the model doesn't exist, or there are no editable columns, this method will do nothing. This will start an edit operation regardless of CellActivationMode. Begin an edit operation on the given cell. This performs various sanity checks and passes off the real work to StartCellEdit(). The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited Really start an edit operation on a given cell. The parameters are assumed to be sane. The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column, when the listview is being owner drawn. A rectangle that is the bounds of the cell editor Calculate the bounds of the edit control for the given item/column, when the listview is not being owner drawn. A rectangle that is the bounds of the cell editor Try to give the given value to the provided control. Fall back to assigning a string if the value assignment fails. A control The value to be given to the control The string to be given if the value doesn't work Setup the given control to be a cell editor Return the value that the given control is showing Called when the cell editor could be about to lose focus. Time to commit the change Return the bounds of the given cell The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Rectangle Return the bounds of the given cell only until the edge of the current text The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Rectangle Calculate the visible bounds of the given column. The column's bottom edge is either the bottom of the last row or the bottom of the control. The bounds of the control itself The column A Rectangle This returns an empty rectnage if the control isn't in Details mode, OR has doesn't have any rows, OR if the given column is hidden. Return a control that can be used to edit the value of the given cell. The row to be edited The index of the cell to be edited A Control to edit the given cell Get the first non-null value of the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The first non-null value, or null if no non-null values were found Return a TextBox that can be used as a default cell editor. What column does the cell belong to? Configure the given text box to autocomplete unique values from the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The textbox to configure The column used to calculate values Configure the given text box to autocomplete unique values from the given column. At most 1000 rows will be considered. The textbox to configure The column used to calculate values Consider only this many rows Stop editing a cell and throw away any changes. If a cell edit is in progress, finish the edit. Returns false if the finishing process was cancelled (i.e. the cell editor is still on screen) This method does not guarantee that the editing will finish. The validation process can cause the finishing to be aborted. Developers should check the return value or use IsCellEditing property after calling this method to see if the user is still editing a cell. If a cell edit is in progress, finish the edit. Returns false if the finishing process was cancelled (i.e. the cell editor is still on screen) This method does not guarantee that the editing will finish. The validation process can cause the finishing to be aborted. Developers should check the return value or use IsCellEditing property after calling this method to see if the user is still editing a cell. True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing Finish the cell edit operation, writing changed data back to the model object This method does not trigger a Validating event, so it always finishes the cell edit. Finish the cell edit operation, writing changed data back to the model object This method does not trigger a Validating event, so it always finishes the cell edit. True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing Remove all trace of any existing cell edit operation True if it is likely that another cell is going to be edited immediately after this cell finishes editing True if the cell editor should be disposed Force the hot item to be recalculated Force the hot item to be recalculated The mouse has moved to the given pt. See if the hot item needs to be updated Where is the mouse? This is the main entry point for hot item handling The mouse has moved to the given pt. See if the hot item needs to be updated This is the main entry point for hot item handling Update the given row using the current hot item information Update the given row using the given hot item information Apply a style to the given row Apply a style to a cell Remove hot item styling from the given row Add the given decoration to those on this list and make it appear The decoration A decoration scrolls with the listview. An overlay stays fixed in place. Add the given overlay to those on this list and make it appear The overlay Draw all the decorations A Graphics The items that were redrawn and whose decorations should also be redrawn Is the given decoration shown on this list The overlay Is the given overlay shown on this list? The overlay Hide any overlays. This is only a temporary hiding -- the overlays will be shown the next time the ObjectListView redraws. Create and configure the empty list msg overlay Initialize the standard image and text overlays Make sure that any overlays are visible. Refresh the display of the overlays Refresh the display of just one overlays Remove the given decoration from this list The decoration to remove Remove the given overlay to those on this list The overlay 创建一个筛选器，该筛选器将执行当前安装在可见列上的所有筛选。 Do the actual work of filtering 删除所有列筛选。 根据每列中定义的值筛选更新此ObjectListView的筛选 When some setting related to filtering changes, this method is called. 使用当前安装的模型过滤器更新所有渲染器 获取给定模型的复选框状态。 The model 模型的复选框状态。默认为未选中。 设置给定模型对象的复选框状态 The model to be remembered The model's checkedness The state given to the method 忽略任何持久复选框状态 The callbacks for CellEditing events this We could replace this with EventHandler<CellEditEventArgs> but that would break all cell editing event code from v1.x. A TreeListView combines an expandable tree structure with list view columns. To support tree operations, two delegates must be provided: CanExpandGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return a boolean indicating if that model should be expandable. ChildrenGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return an IEnumerable of model objects that will be displayed as children of the parent model. This delegate will only be called for a model object if the CanExpandGetter has already returned true for that model. ParentGetter This delegate must accept a model object and return the parent model. This delegate will only be called when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true OR when Reveal() is called. The top level branches of the tree are set via the Roots property. SetObjects(), AddObjects() and RemoveObjects() are interpreted as operations on this collection of roots. To add new children to an existing branch, make changes to your model objects and then call RefreshObject() on the parent. The tree must be a directed acyclic graph -- no cycles are allowed. Put more mundanely, each model object must appear only once in the tree. If the same model object appears in two places in the tree, the control will become confused. This event is triggered when user input requests the expansion of a list item. This event is triggered when user input requests the collapse of a list item. This event is triggered after the expansion of a list item due to user input. This event is triggered after the collapse of a list item due to user input. Trigger the expanding event Trigger the collapsing event Trigger the expanded event Trigger the collapsed event This class handles drawing the tree structure of the primary column. Create a TreeRenderer Should the renderer draw glyphs at the expansion points? The expansion points will still function to expand/collapse even if this is false. Should the renderer draw lines connecting siblings? Return the pen that will be used to draw the lines between branches Should the renderer draw triangles as the expansion glyphs? This looks best with ShowLines = false Return the branch that the renderer is currently drawing. Return the TreeListView for which the renderer is being used. How many pixels will be reserved for each level of indentation? The real work of drawing the tree is done in this method Draw the expansion indicator Gets whether or not we should render using styles Draw the expansion indicator using styles Is the mouse over a checkbox in this cell? Draw the expansion indicator without using styles Draw the lines of the tree Do the hit test Calculate the edit rect Make a default TreeListView This is the delegate that will be used to decide if a model object can be expanded. This is called *often* -- on every mouse move when required. It must be fast. Don't do database lookups, linear searches, or pi calculations. Just return the value of a property. When this delegate is called, the TreeListView is not in a stable state. Don't make calls back into the control. Gets whether or not this listview is capable of showing groups This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the children of a model object This delegate will only be called if the CanExpand delegate has returned true for the model object. When this delegate is called, the TreeListView is not in a stable state. Don't do anything that will result in calls being made back into the control. This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the parent of a model object The parent of the given model, or null if the model doesn't exist or if the model is a root Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivalent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. When getting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects. When setting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects plus the number of objects to be checked. If the ListView is not currently showing CheckBoxes, this property does nothing. It does not remember any check box settings made. Gets or sets the model objects that are expanded. This can be used to expand model objects before they are seen. Setting this does *not* force the control to rebuild its display. You need to call RebuildAll(true). Gets or sets the filter that is applied to our whole list of objects. TreeListViews do not currently support whole list filters. Gets or sets whether this tree list view will display hierarchical checkboxes. Hierarchical checkboxes is when a parent's "checkedness" is calculated from the "checkedness" of its children. If all children are checked, the parent will be checked. If all children are unchecked, the parent will also be unchecked. If some children are checked and others are not, the parent will be indeterminate. Hierarchical checkboxes don't work with either CheckStateGetters or CheckedAspectName (which is basically the same thing). This is because it is too expensive to build the initial state of the control if these are installed, since the control would have to walk *every* branch recursively since a single bottom level leaf could change the checkedness of the top root. Gets or sets the collection of root objects of the tree Gets the collection of objects that will be considered when creating clusters (which are used to generate Excel-like column filters) After expanding a branch, should the TreeListView attempts to show as much of the revealed descendents as possible. The model objects that form the top level branches of the tree. Setting this does NOT reset the state of the control. In particular, it does not collapse branches. Make sure that at least one column is displaying a tree. If no columns is showing the tree, make column 0 do it. Gets or sets the renderer that will be used to draw the tree structure. Setting this to null resets the renderer to default. If a column is currently rendering the tree, the renderer for that column will be replaced. If no column is rendering the tree, column 0 will be given this renderer. This is the delegate that will be used to create the underlying Tree structure that the TreeListView uses to manage the information about the tree. The factory must not return null. Most users of TreeListView will never have to use this delegate. Should a wait cursor be shown when a branch is being expanded? When this is true, the wait cursor will be shown whilst the children of the branch are being fetched. If the children of the branch have already been cached, the cursor will not change. Gets the model that is used to manage the tree structure Don't mess with this property unless you really know what you are doing. If you don't already know what it's for, you don't need it. Return true if the branch at the given model is expanded Collapse the subtree underneath the given model Collapse all subtrees within this control Remove all items from this list This method can safely be called from background threads. Collapse all roots and forget everything we know about all models Expand the subtree underneath the given model object Expand all the branches within this tree recursively. Be careful: this method could take a long time for large trees. Completely rebuild the tree structure If true, the control will try to preserve selection and expansion Completely rebuild the tree structure If not null, this list of objects will be selected after the tree is rebuilt If not null, this collection of objects will be expanded after the tree is rebuilt If not null, this collection of objects will be checked after the tree is rebuilt Unroll all the ancestors of the given model and make sure it is then visible. This works best when a ParentGetter is installed. The object to be revealed If true, the model will be selected and focused after being revealed True if the object was found and revealed. False if it was not found. Update the rows that are showing the given objects Change the check state of the given object to be the given state. If the given model object isn't in the list, we still try to remember its state, in case it is referenced in the future. True if the checkedness of the model changed Toggle the expanded state of the branch at the given model object Return whether or not the given model can expand. The given model must have already been seen in the tree Return the model object that is the parent of the given model object. The given model must have already been seen in the tree. Return the collection of model objects that are the children of the given model as they exist in the tree at the moment. This method returns the collection of children as the tree knows them. If the given model has never been presented to the user (e.g. it belongs to a parent that has never been expanded), then this method will return an empty collection. Because of this, if you want to traverse the whole tree, this is not the method to use. It's better to traverse the your data model directly. If the given model has not already been seen in the tree or if it is not expandable, an empty collection will be returned. Delegates of this type are use to decide if the given model object can be expanded The model under consideration Can the given model be expanded? Delegates of this type are used to fetch the children of the given model object The parent whose children should be fetched An enumerable over the children Delegates of this type are used to fetch the parent of the given model object. The child whose parent should be fetched The parent of the child or null if the child is a root Delegates of this type are used to create a new underlying Tree structure. The view for which the Tree is being created A subclass of Tree Handle a left button down event Create a OLVListItem for given row index The index of the row that is needed An OLVListItem This differs from the base method by also setting up the IndentCount property. Reinitialize the Tree structure Recalculate the state of the checkboxes of all the items in the given list and their ancestors. This only makes sense when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true. Recalculate the hierarchy state of the given item and its ancestors This only makes sense when HierarchicalCheckboxes is true. Yield the unique ancestors of the given collection of objects. The order of the ancestors is guaranteed to be deeper objects first. Roots will always be last. Unique ancestors of the given objects Return all the ancestors of the given model This uses ParentGetter if possible. If the given model is a root OR if the model doesn't exist, the collection will be empty The model whose ancestors should be calculated Return a collection of ancestors of the given model. The application is idle and a SelectionChanged event has been scheduled Decide if the given key event should be handled as a normal key input to the control? Handle focus being lost, including making sure that the whole control is redrawn. Handle the keyboard input to mimic a TreeView. Was the key press handled? A Tree object represents a tree structure data model that supports both tree and flat list operations as well as fast access to branches. If you create a subclass of Tree, you must install it in the TreeListView via the TreeFactory delegate. Create a Tree This is the delegate that will be used to decide if a model object can be expanded. This is the delegate that will be used to fetch the children of a model object This delegate will only be called if the CanExpand delegate has returned true for the model object. Get or return the top level model objects in the tree What tree view is this Tree the model for? Collapse the subtree underneath the given model The model to be collapsed. If the model isn't in the tree, or if it is already collapsed, the command does nothing. The index of the model in flat list version of the tree Collapse all branches in this tree Nothing useful Expand the subtree underneath the given model object The model to be expanded. The index of the model in flat list version of the tree If the model isn't in the tree, if it cannot be expanded or if it is already expanded, the command does nothing. Expand all branches in this tree Return the index of the first branch that was expanded Return the Branch object that represents the given model in the tree The model whose branches is to be returned The branch that represents the given model, or null if the model isn't in the tree. Return the number of visible descendents that are below the given model. The model whose descendent count is to be returned The number of visible descendents. 0 if the model doesn't exist or is collapsed Rebuild the children of the given model, refreshing any cached information held about the given object The index of the model in flat list version of the tree Is the given model expanded? Remember whether or not the given model was expanded Insert the children of the given branch into the given position The branch whose children should be inserted The index where the children should be inserted Rebuild our flat internal list of objects. Rebuild our reverse index that maps an object to its location in the filteredObjectList array. Create a new branch within this tree Sort the tree on the given column and in the given order Add the given collection of objects to the roots of this tree Remove all of the given objects from the roots of the tree. Any objects that is not already in the roots collection is ignored. Set the roots of this tree to be the given collection Update/replace the nth object with the given object Is this list currently being filtered? Should the given model be included in this control? The model to consider True if it will be included A Branch represents a sub-tree within a tree Indicators for branches FirstBranch of tree LastChild of parent OnlyBranch of tree Create a Branch Get the ancestor branches of this branch, with the 'oldest' ancestor first. Can this branch be expanded? Gets or sets our children Get/set the model objects that are beneath this branch Gets a list of all the branches that survive filtering Gets or set whether this branch is expanded Return true if this branch is the first branch of the entire tree Return true if this branch is the last child of its parent Return true if this branch is the only top level branch Gets the depth level of this branch Gets or sets which model is represented by this branch Return the number of descendents of this branch that are currently visible Gets or sets our parent branch Gets or sets our overall tree Is this branch currently visible? A branch is visible if it has no parent (i.e. it's a root), or its parent is visible and expanded. Clear any cached information that this branch is holding Collapse this branch Expand this branch Expand this branch recursively Collapse all branches in this tree Nothing useful Fetch the children of this branch. This should only be called when CanExpand is true. Collapse the visible descendents of this branch into list of model objects Flatten this branch's visible descendents onto the given list. The branch itself is not included in the list. Force a refresh of all children recursively Sort the sub-branches and their descendents so they are ordered according to the given comparer. The comparer that orders the branches This class sorts branches according to how their respective model objects are sorted Create a BranchComparer Order the two branches Let the world know that a cell edit operation is beginning or ending Create an event args Change this to true to cancel the cell editing operation. During the CellEditStarting event, setting this to true will prevent the cell from being edited. During the CellEditFinishing event, if this value is already true, this indicates that the user has cancelled the edit operation and that the handler should perform cleanup only. Setting this to true, will prevent the ObjectListView from trying to write the new value into the model object. During the CellEditStarting event, this can be modified to be the control that you want to edit the value. You must fully configure the control before returning from the event, including its bounds and the value it is showing. During the CellEditFinishing event, you can use this to get the value that the user entered and commit that value to the model. Changing the control during the finishing event has no effect. The column of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The model object of the row of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The listview item of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The data value of the cell as it stands in the control. Only validate during Validating and Finishing events. The index of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. The data value of the cell before the edit operation began. The bounds of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. Gets or sets whether the control used for editing should be auto matically disposed when the cell edit operation finishes. Defaults to true If the control is expensive to create, you might want to cache it and reuse for for various cells. If so, you don't want ObjectListView to dispose of the control automatically Event blocks for events that can be cancelled Has this event been cancelled by the event handler? BeforeSorting Create BeforeSortingEventArgs Create BeforeSortingEventArgs Did the event handler already do the sorting for us? What column will be used for grouping How will groups be ordered What column will be used for sorting What order will be used for sorting. None means no sorting. What column will be used for secondary sorting? What order will be used for secondary sorting? Sorting has just occurred. Create a AfterSortingEventArgs Create a AfterSortingEventArgs What column was used for grouping? What ordering was used for grouping? What column was used for sorting? What ordering was used for sorting? What column was used for secondary sorting? What order was used for secondary sorting? This event is triggered when the contents of a list have changed and we want the world to have a chance to filter the list. Create a FilterEventArgs Gets or sets what objects are being filtered Gets or sets what objects survived the filtering This event is triggered after the items in the list have been changed, either through SetObjects, AddObjects or RemoveObjects. Create a ItemsChangedEventArgs Constructor for this event when used by a virtual list Gets how many items were in the list before it changed Gets how many objects are in the list after the change. This event is triggered by AddObjects before any change has been made to the list. Create an ItemsAddingEventArgs Create an ItemsAddingEventArgs Gets or sets where the collection is going to be inserted. Gets or sets the objects to be added to the list This event is triggered by SetObjects before any change has been made to the list. When used with a virtual list, OldObjects will always be null. Create ItemsChangingEventArgs Gets the objects that were in the list before it change. For virtual lists, this will always be null. Gets or sets the objects that will be in the list after it changes. This event is triggered by RemoveObjects before any change has been made to the list. Create an ItemsRemovingEventArgs Gets or sets the objects that will be removed Triggered after the user types into a list Create an AfterSearchingEventArgs Gets the string that was actually searched for Gets or sets whether an the event handler already handled this event Gets the index of the row that was selected by the search. -1 means that no row was matched Triggered when the user types into a list Create BeforeSearchingEventArgs Gets or sets the string that will be found by the search routine Modifying this value does not modify the memory of what the user has typed. When the user next presses a character, the search string will revert to what the user has actually typed. Gets or sets the index of the first row that will be considered to matching. The parameter block when telling the world about a cell based event Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell This is null for events triggered by the header. Gets the row index of the cell This is -1 for events triggered by the header. Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the location of the mouse at the time of the event Gets the state of the modifier keys at the time of the event Gets the item of the cell Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view and for event triggered by the header Gets the HitTest object that determined which cell was hit Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Tells the world that a cell was clicked Gets or sets the number of clicks associated with this event Tells the world that a cell was right clicked Gets or sets the menu that should be displayed as a result of this event. The menu will be positioned at Location, so changing that property changes where the menu will be displayed. Tell the world that the mouse is over a given cell Tells the world that the frozen-ness of the ObjectListView has changed. Make a FreezeEventArgs How frozen is the control? 0 means that the control is unfrozen, more than 0 indicates froze. The parameter block when telling the world that a tool tip is about to be shown. Gets the tooltip control that is triggering the tooltip event Gets or sets the text should be shown on the tooltip for this event Setting this to empty or null prevents any tooltip from showing In what direction should the text for this tooltip be drawn? Should the tooltip for this event been shown in bubble style? This doesn't work reliable under Vista What color should be used for the background of the tooltip Setting this does nothing under Vista What color should be used for the foreground of the tooltip Setting this does nothing under Vista What string should be used as the title for the tooltip for this event? Which standard icon should be used for the tooltip for this event How many milliseconds should the tooltip remain before it automatically disappears. What font should be used to draw the text of the tooltip? Common information to all hyperlink events Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell Gets the row index of the cell Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the item of the cell Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the model object under the cell Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the text of the cell Gets or sets whether or not this cell is a hyperlink. Defaults to true for enabled rows and false for disabled rows. Gets or sets the url that should be invoked when this cell is clicked. Setting this to None or String.Empty means that this cell is not a hyperlink Gets the ObjectListView that is the source of the event Gets the item of the cell Gets the model object under the cell Gets the row index of the cell Gets the display index of the row Should events be triggered for each cell in this row? Parameter block for FormatCellEvent Gets the column index of the cell This is -1 when the view is not in details view. Gets the column of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view. Gets the subitem of the cell This is null when the view is not in details view Gets the model value that is being displayed by the cell. This is null when the view is not in details view The event args when a hyperlink is clicked Gets the url that was associated with this cell. The event args when the check box in a column header is changing Get the column whose checkbox is changing Get or set the new state that should be used by the column The event args when the hot item changed Gets or set if this event completelely handled. If it was, no further processing will be done for it. Gets the part of the cell that the mouse is over Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse is currently over Gets the index of the column that the mouse is over In non-details view, this will always be 0. Gets the index of the row that the mouse is over Gets the group that the mouse is over Gets the part of the cell that the mouse used to be over Gets an extended indication of the part of item/subitem/group that the mouse used to be over Gets the index of the column that the mouse used to be over Gets the index of the row that the mouse used to be over Gets the group that the mouse used to be over Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 Let the world know that a checkbox on a subitem is changing Create a new event block The column of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The model object of the row of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The listview item of the cell that is having its checkbox changed. The current check state of the cell. The proposed new check state of the cell. The index of the cell that is going to be or has been edited. This event argument block is used when groups are created for a list. Create a CreateGroupsEventArgs Gets the settings that control the creation of groups Gets or sets the groups that should be used Has this event been cancelled by the event handler? This event argument block is used when the text of a group task is clicked Create a GroupTaskClickedEventArgs Gets which group was clicked This event argument block is used when a group is about to expand or collapse Create a GroupExpandingCollapsingEventArgs Gets which group is expanding/collapsing Gets whether this event is going to expand the group. If this is false, the group must be collapsing. This event argument block is used when the state of group has changed (collapsed, selected) Create a GroupStateChangedEventArgs Gets whether the group was collapsed by this event Gets whether the group was focused by this event Gets whether the group was selected by this event Gets whether the group was uncollapsed by this event Gets whether the group was unfocused by this event Gets whether the group was unselected by this event Gets which group had its state changed Gets the previous state of the group Gets the new state of the group This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree is about to be expanded Create a new event args Gets the model that is about to expand. If null, all branches are going to be expanded. Gets the OLVListItem that is about to be expanded This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree has just been expanded Create a new event args Gets the model that is was expanded. If null, all branches were expanded. Gets the OLVListItem that was expanded This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree is about to be collapsed Create a new event args Gets the model that is about to collapse. If this is null, all models are going to collapse. Gets the OLVListItem that is about to be collapsed. Can be null This event argument block is used when a branch of a tree has just been collapsed Create a new event args Gets the model that is was collapsed. If null, all branches were collapsed Gets the OLVListItem that was collapsed This class contains all the settings used when groups are created Create a GroupingParameters Gets or sets the ObjectListView being grouped Gets or sets the column used to create groups In what order will the groups themselves be sorted? If this is set, this comparer will be used to order the groups If this is set, this comparer will be used to order items within each group Gets or sets the column that will be the primary sort Gets or sets the ordering for the primary sort Gets or sets the column used for secondary sorting Gets or sets the ordering for the secondary sort Gets or sets the title format used for groups with zero or more than one element Gets or sets the title format used for groups with only one element Gets or sets whether the items should be sorted by the primary column These values indicate what is the state of the group. These values are taken directly from the SDK and many are not used by ObjectListView. Normal Collapsed Hidden NoHeader Can be collapsed Has focus Is Selected Is subsetted Subset link has focus All styles This mask indicates which members of a LVGROUP have valid data. These values are taken directly from the SDK and many are not used by ObjectListView. No mask Group has header Group has footer Group has state pszSubtitle is valid pszTask is valid pszDescriptionTop is valid pszDescriptionBottom is valid iTitleImage is valid iExtendedImage is valid iFirstItem and cItems are valid pszSubsetTitle is valid readonly, cItems holds count of items in visible subset, iFirstItem is valid This mask indicates which members of a GROUPMETRICS structure are valid Instances of this class enhance the capabilities of a normal ListViewGroup, enabling the functionality that was released in v6 of the common controls. In this implementation (2009-09), these objects are essentially passive. Setting properties does not automatically change the associated group in the listview. Collapsed and Collapsible are two exceptions to this and give immediate results. This really should be a subclass of ListViewGroup, but that class is sealed (why is that?). So this class provides the same interface as a ListViewGroup, plus many other new properties. Create an OLVGroup 按指定标题创建分组 分组标题 Gets or sets the bottom description of the group Descriptions only appear when group is centered and there is a title image Gets or sets whether or not this group is collapsed Gets or sets whether or not this group can be collapsed Gets or sets some representation of the contents of this group This is user defined (like Tag) Gets whether this group has been created. Gets or sets the int or string that will select the extended image to be shown against the title Gets or sets the footer of the group Gets the internal id of our associated ListViewGroup. Gets or sets the header of the group Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of the group header Gets or sets the internally created id of the group Gets or sets ListViewItems that are members of this group Listener of the BeforeCreatingGroups event can populate this collection. It is only used on non-virtual lists. Gets or sets the key that was used to partition objects into this group This is user defined (like Tag) Gets the ObjectListView that this group belongs to If this is null, the group has not yet been created. Gets or sets the name of the group As of 2009-09-01, this property is not used. Gets or sets whether this group is focused Gets or sets whether this group is selected Gets or sets the text that will show that this group is subsetted As of WinSDK v7.0, subsetting of group is officially unimplemented. We can get around this using undocumented interfaces and may do so. Gets or set the subtitleof the task Gets or sets the value by which this group will be sorted. Gets or sets the state of the group Gets or sets which bits of State are valid Gets or sets whether this group is showing only a subset of its elements As of WinSDK v7.0, this property officially does nothing. Gets or sets the user-defined data attached to this group Gets or sets the task of this group This task is the clickable text that appears on the right margin of the group header. Gets or sets the int or string that will select the image to be shown against the title Gets or sets the top description of the group Descriptions only appear when group is centered and there is a title image Gets or sets the number of items that are within this group. This should only be used for virtual groups. Gets or sets the ListViewGroup that is shadowed by this group. For virtual groups, this will always be null. Calculate the index into the group image list of the given image selector Convert this object to a string representation Insert a native group into the underlying Windows control, *without* using a ListViewGroup This is used when creating virtual groups Insert a native group into the underlying control via a ListViewGroup Change the members of the group to match the current contents of Items, using a ListViewGroup Create a native LVGROUP structure that matches this group Get the current state of this group from the underlying control Get the current state of this group from the underlying control An instance of Munger gets a value from or puts a value into a target object. The property to be peeked (or poked) is determined from a string. The peeking or poking is done using reflection. Name of the aspect to be peeked can be a field, property or parameterless method. The name of an aspect to poke can be a field, writable property or single parameter method. Aspect names can be dotted to chain a series of references. Order.Customer.HomeAddress.State Create a do nothing Munger Create a Munger that works on the given aspect name The name of the A helper method to put the given value into the given aspect of the given object. This method catches and silently ignores any errors that occur while modifying the target object The object to be modified The name of the property/field to be modified The value to be assigned Did the modification work? Gets or sets whether Mungers will silently ignore missing aspect errors. By default, if a Munger is asked to fetch a field/property/method that does not exist from a model, it returns an error message, since that condition is normally a programming error. There are some use cases where this is not an error, and the munger should simply keep quiet. By default this is true during release builds. The name of the aspect that is to be peeked or poked. This name can be a field, property or parameter-less method. The name can be dotted, which chains references. If any link in the chain returns null, the entire chain is considered to return null. "DateOfBirth" "Owner.HomeAddress.Postcode" Extract the value indicated by our AspectName from the given target. If the aspect name is null or empty, this will return null. The object that will be peeked The value read from the target Extract the value indicated by our AspectName from the given target, raising exceptions if the munger fails. If the aspect name is null or empty, this will return null. The object that will be peeked The value read from the target Poke the given value into the given target indicated by our AspectName. If the AspectName is a dotted path, all the selectors bar the last are used to find the object that should be updated, and the last selector is used as the property to update on that object. So, if 'target' is a Person and the AspectName is "HomeAddress.Postcode", this method will first fetch "HomeAddress" property, and then try to set the "Postcode" property on the home address object. The object that will be poked The value that will be poked into the target bool indicating whether the put worked Gets the list of SimpleMungers that match our AspectName Convert a possibly dotted AspectName into a list of SimpleMungers Evaluate the given chain of SimpleMungers against an initial target. A SimpleMunger deals with a single property/field/method on its target. Munger uses a chain of these resolve a dotted aspect name. Create a SimpleMunger The name of the aspect that is to be peeked or poked. This name can be a field, property or method. When using a method to get a value, the method must be parameter-less. When using a method to set a value, the method must accept 1 parameter. It cannot be a dotted name. Get a value from the given target Poke the given value into the given target indicated by our AspectName. The object that will be poked The value that will be poked into the target bool indicating if the put worked These exceptions are raised when a munger finds something it cannot process Create a MungerException Get the munger that raised the exception Gets the target that threw the exception Wrapper for all native method calls on ListView controls Put an image under the ListView. The ListView must have its handle created before calling this. This doesn't work very well. Specifically, it doesn't play well with owner drawn, and grid lines are drawn over it. The image to be used as the background. If this is null, any existing background image will be cleared. If this is true, the image is pinned to the bottom right and does not scroll. The other parameters are ignored If this is true, the image will be tiled to fill the whole control background. The offset parameters will be ignored. If both watermark and tiled are false, this indicates the horizontal percentage where the image will be placed. 0 is absolute left, 100 is absolute right. If both watermark and tiled are false, this indicates the vertical percentage where the image will be placed. Flags controlling how the Image List item is drawn Draw item normally. Draw item transparently. Draw item blended with 25% of the specified foreground colour or the Highlight colour if no foreground colour specified. Draw item blended with 50% of the specified foreground colour or the Highlight colour if no foreground colour specified. Draw the icon's mask Draw the icon image without using the mask Draw the icon using the ROP specified. Preserves the alpha channel in dest. XP only. Scale the image to cx, cy instead of clipping it. XP only. Scale the image to the current DPI of the display. XP only. Enumeration containing XP ImageList Draw State options The image state is not modified. Adds a glow effect to the icon, which causes the icon to appear to glow with a given color around the edges. (Note: does not appear to be implemented) Adds a drop shadow effect to the icon. (Note: does not appear to be implemented) Saturates the icon by increasing each color component of the RGB triplet for each pixel in the icon. (Note: only ever appears to result in a completely unsaturated icon) Alpha blends the icon. Alpha blending controls the transparency level of an icon, according to the value of its alpha channel. (Note: does not appear to be implemented). Draws an image using the specified flags and state on XP systems. The image list from which an item will be drawn Device context to draw to Index of image to draw X Position to draw at Y Position to draw at Drawing flags Width to draw Height to draw State flags Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. The listview to send a m to Change the virtual list size of the given ListView (which must be in virtual mode) This will not change the scroll position The listview to send a message to How many rows should the list have? Make sure the ListView has the extended style that says to display subitem images. This method must be called after any .NET call that update the extended styles since they seem to erase this setting. The listview to send a m to Calculates the number of items that can fit vertically in the visible area of a list-view (which must be in details or list view. The listView Number of visible items per page For the given item and subitem, make it display the given image The listview to send a m to row number (0 based) subitem (0 is the item itself) index into the image list Setup the given column of the listview to show the given image to the right of the text. If the image index is -1, any previous image is cleared The listview to send a m to Index of the column to modifiy Index into the small image list Does this version of the operating system have builtin sort indicators? Are there builtin sort indicators XP and later have these Return the bounds of the update region on the given control. The BeginPaint() system call validates the update region, effectively wiping out this information. So this call has to be made before the BeginPaint() call. The control whose update region is be calculated A rectangle Validate an area of the given control. A validated area will not be repainted at the next redraw. The control to be validated The area of the control to be validated Select all rows on the given listview The listview whose items are to be selected Deselect all rows on the given listview The listview whose items are to be deselected Deselect a single row Set the item state on the given item The listview whose item's state is to be changed The index of the item to be changed Which bits of the value are to be set? The value to be set Scroll the given listview by the given deltas true if the scroll succeeded Return the handle to the header control on the given list The listview whose header control is to be returned The handle to the header control Return the edges of the given column. A Point holding the left and right co-ords of the column. -1 means that the sides could not be retrieved. Return the edges of the given column. A Point holding the left and right co-ords of the column. -1 means that the sides could not be retrieved. Return the index of the column of the header that is under the given point. Return -1 if no column is under the pt The list we are interested in The client co-ords The index of the column under the point, or -1 if no column header is under that point Return the index of the divider under the given point. Return -1 if no divider is under the pt The list we are interested in The client co-ords The index of the divider under the point, or -1 if no divider is under that point Get the scroll position of the given scroll bar Change the z-order to the window 'toBeMoved' so it appear directly on top of 'reference' Make the given control/window a topmost window Change the size of the window without affecting any other attributes Show the given window without activating it The window to show Mark the given column as being selected. The OLVColumn or null to clear This method works, but it prevents subitems in the given column from having back colors. A simple-minded implementation of a Dictionary that can handle null as a key. The type of the dictionary key The type of the values to be stored This is not a full implementation and is only meant to handle collecting groups by their keys, since groups can have null as a key value. OLVListItems are specialized ListViewItems that know which row object they came from, and the row index at which they are displayed, even when in group view mode. They also know the image they should draw against themselves Create a OLVListItem for the given row object Create a OLVListItem for the given row object, represented by the given string and image Gets the bounding rectangle of the item, including all subitems Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around each cell of this item This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets how the cells of this item will be vertically aligned This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets the checkedness of this item. Virtual lists don't handle checkboxes well, so we have to intercept attempts to change them through the items, and change them into something that will work. Unfortunately, this won't work if this property is set through the base class, since the property is not declared as virtual. Enable tri-state checkbox. .NET's Checked property was not built to handle tri-state checkboxes, and will return True for both Checked and Indeterminate states. Gets if this item has any decorations set for it. Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn over this item Setting this replaces all other decorations Gets the collection of decorations that will be drawn over this item Gets whether or not this row can be selected and activated Gets whether any cell on this item is showing a hyperlink Get or set the image that should be shown against this item This can be an Image, a string or an int. A string or an int will be used as an index into the small image list. Gets or sets the the model object that is source of the data for this list item. Gets or sets the color that will be used for this row's background when it is selected and the control is focused. To work reliably, this property must be set during a FormatRow event. If this is not set, the normal selection BackColor will be used. Gets or sets the color that will be used for this row's foreground when it is selected and the control is focused. To work reliably, this property must be set during a FormatRow event. If this is not set, the normal selection ForeColor will be used. Return the sub item at the given index Index of the subitem to be returned An OLVListSubItem Return bounds of the given subitem This correctly calculates the bounds even for column 0. A ListViewSubItem that knows which image should be drawn against it. Create a OLVListSubItem Create a OLVListSubItem that shows the given string and image Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around this cell This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets how this cell will be vertically aligned This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. Gets or sets the model value is being displayed by this subitem. Gets if this subitem has any decorations set for it. Gets or sets the decoration that will be drawn over this item Setting this replaces all other decorations Gets the collection of decorations that will be drawn over this item Get or set the image that should be shown against this item This can be an Image, a string or an int. A string or an int will be used as an index into the small image list. Gets or sets the url that should be invoked when this subitem is clicked Gets or sets whether this cell is selected Return the state of the animatation of the image on this subitem. Null means there is either no image, or it is not an animation An indication of where a hit was within ObjectListView cell Nowhere On the text On the image On the checkbox On the expand button (TreeListView) in a button (cell must have ButtonRenderer) in the cell but not in any more specific location UserDefined location1 (used for custom renderers) On the expand/collapse widget of the group Somewhere on a group Somewhere in a column header Somewhere in a column header checkbox Somewhere in a header divider A collection of ListViewHitTest constants Instances of this class encapsulate the information gathered during a OlvHitTest() operation. Custom renderers can use HitTestLocation.UserDefined and the UserData object to store more specific locations for use during event handlers. Create a OlvListViewHitTestInfo Create a OlvListViewHitTestInfo when the header was hit Where is the hit location? Where is the hit location? Which group was hit? Custom renderers can use this information to supply more details about the hit location Gets the item that was hit Gets the subitem that was hit Gets the part of the subitem that was hit Gets the ObjectListView that was tested Gets the model object that was hit Gets the index of the row under the hit point or -1 Gets the index of the column under the hit point Gets the index of the header divider Gets the column that was hit Returns a string that represents the current object. A string that represents the current object. 2 A TreeDataSourceAdapter knows how to build a tree structure from a binding list. To build a tree Create a data source adaptor that knows how to build a tree structure Gets or sets the name of the property/column that uniquely identifies each row. The value contained by this column must be unique across all rows in the data source. Odd and unpredictable things will happen if two rows have the same id. Null cannot be a valid key value. Gets or sets the name of the property/column that contains the key of the parent of a row. The test condition for deciding if one row is the parent of another is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateParentRow[this.KeyAspectName], row[this.ParentKeyAspectName]) Unlike key value, parent keys can be null but a null parent key can only be used to identify root objects. Gets or sets the value that identifies a row as a root object. When the ParentKey of a row equals the RootKeyValue, that row will be treated as root of the TreeListView. The test condition for deciding a root object is functionally equivilent to this: Object.Equals(candidateRow[this.ParentKeyAspectName], this.RootKeyValue) The RootKeyValue can be null. Gets or sets whether or not the key columns (id and parent id) should be shown to the user. This must be set before the DataSource is set. It has no effect afterwards. Gets the DataTreeListView that is being managed A IVirtualGroups is the interface that a virtual list must implement to support virtual groups Return the list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Return the index of the item that appears at the given position within the given group. Return the index of the group to which the given item belongs Return the index at which the given item is shown in the given group A hint that the given range of items are going to be required This is a safe, do nothing implementation of a grouping strategy Return the list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Return the index of the item that appears at the given position within the given group. Return the index of the group to which the given item belongs Return the index at which the given item is shown in the given group A hint that the given range of items are going to be required Provides grouping functionality to a FastObjectListView Create groups for FastListView This is the COM interface that a ListView must be given in order for groups in virtual lists to work. This interface is NOT documented by MS. It was found on Greg Chapell's site. This means that there is no guarantee that it will work on future versions of Windows, nor continue to work on current ones. Not sure what this does Not sure what this does Get the index of the item that occurs at the n'th position of the indicated group. Index of the group Index within the group Index of the item within the whole list Get the index of the group to which the given item belongs Index of the item within the whole list Which occurences of the item is wanted Index of the group Get the number of groups that contain the given item Index of the item within the whole list How many groups does it occur within A hint to prepare any cache for the given range of requests A default implementation of the IOwnerDataCallback interface A VirtualListDataSource is a complete manner to provide functionality to a virtual list. An object that implements this interface provides a VirtualObjectListView with all the information it needs to be fully functional. Implementors must provide functioning implementations of at least GetObjectCount() and GetNthObject(), otherwise nothing will appear in the list. Return the object that should be displayed at the n'th row. The index of the row whose object is to be returned. The model object at the n'th row, or null if the fetching was unsuccessful. Return the number of rows that should be visible in the virtual list The number of rows the list view should have. Get the index of the row that is showing the given model object The model object sought The index of the row showing the model, or -1 if the object could not be found. The ListView is about to request the given range of items. Do whatever caching seems appropriate. Find the first row that "matches" the given text in the given range. The text typed by the user Start searching from this index. This may be greater than the 'to' parameter, in which case the search should descend Do not search beyond this index. This may be less than the 'from' parameter. The column that should be considered when looking for a match. Return the index of row that was matched, or -1 if no match was found Sort the model objects in the data source. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects Insert the given collection of model objects to this control at the position Index where the collection will be added A collection of model objects Remove all of the given objects from the control Collection of objects to be removed Set the collection of objects that this control will show. Update/replace the nth object with the given object This extension allow virtual lists to filter their contents All subsequent retrievals on this data source should be filtered through the given filters. null means no filtering of that kind. A do-nothing implementation of the VirtualListDataSource interface. Creates an AbstractVirtualListDataSource The list view that this data source is giving information to. Update/replace the nth object with the given object This is a useful default implementation of SearchText method, intended to be called by implementors of IVirtualListDataSource. This class mimics the behavior of VirtualObjectListView v1.x. Creates a VirtualListVersion1DataSource How will the n'th object of the data source be fetched? Designer for and its subclasses. This designer removes properties and events that are available on ListView but that are not useful on ObjectListView. We can't inherit from System.Windows.Forms.Design.ListViewDesigner, since it is marked internal. So, this class uses reflection to create a ListViewDesigner and then forwards messages to that designer. Initializes the designer with the specified component. The to associate the designer with. This component must always be an instance of, or derive from, . Initializes a newly created component. A name/value dictionary of default values to apply to properties. May be null if no default values are specified. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Removes the duplicate DockingActionList added by this designer to the . adds an internal DockingActionList : 'Dock/Undock in Parent Container'. But the default designer has already added that action list. So we need to remove one. Adjusts the set of properties the component exposes through a . An containing the properties for the class of the component. Allows a designer to add to the set of events that it exposes through a . The events for the class of the component. Allows a designer to change or remove items from the set of attributes that it exposes through a . The attributes for the class of the component. Allows a designer to change or remove items from the set of events that it exposes through a . The events for the class of the component. Gets the design-time action lists supported by the component associated with the designer. The design-time action lists supported by the component associated with the designer. Gets the collection of components associated with the component managed by the designer. The components that are associated with the component managed by the designer. Indicates whether a mouse click at the specified point should be handled by the control. true if a click at the specified point is to be handled by the control; otherwise, false. A indicating the position at which the mouse was clicked, in screen coordinates. Processes Windows messages and optionally routes them to the control. The to process. This class modifies a ListViewActionList, by removing the "Edit Items" and "Edit Groups" actions. That class is internal, so we cannot simply subclass it, which would be simplier. Action lists use reflection to determine if that action can be executed, so we not only have to modify the returned collection of actions, but we have to implement the properties and commands that the returned actions use. This class works in conjunction with the OLVColumns property to allow OLVColumns to be added to the ObjectListView. Create a OLVColumnCollectionEditor What type of object does this editor create? Edit a given value What text should be shown in the list for the given object? Control how the overlay is presented in the IDE An OLVColumn knows which aspect of an object it should present. The column knows how to: extract its aspect from the row object convert an aspect to a string calculate the image for the row object extract a group "key" from the row object convert a group "key" into a title for the group For sorting to work correctly, aspects from the same column must be of the same type, that is, the same aspect cannot sometimes return strings and other times integers. How should the button be sized? 每个单元格都将具有相同大小的按钮，如ButtonSize属性所示 每个单元格都将绘制一个填充单元格的按钮，该按钮由ButtonPadding插入 将调整每个按钮的大小以包含文本内容 Create an OLVColumn Initialize a column to have the given title, and show the given aspect The title of the column The aspect to be shown in the column 此委托将用于提取要在此列中显示的值。 如果设置, AspectName属性将被忽略. 请记住，如果当前列的AspectGetter是内部生成的，依旧可以随意重新生成 应调用以获取要在此列中显示的值的属性或方法的名称。 仅当未指定ValueGetterDelegate时才使用此选项。 此名称可以用来表示对属性或无参数方法的链引用。 "DateOfBirth" "Owner.HomeAddress.Postcode" 此委托将用于将编辑后的值放回模型对象中。 如果IsEdable==false，则不执行任何操作。 用于将要在此列中显示的Aspect转换为字符串的委托。 如果设置了此值，AspectToStringFormat将被忽略。 将Aspect转换成字符串的格式文本 此字符串作为第一个参数传递给String.Format()方法。 仅当尚未设置AspectToStringConverter时才使用此选项。 "{0:C}" 表示转换数字到货币 获取或设置单元格编辑器是否应使用自动完成 获取或设置单元格编辑器是否应使用自动完成 获取用户操作是否可以隐藏此列 这会同时考虑Hideable属性以及此列是否为列表视图的主列(列0)。 编辑单元格时，是否应该使用整个单元格(减去复选框或图像使用的任何空间)？ 如果控件不是所有者绘制(owner drawn)的，则始终将其视为true。 如果该值为False(默认值)并且控件是所有者绘制(owner drawn)的， ObjectListView将尝试计算单元格实际内容的宽度，然后将编辑控件的大小调整为恰到好处的宽度。 如果为真，则无论单元格的内容如何，都将使用单元格的整个宽度。 如果未在列上设置此属性，则将使用控件中的值 仅当控件处于详细信息视图中时才使用此值。 无论此设置如何，开发人员都可以通过侦听CellEditStarting事件来指定编辑控件的确切大小。 获取编辑此列中的单元格时是否应使用整个单元格 这将计算当前有效值，该值可能与CellEditUseWholeCell不同 获取或设置此列中此单元格周围将留空的像素数 此设置仅在控件为所有者绘制(owner drawn)时生效。 获取或设置此列中的单元格垂直对齐的方式。 此设置仅在控件为所有者绘制(owner drawn)时生效。 如果未设置，将使用控件本身的值。 获取或设置此列是否显示复选框。 在第0列上设置此选项不起作用。列0复选框由ObjectListView本身的CheckBox属性控制。 Gets or sets the clustering strategy used for this column. The clustering strategy is used to build a Filtering menu for this item. If this is null, a useful default will be chosen. To disable filtering on this colummn, set UseFiltering to false. Cluster strategies belong to a particular column. The same instance cannot be shared between multiple columns. 获取或设置是否启用此列中的按钮(如果此列是按钮)，即使该行本身被禁用 此列是否应该调整大小以填充列表视图中的空闲空间？ 如果希望两列(或更多列)平均共享可用空间，请将此属性设置为True。 如果希望此列具有更大或更小的可用空间份额，则必须显式设置FreeSpaceProportion属性。 空间填充列仍然由MinimumWidth和MaximumWidth属性控制。 /// 控件中未占用的水平空间应分配给此列的比例是多少？ 在某些情况下，如果列(通常是最右边的列)可以随着列表视图的扩展而扩展， 这样就可以在不必水平滚动的情况下尽可能多地看到列(您永远不应该让用户必须水平滚动任何内容！)。 调整空间填充列的大小以占据列表视图的未占用宽度的一部分(未占用宽度是一旦所有非填充列都被赋予其空间后剩余的宽度)。 此属性指示将分配给此列的未占用空间的相对比例。此属性的实际值并不重要，重要的是它的值相对于其他列中的值。 例子: 如果只有一个空间填充列，则无论FreeSpaceProportion中的值如何，都将为其提供所有可用空间。 如果有两个或多个空间填充列，并且它们的FreeSpaceProportion值都相同，则它们将平等地共享空闲空间。 如果FreeSpaceProportion有三个值为3、2和1的空间填充列，则第一列将占用一半的空闲空间，第二列将占用三分之一的空闲空间，第三列将占用六分之一的空闲空间。 获取或设置在单击此列的标题时是否对此列值重新生成组。 此设置仅在ShowGroups为true时使用。 如果为False，则单击标题不会重建组。 如果为false，则仍会激发BeforeCreatingGroups事件，这些事件可用于根据具体情况进行分组或提供反馈。 当组已创建但尚未成为真正的ListViewGroup时，将调用此委托。用户可以利用此机会填写有关该组的许多其他详细信息。 调用此委托以获取对象，该对象是给定行所属的组的键。 调用此委托将组键转换为该组的标题。 当列表视图按此列分组并且组标题有项目计数时，应如何设置标签的格式 给定的格式字符串支持以下两个占位符： {0} - 原组标题 {1} - 该组项目数 "{0} [{1} items]" 获取this.GroupWithItemCountFormat或默认值 如果未设置GroupWithItemCountFormat，则如果可能，将从ObjectListView中获取其值。 当列表视图按此列分组并且组标题有项目计数时，如果组中只有一个项目，标签应该如何格式化 给定的格式字符串支持以下两个占位符： {0} - 原组标题 {1} - 该组项目数 (始终为1) "{0} [{1} item]" 获取this.GroupWithItemCountSingularFormat或默认值 如果未设置此值，将使用列表视图中的值 获取是否应在列标题中使用筛选器指示符绘制此列。 获取或设置将用于所有者绘制标题列的委托。 获取或设置将用于绘制此列标题的样式 仅当拥有的ObjectListView将HeaderUsesThemes设置为False时才使用此选项。 获取或设置绘制此列的标题时使用的字体 您可能应该使用HeaderFormatStyle而不是此属性 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用。 获取或设置绘制此列标题文本的颜色 您可能应该使用HeaderFormatStyle而不是此属性 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用。 获取或设置将在列标题中显示的图像键 这仅在HeaderUsesThemes为false时使用 获取或设置Header文本的对齐方式 返回Header的文本对齐方式。这将是显式设置的，或者将遵循列中文本的对齐方式 获取转换为StringAlignment的Header对齐方式 获取此列的标题中是否有图像 获取或设置此Header是否在Header中放置复选框 获取或设置此Header是否在Header中放置三态复选框 获取或设置此列Header中复选框的选中状态 获取或设置选中/取消选中标题复选框的值是否会导致将此列中所有单元格的复选框设置为相同的选中/取消选中。 默认值为true. 当单元格的复选框状态改变时，该函数不会与自动更新标题的功能相反。 此属性在TreeListView上的行为最好描述为未定义，应该避免。 此操作(检查/取消检查所有行)的性能为O(n)，其中n是行数。它将在大型虚拟列表上工作，但可能需要一些时间。 获取或设置是否禁用标题中的复选框 单击禁用的复选框不会更改其值，但会引发HeaderCheckBoxChanging事件，使程序员有机会执行适当的操作。 获取或设置用户是否可以隐藏此列。 无论此设置如何，列0永远不能隐藏。 获取或设置此列中的文本值是否类似于超链接 这是属性的名称，将调用该属性来获取应该在此列中显示的图像的图像选择器。 它可以返回int、String、Image或NULL。 如果ImageGetter不为空，则忽略此项。 该属性可以使用以下返回值来标识图像： null或-1 --表示无图像 int -- Int值将用作图像列表的索引 String -- 字符串值将用作图像列表的关键字 Image -- 将直接绘制图像(仅在OwnerDrawn模式下) 调用此委托以获取应该在此列中显示的图像的图像选择器。它可以返回int、String、Image或NULL。 该属性可以使用以下返回值来标识图像： null或-1 --表示无图像 int -- Int值将用作图像列表的索引 String -- 字符串值将用作图像列表的关键字 Image -- 将直接绘制图像(仅在OwnerDrawn模式下) 获取或设置此列是否在其单元格中绘制按钮 如果将其设置为true，则列的呈现器将成为ColumnButtonRenender(如果尚未成为ColumnButtonRenender)。如果设置为False，则将丢弃以前的任何按钮渲染器 如果单元格的Aspect为Null或空，则不会在单元格中绘制任何内容。 Create a ColumnButtonRenderer to draw buttons in this column Fill in details to our ColumnButtonRenderer based on the properties set on the column 获取或设置按钮可以占用的最大宽度。 -1 表示不限制最大宽度 仅当SizingMode为TextBound时才生效 获取或设置当SizingMode为TextBound时单元格周围的额外空间 获取或设置SizingMode为FixedBound时按钮的大小 如果未设置，将使用单元格的边界 获取或设置此列显示按钮时如何调整每个按钮的大小 此列中显示的值是否可以编辑 此默认值为false，因为控制列表视图的可编辑性的主要方法是列表视图本身。 列表视图可编辑后，所有列也可编辑，除非程序员显式将它们标记为不可编辑 是否是固定宽度 获取/设置当视图切换到平铺视图(TileView)时是否使用此列。 无论此设置如何，第0列始终包含在平铺视图中。平铺视图不能很好地处理许多“列”信息。两三个最好。 获取或设置Header的文本是否应垂直呈现。 如果为True，最好将ToolTipText设置为列的名称，以便于阅读。 垂直Header仅为文本。他们不会画出图像。 该列是否可见 更改此值后，必须调用RebuildColumns()才能使更改生效。 此列最后一次定位在详细信息视图列中的位置是什么 DisplayIndex是易失性的。一旦从控件中移除列，就无法发现它在显示顺序中的位置。 即使列不在列表视图的活动列中，此属性也会保护该信息。 列最大宽度 -1表示不限制. 将该值指定为与MinimumWidth相同的值，以生成固定宽度的列。 列最小宽度 -1表示不限制. 将该值指定为与MaximumWidth相同的值，以生成固定宽度的列。 Get/set the renderer that will be invoked when a cell needs to be redrawn This delegate is called when a cell needs to be drawn in OwnerDrawn mode. This method is kept primarily for backwards compatibility. New code should implement an IRenderer, though this property will be maintained. 获取或设置执行文本搜索时是否使用此列的单元格中的文本。 如果为False，则文本筛选器在查找匹配项时不会尝试搜索此列单元格。 获取或设置一个委托，该委托将返回在使用基于文本的筛选器时应考虑进行文本匹配的文本值数组。 获取或设置此列的标题是否将包括该列的文本。 如果为false，则列标题中呈现的唯一内容将是来自 . 只有在以下情况下才会考虑此设置: ObjectListView中的 为false . 获取或设置当用户单击此列的标题时是否重新排序列表内容。 如果为False，则单击标题将不会对列表进行排序，但也不会提供有关列表未排序原因的任何反馈。提供适当的反馈是程序员的责任。 如果为false，则仍会触发BeforeSorting事件，该事件可用于根据具体情况进行排序或提供反馈。 获取或设置列内容的水平对齐方式。 NET将不允许列0具有除左对齐以外的任何对齐方式。我们不能更改列表视图的基本行为，但当所有者绘制时，列0现在可以有其他对齐方式。 获取列文本对齐的StringAlignment等效项 当鼠标悬停在该列的标题上时，应该显示什么字符串？ 如果拥有的ObjectListView上安装了HeaderToolTipGetter，则将忽略此值。 此列是否应该有一个三态复选框 如果为True，用户可以选择第三种状态(通常是不确定的)。 按列纵横比的首字母对对象进行分组 一种常见的模式是按该组的值的首字母对列进行分组。aspect必须是字符串(显然)。 获取或设置此列是否应为用户可筛选的列 Gets or sets a filter that will only include models where the model's value for this column is one of the values in ValuesChosenForFiltering Gets or sets the values that will be used to generate a filter for this column. For a model to be included by the generated filter, its value for this column must be in this list. If the list is null or empty, this column will not be used for filtering. 列宽 获取或设置此列单元格的内容是否应自动换行 如果此列使用自定义IRenender(即，不是从BaseRenender派生的)，则该呈现器负责实现自动换行。 For a given group value, return the string that should be used as the groups title. The group key that is being converted to a title string Get the checkedness of the given object for this column The row object that is being displayed The checkedness of the object Put the checkedness of the given object for this column The row object that is being displayed The checkedness of the object For a given row object, extract the value indicated by the AspectName property of this column. The row object that is being displayed An object, which is the aspect named by AspectName For a given row object, return the object that is the key of the group that this row belongs to. The row object that is being displayed Group key object For a given row object, return the image selector of the image that should displayed in this column. The row object that is being displayed int or string or Image. int or string will be used as index into image list. null or -1 means no image Return the image that represents the check box for the given model For a given row object, return the strings that will be searched when trying to filter by string. This will normally be the simple GetStringValue result, but if this column is non-textual (e.g. image) you might want to install a SearchValueGetter delegate which can return something that could be used for text filtering. The array of texts to be searched. If this returns null, search will not match that object. For a given row object, return the string representation of the value shown in this column. For aspects that are string (e.g. aPerson.Name), the aspect and its string representation are the same. For non-strings (e.g. aPerson.DateOfBirth), the string representation is very different. For a given row object, return the object that is to be displayed in this column. The row object that is being displayed An object, which is the aspect to be displayed Update the given model object with the given value using the column's AspectName. The model object to be updated The value to be put into the model Update the given model object with the given value The model object to be updated The value to be put into the model Convert the aspect object to its string representation. If the column has been given a AspectToStringConverter, that will be used to do the conversion, otherwise just use ToString(). The returned value will not be null. Nulls are always converted to empty strings. The value of the aspect that should be displayed A string representation of the aspect Convert the aspect object to its string representation. If the column has been given a AspectToStringConverter, that will be used to do the conversion, otherwise just use ToString(). The returned value will not be null. Nulls are always converted to empty strings. The value of the aspect that should be displayed A string representation of the aspect Decide the clustering strategy that will be used for this column Gets or sets the type of data shown in this column. If this is not set, it will try to get the type by looking through the rows of the listview. This event is triggered when the visibility of this column changes. Tell the world when visibility of a column changes. Create groupies This is an untyped version to help with Generator and OLVColumn attributes Create groupies Create groupies Create groupies Create groupies. Install delegates that will group the columns aspects into progressive partitions. If an aspect is less than value[n], it will be grouped with description[n]. If an aspect has a value greater than the last element in "values", it will be grouped with the last element in "descriptions". Array of values. Values must be able to be compared to the aspect (using IComparable) The description for the matching value. The last element is the default description. If there are n values, there must be n+1 descriptions. this.salaryColumn.MakeGroupies( new UInt32[] { 20000, 100000 }, new string[] { "Lowly worker", "Middle management", "Rarified elevation"}); Create groupies based on exact value matches. Install delegates that will group rows into partitions based on equality of this columns aspects. If an aspect is equal to value[n], it will be grouped with description[n]. If an aspect is not equal to any value, it will be grouped with "[other]". Array of values. Values must be able to be equated to the aspect The description for the matching value. this.marriedColumn.MakeEqualGroupies( new MaritalStatus[] { MaritalStatus.Single, MaritalStatus.Married, MaritalStatus.Divorced, MaritalStatus.Partnered }, new string[] { "Looking", "Content", "Looking again", "Mostly content" }); An adorment is the common base for overlays and decorations. Gets or sets the corner of the adornment that will be positioned at the reference corner Gets or sets location within the reference rectange where the adornment will be drawn This is a simplied interface to ReferenceCorner and AdornmentCorner Gets or sets the offset by which the position of the adornment will be adjusted Gets or sets the point of the reference rectangle to which the adornment will be aligned. Gets or sets the degree of rotation by which the adornment will be transformed. The centre of rotation will be the center point of the adornment. Gets or sets the transparency of the overlay. 0 is completely transparent, 255 is completely opaque. Calculate the location of rectangle of the given size, so that it's indicated corner would be at the given point. The point Which corner will be positioned at the reference point CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.TopLeft) -> Point(50, 100) CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter) -> Point(45, 90) CalculateAlignedPosition(new Point(50, 100), new Size(10, 20), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.BottomRight) -> Point(40, 80) Calculate a rectangle that has the given size which is positioned so that its alignment point is at the reference location of the given rect. Create a rectangle of the given size which is positioned so that its indicated corner is at the indicated corner of the reference rect. Creates a rectangle so that its bottom left is at the centre of the reference: corner=BottomLeft, referenceCorner=MiddleCenter This is a powerful concept that takes some getting used to, but is very neat once you understand it. Return the point at the indicated corner of the given rectangle (it doesn't have to be a corner, but a named location) The reference rectangle Which point of the rectangle should be returned? A point CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.TopLeft) -> Point(0, 0) CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter) -> Point(25, 50) CalculateReferenceLocation(new Rectangle(0, 0, 50, 100), System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.BottomRight) -> Point(50, 100) Given the item and the subitem, calculate its bounds. Apply any specified rotation to the Graphic content. The Graphics to be transformed The rotation will be around the centre of this rect Reverse the rotation created by ApplyRotation() An overlay that will draw an image over the top of the ObjectListView Gets or sets the image that will be drawn Gets or sets if the image will be shrunk to fit with its horizontal bounds Draw the image in its specified location The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Draw the image in its specified location The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Draw the image in its specified location The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How big should the image be? How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Draw the image in its specified location, scaled so that it is not wider than the given rectangle. Height is scaled proportional to the width. The image to be drawn The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering How transparent should the image be (0 is completely transparent, 255 is opaque) Utility to draw a bitmap transparenly. An adornment that will draw text Gets or sets the background color of the text Set this to Color.Empty to not draw a background Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the color of the border around the billboard. Set this to Color.Empty to remove the border Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the width of the border around the text How rounded should the corners of the border be? 0 means no rounding. If this value is too large, the edges of the border will appear odd. Gets or sets the font that will be used to draw the text Gets the font that will be used to draw the text or a reasonable default Does this text have a background? Does this overlay have a border? Gets or sets the maximum width of the text. Text longer than this will wrap. 0 means no maximum. Gets or sets the formatting that should be used on the text Gets or sets the text that will be drawn Gets the brush that will be used to paint the text Gets or sets the color of the text Gets or sets whether the text will wrap when it exceeds its bounds Draw our text with our stored configuration in relation to the given reference rectangle The Graphics used for drawing The reference rectangle in relation to which the text will be drawn Draw the given text with our stored configuration The Graphics used for drawing The reference rectangle in relation to which the text will be drawn The text to draw How opaque should be text be Draw the text with a border The Graphics used for drawing The bounds within which the text should be drawn The text to draw How opaque should be text be Return the rectangle that will be the precise bounds of the displayed text The bounds of the text Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle The rectangle The diameter of the corners A round cornered rectagle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. A decoration is an overlay that draws itself in relation to a given row or cell. Decorations scroll when the listview scrolls. Gets or sets the row that is to be decorated Gets or sets the subitem that is to be decorated An AbstractDecoration is a safe do-nothing implementation of the IDecoration interface Gets or sets the row that is to be decorated Gets or sets the subitem that is to be decorated Gets the bounds of the decorations row Get the bounds of the decorations cell Draw the decoration This decoration draws a slight tint over a column of the owning listview. If no column is explicitly set, the selected column in the listview will be used. The selected column is normally the sort column, but does not have to be. Create a TintedColumnDecoration Create a TintedColumnDecoration Gets or sets the column that will be tinted Gets or sets the color that will be 'tinted' over the selected column Draw a slight colouring over our tinted column This overlay only works when: - the list is in Details view - there is at least one row - there is a selected column (or a specified tint column) This decoration draws an optionally filled border around a rectangle. Subclasses must override CalculateBounds(). Create a BorderDecoration Create a BorderDecoration The pen used to draw the border Create a BorderDecoration The pen used to draw the border The brush used to fill the rectangle Gets or sets the pen that will be used to draw the border Gets or sets the padding that will be added to the bounds of the item before drawing the border and fill. How rounded should the corners of the border be? 0 means no rounding. If this value is too large, the edges of the border will appear odd. Gets or sets the brush that will be used to fill the border This value is ignored when using gradient brush Gets or sets the color that will be used as the start of a gradient fill. This and FillGradientTo must be given value to show a gradient Gets or sets the color that will be used as the end of a gradient fill. This and FillGradientFrom must be given value to show a gradient Gets or sets the fill mode that will be used for the gradient. Draw a filled border Subclasses should override this to say where the border should be drawn Do the actual work of drawing the filled border Create a GraphicsPath that represents a round cornered rectangle. If this is 0 or less, the rectangle will not be rounded. Instances of this class draw a border around the decorated row Gets or sets the index of the left most column to be used for the border Gets or sets the index of the right most column to be used for the border Calculate the boundaries of the border Instances of this class draw a border around the decorated subitem. Calculate the boundaries of the border This decoration puts a border around the cell being edited and optionally "lightboxes" the cell (makes the rest of the control dark). Create a EditingCellBorderDecoration Create a EditingCellBorderDecoration Should the decoration use a lighbox display style? Gets or set whether the decoration should make the rest of the control dark when a cell is being edited If this is true, FillBrush is used to overpaint the control. Draw the decoration This decoration causes everything *except* the row under the mouse to be overpainted with a tint, making the row under the mouse stand out in comparison. The darker and more opaque the fill color, the more obvious the decorated row becomes. Create a LightBoxDecoration Draw a tint over everything in the ObjectListView except the row under the mouse. Instances of this class put an Image over the row/cell that it is decorating Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Create an image decoration Gets or sets the item being decorated Gets or sets the sub item being decorated Draw this decoration The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Instances of this class draw some text over the row/cell that they are decorating Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Create a TextDecoration Gets or sets the item being decorated Gets or sets the sub item being decorated Draw this decoration The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering The interface for an object which can draw itself over the top of an ObjectListView. Draw this overlay The ObjectListView that is being overlaid The Graphics onto the given OLV The content area of the OLV An interface for an overlay that supports variable levels of transparency Gets or sets the transparency of the overlay. 0 is completely transparent, 255 is completely opaque. A null implementation of the IOverlay interface Draw this overlay The ObjectListView that is being overlaid The Graphics onto the given OLV The content area of the OLV How transparent should this overlay be? An overlay that will draw an image over the top of the ObjectListView Create an ImageOverlay Gets or sets the horizontal inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets the vertical inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering An overlay that will draw text over the top of the ObjectListView Create a TextOverlay Gets or sets the horizontal inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets the vertical inset by which the position of the overlay will be adjusted Gets or sets whether the border will be drawn with rounded corners Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering A Billboard overlay is a TextOverlay positioned at an absolute point Create a BillboardOverlay Gets or sets where should the top left of the billboard be placed Draw this overlay The ObjectListView being decorated The Graphics used for drawing The bounds of the rendering Renderers are the mechanism used for owner drawing cells. As such, they can also handle hit detection and positioning of cell editing rectangles. Render the whole item within an ObjectListView. This is only used in non-Details views. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the item The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. Render one cell within an ObjectListView when it is in Details mode. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the cell The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. What is under the given point? x co-ordinate y co-ordinate This method should only alter HitTestLocation and/or UserData. When the value in the given cell is to be edited, where should the edit rectangle be placed? Renderers that implement this interface will have the filter property updated, each time the filter on the ObjectListView is updated. An AbstractRenderer is a do-nothing implementation of the IRenderer interface. Render the whole item within an ObjectListView. This is only used in non-Details views. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the item The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. Render one cell within an ObjectListView when it is in Details mode. The event A Graphics for rendering The bounds of the cell The model object to be drawn Return true to indicate that the event was handled and no further processing is needed. What is under the given point? x co-ordinate y co-ordinate This method should only alter HitTestLocation and/or UserData. When the value in the given cell is to be edited, where should the edit rectangle be placed? This class provides compatibility for v1 RendererDelegates The renderer delegate that this renderer wraps A BaseRenderer provides useful base level functionality for any custom renderer. Subclasses will normally override the Render or OptionalRender method, and use the other methods as helper functions. Can the renderer wrap lines that do not fit completely within the cell? Wrapping text doesn't work with the GDI renderer. Gets or sets how many pixels will be left blank around this cell This setting only takes effect when the control is owner drawn. for more details. Gets the horiztonal alignment of the column Gets or sets how cells drawn by this renderer will be vertically aligned. If this is not set, the value from the column or control itself will be used. Gets the optional padding that this renderer should apply before drawing. This property considers all possible sources of padding Gets the vertical cell alignment that should govern the rendering. This property considers all possible sources. Gets or sets the image list from which keyed images will be fetched When rendering multiple images, how many pixels should be between each image? Should text be rendered using GDI routines? This makes the text look more like a native List view control. Get or set the aspect of the model object that this renderer should draw What are the bounds of the cell that is being drawn? Get or set the OLVColumn that this renderer will draw Get/set the event that caused this renderer to be called Get/set the event that caused this renderer to be called Gets or sets the font to be used for text in this cell Gets the image list from which keyed images will be fetched Should this renderer fill in the background before drawing? Cache whether or not our item is selected Is this renderer being used on a printer context? Get or set the listitem that this renderer will be drawing Get/set the listview for which the drawing is to be done Get the specialized OLVSubItem that this renderer is drawing This returns null for column 0. Get or set the model object that this renderer should draw Get or set the list subitem that this renderer will be drawing The brush that will be used to paint the text Will this renderer use the custom images from the parent ObjectListView to draw the checkbox images. If this is true, the renderer will use the images from the StateImageList to represent checkboxes. 0 - unchecked, 1 - checked, 2 - indeterminate. If this is false (the default), then the renderer will use .NET's standard CheckBoxRenderer. Align the second rectangle with the first rectangle, according to the alignment of the column The cell's bounds The rectangle to be aligned within the bounds An aligned rectangle Calculate the left edge of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with the inner one according to this renderer's horizontal alignment Calculate the top of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with the inner rectangle according to this renders vertical alignment Calculate the top of the rectangle that aligns the outer rectangle with a rectangle of the given height according to this renderer's vertical alignment Calculate the space that our rendering will occupy and then align that space with the given rectangle, according to the Column alignment Pre-padded bounds of the cell Calculate the size of the content of this cell. Pre-padded bounds of the cell The width and height of the content Calculate the bounds of a checkbox given the (pre-padded) cell bounds Pre-padded cell bounds How much space will the check box for this cell occupy? Only column 0 can have check boxes. Sub item checkboxes are treated as images How much space will the check box for this row occupy? If the list doesn't have checkboxes, or this isn't the primary column, this returns an empty size. How much horizontal space will the image of this cell occupy? How much vertical space will the image of this cell occupy? How much space will the image of this cell occupy? How much horizontal space will the text of this cell occupy? How much space will the text of this cell occupy? Return the Color that is the background color for this item's cell The background color of the subitem Return the color of the background color when the item is selected The background color of the subitem Return the color to be used for text in this cell The text color of the subitem Return the color of the foreground color when the item is selected The foreground color of the subitem Return the image that should be drawn against this subitem An Image or null if no image should be drawn. Return the actual image that should be drawn when keyed by the given image selector. An image selector can be: an int, giving the index into the image list a string, giving the image key into the image list an Image, being the image itself The value that indicates the image to be used An Image or null Return the string that should be drawn within this Return the Color that is the background color for this item's text The background color of the subitem's text Render the whole item in a non-details view. Prepare this renderer to draw in response to the given event Use this if you want to chain a second renderer within a primary renderer. Render one cell Prepare this renderer to draw in response to the given event Use this if you want to chain a second renderer within a primary renderer. Calculate which part of this cell was hit Calculate the edit rectangle Draw our data into the given rectangle using the given graphics context. Subclasses should override this method. The graphics context that should be used for drawing The bounds of the subitem cell Returns whether the rendering has already taken place. If this returns false, the default processing will take over. Draw our data into the given rectangle using the given graphics context. Subclasses should override this method if they never want to fall back on the default processing The graphics context that should be used for drawing The bounds of the subitem cell Do the actual work of hit testing. Subclasses should override this rather than HitTest() Handle a HitTest request after all state information has been initialized Draw the standard "[checkbox] [image] [text]" cell after the state properties have been initialized. Change the bounds of the given rectangle to take any cell padding into account Perform normal hit testing relative to the given aligned content bounds This method calculates the bounds of the text within a standard layout (i.e. optional checkbox, optional image, text) This method only works correctly if the state of the renderer has been fully initialized (see BaseRenderer.GetEditRectangle) Apply any padding to the given bounds, and then align a rectangle of the given size within that padded area. Draw the given image aligned horizontally within the column. Over tall images are scaled to fit. Over-wide images are truncated. This is by design! Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The image to be drawn Draw our subitems image and text Graphics context to use for drawing Pre-padded bounds of the cell Fill in the background of this cell Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell Draw the primary check box of this row (checkboxes in other sub items use a different method) Graphics context to use for drawing The pre-aligned and padded target rectangle Calculate the CheckBoxState we need to correctly draw the given state Should this checkbox be drawn as disabled? Is the current item hot (i.e. under the mouse)? Is the mouse over a checkbox in this cell? Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The optional image to be drawn Draw our subitems image and text Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell Draw the given collection of image selectors Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn 笔刷 Draw the given text and optional image in the "normal" fashion Graphics context to use for drawing Bounds of the cell The string to be drawn 这里的r Print the given text in the given rectangle using only GDI routines The native list control uses GDI routines to do its drawing, so using them here makes the owner drawn mode looks more natural. This method doesn't honour the CanWrap setting on the renderer. All text is single line Gets the cell's vertical alignment as a TextFormatFlag Gets the StringFormat needed when drawing text using GDI+ Print the given text in the given rectangle using normal GDI+ .NET methods Printing to a printer dc has to be done using this method. This renderer highlights substrings that match a given text filter. Create a HighlightTextRenderer Create a HighlightTextRenderer Create a HighlightTextRenderer Gets or set how rounded will be the corners of the text match frame Gets or set the brush will be used to paint behind the matched substrings. Set this to null to not fill the frame. Gets or sets the filter that is filtering the ObjectListView and for which this renderer should highlight text When a filter changes, keep track of the text matching filters Gets or set the pen will be used to frame the matched substrings. Set this to null to not draw a frame. Gets or sets whether the frame around a text match will have rounded corners Gets or set the text that will be highlighted Gets or sets the manner in which substring will be compared. Use this to control if substring matches are case sensitive or insensitive. Handle a HitTest request after all state information has been initialized Draw text using GDI Draw the highlighted text using GDI Draw an indication around the given frame that shows a text match Draw the text using GDI+ Draw the highlighted text using GDI+ Gets whether the renderer should actually draw highlighting Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle A round cornered rectangle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. Return a GraphicPath that is a round cornered rectangle The rectangle The diameter of the corners A round cornered rectangle path If I could rely on people using C# 3.0+, this should be an extension method of GraphicsPath. This class maps a data value to an image that should be drawn for that value. It is useful for drawing data that is represented as an enum or boolean. Return a renderer that draw boolean values using the given images Draw this when our data value is true Draw this when our data value is false A Renderer Return a renderer that draw tristate boolean values using the given images Draw this when our data value is true Draw this when our data value is false Draw this when our data value is null A Renderer Make a new empty renderer Make a new renderer that will show the given image when the given key is the aspect value The data value to be matched The image to be shown when the key is matched Make a new renderer that will show the given images when it receives the given keys Build a renderer from the given array of keys and their matching images An array of key/image pairs Register the image that should be drawn when our Aspect has the data value. Value that the Aspect must match An ImageSelector -- an int, string or image Render our value Draw a collection of images Draw one image This renderer draws just a checkbox to match the check state of our model object. Draw our cell Handle the GetEditRectangle request Handle the HitTest request Render an image that comes from our data source. The image can be sourced from: a byte-array (normally when the image to be shown is stored as a value in a database) an int, which is treated as an index into the image list a string, which is treated first as a file name, and failing that as an index into the image list an ICollection of ints or strings, which will be drawn as consecutive images If an image is an animated GIF, it's state is stored in the SubItem object. By default, the image renderer does not render animations (it begins life with animations paused). To enable animations, you must call Unpause(). In the current implementation (2009-09), each column showing animated gifs must have a different instance of ImageRenderer assigned to it. You cannot share the same instance of an image renderer between two animated gif columns. If you do, only the last column will be animated. Make an empty image renderer Make an empty image renderer that begins life ready for animations Finalizer Should the animations in this renderer be paused? Gets a timer that can be used to trigger redraws on animations Pause any animations Unpause any animations Draw our image Translate our Aspect into an image. The strategy is: If its a byte array, we treat it as an in-memory image If it's an int, we use that as an index into our image list If it's a string, we try to load a file by that name. If we can't, we use the string as an index into our image list. An image This is the method that is invoked by the timer. It basically switches control to the listview thread. not used This is the OnTimer callback, but invoked in the same thread as the creator of the ListView. This method can use all of ListViews methods without creating a CrossThread exception. Instances of this class kept track of the animation state of a single image. Is the given image an animation The image to be tested Is the image an animation? Create an AnimationState in a quiet state Create an animation state for the given image, which may or may not be an animation The image to be rendered Does this state represent a valid animation Advance our images current frame and calculate when it will expire Render our Aspect as a progress bar Make a BarRenderer Make a BarRenderer for the given range of data values Make a BarRenderer using a custom bar scheme Make a BarRenderer using a custom bar scheme Make a BarRenderer that uses a horizontal gradient Make a BarRenderer that uses a horizontal gradient 此栏是否应以系统样式绘制？ 将从我们的单元格边框开始绘制多少像素的条形图 在绘制进度条之前，将使用什么颜色填充控件内部？ 进度条边框颜色 进度条的边框像素宽 进度条的“填充”部分应该是什么颜色？ 仅当GradientStartColor为Color.Empty时才使用此选项 进度条中是否显示文本百分比进度显示 使用渐变以此颜色开始填充进度条 使用渐变填充以此颜色结尾的进度条 使用渐变以此颜色开始填充渐满进度条 使用渐变填充以此颜色结尾的渐满进度条 无论列变得多宽，进度条都不会比这个宽。 无论单元格有多高，进度条都不会比这个高 预期的最小数据值。小于此值的值将显示一个空条。 接近满时的值,高于该值时，显示不同颜色，小于等于MinimumValue或大于MaximumValue值，则表示未设置该值 范围的最大值。大于此值的值将给出一个完整的条形。 The Pen that will draw the frame surrounding this bar The brush that will be used to fill the bar The brush that will be used to fill the bar The brush that will be used to fill the background of the bar Draw this progress bar using a gradient Draw our aspect Handle the GetEditRectangle request An ImagesRenderer draws zero or more images depending on the data returned by its Aspect. This renderer's Aspect must return a ICollection of ints, strings or Images, each of which will be drawn horizontally one after the other. As of v2.1, this functionality has been absorbed into ImageRenderer and this is now an empty shell, solely for backwards compatibility. A MultiImageRenderer draws the same image a number of times based on our data value The stars in the Rating column of iTunes is a good example of this type of renderer. Make a quiet renderer Make an image renderer that will draw the indicated image, at most maxImages times. The index of the image that should be drawn The name of the image that should be drawn The image selector that will give the image to be drawn Like all image selectors, this can be an int, string or Image What is the maximum number of images that this renderer should draw? Values less than or equal to this will have 0 images drawn Values greater than or equal to this will have MaxNumberImages images drawn Draw our data value A class to render a value that contains a bitwise-OR'ed collection of values. Register the given image to the given value When this flag is present... ...draw this image Draw the flags Do the actual work of hit testing. Subclasses should override this rather than HitTest() This renderer draws an image, a single line title, and then multi-line description under the title. This class works best with FullRowSelect = true. It's not designed to work with cell editing -- it will work but will look odd. It's not RightToLeft friendly. Create a DescribedTaskRenderer Should text be rendered using GDI routines? This makes the text look more like a native List view control. Gets or set the font that will be used to draw the title of the task If this is null, the ListView's font will be used Return a font that has been set for the title or a reasonable default Gets or set the color of the title of the task This color is used when the task is not selected or when the listview has a translucent selection mechanism. Return the color of the title of the task or a reasonable default Gets or set the font that will be used to draw the description of the task If this is null, the ListView's font will be used Return a font that has been set for the title or a reasonable default Gets or set the color of the description of the task This color is used when the task is not selected or when the listview has a translucent selection mechanism. Return the color of the description of the task or a reasonable default Gets or sets the number of pixels that will be left between the image and the text 顶部留白像素 Gets or sets the number of pixels that will be left between the title and the description Gets or sets the name of the aspect of the model object that contains the task description Gets or sets the filter that is filtering the ObjectListView and for which this renderer should highlight text When a filter changes, keep track of the text matching filters Fetch the description from the model class Draw our item Draw the task Handle the HitTest request This renderer draws a functioning button in its cell Gets or sets how each button will be sized 获取或设置SizingMode为FixedBounds时按钮的大小 If this is not set, the bounds of the cell will be used 获取或设置SizingMode为TextBounds时单元格周围的额外空间 Gets or sets the maximum width that a button can occupy. -1 means there is no maximum width. This is only considered when the SizingMode is TextBounds Gets or sets the minimum width that a button can occupy. -1 means there is no minimum width. This is only considered when the SizingMode is TextBounds 获取或设置此列按钮的字体颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的背景颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的边框颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮的内边框颜色(如果有按钮的话) 获取或设置此列按钮是否画边框(如果有按钮的话) Calculate the size of the contents Draw the button What part of the control is under the given point? What is the state of the button? Is the mouse over the button? The common interface supported by all style objects Gets or set the font that will be used by this style Gets or set the font style Gets or sets the ForeColor Gets or sets the BackColor Basic implementation of IItemStyle Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the style of font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Instances of this class specify how should "hot items" (non-selected rows under the cursor) be renderered. Gets or sets the overlay that should be drawn as part of the hot item Gets or sets the decoration that should be drawn as part of the hot item A decoration is different from an overlay in that an decoration scrolls with the listview contents, whilst an overlay does not. This class defines how a cell should be formatted Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the style of font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Instances of this class describe how hyperlinks will appear Create a HyperlinkStyle What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks in their normal state? What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks when the mouse is over them? What sort of formatting should be applied to hyperlinks after they have been clicked? Gets or sets the cursor that should be shown when the mouse is over a hyperlink. Instances of this class control one the styling of one particular state (normal, hot, pressed) of a header control Gets or sets the font that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color of the text that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the background color that will be applied by this style Gets or sets the color in which a frame will be drawn around the header for this column Gets or sets the width of the frame that will be drawn around the header for this column This class defines how a header should be formatted in its various states. Create a new HeaderFormatStyle What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header when the mouse is over it? What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header in its normal state? What sort of formatting should be applied to a column header when pressed? Set the font for all three states Set the fore color for all three states Set the back color for all three states 正常为选中按钮 获得焦点的按钮 鼠标经过样式 获得焦点并鼠标经过 自定义GDI工具，绘制按钮 绘制圆形按钮（用法同矩形按钮） 绘制圆角按钮 要绘制的文字 Graphics 对象 要填充的矩形 根据普通矩形得到圆角矩形的路径 原始矩形 半径 图形路径 A GlassPanelForm sits transparently over an ObjectListView to show overlays. Get the low-level windows flag that will be given to CreateWindow. Attach this form to the given ObjectListView Made the overlay panel invisible Show the overlay panel in its correctly location If the panel is always shown, this method does nothing. If the panel is being resized, this method also does nothing. Detach this glass panel from its previous ObjectListView You should unbind the overlay panel before making any changes to the widget hierarchy. Handle when the form that owns the ObjectListView begins to be resized Handle when the form that owns the ObjectListView finished to be resized The owning form has moved. Move the overlay panel too. The owning form is resizing. Hide our overlay panel until the resizing stops Handle when the bound OLV changes its location. The overlay panel must be moved too, IFF it is currently visible. Handle when the bound OLV changes size. The overlay panel must resize too, IFF it is currently visible. Handle when the bound OLV is part of a TabControl and that TabControl changes tabs. The overlay panel is hidden. The first time the bound OLV is redrawn, the overlay panel will be shown again. Somewhere the parent of the bound OLV has changed. Update our events. Handle when the bound OLV changes its visibility. The overlay panel should match the OLV's visibility. Class used to capture window messages for the header of the list view control. Create a header control for the given ObjectListView. Return the index of the column under the current cursor position, or -1 if the cursor is not over a column Index of the column under the cursor, or -1 返回此控件的Windows句柄 当ObjectListView被初始化为UserControl的一部分时，GetHeaderControl()方法返回0，直到UserControl完全初始化。 因此，构造函数中的AssignHandle()调用不起作用。因此，我们覆盖了Handle属性，以便值始终为当前值。 Gets or sets a style that should be applied to the font of the column's header text when the mouse is over that column THIS IS EXPERIMENTAL. USE AT OWN RISK. August 2009 如果光标位于其复选框上，则获取光标下列的索引 Gets the client rectangle for the header 如果给定坐标点在给定列的复选框上方，则返回TRUE。 获取光标是否位于“锁定”的分隔线上，即用户无法拖动的分隔线。 获取或设置此标头所属的列表视图 获取标题的最大高度。-1表示没有最大值。 获取标题的最小高度。-1表示没有最低要求。 Get or set the ToolTip that shows tips for the header 获取或设置当列标题中的文本太长而无法放入列中时，是否应对其进行自动换行 Calculate how height the header needs to be Height in pixels Get the bounds of the checkbox against the given column Should the given column be drawn with a checkbox against it? Should the given column show a sort indicator? Should the given column be drawn with a filter indicator against it? Should the given column show a non-themed sort indicator? Return the bounds of the item with the given index Return the bounds within which the given column will be drawn Force the header to redraw by invalidating it Force the header to redraw a single column by invalidating it Create a native tool tip control for this listview Override the basic message pump Handle the LButtonDown windows message Handle the LButtonUp windows message Handle the SetCursor windows message Handle the MouseMove windows message Handle the MouseLeave windows message Handle the Notify windows message Handle the CustomDraw windows message The message divides a ListView's space between the header and the rows of the listview. The WINDOWPOS structure controls the headers bounds, the RECT controls the listview bounds. Handle when the underlying header control is destroyed Does this header need to be custom drawn? Word wrapping and colored text require custom drawning. Funnily enough, we can change the font natively. Draw one cell of the header Draw a background for the header, without using Themes. Draw a more-or-less pure themed header background. Draw a sort indicator using themes Draw a sort indicator without using themes Draw an indication that this column has a filter applied to it Draw the header's image and text Return the header format that should be used for the given column What style should be applied to the header? What font should be used to draw the header text? What flags will be used when drawing text Perform a HitTest for the header control Null if the given point isn't over the header Instances of this class put a CheckedListBox into a tool strip menu item. Create a ToolStripCheckedListBox Gets the control embedded in the menu Gets the items shown in the checkedlistbox Gets or sets whether an item should be checked when it is clicked Gets a collection of the checked items Add a possibly checked item to the control Add an item with the given state to the control Gets the checkedness of the i'th item Set the checkedness of the i'th item Check all the items in the control Unchecked all the items in the control Listen for events on the underlying control Stop listening for events on the underlying control Tell the world that an item was checked Trigger the ItemCheck event A limited wrapper around a Windows tooltip window. These are the standard icons that a tooltip can display. No icon Info Warning Error Large info (Vista and later only) Large warning (Vista and later only) Large error (Vista and later only) Get or set if the style of the tooltip control Get or set if the tooltip should be shown as a ballon Get or set if the tooltip should be shown as a ballon Get or set the background color of the tooltip Get or set the color of the text and border on the tooltip. Get or set the title that will be shown on the tooltip. Get or set the icon that will be shown on the tooltip. Gets or sets the font that will be used to draw this control. is still. Setting this to null reverts to the default font. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the tooltip will remain visible while the mouse is still. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the mouse must be still before the tooltip is shown. Gets or sets how many milliseconds the mouse must be still before the tooltip is shown again. Create the underlying control. The parent of the tooltip This does nothing if the control has already been created Take a copy of the current settings and restore them when the tooltip is poppped. This call cannot be nested. Subsequent calls to this method will be ignored until PopSettings() is called. Restore the settings of the tooltip as they were when PushSettings() was last called. Add the given window to those for whom this tooltip will show tips The window Hide any currently visible tooltip Remove the given window from those managed by this tooltip Set the maximum width of a tooltip string. Set the maximum width of a tooltip string. Setting this ensures that line breaks in the tooltip are honoured. Make a TOOLINFO structure for the given window A filled in TOOLINFO Handle a WmNotify message The msg True if the message has been handled Handle a get display info message The msg True if the message has been handled Handle a TTN_LINKCLICK message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a TTN_POP message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a TTN_SHOW message The msg True if the message has been handled This cannot call base.WndProc() since the msg may have come from another control. Handle a reflected notify message The msg True if the message has been handled Mess with the basic message pump of the tooltip Tell the world that a tooltip is about to show Tell the world that a tooltip is about to disappear This form is an example of how an application could allows the user to select which columns an ObjectListView will display, as well as select which order the columns are displayed in. In Tile view, ColumnHeader.DisplayIndex does nothing. To reorder the columns you have to change the order of objects in the Columns property. Remember that the first column is special! It has to remain the first column. Make a new ColumnSelectionForm Open this form so it will edit the columns that are available in the listview's current view The ObjectListView whose columns are to be altered Open this form so it will edit the columns that are available in the given listview when the listview is showing the given type of view. The ObjectListView whose columns are to be altered The view that is to be altered. Must be View.Details or View.Tile Initialize the form to show the columns of the given view The user has pressed OK. Do what's requied. Enable the controls on the dialog to match the current state A Comparer that will sort a list of columns so that visible ones come before hidden ones, and that are ordered by their display order. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. An object that implements the IGenerator interface provides the ability to dynamically create columns for an ObjectListView based on the characteristics of a given collection of model objects. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the attributes of the given type If allProperties to true, all public properties will have a matching column generated. If allProperties is false, only properties that have a OLVColumn attribute will have a column generated. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. The Generator class provides methods to dynamically create columns for an ObjectListView based on the characteristics of a given collection of model objects. For a given type, a Generator can create columns to match the public properties of that type. The generator can consider all public properties or only those public properties marked with [OLVColumn] attribute. Gets or sets the actual generator used by the static convinence methods. If you subclass the standard generator or implement IGenerator yourself, you should install an instance of your subclass/implementation here. Replace all columns of the given ObjectListView with columns generated from the first member of the given enumerable. If the enumerable is empty or null, the ObjectListView will be cleared. The ObjectListView to modify The collection whose first element will be used to generate columns. Replace all columns of the given ObjectListView with columns generated from the first member of the given enumerable. If the enumerable is empty or null, the ObjectListView will be cleared. The ObjectListView to modify The collection whose first element will be used to generate columns. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the public properties of the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the public properties of the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the public properties of the given type that have a OLVColumn attribute. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. Generate columns into the given ObjectListView that come from the given model object type. The ObjectListView to modify The model type whose attributes will be considered. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. Generate a list of OLVColumns based on the attributes of the given type If allProperties to true, all public properties will have a matching column generated. If allProperties is false, only properties that have a OLVColumn attribute will have a column generated. Will columns be generated for properties that are not marked with [OLVColumn]. A collection of OLVColumns matching the attributes of Type that have OLVColumnAttributes. Replace all the columns in the given listview with the given list of columns. Post process columns after creating them and adding them to the AllColumns collection. Create a column from the given PropertyInfo and OLVColumn attribute Make a column from the given PropertyInfo Make a column from the given PropertyDescriptor Create a column with all the given information Create a column. Convert a property name to a displayable title. Configure the given column to show a checkbox if appropriate If this given type has an property marked with [OLVChildren], make delegates that will traverse that property as the children of an instance of the model Generate CanExpand and ChildrenGetter delegates from the given property. An OLVExporter converts a collection of rows from an ObjectListView into a variety of textual formats. What format will be used for exporting Tab separated values, according to http://www.iana.org/assignments/media-types/text/tab-separated-values Alias for TabSeparated Comma separated values, according to http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc4180.txt HTML table, according to me Create an empty exporter Create an exporter that will export all the rows of the given ObjectListView Create an exporter that will export all the given rows from the given ObjectListView Gets or sets whether hidden columns will also be included in the textual representation. If this is false (the default), only visible columns will be included. Gets or sets whether column headers will also be included in the text and HTML representation. Default is true. Gets the ObjectListView that is being used as the source of the data to be exported Gets the model objects that are to be placed in the data object Export the nominated rows from the nominated ObjectListView. Returns the result in the expected format. This will perform only one conversion, even if called multiple times with different formats. Convert Encode a string such that it can be used as a value in a CSV file. This basically means replacing any quote mark with two quote marks, and enclosing the whole string in quotes. HTML-encodes a string and returns the encoded string. The text string to encode. The HTML-encoded text. Taken from http://www.west-wind.com/weblog/posts/2009/Feb/05/Html-and-Uri-String-Encoding-without-SystemWeb A TypedObjectListView is a type-safe wrapper around an ObjectListView. VCS does not support generics on controls. It can be faked to some degree, but it cannot be completely overcome. In our case in particular, there is no way to create the custom OLVColumn's that we need to truly be generic. So this wrapper is an experiment in providing some type-safe access in a way that is useful and available today. A TypedObjectListView is not more efficient than a normal ObjectListView. Underneath, the same name of casts are performed. But it is easier to use since you do not have to write the casts yourself. The class of model object that the list will manage To use a TypedObjectListView, you write code like this: TypedObjectListView<Person> tlist = new TypedObjectListView<Person>(this.listView1); tlist.CheckStateGetter = delegate(Person x) { return x.IsActive; }; tlist.GetColumn(0).AspectGetter = delegate(Person x) { return x.Name; }; ... To iterate over the selected objects, you can write something elegant like this: foreach (Person x in tlist.SelectedObjects) { x.GrantSalaryIncrease(); } Create a typed wrapper around the given list. The listview to be wrapped Return the model object that is checked, if only one row is checked. If zero rows are checked, or more than one row, null is returned. Return the list of all the checked model objects The ObjectListView that is being wrapped Get or set the list of all model objects Return the model object that is selected, if only one row is selected. If zero rows are selected, or more than one row, null is returned. The list of model objects that are selected. Return a typed wrapper around the column at the given index The index of the column A typed column or null Return a typed wrapper around the column with the given name The name of the column A typed column or null Return the model object at the given index The index of the model object The model object or null CheckStateGetter Gets or sets the check state getter BooleanCheckStateGetter Gets or sets the boolean check state getter CheckStatePutter Gets or sets the check state putter delegate BooleanCheckStatePutter Gets or sets the boolean check state putter ToolTipGetter Gets or sets the cell tooltip getter Gets or sets the header tool tip getter This method will generate AspectGetters for any column that has an AspectName. A type-safe wrapper around an OLVColumn Creates a TypedColumn Generate an aspect getter that does the same thing as the AspectName, except without using reflection. If you have an AspectName of "Owner.Address.Postcode", this will generate the equivilent of: this.AspectGetter = delegate (object x) { return x.Owner.Address.Postcode; } If AspectName is empty, this method will do nothing, otherwise this will replace any existing AspectGetter. Generates an aspect getter method dynamically. The method will execute the given dotted chain of selectors against a model object given at runtime. The type of model object to be passed to the generated method A dotted chain of selectors. Each selector can be the name of a field, property or parameter-less method. A typed delegate This method generates the actual IL for the method. A virtual object list view operates in virtual mode, that is, it only gets model objects for a row when it is needed. This gives it the ability to handle very large numbers of rows with minimal resources. A listview is not a great user interface for a large number of items. But if you've ever wanted to have a list with 10 million items, go ahead, knock yourself out. Virtual lists can never iterate their contents. That would defeat the whole purpose. Animated GIFs should not be used in virtual lists. Animated GIFs require some state information to be stored for each animation, but virtual lists specifically do not keep any state information. In any case, you really do not want to keep state information for 10 million animations! Although it isn't documented, .NET virtual lists cannot have checkboxes. This class codes around this limitation, but you must use the functions provided by ObjectListView: CheckedObjects, CheckObject(), UncheckObject() and their friends. If you use the normal check box properties (CheckedItems or CheckedIndicies), they will throw an exception, since the list is in virtual mode, and .NET "knows" it can't handle checkboxes in virtual mode. Due to the limits of the underlying Windows control, virtual lists do not trigger ItemCheck/ItemChecked events. Use a CheckStatePutter instead. To enable grouping, you must provide an implmentation of IVirtualGroups interface, via the GroupingStrategy property. Similarly, to enable filtering on the list, your VirtualListDataSource must also implement the IFilterableDataSource interface. Create a VirtualObjectListView Gets whether or not this listview is capabale of showing groups Get or set the collection of model objects that are checked. When setting this property, any row whose model object isn't in the given collection will be unchecked. Setting to null is equivilent to unchecking all. This property returns a simple collection. Changes made to the returned collection do NOT affect the list. This is different to the behaviour of CheckedIndicies collection. When getting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects. When setting CheckedObjects, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the number of checked objects plus the number of objects to be checked. If the ListView is not currently showing CheckBoxes, this property does nothing. It does not remember any check box settings made. This class optimizes the management of CheckStates so that it will work efficiently even on large lists of item. However, those optimizations are impossible if you install a CheckStateGetter. With a CheckStateGetter installed, the performance of this method is O(n) where n is the size of the list. This could be painfully slow. Gets or sets whether or not an object will be included in the CheckedObjects collection, even if it is not present in the control at the moment This property is an implementation detail and should not be altered. Gets the collection of objects that survive any filtering that may be in place. Gets or sets the strategy that will be used to create groups This must be provided for a virtual list to show groups. Gets whether or not the current list is filtering its contents This is only possible if our underlying data source supports filtering. Get/set the collection of objects that this list will show The contents of the control will be updated immediately after setting this property. Setting this property preserves selection, if possible. Use SetObjects() if you do not want to preserve the selection. Preserving selection is the slowest part of this code -- performance is O(n) where n is the number of selected rows. This method is not thread safe. The property DOES work on virtual lists, but if you try to iterate through a list of 10 million objects, it may take some time :) This delegate is used to fetch a rowObject, given it's index within the list Only use this property if you are not using a VirtualListDataSource. Should this list show its items in groups? Get/set the data source that is behind this virtual list Setting this will cause the list to redraw. Gets or sets the number of rows in this virtual list. There is an annoying feature/bug in the .NET ListView class. When you change the VirtualListSize property, it always scrolls so that the focused item is the top item. This is annoying since it makes the virtual list seem to flicker as the control scrolls to show the focused item and then scrolls back to where ObjectListView wants it to be. Return the number of items in the list the number of items in the list Return the model object at the given index Index of the model object to be returned A model object Find the given model object within the listview and return its index The model object to be found The index of the object. -1 means the object was not present Return the OLVListItem that displays the given model object The modelObject whose item is to be found The OLVListItem that displays the model, or null This method has O(n) performance. Add the given collection of model objects to this control. A collection of model objects The added objects will appear in their correct sort position, if sorting is active. Otherwise, they will appear at the end of the list. No check is performed to see if any of the objects are already in the ListView. Null objects are silently ignored. Remove all items from this list This method can safely be called from background threads. Scroll the listview so that the given group is at the top. The index of the group to be revealed If the group is already visible, the list will still be scrolled to move the group to the top, if that is possible. This only works when the list is showing groups (obviously). Inserts the given collection of model objects to this control at hte given location A collection of model objects The added objects will appear in their correct sort position, if sorting is active. Otherwise, they will appear at the given position of the list. No check is performed to see if any of the objects are already in the ListView. Null objects are silently ignored. Update the rows that are showing the given objects This method does not resort the items. Update the rows that are selected This method does not resort or regroup the view. Remove all of the given objects from the control Collection of objects to be removed Nulls and model objects that are not in the ListView are silently ignored. Due to problems in the underlying ListView, if you remove all the objects from the control using this method and the list scroll vertically when you do so, then when you subsequenially add more objects to the control, the vertical scroll bar will become confused and the control will draw one or more blank lines at the top of the list. Select the row that is displaying the given model object. All other rows are deselected. Model object to select Should the object be focused as well? Select the rows that is displaying any of the given model object. All other rows are deselected. A collection of model objects This method has O(n) performance where n is the number of model objects passed. Do not use this to select all the rows in the list -- use SelectAll() for that. Set the collection of objects that this control will show. Should the state of the list be preserved as far as is possible. Get the checkedness of an object from the model. Returning null means the model does know and the value from the control will be used. Rebuild the list with its current contents. Invalidate any cached information when we rebuild the list. Clear any cached info this list may have been using Do the work of creating groups for this control Do the plumbing to disable groups on a virtual list Do the plumbing to enable groups on a virtual list Return the position of the given itemIndex in the list as it currently shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the last item in the order they are shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the n'th item (0-based) in the order they are shown to the user. If the control is not grouped, the display order is the same as the sorted list order. But if the list is grouped, the display order is different. Return the ListViewItem that appears immediately after the given item. If the given item is null, the first item in the list will be returned. Return null if the given item is the last item. The item that is before the item that is returned, or null A OLVListItem Return the ListViewItem that appears immediately before the given item. If the given item is null, the last item in the list will be returned. Return null if the given item is the first item. The item that is before the item that is returned A ListViewItem Make a list of groups that should be shown according to the given parameters Create a OLVListItem for given row index The index of the row that is needed An OLVListItem On virtual lists, this cannot work. Record the change of checkstate for the given object in the model. This does not update the UI -- only the model The check state that was recorded and that should be used to update the control. Refresh the given item in the list The item to refresh Change the size of the list Take ownership of the 'objects' collection. This separates our collection from the source. This method separates the 'objects' instance variable from its source, so that any AddObject/RemoveObject calls will modify our collection and not the original colleciton. VirtualObjectListViews always own their collections, so this is a no-op. Change the state of the control to reflect changes in filtering Change the size of the virtual list so that it matches its data source Handle the CacheVirtualItems event Handle a RetrieveVirtualItem Handle the SearchForVirtualList event, which is called when the user types into a virtual list Find the first row in the given range of rows that prefix matches the string value of the given column. The index of the matched row, or -1 Item of autocomplete menu Parent AutocompleteMenu Text for inserting into textbox Image index for this item Alignment. The direction the text shows. Title for tooltip. Return null for disable tooltip for this item Tooltip text. For display tooltip text, ToolTipTitle must be not null Menu text. This text is displayed in the drop-down menu. Returns text for inserting into Textbox Compares fragment text with this item Returns text for display into popup menu This method is called after item was inserted into text Item do not appears Item appears Item appears and will selected This autocomplete item appears after dot Autocomplete item for code snippets Snippet can contain special char ^ for caret position. Compares fragment text with this item This class finds items by substring This item draws multicolumn menu Duration (ms) of tooltip showing Occurs when user selected item for inserting into text Occurs when current hovered item is changing Colors Duration (ms) of tooltip showing Called when user selected the control and needed wrapper over it. You can assign own Wrapper for target control. Current target control wrapper Maximum size of popup menu Font Left padding of text Colors of foreground and background AutocompleteMenu will popup automatically (when user writes text). Otherwise it will popup only programmatically or by Ctrl-Space. AutocompleteMenu will capture focus when opening. Indicates whether the component should draw right-to-left for RTL languages. Image list Fragment Regex pattern for serach fragment around caret Minimum fragment length for popup Allows TAB for select menu item Interval of menu appear (ms) The control for menu displaying. Set to null for restore default ListView (AutocompleteListView). Updates size of the menu Returns rectangle of item User selects item It fires after item was inserting It fires when item was hovered Occurs when popup menu is opening Shows popup menu immediately If True - MinFragmentLength will be ignored Menu is visible Control for displaying menu items, hosted in AutocompleteMenu. Image list Index of current selected item Index of current selected item List of visible elements Duration (ms) of tooltip showing Occurs when user selected item for inserting into text Occurs when current hovered item is changing Shows tooltip Hides tooltip Returns rectangle of item Colors Wrapper over the control like TextBox. Wrapper over the control like TextBox. Specifies a range of characters. If the cpMin and cpMax members are equal, the range is empty. The range includes everything if cpMin is 0 and cpMax is –1. Character position index immediately preceding the first character in the range. Character position immediately following the last character in the range. 所在行开始的位置 所在行数 所在行文本 所在行文本 选择区域是否是空 Specifies a range of characters. If the cpMin and cpMax members are equal, the range is empty. The range includes everything if cpMin is 0 and cpMax is –1. The minimum, or start position. The maximum, or end position. Specifies a range of characters. If the cpMin and cpMax members are equal, the range is empty. The range includes everything if cpMin is 0 and cpMax is –1. 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 搜索模式,0表示标准,1表示扩展,2表示正则 匹配大小写 全词匹配 单词开头匹配 【正则】已编译 【正则】显式捕获 【正则】多行模式 【正则】忽略语言区域差异 【正则】忽略大小写 【正则】从右到左 【正则】ECMA脚本 【正则】忽略空白符 【正则】单行模式 获取正则选项 设置正则选项 获取普通搜索选项 设置普通搜索选项 从另一个控件复制配置 必需的设计器变量。 清理所有正在使用的资源。 如果应释放托管资源，为 true；否则为 false。 设计器支持所需的方法 - 不要修改 使用代码编辑器修改此方法的内容。 Controls find behavior for non-regular expression searches Find must match the whole word Find must match the case of the expression Only match the _start of a word Not used in ScintillaNET Not used in ScintillaNET Creates an instance of the FindReplace class. The Scintilla class to which the FindReplace class is attached. Creates an instance of the FindReplace class. 搜索路径 Triggered when a key is pressed on the Find and Replace Dialog. Handler for the key press on a Find and Replace Dialog. The sender. The key info of the key(s) pressed. Clears highlights from the entire document Highlight ranges in the document. List of ranges to which highlighting should be applied. Creates and returns a new object. A new object. Creates and returns a new object. A new object. Gets or sets whether the dialog should automatically move away from the current selection to prevent obscuring it. true to automatically move away from the current selection; otherwise, false. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Gets or sets whether the control should automatically move away from the current selection to prevent obscuring it. true to automatically move away from the current selection; otherwise, false. If ToolItem is enabled, this defaults to false. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. 读取或设置只读模式 是否开启行号 是否使用自定义搜索功能 是否使用自定义定位行功能 当前高亮语言 获取或设置是否开启自动标记功能 获取或设置编辑器字体 Sets font style properties 获取或设置当前选中的文字 设置或获取文本 在自带菜单弹出前激发 保存热键发生时 打开自定义查找窗口时发生 打开自定义替换窗口时发生 打开自定义定位行窗口时发生 选定内容发生变化 判断改行为函数开头行 获取最近的函数名称所在行内容 到达与指定编辑器同样的位置 标记指定字符串 标记词语 清除所有标记 设置高亮文本 设置高亮文本 设置文本 显示查找对话框 显示替换对话框 显示行定位对话框 根据标签获得菜单项 设置自动完成列表 添加菜单分隔线 添加菜单 Visibility and location of annotations in a control Annotations are not displayed. This is the default. Annotations are drawn left justified with no adornment. Annotations are indented to match the text and are surrounded by a box. Annotations are indented to match the text. Provides data for the event. Gets the list type of the user list or 0 for an autocompletion. The list type of the user list or 0 for an autocompletion. Gets the position where the list was displayed at. The zero-based document position where the list was displayed. Gets the text of the selected autocompletion item. The selected autocompletion item text. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. A pointer to the selected autocompletion text. The zero-based byte position within the document where the list was displayed. The list type of the user list, or 0 for an autocompletion. Provides data for the event. Gets the fillup character that caused the completion. The fillup character used to cause the completion; otherwise, 0. Only a of will return a non-zero character. Gets a value indicating how the completion occurred. One of the enumeration values. Gets the start position of the word being completed. The zero-based document position of the word being completed. Gets the text of the selected autocompletion item. The selected autocompletion item text. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position within the document of the word being completed. A pointer to the selected autocompletion text. The character that caused the completion. A value indicating the way in which the completion occurred. Configuration options for automatic code folding. This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. Automatic folding is disabled. This is the default. Automatically show lines as needed. The event is not raised when this value is used. Handle clicks in fold margin automatically. The event is not raised for folding margins when this value is used. Show lines as needed when the fold structure is changed. Provides data for the and events. Gets the zero-based document position where the modification will occur. The zero-based character position within the document where text will be inserted or deleted. Gets the source of the modification. One of the enum values. Gets the text being inserted or deleted. The text about to be inserted or deleted. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The source of the modification. The zero-based byte position within the document where text is being modified. The length in bytes of the text being modified. A pointer to the text being inserted. The display type for the property. The bi-directional display type is disabled. The bi-directional display type is left-to-right. The bi-directional display type is right-to-left. Specifies the border style for a control. Use the members of this enumeration to set the border style for controls that have a changeable border. No border. A single-line border. A three-dimensional border (classic). A three-dimensional border. When visual styles are enabled, the border is displayed like that of a . When visual styles are not enabled, this is equivalent to . Provides data for the event. Gets the type of the call tip click. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. /// Type of the call tip click. The type of a call tip click. The call tip was clicked elsewhere; not the up or down arrows. The call tip up arrow was clicked. The call tip down arrow was clicked. The caret policy. If set, we can define a slop value: caretSlop. This value defines an unwanted zone (UZ) where the caret is... unwanted. This zone is defined as a number of pixels near the vertical margins, and as a number of lines near the horizontal margins. By keeping the caret away from the edges, it is seen within its context. This makes it likely that the identifier that the caret is on can be completely seen, and that the current line is seen with some of the lines following it, which are often dependent on that line. If set, the policy set by CARET_SLOP is enforced... strictly. The caret is centered on the display if caretSlop is not set, and cannot go in the UZ if caretSlop is set. If set, the display is moved more energetically so the caret can move in the same direction longer before the policy is applied again. '3UZ' notation is used to indicate three time the size of the UZ as a distance to the margin. If not set, instead of having symmetrical UZs, the left and bottom UZs are extended up to right and top UZs respectively. This way, we favour the displaying of useful information: the beginning of lines, where most code reside, and the lines after the caret, for example, the body of a function. The caret visual style. The caret is not displayed. The caret is drawn as a vertical line. The caret is drawn as a block. Provides data for the event. Gets the line index where the annotation changed. The zero-based line index where the annotation change occurred. Initializes a new instance of the class. The zero-based line index of the annotation that changed. Bit-flags for whether Scintilla should keep track of document change history and in which ways it should display the difference. The default: change history turned off. Track changes to the document. Display changes in the margin using the SC_MARKNUM_HISTORY markers. Display changes in the text using the INDICATOR_HISTORY indicators. Provides data for the event. Gets the text character added to a control. The character added. Initializes a new instance of the class. The character added. OkLab color. Luminance (perceived lightness) in range [0.0, 1.0]. How green/red the color is in range [-0.233887, +0.276216]. How blue/yellow the color is in range [-0.311528, +0.198570]. OkLab color. Luminance (perceived lightness) in range [0.0, 1.0]. How green/red the color is in range [-0.233887, +0.276216]. How blue/yellow the color is in range [-0.311528, +0.198570]. sRGB color. Red component. Green component. Blue component. sRGB color. Red component. Green component. Blue component. Actions which can be performed by the application or bound to keys in a control. When bound to keys performs the standard platform behavior. Performs no action and when bound to keys prevents them from propagating to the parent window. Moves the caret down one line. Extends the selection down one line. Extends the rectangular selection down one line. Scrolls down one line. Moves the caret up one line. Extends the selection up one line. Extends the rectangular selection up one line. Scrolls up one line. Moves the caret down one paragraph. Extends the selection down one paragraph. Moves the caret up one paragraph. Extends the selection up one paragraph. Moves the caret left one character. Extends the selection left one character. Extends the rectangular selection left one character. Moves the caret right one character. Extends the selection right one character. Extends the rectangular selection right one character. Moves the caret to the start of the previous word. Extends the selection to the start of the previous word. Moves the caret to the start of the next word. Extends the selection to the start of the next word. Moves the caret to the end of the previous word. Extends the selection to the end of the previous word. Moves the caret to the end of the next word. Extends the selection to the end of the next word. Moves the caret to the previous word segment (case change or underscore). Extends the selection to the previous word segment (case change or underscore). Moves the caret to the next word segment (case change or underscore). Extends the selection to the next word segment (case change or underscore). Moves the caret to the start of the line. Extends the selection to the start of the line. Extends the rectangular selection to the start of the line. Moves the caret to the start of the display line. Extends the selection to the start of the display line. Moves the caret to the start of the display or document line. Extends the selection to the start of the display or document line. Moves the caret to the first non-whitespace character of the line. Extends the selection to the first non-whitespace character of the line. Extends the rectangular selection to the first non-whitespace character of the line. Moves the caret to the first non-whitespace character of the display or document line. Extends the selection to the first non-whitespace character of the display or document line. Moves the caret to the first non-whitespace character of the display line. Extends the selection to the first non-whitespace character of the display line. Moves the caret to the end of the document line. Extends the selection to the end of the document line. Extends the rectangular selection to the end of the document line. Moves the caret to the end of the display line. Extends the selection to the end of the display line. Moves the caret to the end of the display or document line. Extends the selection to the end of the display or document line. Moves the caret to the start of the document. Extends the selection to the start of the document. Moves the caret to the end of the document. Extends the selection to the end of the document. Moves the caret up one page. Extends the selection up one page. Extends the rectangular selection up one page. Moves the caret down one page. Extends the selection down one page. Extends the rectangular selection down one page. Moves the caret up one window or page. Extends the selection up one window or page. Moves the caret down one window or page. Extends the selection down one window or page. Deletes the character left of the caret. Deletes the character (excluding line breaks) left of the caret. Deletes from the caret to the start of the previous word. Deletes from the caret to the start of the next word. Deletes from the caret to the end of the next word. Deletes the characters left of the caret to the start of the line. Deletes the characters right of the caret to the start of the line. Deletes the current line. Removes the current line and places it on the clipboard. Copies the current line and places it on the clipboard. Transposes the current and previous lines. Reverses the current line. Duplicates the current line. Converts the selection to lowercase. Converts the selection to uppercase. Cancels autocompletion, calltip display, and drops any additional selections. Toggles overtype. See . Inserts a newline character. Inserts a form feed character. Adds a tab (indent) character. Removes a tab (indent) character from the start of a line. Duplicates the current selection. Moves the caret vertically to the center of the screen. Moves the selected lines up. Moves the selected lines down. Scrolls to the start of the document without changing the selection. Scrolls to the end of the document without changing the selection. Command equivalent to . Command equivalent to . Command equivalent to . Command equivalent to . Command equivalent to Command equivalent to Command equivalent to Command equivalent to Command equivalent to Specifies the clipboard formats to copy. Copies text to the clipboard in Unicode format. Copies text to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF). Copies text to the clipboard in HyperText Markup Language (HTML) format. A document. This is an opaque type, meaning it can be used by a control but otherwise has no public members of its own. A read-only field that represents an uninitialized document. Returns a value indicating whether this instance is equal to a specified object. An object to compare with this instance or null. true if is an instance of and equals the value of this instance; otherwise, false. Returns the hash code for this instance. A 32-bit signed integer hash code. Determines whether two specified instances of are equal. The first document to compare. The second document to compare. true if equals ; otherwise, false. Determines whether two specified instances of are not equal. The first document to compare. The second document to compare. true if does not equal ; otherwise, false. Provides data for the event. Gets the line double clicked. The zero-based index of the double clicked line. Gets the modifier keys (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT) held down when double clicked. A bitwise combination of the Keys enumeration indicating the modifier keys. Gets the zero-based document position of the text double clicked. The zero-based character position within the document of the double clicked text; otherwise, -1 if not a document position. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The modifier keys that where held down at the time of the double click. The zero-based byte position of the double clicked text. The zero-based line index of the double clicked text. Provides data for the and events. Gets the zero-based document position where the mouse pointer was lingering. The nearest zero-based document position to where the mouse pointer was lingering. Gets the x-coordinate of the mouse pointer. The x-coordinate of the mouse pointer relative to the control. Gets the y-coordinate of the mouse pointer. The y-coordinate of the mouse pointer relative to the control. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position within the document where the mouse pointer was lingering. The x-coordinate of the mouse pointer relative to the control. The y-coordinate of the mouse pointer relative to the control. The long line edge display mode. Long lines are not indicated. This is the default. Long lines are indicated with a vertical line. Long lines are indicated with a background color. Similar to except allows for multiple vertical lines to be visible using the method. and are completely independant of this mode. End-of-line format. Carriage Return, Line Feed pair "\r\n" (0x0D0A). Carriage Return '\r' (0x0D). Line Feed '\n' (0x0A). Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Fold actions. Contract the fold. Expand the fold. Toggle between contracted and expanded. Display options for fold text tags. Do not display the text tags. This is the default. Display the text tags. Display the text tags with a box drawn around them. Additional display options for folds. A line is drawn above if expanded. A line is drawn above if not expanded. A line is drawn below if expanded. A line is drawn below if not expanded. Displays the hexadecimal fold levels in the margin to aid with debugging. This feature may change in the future. Displays the hexadecimal line state in the margin to aid with debugging. This flag cannot be used at the same time as the flag. Flags for additional line fold level behavior. Indicates that the line is blank and should be treated slightly different than its level may indicate; otherwise, blank lines should generally not be fold points. Indicates that the line is a header (fold point). The font quality (antialiasing method) used to render text. Specifies that the character quality of the font does not matter; so the lowest quality can be used. This is the default. Specifies that anti-aliasing should not be used when rendering text. Specifies that anti-aliasing should be used when rendering text, if the font supports it. Specifies that ClearType anti-aliasing should be used when rendering text, if the font supports it. Helper methods for the control. Converts an ABGR WinAPI color to . The color value to convert. A equivalent of the ABGR WinAPI color. Converts a to ABGR WinAPI color. The instance to convert. ABGR WinAPI color value of the instance. Converts an ABGR WinAPI color to while ignoring the alpha channel. The color value to convert. A equivalent of the ABGR WinAPI color with alpha channel value set to max (opaque). Converts a to ABGR WinAPI color while ignoring the alpha channel. The instance to convert. ABGR WinAPI color value of the instance with alpha channel value set to max (opaque). Gets the folding state of the control as a delimited string containing line indexes. The control instance. The string to use as a separator. The folding state of the control. Sets the folding state of the state of the control with specified index string. The control instance. A string containing the folded line indexes separated with the to restore the folding. The string to use as a separator. Returns index of the maximum value in a generic sequence. The type of the elements of . A sequence of values to determine the index of the maximum value of. The to compare values. The index of the maximum value in the sequence. is . No object in implements the or interface. If type implements , the method uses that implementation to compare values. Otherwise, if type implements , that implementation is used to compare values. If is a reference type and the source sequence is empty or contains only values that are , this method returns -1. Provides data for the , , and events. Gets the modifier keys (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT) held down when clicked. A bitwise combination of the Keys enumeration indicating the modifier keys. Only the state of the CTRL key is reported in the event. Gets the zero-based document position of the text clicked. The zero-based character position within the document of the clicked text. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The modifier keys that where held down at the time of the click. The zero-based byte position of the clicked text. Possible strategies for styling text using application idle time. Syntax styling is performed for all the currently visible text before displaying it. This is the default. A small amount of styling is performed before display and then further styling is performed incrementally in the background as an idle-time task. This can improve initial display/scroll performance, but may result in the text initially appearing uncolored and then, some time later, it is colored. Text after the currently visible portion may be styled as an idle-time task. This will not improve initial display/scroll performance, but may improve subsequent display/scroll performance. Text before and after the current visible text. This is a combination of and . Provides methods for loading and creating a on a background (non-UI) thread. Internally an maintains a instance with a reference count of 1. You are responsible for ensuring the reference count eventually reaches 0 or memory leaks will occur. Adds the data specified to the internal document. The character buffer to copy to the new document. The number of characters in to copy. true if the data was added successfully; otherwise, false. A return value of false should be followed by a call to . Returns the internal document. A containing the added text. The document has a reference count of 1. Called to release the internal document when an error occurs using or to abandon loading. The internal document reference count. A return value of 0 indicates that the document has been destroyed and all associated memory released. Options for displaying indentation guides in a control. Indentation guides can be styled using the style. No indentation guides are shown. This is the default. Indentation guides are shown inside real indentation whitespace. Indentation guides are shown beyond the actual indentation up to the level of the next non-empty line. If the previous non-empty line was a fold header then indentation guides are shown for one more level of indent than that line. This setting is good for Python. Indentation guides are shown beyond the actual indentation up to the level of the next non-empty line or previous non-empty line whichever is the greater. This setting is good for most languages. Represents an indicator in a control. An OR mask to use with and to indicate that the user-defined indicator value should be treated as a RGB color. An AND mask to use with to retrieve the user-defined value as a RGB color when being treated as such. Given a document position which is filled with this indicator, will return the document position where the use of this indicator ends. A zero-based document position using this indicator. The zero-based document position where the use of this indicator ends. Specifying a which is not filled with this indicator will cause this method to return the end position of the range where this indicator is not in use (the negative space). If this indicator is not in use anywhere within the document the return value will be 0. Given a document position which is filled with this indicator, will return the document position where the use of this indicator starts. A zero-based document position using this indicator. The zero-based document position where the use of this indicator starts. Specifying a which is not filled with this indicator will cause this method to return the start position of the range where this indicator is not in use (the negative space). If this indicator is not in use anywhere within the document the return value will be 0. Returns the user-defined value for the indicator at the specified position. The zero-based document position to get the indicator value for. The user-defined value at the specified . Gets or sets the alpha transparency of the indicator. The alpha transparency ranging from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (no transparency). The default is 30. Gets or sets the indicator flags. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. The default is . Gets or sets the color used to draw an indicator. The Color used to draw an indicator. The default varies. Changing the property will reset the . Gets or sets the color used to draw an indicator when the mouse or caret is over an indicator. The Color used to draw an indicator. By default, the hover style is equal to the regular . Changing the property will reset the . Gets or sets the indicator style used when the mouse or caret is over an indicator. One of the enumeration values. By default, the hover style is equal to the regular . Changing the property will reset the . Gets the zero-based indicator index this object represents. The indicator definition index within the . Gets or sets the alpha transparency of the indicator outline. The alpha transparency ranging from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (no transparency). The default is 50. Gets or sets the indicator style. One of the enumeration values. The default varies. Changing the property will reset the . Gets or sets whether indicators are drawn under or over text. true to draw the indicator under text; otherwise, false. The default is false. Drawing indicators under text requires or drawing. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this indicator. The index of this style within the that created it. Provides data for the event. Gets the modifier keys (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT) held down when clicked. A bitwise combination of the Keys enumeration indicating the modifier keys. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The modifier keys that where held down at the time of the click. The zero-based byte position of the clicked text. An immutable collection of indicators in a control. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object that contains all objects within the . Gets the number of indicators. The number of indicators in the . Gets an object at the specified index. The indicator index. An object representing the indicator at the specified . Indicators 0 through 7 are used by lexers. Indicators 32 through 35 are used for IME. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this collection. Flags associated with a . This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. No flags. This is the default. When set, will treat an indicator value as a RGB color that has been OR'd with and will use that instead of the value specified in the property. This allows an indicator to display more than one color. Provides data for the event. Gets the zero-based document position of the text clicked. The zero-based character position within the document of the clicked text. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position of the clicked text. The visual appearance of an indicator. Underlined with a single, straight line. A squiggly underline. Requires 3 pixels of descender space. A line of small T shapes. Diagonal hatching. Strike out. An indicator with no visual effect. A rectangle around the text. A rectangle around the text with rounded corners. The rectangle outline and fill transparencies can be adjusted using and . A rectangle around the text. The rectangle outline and fill transparencies can be adjusted using and . A dashed underline. A dotted underline. Similar to but only using 2 vertical pixels so will fit under small fonts. A dotted rectangle around the text. The dots transparencies can be adjusted using and . A version of Squiggle that draws using a pixmap instead of as a series of line segments for performance. A 2-pixel thick underline with 1 pixel insets on either side. A 1-pixel thick underline with 1 pixel insets on either side. A rectangle around the entire character area. The rectangle outline and fill transparencies can be adjusted using and . An indicator that will change the foreground color of text to the foreground color of the indicator. A triangle below the start of the indicator range. A triangle below the center of the first character of the indicator range. A vertical gradient between a color and alpha at top to fully transparent at bottom. A vertical gradient with color and alpha in the mid-line fading to fully transparent at top and bottom. A triangle above the start of the indicator range. Provides data for the event. Gets the zero-based document position where text will be inserted. The zero-based character position within the document where text will be inserted. Gets or sets the text being inserted. The text being inserted into the document. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position within the document where text is being inserted. The length in bytes of the inserted text. A pointer to the text being inserted. The layer on which a control will draw elements like for example the text selection. Draw the selection background opaquely on the base layer. Draw the selection background translucently under the text. This will not work in single phase drawing mode. () as there is no under-text phase. Draw the selection background translucently over the text. Supported lexer names helper. Lexer for Assembler, just for the MASM syntax Lexer for APDL. Based on the lexer for Assembler by The Black Horus. This lexer is for the Asymptote vector graphics language Lexer for AutoIt3 Lexer for Avenue Lexer for AviSynth Lexer for ABAQUS. Based on the lexer for APDL by Hadar Raz. Lexer for Ada 95 Lexer for Asciidoc Lexer for Assembler, just for the MASM syntax Lexer for Assembler Lexer for ASN.1 Lexer for Baan. Lexer for Bash. Lexer for BlitzBasic. Lexer for PureBasic. Lexer for FreeBasic. Lexer for batch files Lexer for BibTeX coloring scheme. Lexer for Bullant Lexer for Common Intermediate Language (CIL) Case Sensitive Clarion Language Lexer Lexer for Clarion with no case sensitivity. Lexer for COBOL Lexer for Case Sensitive C++ Lexer for no case sensitivity C++ Lexer for C# Lexer for Cascading Style Sheets Lexer for Java Lexer for JavaScript Lexer for Objective Caml. Lexer for Cmake Lexer for CoffeeScript. Apache Configuration Files Lexer to use with extended crontab files used by a powerful Windows scheduler/event monitor/automation manager nnCron. Lexer for Csound (Orchestra and Score) Lexer for D Lexer for MSC Nastran DMAP. Lexer for DMIS. Lexer for DataFlex. Lexer for diff results. Lexer for ECL. Lexer for EDIFACT Lexer for ESCRIPT Lexer for Eiffel. Lexer for EiffelKW Lexer for Erlang. Lexer for error lists. Used for the output pane in SciTE Lexer for F# 5.0 Lexer for Harbour and FlagShip. Lexer for Forth Lexer for Fortran Lexer for Fortran 77 Lexer for the GAP language. (The GAP System for Computational Discrete Algebra) Lexer for GDScript. This is the Lexer for Gui4Cli, included in SciLexer.dll Lexer for HTML Lexer for XML Lexer for PHPScript A haskell lexer for the scintilla code control. Lexer for Literate Haskell Lexer for Motorola S-Record. Lexer for Intel HEX Lexer for Tektronix extended HEX Lexer for Hollywood Lexer for no language. Used for indentation-based folding of files. Lexer for Inno Setup scripts. Lexer for JSON and JSON-LD formats Lexer for Julia Lexer for KIX-Scripts. Lexer for KVIrc script. Lexer for LaTeX2e. Lexer for Lisp Lexer for the Basser Lout (>= version 3) typesetting language Lexer for Lua language Lexer for MMIX Assembler Language. Lexer for MPT specific files. Based on LexOthers.cxx LOT = the text log file created by the MPT application while running a test program Lexer for MSSQL Lexer for GE(r) Smallworld(tm) MagikSF Lexer for make files. A simple Markdown lexer for scintilla. Lexer for Matlab. Lexer for Octave Lexer for Maxima Lexer for general context conformant metapost coloring scheme Lexer for Modula-2/3 documents. Lexer for MySQL Lexer for NIM Lexer for NIMROD Lexer for NSIS Lexer for no language. Used for plain text and unrecognized files. Lexer for OScript sources; ocx files and/or OSpace dumps. Lexer for OPAL (functional language similar to Haskell) Lexer for PowerBasic Lexer for PL/M Lexer for GetText Translation (PO) files. Lexer for POV-Ray SDL Lexer for PostScript Lexer for Pascal Lexer for Perl Lexer for PowerPro Lexer for PowerShellj scripts Lexer for Progress 4GL. Lexer for properties files. Lexer for Python Lexer for R. Lexer for S. Lexer for SPlus Statistics Program. Lexer for Raku Lexer for REBOL Lexer for Windows registration files(.reg) Lexer for Ruby Lexer for Rust Lexer for SAS Lexer for SML Lexer for SQL, including PL/SQL and SQL*Plus. Lexer for Structured Text language. Lexer for Scriptol Lexer for SmallTalk Lexer for SORCUS installation files Lexer for Specman E language. Lexer for SPICE Lexer for Stata Lexer for TACL Lexer for TADS3 Lexer for TAL Lexer for TCL Lexer for Take Command / TCC batch scripts (.bat, .btm, .cmd). Lexer for LaTeX general context conformant tex coloring scheme A simple Txt2tags lexer for scintilla. Visual Basic Visual Basic Script Lexer for vhdl Lexer for Verilog Lexer for Visual Prolog Lexer for X12 Lexer for Yaml A class containing methods for interacting with the Lexilla library. Initializes the Lexilla.dll library. The handle to the Lexilla.dll file. Gets the lexer count in the Lexilla library. Amount of lexers defined in the Lexilla library. Creates a lexer with the specified name. The name of the lexer to create. A containing the lexer interface pointer. Gets the name of the lexer specified by an index number. The index. The name of the lexer if one was found with the specified index; null otherwise. Returns a lexer name with the specified identifier. The lexer identifier. The name of the lexer if one was found with the specified identifier; null otherwise. Gets the lexer names contained in the Lexilla library. An IEnumerable<System.String> value with the lexer names. Represents a line of text in a control. Expands any parent folds to ensure the line is visible. Performs the specified fold action on the current line and all child lines. One of the enumeration values. Performs the specified fold action on the current line. One of the enumeration values. Searches for the next line that has a folding level that is less than or equal to and returns the previous line index. The level of the line to search for. A value of -1 will use the current line . The zero-based index of the next line that has a less than or equal to . If the current line is a fold point and is -1 the index returned is the last line that would be made visible or hidden by toggling the fold state. Navigates the caret to the start of the line. Any selection is discarded. Adds the specified to the line. The zero-based index of the marker to add to the line. A which can be used to track the line. This method does not check if the line already contains the . Adds one or more markers to the line in a single call using a bit mask. An unsigned 32-bit value with each bit cooresponding to one of the 32 zero-based indexes to add. Removes the specified from the line. The zero-based index of the marker to remove from the line or -1 to delete all markers from the line. If the same marker has been added to the line more than once, this will delete one copy each time it is used. Returns a bit mask indicating which markers are present on the line. An unsigned 32-bit value with each bit cooresponding to one of the 32 zero-based indexes. Efficiently searches from the current line forward to the end of the document for the specified markers. An unsigned 32-bit value with each bit cooresponding to one of the 32 zero-based indexes. If found, the zero-based line index containing one of the markers in ; otherwise, -1. For example, the mask for marker index 10 is 1 shifted left 10 times (1 << 10). Efficiently searches from the current line backward to the start of the document for the specified markers. An unsigned 32-bit value with each bit cooresponding to one of the 32 zero-based indexes. If found, the zero-based line index containing one of the markers in ; otherwise, -1. For example, the mask for marker index 10 is 1 shifted left 10 times (1 << 10). Toggles the folding state of the line; expanding or contracting all child lines. The line must be set as a . Toggles the folding state of the line; expanding or contracting all child lines, and specifies the text tag to display to the right of the fold. The text tag to show to the right of the folded text. The display of fold text tags are determined by the method. Gets the number of annotation lines of text. The number of annotation lines. Gets or sets the style of the annotation text. The zero-based index of the annotation text or 256 when has been used to set individual character styles. Gets or sets an array of style indexes corresponding to each charcter in the so that each character may be individually styled. An array of indexes corresponding with each annotation text character or an uninitialized array when has been used to set a single style for all characters. must be set prior to setting this property. The specified should have a length equal to the length to properly style all characters. Gets or sets the line annotation text. A String representing the line annotation text. Searches from the current line to find the index of the next contracted fold header. The zero-based line index of the next contracted folder header. If the current line is contracted the current line index is returned. Gets the zero-based index of the line as displayed in a control taking into consideration folded (hidden) lines. The zero-based display line index. Gets the zero-based character position in the document where the line ends (exclusive). The equivalent of + . Gets or sets the expanded state (not the visible state) of the line. For toggling the fold state of a single line the method should be used. This property is useful for toggling the state of many folds without updating the display until finished. Gets or sets the fold level of the line. The fold level ranging from 0 to 4095. The default is 1024. Gets or sets the fold level flags. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. Gets the zero-based line index of the first line before the current line that is marked as and has a less than the current line. The zero-based line index of the fold parent if present; otherwise, -1. Gets the height of the line in pixels. The height in pixels of the line. Currently all lines are the same height. Gets the line index. The zero-based line index within the that created it. Gets the length of the line. The number of characters in the line including any end of line characters. Gets or sets the style of the margin text in a or margin. The zero-based index of the margin text or 256 when has been used to set individual character styles. Gets or sets an array of style indexes corresponding to each charcter in the so that each character may be individually styled. An array of indexes corresponding with each margin text character or an uninitialized array when has been used to set a single style for all characters. must be set prior to setting this property. The specified should have a length equal to the length to properly style all characters. Gets or sets the text displayed in the line margin when the margin type is or . The text displayed in the line margin. Gets the zero-based character position in the document where the line begins. The document position of the first character in the line. Gets the line text. A string representing the document line. The returned text includes any end of line characters. Sets or gets the line indentation. The indentation measured in character columns, which corresponds to the width of space characters. This returns the position at the end of indentation of a line. Gets a value indicating whether the line is visible. true if the line is visible; otherwise, false. Gets the number of display lines this line would occupy when wrapping is enabled. The number of display lines needed to wrap the current document line. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this line. The index of this line within the that created it. An immutable collection of lines of text in a control. Adjust the number of CHARACTERS in a line. Converts a BYTE offset to a CHARACTER offset. Returns the number of CHARACTERS in a line. Returns the CHARACTER offset where the line begins. Gets the number of CHARACTERS int a BYTE range. Gets the number of CHARACTERS in a BYTE range. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object that contains all objects within the . Returns the line index containing the CHARACTER position. Tracks a new line with the given CHARACTER length. Gets a value indicating whether all the document lines are visible (not hidden). true if all the lines are visible; otherwise, false. Gets the number of lines. The number of lines in the . Gets the number of CHARACTERS in the document. Gets the at the specified zero-based index. The zero-based index of the to get. The at the specified index. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this collection. Stuff we track for each line. The CHARACTER position where the line begins. 1 if the line contains multibyte (Unicode) characters; -1 if not; 0 if undetermined. Using an enum instead of Nullable because it uses less memory per line... Line endings types supported by lexers and allowed by a control. ASCII line endings. Carriage Return, Line Feed pair "\r\n" (0x0D0A); Carriage Return '\r' (0x0D); Line Feed '\n' (0x0A). Unicode line endings. Next Line (0x0085); Line Separator (0x2028); Paragraph Separator (0x2029). Indicates how an autocompletion occurred. A fillup character (see ) triggered the completion. The character used is indicated by the property. A double-click triggered the completion. A tab key or the command triggered the completion. A new line or command triggered the completion. The method triggered the completion. Represents a margin displayed on the left edge of a control. Gets or sets the background color of the margin when the property is set to . A Color object representing the margin background color. The default is Black. Alpha color values are ignored. Gets or sets the mouse cursor style when over the margin. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets the zero-based margin index this object represents. The margin index within the . Gets or sets whether the margin is sensitive to mouse clicks. true if the margin is sensitive to mouse clicks; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the margin type. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the width in pixels of the margin. The width of the margin measured in pixels. Scintilla assigns various default widths. Gets or sets a mask indicating which markers this margin can display. An unsigned 32-bit value with each bit cooresponding to one of the 32 zero-based indexes. The default is 0x1FFFFFF, which is every marker except folder markers (i.e. 0 through 24). For example, the mask for marker index 10 is 1 shifted left 10 times (1 << 10). is a useful constant for working with just folder margin indexes. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this margin. The index of this margin within the that created it. Provides data for the event. Gets the margin clicked. The zero-based index of the clicked margin. Gets the modifier keys (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT) held down when the margin was clicked. A bitwise combination of the Keys enumeration indicating the modifier keys. Gets the zero-based document position where the line ajacent to the clicked margin starts. The zero-based character position within the document of the start of the line adjacent to the margin clicked. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The modifier keys that where held down at the time of the margin click. The zero-based byte position within the document where the line adjacent to the clicked margin starts. The zero-based index of the clicked margin. An immutable collection of margins in a control. Removes all text displayed in every and margins. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object that contains all objects within the . Gets or sets the number of margins in the . The number of margins in the collection. The default is 5. Gets the number of margins in the . The number of margins in the collection. This property is kept for convenience. The return value will always be equal to . Gets or sets the width in pixels of the left margin padding. The left margin padding measured in pixels. The default is 1. Gets or sets the width in pixels of the right margin padding. The right margin padding measured in pixels. The default is 1. Gets a object at the specified index. The margin index. An object representing the margin at the specified . By convention margin 0 is used for line numbers and the two following for symbols. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this collection. The display of a cursor when over a margin. A normal arrow. A reversed arrow. Flags used to define margin options. This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. No options. This is the default. Lines selected by clicking on the margin will select only the subline of wrapped text. The behavior and appearance of a margin. Margin can display symbols. Margin displays line numbers. Margin can display symbols and has a background color equivalent to background color. Margin can display symbols and has a background color equivalent to foreground color. Margin can display application defined text. Margin can display application defined text right-justified. Margin can display symbols and has a background color specified using the property. Represents a margin marker in a control. An unsigned 32-bit mask of all indexes where each bit cooresponds to a margin index. An unsigned 32-bit mask of history indexes (21 through 24) where each bit cooresponds to a margin index. A change was made to this line and saved but then reverted to its original state. This line was modified and saved. This line was modified but not yet saved. A change was made to this line and saved but then reverted but not to its original state. An unsigned 32-bit mask of folder indexes (25 through 31) where each bit cooresponds to a margin index. Folder end marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder open marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder mid tail marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder tail marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder sub marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Folder open marker index. This marker is typically configured to display the symbol. Sets the marker symbol to a custom image. The Bitmap to use as a marker symbol. Calling this method will also update the property to . Removes this marker from all lines. Sets the foreground alpha transparency for markers that are drawn in the content area. The alpha transparency ranging from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (no transparency). See the remarks on the method for a full explanation of when a marker can be drawn in the content area. Sets the background color of the marker. The background Color. The default is White. The background color of the whole line will be drawn in the specified when the marker is not visible because it is hidden by a or the is zero. Sets the foreground color of the marker. The foreground Color. The default is Black. Gets the zero-based marker index this object represents. The marker index within the . Gets or sets the marker symbol. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this marker. The index of this style within the that created it. An immutable collection of markers in a control. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object for enumerating all objects within the . Gets the number of markers in the . This property always returns 32. Gets a object at the specified index. The marker index. An object representing the marker at the specified . Markers 25 through 31 are used by Scintilla for folding. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this collection. A handle. This is an opaque type, meaning it can be used by a control but otherwise has no public members of its own. A read-only field that represents an uninitialized handle. Returns a value indicating whether this instance is equal to a specified object. An object to compare with this instance or null. true if is an instance of and equals the value of this instance; otherwise, false. Returns the hash code for this instance. A 32-bit signed integer hash code. Determines whether two specified instances of are equal. The first handle to compare. The second handle to compare. true if equals ; otherwise, false. Determines whether two specified instances of are not equal. The first handle to compare. The second handle to compare. true if does not equal ; otherwise, false. The symbol displayed by a A circle. This symbol is typically used to indicate a breakpoint. A rectangel with rounded edges. An arrow (triangle) pointing right. A rectangle that is wider than it is tall. An arrow and tail pointing right. This symbol is typically used to indicate the current line of execution. An invisible symbol useful for tracking the movement of lines. An arrow (triangle) pointing down. A minus (-) symbol. A plus (+) symbol. A thin vertical line. This symbol is typically used on the middle line of an expanded fold block. A thin 'L' shaped line. This symbol is typically used on the last line of an expanded fold block. A thin 't' shaped line. This symbol is typically used on the last line of an expanded nested fold block. A plus (+) symbol with surrounding box. This symbol is typically used on the first line of a collapsed fold block. A plus (+) symbol with surrounding box and thin vertical line. This symbol is typically used on the first line of a collapsed nested fold block. A minus (-) symbol with surrounding box. This symbol is typically used on the first line of an expanded fold block. A minus (-) symbol with surrounding box and thin vertical line. This symbol is typically used on the first line of an expanded nested fold block. Similar to a , but curved. Similar to a , but curved. Similar to a but surrounded by a circle. Similar to a , but surrounded by a circle. Similar to a , but surrounded by a circle. Similar to a , but surrounded by a circle. A special marker that displays no symbol but will affect the background color of the line. Three dots (ellipsis). Three bracket style arrows. A rectangle occupying the entire marker space. A rectangle occupying only the left edge of the marker space. A special marker left available to plugins. A special marker that displays no symbol but will underline the current line text. A user-defined image. Images can be set using the method. A left-rotated bookmark. A bookmark. A slim rectangular vertical bar. Provides data for the and events. Gets the number of lines added or removed. The number of lines added to the document when text is inserted, or the number of lines removed from the document when text is deleted. When lines are deleted the return value will be negative. Gets the text that was inserted or deleted. The text inserted or deleted from the document. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The source of the modification. The zero-based byte position within the document where text was modified. The length in bytes of the inserted or deleted text. >A pointer to the text inserted or deleted. The number of lines added or removed (delta). The source of a modification Modification is the result of a user operation. Modification is the result of an undo operation. Modification is the result of a redo operation. Specifies the behavior of pasting into multiple selections. Pasting into multiple selections only pastes to the main selection. This is the default. Pasting into multiple selections pastes into each selection. Like an UnmanagedMemoryStream execpt it can grow. Provides data for the event. Gets the length of the text that needs to be shown. The length of text starting at that needs to be shown. Gets the zero-based document position where text needs to be shown. The zero-based document position where the range of text to be shown starts. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position within the document where text needs to be shown. The length in bytes of the text that needs to be shown. The sorting order for autocompletion lists. Requires that an autocompletion lists be sorted in alphabetical order. This is the default. Instructs a control to perform an alphabetical sort of autocompletion lists. User-defined order. The number of phases used when drawing. Drawing is done in a single phase. This is the fastest but provides no support for kerning. Drawing is done in two phases; the background first and then the text. This is the default. Drawing is done in multiple phases; once for each feature. This is the slowest but allows extreme ascenders and descenders to overflow into adjacent lines. Behavior of the standard edit control context menu. Never show the default editing menu. Show default editing menu if clicking on the control. Show default editing menu only if clicking on text area. To receive the event, this value must be used. Non-generic class to produce instances of the generic class, optionally using type inference. Creates an instance of ProjectionEqualityComparer using the specified projection. Type parameter for the elements to be compared Type parameter for the keys to be compared, after being projected from the elements Projection to use when determining the key of an element A comparer which will compare elements by projecting each element to its key, and comparing keys Creates an instance of ProjectionEqualityComparer using the specified projection. The ignored parameter is solely present to aid type inference. Type parameter for the elements to be compared Type parameter for the keys to be compared, after being projected from the elements Value is ignored - type may be used by type inference Projection to use when determining the key of an element A comparer which will compare elements by projecting each element to its key, and comparing keys Class generic in the source only to produce instances of the doubly generic class, optionally using type inference. Creates an instance of ProjectionEqualityComparer using the specified projection. Type parameter for the keys to be compared, after being projected from the elements Projection to use when determining the key of an element A comparer which will compare elements by projecting each element to its key, and comparing keys Comparer which projects each element of the comparison to a key, and then compares those keys using the specified (or default) comparer for the key type. Type of elements which this comparer will be asked to compare Type of the key projected from the element Creates a new instance using the specified projection, which must not be null. The default comparer for the projected type is used. Projection to use during comparisons Creates a new instance using the specified projection, which must not be null. Projection to use during comparisons The comparer to use on the keys. May be null, in which case the default comparer will be used. Compares the two specified values for equality by applying the projection to each value and then using the equality comparer on the resulting keys. Null references are never passed to the projection. Produces a hash code for the given value by projecting it and then asking the equality comparer to find the hash code of the resulting key. Lexer property types. A Boolean property. This is the default. An integer property. A string property. Represents a Scintilla editor control. Enumerates a list of folder paths that the native satellite libraries ('Scintilla.dll' & 'Lexilla.dll') are searched in. A constant used to specify an infinite mouse dwell wait time. A constant used to specify an invalid document position. Sets the name of the lexer by its name. Name of the lexer. true if the lexer was successfully set, false otherwise. Increases the reference count of the specified document by 1. The document reference count to increase. Adds an additional selection range to the existing main selection. The zero-based document position to end the selection. The zero-based document position to start the selection. A main selection must first have been set by a call to . Inserts the specified text at the current caret position. The text to insert at the current caret position. The caret position is set to the end of the inserted text, but it is not scrolled into view. Allocates some number of substyles for a particular base style. Substyles are allocated contiguously. The lexer style integer The amount of substyles to allocate Returns the first substyle number allocated. Removes the annotation text for every in the document. Adds the specified text to the end of the document. The text to add to the document. The current selection is not changed and the new text is not scrolled into view. Assigns the specified key definition to a command. The key combination to bind. The command to assign. Cancels any displayed autocompletion list. Triggers completion of the current autocompletion word. Selects an item in the autocompletion list. The autocompletion word to select. If found, the word in the autocompletion list is selected and the index can be obtained by calling . If not found, the behavior is determined by . Comparisons are performed according to the property and will match the first word starting with . Sets the characters that, when typed, cause the autocompletion item to be added to the document. A string of characters that trigger autocompletion. The default is null. Common fillup characters are '(', '[', and '.' depending on the language. Displays an auto completion list. The number of characters already entered to match on. A list of autocompletion words separated by the character. Specifies the characters that will automatically cancel autocompletion without the need to call . A String of the characters that will cancel autocompletion. The default is empty. Characters specified should be limited to printable ASCII characters. Marks the beginning of a set of actions that should be treated as a single undo action. A call to should be followed by a call to . Styles the specified character position with the style when there is an unmatched brace. The zero-based document position of the unmatched brace character or to remove the highlight. Styles the specified character positions with the style. The zero-based document position of the open brace character. The zero-based document position of the close brace character. Brace highlighting can be removed by specifying for and . Finds a corresponding matching brace starting at the position specified. The brace characters handled are '(', ')', '[', ']', '{', '}', '<', and '>'. The zero-based document position of a brace character to start the search from for a matching brace character. The zero-based document position of the corresponding matching brace or it no matching brace could be found. A match only occurs if the style of the matching brace is the same as the starting brace. Nested braces are handled correctly. Cancels the display of a call tip window. Sets the color of highlighted text in a call tip. The new highlight text Color. The default is dark blue. Sets the specified range of the call tip text to display in a highlighted style. The zero-based index in the call tip text to start highlighting. The zero-based index in the call tip text to stop highlighting (exclusive). Determines whether to display a call tip above or below text. true to display above text; otherwise, false. The default is false. Displays a call tip window. The zero-based document position where the call tip window should be aligned. The call tip text. Call tips can contain multiple lines separated by '\n' characters. Do not include '\r', as this will most likely print as an empty box. The '\t' character is supported and the size can be set by using . Sets the call tip tab size in pixels. The width in pixels of a tab '\t' character in a call tip. Specifying 0 disables special treatment of tabs. Indicates to the current Lexer that the internal lexer state has changed in the specified range and therefore may need to be redrawn. The zero-based document position at which the lexer state change starts. The zero-based document position at which the lexer state change ends. Finds the closest character position to the specified display point. The x pixel coordinate within the client rectangle of the control. The y pixel coordinate within the client rectangle of the control. The zero-based document position of the nearest character to the point specified. Finds the closest character position to the specified display point or returns -1 if the point is outside the window or not close to any characters. The x pixel coordinate within the client rectangle of the control. The y pixel coordinate within the client rectangle of the control. The zero-based document position of the nearest character to the point specified when near a character; otherwise, -1. Explicitly sets the current horizontal offset of the caret as the X position to track when the user moves the caret vertically using the up and down keys. When not set explicitly, Scintilla automatically sets this value each time the user moves the caret horizontally. Removes the selected text from the document. Deletes all document text, unless the document is read-only. Makes the specified key definition do nothing. The key combination to bind. This is equivalent to binding the keys to . Removes all the key definition command mappings. Removes all styling from the document and resets the folding state. Removes all images registered for autocompletion lists. Sets a single empty selection at the start of the document. Requests that the current lexer restyle the specified range. The zero-based document position at which to start styling. The zero-based document position at which to stop styling (exclusive). This will also cause fold levels in the range specified to be reset. Changes all end-of-line characters in the document to the format specified. One of the enumeration values. Copies the selected text from the document and places it on the clipboard. Copies the selected text from the document and places it on the clipboard. One of the enumeration values. Copies the selected text from the document and places it on the clipboard. If the selection is empty the current line is copied. If the selection is empty and the current line copied, an extra "MSDEVLineSelect" marker is added to the clipboard which is then used in to paste the whole line before the current line. Copies the selected text from the document and places it on the clipboard. If the selection is empty the current line is copied. One of the enumeration values. If the selection is empty and the current line copied, an extra "MSDEVLineSelect" marker is added to the clipboard which is then used in to paste the whole line before the current line. Copies the specified range of text to the clipboard. The zero-based character position in the document to start copying. The zero-based character position (exclusive) in the document to stop copying. Copies the specified range of text to the clipboard. The zero-based character position in the document to start copying. The zero-based character position (exclusive) in the document to stop copying. One of the enumeration values. Create a new, empty document. A new with a reference count of 1. You are responsible for ensuring the reference count eventually reaches 0 or memory leaks will occur. Creates an object capable of loading a on a background (non-UI) thread. The initial number of characters to allocate. A new object, or null if the loader could not be created. Cuts the selected text from the document and places it on the clipboard. Deletes a range of text from the document. The zero-based character position to start deleting. The number of characters to delete. Retrieves a description of keyword sets supported by the current lexer />. A String describing each keyword set separated by line breaks for the current lexer. Retrieves a brief description of the specified property name for the current Lexer. A property name supported by the current Lexer. A String describing the lexer property name if found; otherwise, String.Empty. A list of supported property names for the current Lexer can be obtained by calling . Sends the specified message directly to the native Scintilla window, bypassing any managed APIs. The message ID. The message wparam field. The message lparam field. An representing the result of the message request. This API supports the Scintilla infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Releases the unmanaged resources used by the Control and its child controls and optionally releases the managed resources. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Returns the zero-based document line index from the specified display line index. The zero-based display line index. The zero-based document line index. If there are multiple selections, removes the specified selection. The zero-based selection index. Clears any undo or redo history. This will also cause to be called but will not raise the event. Marks the end of a set of actions that should be treated as a single undo action. Performs the specified command. The command to perform. Search text in document without changing the current selection. The argument controls the search type, which includes regular expression searches. You can search backwards to find the previous occurrence of a search string by setting the end of the search range before the start. Specifies the how patterns are matched when performing the search. String to search for. Beginning of The position of the found text if it succeeds or -1 if the search fails. Performs the specified fold action on the entire document. One of the enumeration values. When using the first fold header in the document is examined to decide whether to expand or contract. Changes the appearance of fold text tags. One of the enumeration values. The text tag to display on a folded line can be set using . . Frees all allocated substyles. Returns the character as the specified document position. The zero-based document position of the character to get. The character at the specified . Returns the column number of the specified document position, taking the width of tabs into account. The zero-based document position to get the column for. The number of columns from the start of the line to the specified document . Returns the last document position likely to be styled correctly. The zero-based document position of the last styled character. Gets the product version of the Scintilla.dll user by the control. Gets the product version of the Lexilla.dll user by the control. Gets the Primary style associated with the given Secondary style. The secondary style For a secondary style, return the primary style, else return the argument. Lookup a property value for the current Lexer. The property name to lookup. A String representing the property value if found; otherwise, String.Empty. Any embedded property name macros as described in will not be replaced (expanded). Lookup a property value for the current Lexer and expand any embedded property macros. The property name to lookup. A String representing the property value if found; otherwise, String.Empty. Any embedded property name macros as described in will be replaced (expanded). Lookup a property value for the current Lexer and convert it to an integer. The property name to lookup. A default value to return if the property name is not found or has no value. An Integer representing the property value if found; otherwise, if not found or the property has no value; otherwise, 0 if the property is not a number. Gets the style of the specified document position. The zero-based document position of the character to get the style for. The zero-based index used at the specified . Gets the lexer base style of a substyle. The integer index of the substyle Returns the base style, else returns the argument. Gets the length of the number of substyles allocated for a given lexer base style. The lexer style integer Returns the length of the substyles allocated for a base style. Gets the start index of the substyles for a given lexer base style. The lexer style integer Returns the start of the substyles allocated for a base style. Returns the capture group text of the most recent regular expression search. The capture group (1 through 9) to get the text for. A String containing the capture group text if it participated in the match; otherwise, an empty string. Gets a range of text from the document accounting for wide characters. The zero-based starting character position of the range to get. The number of characters (including wide) to get. A string representing the text range. Map Lexer enum value to supported lexer ID Supported Lexer enum value LexerName string for corresponding lexer value Gets a range of text from the document. The zero-based starting character position of the range to get. The number of characters to get. A string representing the text range. Gets a range of text from the document formatted as Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). The zero-based starting character position of the range to get. The number of characters to get. A string representing the text range formatted as HTML. Returns the version information of the native Scintilla library. An object representing the version information of the native Scintilla library. Gets the word from the position specified. The zero-based document character position to get the word from. The word at the specified position. Navigates the caret to the document position specified. The zero-based document character position to navigate to. Any selection is discarded. Hides the range of lines specified. The zero-based index of the line range to start hiding. The zero-based index of the line range to end hiding. Returns a bitmap representing the 32 indicators in use at the specified position. The zero-based character position within the document to test. A bitmap indicating which of the 32 indicators are in use at the specified . Removes the indicator (and user-defined value) from the specified range of text. The zero-based character position within the document to start clearing. The number of characters to clear. Adds the indicator and value to the specified range of text. The zero-based character position within the document to start filling. The number of characters to fill. Default Attribute values do not always get applied to the control. https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/api/system.componentmodel.defaultvalueattribute "A DefaultValueAttribute will not cause a member to be automatically initialized with the attribute's value. You must set the initial value in your code." This function is created to be called in the OnHandleCreated event so that we can force the default values to be applied. Inserts text at the specified position. The zero-based character position to insert the text. Specify -1 to use the current caret position. The text to insert into the document. less than zero and not equal to -1. -or- is greater than the document length. No scrolling is performed. Determines whether the specified and positions are at the beginning and end of a word, respectively. The zero-based document position of the possible word start. The zero-based document position of the possible word end. true if and are at the beginning and end of a word, respectively; otherwise, false. This method does not check whether there is whitespace in the search range, only that the and are at word boundaries. Returns the line that contains the document position specified. The zero-based document character position. The zero-based document line index containing the character . Scrolls the display the number of lines and columns specified. The number of lines to scroll. The number of columns to scroll. Negative values scroll in the opposite direction. A column is the width in pixels of a space character in the style. Loads a compatible lexer from an external DLL. The path to the external lexer DLL. Removes the specified marker from all lines. The zero-based index to remove from all lines, or -1 to remove all markers from all lines. Searches the document for the marker handle and deletes the marker if found. The created by a previous call to of the marker to delete. Enable or disable highlighting of the current folding block. true to highlight the current folding block; otherwise, false. Searches the document for the marker handle and returns the line number containing the marker if found. The created by a previous call to of the marker to search for. If found, the zero-based line index containing the marker; otherwise, -1. Specifies the long line indicator column number and color when is . The zero-based column number to indicate. The color of the vertical long line indicator. A column is defined as the width of a space character in the style. Removes all the long line column indicators specified using . Searches for all instances of the main selection within the and range and adds any matches to the selection. The property is respected when searching, allowing additional selections to match on different case sensitivity and word search options. Searches for the next instance of the main selection within the and range and adds any match to the selection. The property is respected when searching, allowing additional selections to match on different case sensitivity and word search options. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the HandleCreated event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the MouseUp event. A MouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Raises the event. A that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An EventArgs that contains the event data. Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the current selection. Returns the X display pixel location of the specified document position. The zero-based document character position. The x-coordinate of the specified within the client rectangle of the control. Returns the Y display pixel location of the specified document position. The zero-based document character position. The y-coordinate of the specified within the client rectangle of the control. Retrieves a list of property names that can be set for the current Lexer. A String of property names separated by line breaks. Retrieves the data type of the specified property name for the current Lexer. A property name supported by the current Lexer. One of the enumeration values. The default is . A list of supported property names for the current Lexer can be obtained by calling . Redoes the effect of an operation. Maps the specified image to a type identifer for use in an autocompletion list. The numeric identifier for this image. The Bitmap to use in an autocompletion list. The registered can be referenced by its identifer in an autocompletion list by suffixing a word with the character and the value. e.g. "int?2 long?3 short?1" etc.... Decreases the reference count of the specified document by 1. The document reference count to decrease. When a document's reference count reaches 0 it is destroyed and any associated memory released. Replaces the current selection with the specified text. The text that should replace the current selection. If there is not a current selection, the text will be inserted at the current caret position. Following the operation the caret is placed at the end of the inserted text and scrolled into view. Replaces the target defined by and with the specified . The text that will replace the current target. The length of the replaced text. The and properties will be updated to the start and end positions of the replaced text. The recommended way to delete text in the document is to set the target range to be removed and replace the target with an empty string. Replaces the target text defined by and with the specified value after first substituting "\1" through "\9" macros in the with the most recent regular expression capture groups. The text containing "\n" macros that will be substituted with the most recent regular expression capture groups and then replace the current target. The length of the replaced text. The "\0" macro will be substituted by the entire matched text from the most recent search. The and properties will be updated to the start and end positions of the replaced text. Makes the next selection the main selection. Scrolls the current position into view, if it is not already visible. Scrolls the specified range into view. The zero-based document start position to scroll to. The zero-based document end position to scroll to if doing so does not cause the position to scroll out of view. This may be used to make a search match visible. Searches for the first occurrence of the specified text in the target defined by and . The text to search for. The interpretation of the text (i.e. whether it is a regular expression) is defined by the property. The zero-based start position of the matched text within the document if successful; otherwise, -1. If successful, the and properties will be updated to the start and end positions of the matched text. Searching can be performed in reverse using a greater than the . Selects all the text in the document. The current position is not scrolled into view. Sets the background color of additional selections. Additional selections background color. Calling will reset the specified. Sets the foreground color of additional selections. Additional selections foreground color. Calling will reset the specified. Removes any selection and places the caret at the specified position. The zero-based document position to place the caret at. The caret is not scrolled into view. Sets additional options for displaying folds. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. Sets a global override to the fold margin color. true to override the fold margin color; otherwise, false. The global fold margin color. Sets a global override to the fold margin highlight color. true to override the fold margin highlight color; otherwise, false. The global fold margin highlight color. Similar to but for substyles. The substyle integer index A list of words separated by whitespace (space, tab, '\n', '\r') characters. Updates a keyword set used by the current Lexer. The zero-based index of the keyword set to update. A list of keywords pertaining to the current Lexer separated by whitespace (space, tab, '\n', '\r') characters. The keywords specified will be styled according to the current Lexer. Sets the application-wide behavior for destroying controls. true to reparent Scintilla controls to message-only windows when destroyed rather than actually destroying the control handle; otherwise, false. The default is true. This method must be called prior to the first control being created. Passes the specified property name-value pair to the current Lexer. The property name to set. The property value. Values can refer to other property names using the syntax $(name), where 'name' is another property name for the current Lexer. When the property value is retrieved by a call to the embedded property name macro will be replaced (expanded) with that current property value. Property names are case-sensitive. Marks the document as unmodified. Sets the anchor and current position. The zero-based document position to start the selection. The zero-based document position to end the selection. A negative value for signifies the end of the document. A negative value for signifies no selection (i.e. sets the to the same position as the ). The current position is scrolled into view following this operation. Sets a single selection from anchor to caret. The zero-based document position to end the selection. The zero-based document position to start the selection. Sets a global override to the selection background color. true to override the selection background color; otherwise, false. The global selection background color. Sets a global override to the selection foreground color. true to override the selection foreground color; otherwise, false. The global selection foreground color. Gets or sets the layer where the text selection will be painted. Default value is Styles the specified length of characters. The number of characters to style. The definition index to assign each character. or is less than zero. -or- The sum of a preceeding call to or and is greater than the document length. -or- is greater than or equal to the number of style definitions. The styling position is advanced by after each call allowing multiple calls to for a single call to . Sets the and properties in a single call. The zero-based character position within the document to start a search or replace operation. The zero-based character position within the document to end a search or replace operation. Sets a global override to the whitespace background color. true to override the whitespace background color; otherwise, false. The global whitespace background color. When not overridden globally, the whitespace background color is determined by the current lexer. Sets a global override to the whitespace foreground color. true to override the whitespace foreground color; otherwise, false. The global whitespace foreground color. When not overridden globally, the whitespace foreground color is determined by the current lexer. Sets the X caret policy. a combination of values. the caretSlop value Sets the Y caret policy. a combination of values. the caretSlop value Shows the range of lines specified. The zero-based index of the line range to start showing. The zero-based index of the line range to end showing. Prepares for styling by setting the styling to start at. The zero-based character position in the document to start styling. After preparing the document for styling, use successive calls to to style the document. Resets all style properties to those currently configured for the style. Resets the style to its initial state. Moves the caret to the opposite end of the main selection. Sets the and to the start and end positions of the selection. Sets the and to the start and end positions of the document. Measures the width in pixels of the specified string when rendered in the specified style. The index of the to use when rendering the text to measure. The text to measure. The width in pixels. Undoes the previous action. Determines whether to show the right-click context menu. true to enable the popup window; otherwise, false. Determines the conditions for displaying the standard right-click context menu. One of the enumeration values. Processes Windows messages. The Windows Message to process. Returns the position where a word ends, searching forward from the position specified. The zero-based document position to start searching from. true to stop searching at the first non-word character regardless of whether the search started at a word or non-word character. false to use the first character in the search as a word or non-word indicator and then search for that word or non-word boundary. The zero-based document postion of the word boundary. Returns the position where a word starts, searching backward from the position specified. The zero-based document position to start searching from. true to stop searching at the first non-word character regardless of whether the search started at a word or non-word character. false to use the first character in the search as a word or non-word indicator and then search for that word or non-word boundary. The zero-based document postion of the word boundary. Increases the zoom factor by 1 until it reaches 20 points. Decreases the zoom factor by 1 until it reaches -10 points. Sets the representation for a specified character string. The encoded string. I.e. the Ohm character: Ω = \u2126. The representation string for the . I.e. "OHM". The must be set to for this to work. Sets the representation for a specified character string. The encoded string. I.e. the Ohm character: Ω = \u2126. The representation string for the . I.e. "OHM". Clears the representation from a specified character string. The encoded string. I.e. the Ohm character: Ω = \u2126. Clears the change history so that scintilla does not show any saved/modified markers. Undo buffer is cleared but is not called. Gets or sets whether Scintilla's native drag & drop should be used instead of WinForms based one. true if Scintilla's native drag & drop should be used; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the bi-directionality of the Scintilla control. The bi-directionality of the Scintilla control. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the reading layout is from right to left. true if reading layout is from right to left; otherwise, false. Gets or sets the caret foreground color for additional selections. The caret foreground color in additional selections. The default is (127, 127, 127). Gets or sets whether the carets in additional selections will blink. true if additional selection carets should blink; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets whether the carets in additional selections are visible. true if additional selection carets are visible; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the alpha transparency of additional multiple selections. The alpha transparency ranging from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (completely opaque). The value 256 will disable alpha transparency. The default is 256. Gets or sets whether additional typing affects multiple selections. true if typing will affect multiple selections instead of just the main selection; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the current anchor position. The zero-based character position of the anchor. Setting the current anchor position will create a selection between it and the . The caret is not scrolled into view. Gets or sets the display of annotations. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the text color in autocompletion lists. Gets or sets the background color in autocompletion lists. Gets or sets the text color of selected item in autocompletion lists. Gets or sets the background color of selected item in autocompletion lists. Gets a value indicating whether there is an autocompletion list displayed. true if there is an active autocompletion list; otherwise, false. Gets or sets whether to automatically cancel autocompletion when there are no viable matches. true to automatically cancel autocompletion when there is no possible match; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets whether to cancel an autocompletion if the caret moves from its initial location, or is allowed to move to the word start. true to cancel autocompletion when the caret moves. false to allow the caret to move to the beginning of the word without cancelling autocompletion. Gets the index of the current autocompletion list selection. The zero-based index of the current autocompletion selection. Gets or sets whether to automatically select an item when it is the only one in an autocompletion list. true to automatically choose the only autocompletion item and not display the list; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets whether to delete any word characters following the caret after an autocompletion. true to delete any word characters following the caret after autocompletion; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets whether matching characters to an autocompletion list is case-insensitive. true to use case-insensitive matching; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the maximum height of the autocompletion list measured in rows. The max number of rows to display in an autocompletion window. The default is 9. If there are more items in the list than max rows, a vertical scrollbar is shown. Gets or sets the width in characters of the autocompletion list. The width of the autocompletion list expressed in characters, or 0 to automatically set the width to the longest item. The default is 0. Any items that cannot be fully displayed will be indicated with ellipsis. Gets or sets the autocompletion list sort order to expect when calling . One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets the document position at the time was called. The zero-based document position at the time was called. Gets or sets the delimiter character used to separate words in an autocompletion list. The separator character used when calling . The default is the space character. The specified should be limited to printable ASCII characters. Gets or sets the delimiter character used to separate words and image type identifiers in an autocompletion list. The separator character used to reference an image registered with . The default is '?'. The specified should be limited to printable ASCII characters. Gets or sets the automatic folding flags. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. The default is . Not supported. Not supported. Not supported. Gets or sets whether backspace deletes a character, or unindents. Whether backspace deletes a character, (false) or unindents (true). Gets or sets the border type of the control. A BorderStyle enumeration value that represents the border type of the control. The default is Fixed3D. A value that is not within the range of valid values for the enumeration was assigned to the property. Gets or sets whether drawing is double-buffered. true to draw each line into an offscreen bitmap first before copying it to the screen; otherwise, false. The default is true. Disabling buffer can improve performance but will cause flickering. Gets a value indicating whether there is a call tip window displayed. true if there is an active call tip window; otherwise, false. Gets a value indicating whether there is text on the clipboard that can be pasted into the document. true when there is text on the clipboard to paste; otherwise, false. The document cannot be and the selection cannot contain protected text. Gets a value indicating whether there is an undo action to redo. true when there is something to redo; otherwise, false. Gets a value indicating whether there is an action to undo. true when there is something to undo; otherwise, false. Gets or sets the caret foreground color. The caret foreground color. The default is black. Gets or sets the caret line background color. The caret line background color. The default is yellow. Gets or sets the alpha transparency of the . The alpha transparency ranging from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (completely opaque). The value 256 will disable alpha transparency. The default is 256. Gets or sets the width of the caret line frame. must be set to true. A value of 0 disables the frame. The default is 0. Gets or sets whether the caret line is visible (highlighted). true if the caret line is visible; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets whether the caret line is always visible even when the window is not in focus. true if the caret line is always visible; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the layer where the line caret will be painted. Default value is Gets or sets the caret blink rate in milliseconds. The caret blink rate measured in milliseconds. The default is 530. A value of 0 will stop the caret blinking. Gets or sets the caret display style. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the width in pixels of the caret. The width of the caret in pixels. The default is 1 pixel. The caret width can only be set to a value of 0, 1, 2 or 3 pixels and is only effective when the property is set to . Gets or sets whether Scintilla should keep track of document change history and in which ways it should display the difference. Gets the required creation parameters when the control handle is created. A CreateParams that contains the required creation parameters when the handle to the control is created. Gets the current line index. The zero-based line index containing the . Gets or sets the current caret position. The zero-based character position of the caret. Setting the current caret position will create a selection between it and the current . The caret is not scrolled into view. Not supported. Gets or sets the default cursor for the control. An object of type Cursor representing the current default cursor. Gets the default size of the control. The default Size of the control. Gets a value indicating the start index of the secondary styles. Returns the distance between a primary style and its corresponding secondary style. Gets or sets the current document used by the control. The current . Setting this property is equivalent to calling on the current document, and calling if the new is or if the new is not . Gets or sets the background color to use when indicating long lines with . The background Color. Gets or sets the column number at which to begin indicating long lines. The number of columns in a long line. The default is 0. When using , a column is defined as the width of a space character in the style. When using a column is equal to a character (including tabs). Gets or sets the mode for indicating long lines. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets whether vertical scrolling ends at the last line or can scroll past. true if the maximum vertical scroll position ends at the last line; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the end-of-line mode, or rather, the characters added into the document when the user presses the Enter key. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the amount of whitespace added to the ascent (top) of each line. The extra line ascent. The default is zero. Gets or sets the amount of whitespace added to the descent (bottom) of each line. The extra line descent. The default is zero. Gets or sets the first visible line on screen. The zero-based index of the first visible screen line. The value is a visible line, not a document line. Gets or sets the font of the text displayed by the control. The to apply to the text displayed by the control. The default is the value of the property. Gets or sets font quality (anti-aliasing method) used to render fonts. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Not supported. Gets or sets the column number of the indentation guide to highlight. The column number of the indentation guide to highlight or 0 if disabled. Guides are highlighted in the style. Column numbers can be determined by calling . Gets or sets whether to display the horizontal scroll bar. true to display the horizontal scroll bar when needed; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the strategy used to perform styling using application idle time. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the size of indentation in terms of space characters. The indentation size measured in characters. The default is 0. A value of 0 will make the indent width the same as the tab width. Gets or sets whether to display indentation guides. One of the enumeration values. The default is . The style can be used to specify the foreground and background color of indentation guides. Gets or sets the indicator used in a subsequent call to or . The zero-based indicator index to apply when calling or remove when calling . Gets a collection of objects for working with indicators. A collection of objects. Gets or sets the user-defined value used in a subsequent call to . The indicator value to apply when calling . This is used by clients that have complex focus requirements such as having their own window that gets the real focus but with the need to indicate that Scintilla has the logical focus. Gets or sets the name of the lexer. The name of the lexer. Lexer with the name of 'Value' was not found. Gets or sets the current lexer by name. A String representing the current lexer. Lexer names are case-sensitive. Gets the combined result of the and properties to report the line end types actively being interpreted. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. Gets or sets the line ending types interpreted by the control. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. The default is . The line ending types allowed must also be supported by the current lexer to be effective. Gets the different types of line ends supported by the current lexer. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. Gets a collection representing lines of text in the control. A collection of text lines. Gets the number of lines that can be shown on screen given a constant line height and the space available. The number of screen lines which could be displayed (including any partial lines). Gets or sets the main selection when their are multiple selections. The zero-based main selection index. Gets a collection representing margins in a control. A collection of margins. Gets a collection representing markers in a control. A collection of markers. Gets a value indicating whether the document has been modified (is dirty) since the last call to . true if the document has been modified; otherwise, false. Gets or sets the time in milliseconds the mouse must linger to generate a event. The time in milliseconds the mouse must linger to generate a event or if dwell events are disabled. Gets or sets the ability to switch to rectangular selection mode while making a selection with the mouse. true if the current mouse selection can be switched to a rectangular selection by pressing the ALT key; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets whether multiple selection is enabled. true if multiple selections can be made by holding the CTRL key and dragging the mouse; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the behavior when pasting text into multiple selections. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets whether to write over text rather than insert it. true to write over text; otherwise, false. The default is false. Not supported. Gets or sets whether line endings in pasted text are convereted to the document . true to convert line endings in pasted text; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the number of phases used when drawing. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets whether the document is read-only. true if the document is read-only; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the anchor position of the rectangular selection. The zero-based document position of the rectangular selection anchor. Gets or sets the amount of anchor virtual space in a rectangular selection. The amount of virtual space past the end of the line offsetting the rectangular selection anchor. Gets or sets the caret position of the rectangular selection. The zero-based document position of the rectangular selection caret. Gets or sets the amount of caret virtual space in a rectangular selection. The amount of virtual space past the end of the line offsetting the rectangular selection caret. Gets or sets the range of the horizontal scroll bar. The range in pixels of the horizontal scroll bar. The width will automatically increase as needed when is enabled. Gets or sets whether the is automatically increased as needed. true to automatically increase the horizontal scroll width as needed; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the search flags used when searching text. A bitwise combination of values. The default is . Gets the selected text. The selected text if there is any; otherwise, an empty string. Gets or sets the end position of the selection. The zero-based document position where the selection ends. When getting this property, the return value is Math.Max(, ). When setting this property, is set to the value specified and set to Math.Min(, ). The caret is not scrolled into view. Gets or sets whether to fill past the end of a line with the selection background color. true to fill past the end of the line; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the color of visible white space. Gets or sets the background color of visible white space. Gets or sets the text color of active hot spot. Gets or sets the background color of active hot spot. Gets or sets the text color of main selection. Gets or sets the background color of main selection. Gets or sets the text color of additional selections. Gets or sets the background color of additional selections. Gets or sets the text colour of selections when another window contains the primary selection. Gets or sets the background color of selections when another window contains the primary selection. Gets or sets the text colour of selections when the control has no focus. Gets or sets the selection highlight color to use when the control has no focus. Gets or sets the selected text color to use when the control has no focus. Gets or sets the selection highlight color to use when the control has no focus. Gets or sets the color of fold lines. Gets or sets the color of line drawn to show there are lines hidden at that point. Gets a collection representing multiple selections in a control. A collection of selections. Gets or sets the start position of the selection. The zero-based document position where the selection starts. When getting this property, the return value is Math.Min(, ). When setting this property, is set to the value specified and set to Math.Max(, ). The caret is not scrolled into view. Gets or sets the last internal error code used by Scintilla. One of the enumeration values. The default is . The status can be reset by setting the property to . Gets a collection representing style definitions in a control. A collection of style definitions. Gets or sets how tab characters are represented when whitespace is visible. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets whether tab inserts a tab character, or indents. Whether tab inserts a tab character (false), or indents (true). Gets or sets the width of a tab as a multiple of a space character. The width of a tab measured in characters. The default is 4. Gets or sets the end position used when performing a search or replace. The zero-based character position within the document to end a search or replace operation. Gets or sets the start position used when performing a search or replace. The zero-based character position within the document to start a search or replace operation. Gets the current target text. A String representing the text between and . Targets which have a start position equal or greater to the end position will return an empty String. Gets or sets the rendering technology used. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the current document text in the control. The text displayed in the control. Depending on the length of text get or set, this operation can be expensive. Gets the length of the text in the control. The number of characters in the document. Gets or sets whether to use a mixture of tabs and spaces for indentation or purely spaces. true to use tab characters; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets a value indicating whether to use the wait cursor for the current control. true to use the wait cursor for the current control; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the visibility of end-of-line characters. true to display end-of-line characters; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets how to display whitespace characters. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the ability for the caret to move into an area beyond the end of each line, otherwise known as virtual space. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. The default is . Gets or sets whether to display the vertical scroll bar. true to display the vertical scroll bar when needed; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the characters considered 'whitespace' characters when using any word-based logic. A string of whitespace characters. Gets or sets the size of the dots used to mark whitespace. The size of the dots used to mark whitespace. The default is 1. Gets or sets the characters considered 'word' characters when using any word-based logic. A string of word characters. Gets or sets the line wrapping indent mode. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the line wrapping mode. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the indented size in pixels of wrapped sublines. The indented size of wrapped sublines measured in pixels. The default is 0. Setting to will add an additional 1 pixel to the value specified. Gets or sets the wrap visual flags. A bitwise combination of the enumeration. The default is . Gets or sets additional location options when displaying wrap visual flags. One of the enumeration values. The default is . Gets or sets the horizontal scroll offset. The horizontal scroll offset in pixels. Gets or sets the zoom factor. The zoom factor measured in points. For best results, values should range from -10 to 20 points. Occurs when an autocompletion list is cancelled. Occurs when the user deletes a character while an autocompletion list is active. Occurs after autocompleted text is inserted. Occurs when a user has selected an item in an autocompletion list. Automatic insertion can be cancelled by calling from the event handler. Occurs when a user has highlighted an item in an autocompletion list. Not supported. Not supported. Not supported. Occurs when text is about to be deleted. Occurs when text is about to be inserted. Occurs when the value of the property has changed. Occurs when an annotation has changed. Occurs when the user enters a text character. Not supported. Occurs when text has been deleted from the document. Occurs when the control is double-clicked. Occurs when the mouse moves or another activity such as a key press ends a event. Occurs when the mouse clicked over a call tip displayed by the method. Occurs when the mouse is kept in one position (hovers) for the . Not supported. Not supported. Occurs when the user clicks on text that is in a style with the property set. Occurs when the user double clicks on text that is in a style with the property set. Occurs when the user releases a click on text that is in a style with the property set. Occurs when the user clicks on text that has an indicator. Occurs when the user releases a click on text that has an indicator. Occurs when text has been inserted into the document. Occurs when text is about to be inserted. The inserted text can be changed. Occurs when the mouse was clicked inside a margin that was marked as sensitive. The property must be set for a margin to raise this event. Occurs when the mouse was right-clicked inside a margin that was marked as sensitive. The property and must be set for a margin to raise this event. Occurs when a user attempts to change text while the document is in read-only mode. Occurs when the control determines hidden text needs to be shown. An example of when this event might be raised is if the end of line of a contracted fold point is deleted. Not supported. Occurs when painting has just been done. Occurs when the document becomes 'dirty'. The document 'dirty' state can be checked with the property and reset by calling . Occurs when the document 'dirty' flag is reset. The document 'dirty' state can be reset by calling or undoing an action that modified the document. Occurs when the control is about to display or print text and requires styling. This event is only raised when LexerName is set to Container />. The last position styled correctly can be determined by calling . Occurs when the control UI is updated as a result of changes to text (including styling), selection, and/or scroll positions. Occurs when the user zooms the display using the keyboard or the property is changed. Initializes a new instance of the class. Gets or sets a value indicating whether control's elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts. The right to left. Implements a TextReader that reads from a Scintilla control. Arbitrarily chosen default buffer size Returns the number of buffered characters left to be read. Returns the number of unbuffered characters left to be read. Returns the total number of characters left to be read. Initializes a new instance of the ScintillaReader class that reads all text from the specified Scintilla control. The Scintilla control from which to read. Initializes a new instance of the ScintillaReader class that reads all text from the specified Scintilla control. The Scintilla control from which to read. The number of characters to buffer at a time. Initializes a new instance of the ScintillaReader class that reads a subsection from the specified Scintilla control. The Scintilla control from which to read. The index of the first character to read. The index just past the last character to read. Initializes a new instance of the ScintillaReader class that reads a subsection from the specified Scintilla control. The Scintilla control from which to read. The index of the first character to read. The index just past the last character to read. The number of characters to buffer at a time. Returns the next character to be read from the reader without actually removing it from the stream. Returns -1 if no characters are available. The next character from the input stream, or -1 if no more characters are available. Removes a character from the stream and returns it. Returns -1 if no characters are available. The next character from the input stream, or -1 if no more characters are available. Reads a maximum of count characters from the current stream and writes the data to buffer, beginning at index. The buffer to receive the characters. The position in buffer at which to begin writing. The maximum number of characters to read. The actual number of characters that have been read. The number will be less than or equal to count. buffer is null. The buffer length minus index is less than count. index or count is negative. Reads a maximum of count characters from the current stream and writes the data to buffer, beginning at index. The buffer to receive the characters. The position in buffer at which to begin writing. The maximum number of characters to read. The actual number of characters that have been read. The number will be less than or equal to count. buffer is null. The buffer length minus index is less than count. index or count is negative. Fills the buffer with the next section of text. Specifies the how patterns are matched when performing a search in a control. This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. Case-insensitive literal match. A match only occurs with text that matches the case of the search string. A match only occurs if the characters before and after are not word characters as defined by . A match only occurs if the character before is not a word character as defined by . The search string should be interpreted as a regular expression. Uses Scintilla's base implementation unless combined with . Regular expressions will only match ranges within a single line, never matching over multiple lines. Treat regular expression in a more POSIX compatible manner by interpreting bare '(' and ')' for tagged sections rather than "\(" and "\)". Has no effect when is set. The search string should be interpreted as a regular expression and use the C++11 <regex> standard library engine. The property can queried to determine if the regular expression is invalid. The ECMAScript flag is set on the regex object and documents will exhibit Unicode-compliant behaviour. Regular expressions will only match ranges within a single line, never matching over multiple lines. Must also have set. Represents a selection when there are multiple active selections in a control. Gets or sets the anchor position of the selection. The zero-based document position of the selection anchor. Gets or sets the amount of anchor virtual space. The amount of virtual space past the end of the line offsetting the selection anchor. Gets or sets the caret position of the selection. The zero-based document position of the selection caret. Gets or sets the amount of caret virtual space. The amount of virtual space past the end of the line offsetting the selection caret. Gets or sets the end position of the selection. The zero-based document position where the selection ends. Gets the selection index. The zero-based selection index within the that created it. Gets or sets the start position of the selection. The zero-based document position where the selection starts. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this selection. The index of this selection within the that created it. A multiple selection collection. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object that contains all objects within the . Gets the number of active selections. The number of selections in the . Gets a value indicating whether all selection ranges are empty. true if all selection ranges are empty; otherwise, false. Gets the at the specified zero-based index. The zero-based index of the to get. The at the specified index. Initializes a new instance of the class. Possible status codes returned by the property. No failures. Generic failure. Memory is exhausted. Regular expression is invalid. A style definition in a control. Default style index. This style is used to define properties that all styles receive when calling . Line number style index. This style is used for text in line number margins. The background color of this style also sets the background color for all margins that do not have any folding mask set. Call tip style index. Only font name, size, foreground color, background color, and character set attributes can be used when displaying a call tip. Indent guide style index. This style is used to specify the foreground and background colors of . Brace highlighting style index. This style is used on a brace character when set with the method or the indentation guide when used with the property. Bad brace style index. This style is used on an unmatched brace character when set with the method. Fold text tag style index. This is the style used for drawing text tags attached to folded text when and are used. Copies the current style to another style. The to which the current style should be copied. Gets or sets the background color of the style. A Color object representing the style background color. The default is White. Alpha color values are ignored. Gets or sets whether the style font is bold. true if bold; otherwise, false. The default is false. Setting this property affects the property. Gets or sets the casing used to display the styled text. One of the enum values. The default is . This does not affect how text is stored, only displayed. This is an experimental and incompletely implemented style attribute. The default setting is changeable set true but when set false it makes text read-only. The user can not move the caret within not-changeable text and not-changeable text may not be deleted by the user. The application may delete not-changeable text by calling . false to make the text read-only, true otherwise. The default is true. Gets or sets whether the remainder of the line is filled with the when this style is used on the last character of a line. true to fill the line; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the style font name. The style font name. The default is Verdana. Scintilla caches fonts by name so font names and casing should be consistent. Gets or sets the foreground color of the style. A Color object representing the style foreground color. The default is Black. Alpha color values are ignored. Gets or sets whether hovering the mouse over the style text exhibits hyperlink behavior. true to use hyperlink behavior; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets the zero-based style definition index. The style definition index within the . Gets or sets whether the style font is italic. true if italic; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets the size of the style font in points. The size of the style font as a whole number of points. The default is 8. Gets or sets the size of the style font in fractoinal points. The size of the style font in fractional number of points. The default is 8. Gets or sets whether the style is underlined. true if underlined; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets or sets whether the style text is visible. true to display the style text; otherwise, false. The default is true. Gets or sets the style font weight. The font weight. The default is 400. Setting this property affects the property. Initializes a new instances of the class. The control that created this style. The index of this style within the that created it. Style constants for use with the Ada lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Line comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Delimiter style index. Label style index. Identifier style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Unclosed character EOL style index. Illegal identifier or keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Asm lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Comment block style index. Number style index. Math instruction (keword list 1) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. CPU instruction (keyword list 0) style index. Register (keyword list 2) style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Directive (keyword list 3) string style index. Directive operand (keyword list 4) style index. Extended instruction (keyword list 5) style index. Comment directive style index. Style constants for use with the BlitzBasic lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. String style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Date style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Keyword list 3 (index 2) style index. Keyword list 4 (index 3) style index. Constant style index. Inline assembler style index. Label style index. Error style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Binary number style index. Block comment style index. Documentation line style index. Documentation block style index. Documentation keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Batch lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Keyword (list 0) style index. Label style index. Hide (@ECHO OFF/ON) style index. External command (keyword list 1) style index. Identifier string style index. Operator style index. Style constants for use with the Clw lexer. Attributes style index Built in procedures function style index. Comment style index. Compiler directive style index Default (whitespace) style index. Depreciated style index Error style index Integer Constant style index. Keyword style index Label string style index. Real Constant style index. Real Constant style index. Runtime expressions style index Standard equates style index Single-quoted string style index. Structure data type style index. User Identifier style index. Style constants for use with the Cpp lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Line comment style index. Documentation comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. UUID style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Verbatim string style index. Regular expression style index. Documentation comment line style index. Keyword style 2 index. Comment keyword style index. Comment keyword error style index. Global class style index. Raw string style index. Triple-quoted string style index. Hash-quoted string style index. Preprocessor comment style index. Preprocessor documentation comment style index. User-defined literal style index. Task marker style index. Escape sequence style index. Style constants for use with the Css lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Tag style index. Class style index. Pseudo class style index. Unknown pseudo class style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Unknown identifier style index. Value style index. Comment style index. ID style index. Important style index. Directive style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Identifier style 2 index. Attribute style index. Identifier style 3 index. Pseudo element style index. Extended identifier style index. Extended pseudo class style index. Extended pseudo element style index. Media style index. Variable style index. Style constants for use with the Fortran lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Single-quoted string style index. Double-quoted string style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Keyword (list 0) style index. Keyword 2 (list 1) style index. Keyword 3 (list 2) style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator 2 style index. Label string style index. Continuation style index. Style constants for use with the FreeBasic lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. String style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Date style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Keyword list 3 (index 2) style index. Keyword list 4 (index 3) style index. Constant style index. Inline assembler style index. Label style index. Error style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Binary number style index. Block comment style index. Documentation line style index. Documentation block style index. Documentation keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Html lexer. Content style index. Tag style index. Unknown tag style index. Attribute style index. Unknown attribute style index. Number style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Other tag content (not elements or attributes) style index. Comment style index. Entity ($nnn;) name style index. End-tag style index. Start of XML declaration (<?xml>) style index. End of XML declaration (?>) style index. Script tag (<script>) style index. ASP-like script engine block (<%) style index. ASP-like language declaration (<%@) style index. CDATA section style index. Question mark style index. Value style index. Script engine comment (<%--) style index. Embedded JavaScript style constants for use with the JavaScript lexer. Start style index (allows EOL filled background to not start on same line as SCRIPT tag). Default style index. Comment style index. Line comment style index. Doc comment style index. Number style index. Word style index. Keyword style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Symbols style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Regular expression style index. Style constants for use with the Json lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Number style index. String style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Property name style index. Escape sequence style index. Line comment style index. Block comment style index. Operator style index. URI style index. Compact Internationalized Resource Identifier (IRI) style index. Keyword style index. Linked data (LD) keyword style index. Error style index. Style constants for use with the Lisp lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Functions and special operators (list 0) style index. Keywords (list 1) style index. Symbol style index. Double-quoted string style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Identifier style index. Operator style index. Special character style index. Multi-line comment style index. Style constants for use with the Lua lexer. Default style index. Comment style index. Line comment style index. Documentation comment style index. Number style index. Keyword list 1 (index 0) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Literal string style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keywords list 2 (index 1) style index. Keywords list 3 (index 2) style index. Keywords list 4 (index 3) style index. Keywords list 5 (index 4) style index. Keywords list 6 (index 5) style index. Keywords list 7 (index 6) style index. Keywords list 8 (index 7) style index. Label style index. Style constants for use with the Matlab lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Line comment style index. Number style index. String style index. Command style index. Keyword style index. Double quote string style index. Identifier style index. Operator style index. Style constants for use with the Pascal lexer. Default style index. Identifier style index. Comment style '{' index. Comment style 2 "(*" index. Comment line style "//" index. Preprocessor style "{$" index. Preprocessor style 2 "(*$" index. Number style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Word (keyword set 0) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Single-quoted string style index. Operator style index. Assembly style index. Style constants for use with the Perl lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Error style index. Line comment style index. POD style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Punctuation style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Scalar style index. Array style index. Hash style index. Symbol table style index. Variable indexer index. Regular expression style index. RegSubst style index. Backtick (grave accent, backquote) style index. Data section style index. HereDoc delimiter style index. HereDoc single-quote style index. HereDoc double-quote style index. HereDoc backtick style index. Q quote style index. QQ quote style index. QZ quote style index. QR quote style index. QW quote style index. POD verbatim style index. Subroutine prototype style index. Format identifier style index. Format style index. String variable style index. XLAT style index. Regular expression variable style index. RegSubst variable style index. Backticks variable style index. HereDoc QQ quote variable style index. HereDoc QX quote variable style index. QQ quote variable style index. QX quote variable style index. QR quote variable style index. Style constants for use with the PhpScript lexer. Complex Variable style index. Default (whitespace) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Keyword style index. Number style index. Variable style index. Comment style index. Line comment style index. Double-quoted string variable style index. Operator style index. Style constants for use with the PowerShell lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Line comment style index String style index. Character style index. Number style index. Variable style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Keyword (set 0) style index. Cmdlet (set 1) style index. Alias (set 2) style index. Function (set 3) style index. User word (set 4) style index. Multi-line comment style index. Here string style index. Here character style index. Comment based help keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Properties lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Section style index. Assignment operator index. Default (registry-only) value index. Key style index. Style constants for use with the PureBasic lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. String style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Date style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Keyword list 3 (index 2) style index. Keyword list 4 (index 3) style index. Constant style index. Inline assembler style index. Label style index. Error style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Binary number style index. Block comment style index. Documentation line style index. Documentation block style index. Documentation keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Python lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Line comment style index. Number style index. String style index. Single-quote style index. Keyword style index. Triple single-quote style index. Triple double-quote style index. Class name style index. Function or method name style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Block comment style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword style 2 index. Decorator style index. Style constants for use with the Ruby lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Error style index. Line comment style index. POD style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Class name style index. Definition style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Regular expression style index. Global style index. Symbol style index. Module name style index. Instance variable style index. Class variable style index. Backticks style index. Data section style index. HereDoc delimiter style index. HereDoc Q quote style index. HereDoc QQ quote style index. HereDoc QX quote style index. Q quote string style index. QQ quote string style index. QX quote string style index. QR quote string style index. QW quote style index. Demoted keyword style index. Standard-in style index. Standard-out style index. Standard-error style index. Style constants for use with the Smalltalk lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Number style index. Comment style index. Symbol style index. Binary style index. Bool style index. Self style index. Super style index. NIL style index. Global style index. Return style index. Special style index. KWS End style index. Assign style index. Single-quoted string style index. Special selector style index. Style constants for use with the Sql lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Line comment style index. Documentation comment style index. Number style index. Keyword list 1 (index 0) style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Keyword from the SQL*Plus list (index 3) style index. SQL*Plus prompt style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. SQL*Plus comment style index. Documentation line comment style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Documentation (Doxygen) keyword style index. Documentation (Doxygen) keyword error style index. Keyword user-list 1 (index 4) style index. Keyword user-list 2 (index 5) style index. Keyword user-list 3 (index 6) style index. Keyword user-list 4 (index 7) style index. Quoted identifier style index. Q operator style index. Style constants for use with the Markdown lexer. Default text style index. Line begin style index. Strong type 1 style index. Strong type 2 style index. Empasis type 1 style index. Empasis type 2 style index. Header type 1 style index. Header type 2 style index. Header type 3 style index. Header type 4 style index. Header type 5 style index. Header type 6 style index. Pre char style index. Unordered list style index. Ordered list style index. Blockquote style index. Strikeout style index. Horizontal rule style index. Link style index. Code type 1 style index. Code type 2 style index. Code block style index. Style constants for use with the R lexer. Default style index. Comment style index. Keyword (set 0) style index. Base keyword (set 1) style index. Other keyword (set 2) style index. Number style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Infix style index. Unclosed infix EOL style index. Style constants for use with the Vb lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. String style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Date style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Keyword list 3 (index 2) style index. Keyword list 4 (index 3) style index. Constant style index. Inline assembler style index. Label style index. Error style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Binary number style index. Block comment style index. Documentation line style index. Documentation block style index. Documentation keyword style index. Style constants for use with the VbScript lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Number style index. Keyword style index. String style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Date style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. Keyword list 2 (index 1) style index. Keyword list 3 (index 2) style index. Keyword list 4 (index 3) style index. Constant style index. Inline assembler style index. Label style index. Error style index. Hexadecimal number style index. Binary number style index. Block comment style index. Documentation line style index. Documentation block style index. Documentation keyword style index. Style constants for use with the Verilog lexer. Default (whitespace) style index. Comment style index. Comment line style index. Comment line bang (exclamation) style index. Number style index. Keyword (set 0) style index. String style index. Keyword (set 1) style index. Keyword (set 2) style index. Preprocessor style index. Operator style index. Identifier style index. Unclosed string EOL style index. User word (set 3) style index. Comment word (set 4) style index. Input style index. Output style index. In-out style index. Port connect style index. Style constants for use with the Xml lexer. Content style index. Tag style index. Unknown tag style index. Attribute style index. Unknown attribute style index. Number style index. Double-quoted string style index. Single-quoted string style index. Other tag content (not elements or attributes) style index. Comment style index. Entity ($nnn;) name style index. End-tag style index. Start of XML declaration (<?xml>) style index. End of XML declaration (?>) style index. Script tag (<script>) style index. ASP-like script engine block (<%) style index. ASP-like language declaration (<%@) style index. CDATA section style index. Question mark style index. Value style index. Script engine comment (<%--) style index. The possible casing styles of a style. Display the text normally. Display the text in upper case. Display the text in lower case. Display the text in camel case. An immutable collection of style definitions in a control. Provides an enumerator that iterates through the collection. An object that contains all objects within the . Gets the number of styles. The number of styles in the . Gets a object at the specified index. The style definition index. An object representing the style definition at the specified . Styles 32 through 39 have special significance. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that created this collection. Provides data for the event. Gets the document position where styling should end. The method indicates the last position styled correctly and the starting place for where styling should begin. The zero-based position within the document to perform styling up to. Initializes a new instance of the class. The control that generated this event. The zero-based byte position within the document to stop styling. Specifies how tab characters are drawn when whitespace is visible. The default mode of an arrow stretching until the tabstop. A horizontal line stretching until the tabstop. The rendering technology used in a control. Renders text using GDI. This is the default. Renders text using Direct2D/DirectWrite. Since Direct2D buffers drawing, Scintilla's buffering can be turned off with . Specifies the change that triggered a event. This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. Contents, styling or markers have been changed. Selection has been changed. Scrolled vertically. Scrolled horizontally. Provides data for the event. The UI update that occurred. A bitwise combination of values specifying the UI update that occurred. Initializes a new instance of the class. A bitwise combination of values specifying the reason to update the UI. Enables virtual space for rectangular selections or in other circumstances or in both. This enumeration has a FlagsAttribute attribute that allows a bitwise combination of its member values. Virtual space is not enabled. This is the default. Virtual space is enabled for rectangular selections. Virtual space is user accessible. Prevents left arrow movement and selection from wrapping to the previous line. Specifies the display mode of whitespace characters. The normal display mode with whitespace displayed as an empty background color. Whitespace characters are drawn as dots and arrows. Whitespace used for indentation is displayed normally but after the first visible character, it is shown as dots and arrows. Whitespace used for indentation is displayed as dots and arrows. Indenting behavior of wrapped sublines. Wrapped sublines aligned to left of window plus the amount set by . This is the default. Wrapped sublines are aligned to first subline indent. Wrapped sublines are aligned to first subline indent plus one more level of indentation. The line wrapping strategy. Line wrapping is disabled. This is the default. Lines are wrapped on word or style boundaries. Lines are wrapped between any character. Lines are wrapped on whitespace. Additional location options for line wrapping visual indicators. Wrap indicators are drawn near the border. This is the default. Wrap indicators are drawn at the end of sublines near the text. Wrap indicators are drawn at the beginning of sublines near the text. The visual indicator used on a wrapped line. No visual indicator is displayed. This the default. A visual indicator is displayed at th end of a wrapped subline. A visual indicator is displayed at the beginning of a subline. The subline is indented by 1 pixel to make room for the display. A visual indicator is displayed in the number margin. A class for the Batch lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the batch script file. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A base class for creating static lexers. Resets the Scintilla's style to default. A Scintilla which style to reset. Adds a "standard" folding to a lexer. An instance to a Scintilla class. Adds a "standard" folding to a lexer with given foreground and background colors. An instance to a Scintilla class. The foreground color to be used. The background color to be used. Sets the HTML styles for a lexer. A class instance. A class instance for the lexer coloring. Sets the PHP styles for a lexer. A class instance. A class instance for the lexer coloring. Sets the JS styles for a lexer. A class instance. A class instance for the lexer coloring. A helper method to be used with HTML including scripts. Type of the lexer to embed into the HTML lexer. An instance to a scintilla to which to append the script lexer. A class instance for the lexer coloring. A class for the C++ lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the C++ programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the C# lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the C# programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the HTML lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the INI lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the INI (properties file). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Constants for the InnoSetup script language. Summary: Default style index. Summary: Identifier style index. Summary: Comment style '{' index. Summary: Comment style 2 "(*" index. Summary: Comment line style "//" index. Summary: Preprocessor style "{$" index. Summary: Preprocessor style 2 "(*$" index. Summary: Number style index. Summary: Hexadecimal number style index. Summary: Word (keyword set 0) style index. Summary: Double-quoted string style index. Summary: Unclosed string EOL style index. Summary: Single-quoted string style index. Summary: Operator style index. Summary: Assembly style index. A class for the InnoSetup lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the InnoSetup programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Creates a color value of a given integer containing an RGB color value. The RGB color value. System.Drawing.Color. A class for the Java lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Java programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Java programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the YAML lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the YAML (YAML Ain't Markup Language). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the NSIS lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the NSIS (Nullsoft Scriptable Install System). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for plain text. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for a plain text file. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the Pascal lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Pascal programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the PHP lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the PHP programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the Windows PowerShell lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Windows PowerShell script language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the Python lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Python programming language. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the SQL lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the Structured Query Language (SQL). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the Batch lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the batch script file. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the XML lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the XML (The eXtensible Markup Language). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class for the YAML lexer. Implements the Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance for the YAML (YAML Ain't Markup Language). A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A class instance for the lexer coloring. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. A class containing code folding properties for different lexers. Gets or sets the name of the fold property. The name of the fold property. Gets or sets the fold property value. The fold property value. Gets or sets the default folding properties for all lexers. Gets or sets the additional folding properties for the XML (eXtensible Markup Language) lexer. Gets or sets the additional folding properties for the SQL (Structured Query Language) lexer. Gets or sets the additional folding properties for the HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) lexer. Sets the properties. The instance of which properties to set. A list of fold properties. Sets the default folding for all lexers. The instance of which default folding properties to set. Sets the fold properties to a given lexer type. The of which fold properties to set. Type of the lexer. A class to set the basic font style for the . Gets or sets the size of the font for the controls. Gets or sets the name of the font family for the controls. A class containing lexer known file extensions for different lexers. Gets or sets the type of the lexer. Gets or sets the file extension list for a lexer. A list of strings used to detect if a file by it's starting contents is a XML file. Gets a value indicating if the given file is an XML file. There are so many different extensions for XML files so it's better to peek inside the file if necessary. Name of the file to check for being a XML file. Gets or sets the value whether to peek inside to a file to check if the file is a XML file. Gets or sets the file extensions for specified lexers. Gets a lexer type from a given file name. Name of the file from which to get the lexer type from. A LexerType enumeration value. A helper class for Class LexerTypeName. The NSIS (Nullsoft Scriptable Install System) lexer value. The Inno Setup lexer value. The YAML (YAML Ain't Markup Language) lexer value. A list of currently supported lexers by this library. Gets the name of the lexer XML used in Notepad++'s XML style files. Type of the lexer. The name of the lexer used in Notepad++'s XML style files if successful; otherwise "text". A class for keywords for different lexers. Gets or sets the index of the key word set. Gets or sets the key words belonging to a keyword set. Gets or sets the type of the lexer of the keyword set. Sets the keywords for a given instance with a given . The scintilla instance which keywords to set. Type of the lexer. Gets or sets the key word list containing specific keywords for different lexer types. A class containing the colors for the lexers. Gets or sets the colors for a given LexerType enumeration. The type of the lexer. A list of color belonging to a specific lexer. value Gets or sets the color uses by the SciTE color name and a value indicating whether a foreground or a background color is requested. URL: https://www.scintilla.org/SciTE.html The type of the lexer. The name of the color in the SciTE. A flag indicating whether a foreground or a background color is requested. A color with the specified lexer, a specified SciTE name and a flag indicating whether the color in question is a background or a foreground color. value Gets or sets the with the specified lexer type and the color's name. The type of the lexer. The name of the color. A color with the specified lexer type and with a specified name. value Saves a lexer color definition to a XML file. Name of the file where to save the lexer's color definitions. Type of the lexer. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Saves a lexer color definition to a XDocument class instance. Type of the lexer. An instance to a XDocument class containing the color definitions. Loads the lexer color definition from a XDocument class instance. The document containing the lexer's color definitions. Type of the lexer. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Loads the lexer color definition from a XML file. Name of the file from where to load the lexer color definitions. Type of the lexer. True if the operation was successful; otherwise false. Gets the color uses by the SciTE color name and a value indicating whether a foreground or a background color is requested. URL: https://www.scintilla.org/SciTE.html The name of the color (SciTE). Type of the lexer. A flag indicating whether a foreground or a background color is requested. An index >= 0 if successful; otherwise -1. Gets the index of the color by name. The name of the color. Type of the lexer. An index >= 0 if successful; otherwise -1. Gets the color names for a given lexer type. Type of the lexer. A collection of color names of the given lexer type if successful; otherwise an empty collection is returned. A class containing the enumeration values. An enumeration of currently supported Scintilla lexers. An unknown language and / or file. The C# programming language. The C++ programming language. The eXtensible Markup Language. A plain text document. The NSIS (Nullsoft Scriptable Install System). The Structured Query Language (SQL). A batch script file. A lexer for the Pascal programming language. A lexer for the PHP programming language. A lexer type for the HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). A lexer type for the Windows PowerShell scripting language. An INI file lexer. A lexer for the Python programming language. A lexer for the YAML Ain't Markup Language. A lexer for the Java programming language. A lexer for the JavaScript scripting language. A lexer for the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). A lexer for the Inno Setup. The Visual Basic .NET programming language. The JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) data format. A class for setting a lexer for a Scintilla class instance. Gets or sets the value of a LexerColors class instance. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. Type of the lexer. A file name to get the lexer type from. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. A file name to get the lexer type from. A XML file to load the lexer style from. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. A file name to get the lexer type from. A XML file to load the lexer style from. A flag indicating whether the style "Global override" should be set for the lexer from the XML document. A flag indicating whether to use the defined font name from the XML document or not. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. Type of the lexer. A file name to get the lexer type from. A flag indicating whether the style "Global override" should be set for the lexer from the XML document. A flag indicating whether to use the defined font name from the XML document or not. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. A file name to get the lexer type from. A XML file to load the lexer style from. A flag indicating whether the style "Global override" should be set for the lexer from the XML document. A flag indicating whether to use the defined font name from the XML document or not. A flag indicating whether to color the white space symbol. A flag indicating whether to color the selection. A flag indicating whether to color the margin. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer from XML file used by the Notepad++ software. The which lexer style to set. Type of the lexer. A file name to get the lexer type from. A flag indicating whether the style "Global override" should be set for the lexer from the XML document. A flag indicating whether to use the defined font name from the XML document or not. A flag indicating whether to color the white space symbol. A flag indicating whether to color the selection. A flag indicating whether to color the margin. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance with a given language type enumeration. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. A file name to get the lexer type from. True if the given lexer was found; otherwise false (a work in progress). Creates the lexer for a given Scintilla class instance with a given language type enumeration. A Scintilla class instance to set the lexer style for. Type of the lexer / programming language. True if the given lexer was found; otherwise false (a work in progress). A helper class to get the mark colors from the Notepad++ software XML lexer definition file. Gets or sets the smart high highlighting foreground color. Gets or sets the smart high highlighting background color. Gets or sets the incremental highlight all foreground color. Gets or sets the incremental highlight all background color. Gets or sets the mark one foreground color. Gets or sets the mark one background color. Gets or sets the mark two foreground color. Gets or sets the mark two background color. Gets or sets the mark three foreground color. Gets or sets the mark three background color. Gets or sets the mark four foreground color. Gets or sets the mark four background color. Gets or sets the mark five foreground color. Gets or sets the mark five background color. Gets or sets the current line background color. Gets or sets the current line background color. Gets the color definitions from a XML style definition file. The name of the file. An instance to this () class. Gets the color definitions from a XDocument style definition instance. The XDocument to document to get the styles from. An instance to this () class. A class for loading global styles for the from Sets the global and default styles for the given instance depending on the other parameters. A XML document containing the lexer style data. The scintilla instance of which style to set. if set to true the "Global override" style is read from the . If set to true the font name and size is read from the .. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Sets the folding of a based on the "Fold" style defined in the XML document. The XML document to read the folding style from. The instance to a scintilla of which folding style to set. true if the operation was successful, false otherwise. Sets the style of a given with a given style. The scintilla instance of which style to set. The style to set for the . If set to true the font is also set from the given style. Loads the Scintilla global styles from a Notepad++ style definition XML file. The XML document to read the global style from. The Scintilla of which global styles to set. A flag indicating whether to color the white space symbol. A flag indicating whether to color the selection. A flag indicating whether to color the margin. true if the operations was successful, false otherwise. Gets the styles for a from the Notepad++'s XML style files for a given lexer. The XML document to read the lexer style from. The which lexer style to set. A enumeration. true if the operations was successful, false otherwise. A helper class for Notepad++ XML style definition files. Gets or sets the name of the style definition. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the style definition defines a fond as bold. Gets or sets a value indicating whether the style definition defines a fond as italic. Gets or sets the style identifier from a style definition. Gets or sets the foreground color of a font from a style definition. Gets or sets the background color of a font from a style definition. Gets or sets the name of the font from a style definition. Gets or sets the size of the font from a style definition. Gets the attribute value of a given . The element to get the attribute from. Name of the attribute. The default value for the attribute in case the attribute is null or the value is empty. The value based on given parameters if successful; otherwise . Gets the attribute value of a given as a . The element to get the color attribute from. Name of the attribute. A color if the operation was successful; otherwise Color.Empty. Creates a new instance of this class based on the given The element to get the style definition from. A class instance filled with the style definition data. Flags enumeration type converter. This class represents an enumeration field in the property grid. Stores the context which the enumeration field descriptor was created in. Creates an instance of the enumeration field descriptor class. The type of the enumeration. The name of the enumeration field. The current context. Retrieves the value of the enumeration field. The instance of the enumeration type which to retrieve the field value for. True if the enumeration field is included to the enumeration; otherwise, False. Sets the value of the enumeration field. The instance of the enumeration type which to set the field value to. True if the enumeration field should included to the enumeration; otherwise, False. Retrieves a value indicating whether the enumeration field is set to a non-default value. Resets the enumeration field to its default value. Retrieves a value indicating whether the enumeration field can be reset to the default value. Retrieves the enumerations field�s default value. Creates an instance of the FlagsEnumConverter class. The type of the enumeration. Retrieves the property descriptors for the enumeration fields. These property descriptors will be used by the property grid to show separate enumeration fields. The current context. A value of an enumeration type. 获取颜色 颜色变化时激发 Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The top left rectangle in auto hide strip area. The top right rectangle in auto hide strip area. The bottom left rectangle in auto hide strip area. The bottom right rectangle in auto hide strip area. Gets one of the four auto hide strip rectangles. Dock state. The desired rectangle. As the corners are represented by , , , and , the four strips can be easily calculated out as the borders. Context menu. This property should be obsolete as it does not support theming. Please use instead. Context menu strip. Overridden to avoid resize issues with nested controls http://blogs.msdn.com/b/alejacma/archive/2008/11/20/controls-won-t-get-resized-once-the-nesting-hierarchy-of-windows-exceeds-a-certain-depth-x64.aspx http://support.microsoft.com/kb/953934 Determines whether the close button is visible on the content There's a bug in the WinForms layout engine that can result in a deferred layout to not properly clear out the cached layout args after the layout operation is performed. Specifically, this bug is hit when the bounds of the Pane change, initiating a layout on the parent (DockWindow) which is where the bug hits. To work around it, when a pane loses the DockWindow as its parent, that parent DockWindow needs to perform a layout to flush the cached args, if they exist. Gets a value indicating whether dock panel can be dragged when in auto hide mode. Default is false. Determines the color with which the client rectangle will be drawn. If this property is used instead of the BackColor it will not have any influence on the borders to the surrounding controls (DockPane). The BackColor property changes the borders of surrounding controls (DockPane). Alternatively both properties may be used (BackColor to draw and define the color of the borders and DockBackColor to define the color of the client rectangle). For Backgroundimages: Set your prefered Image, then set the DockBackColor and the BackColor to the same Color (Control) Dock area. This is the center rectangle of control. Excluded spaces are for the following visual elements, * Auto hide strips on four sides. * Necessary paddings defined in themes. Therefore, all dock contents mainly fall into this area (except auto hide window, which might slightly move beyond this area). Flag to show autohide content on mouse hover. Default value is true. This flag is ignored in VS2012/2013 themes. Such themes assume it is always false. DragHandlerBase is the base class for drag handlers. The derived class should: 1. Define its public method BeginDrag. From within this public BeginDrag method, DragHandlerBase.BeginDrag should be called to initialize the mouse capture and message filtering. 2. Override the OnDragging and OnEndDrag methods. Loads layout from XML file. The file name. Deserialization handler. Deserialization might throw exceptions. Loads layout from a stream. The stream. Deserialization handler. Deserialization might throw exceptions. The stream is closed after deserialization. Loads layout from a stream. The stream. Deserialization handler. The flag to close the stream after deserialization. Deserialization might throw exceptions. Deserialization handler of layout file/stream. Strings stored in layout file/stream. Dock content deserialized from layout/stream. The deserialization handler method should handle all possible exceptions. If any exception happens during deserialization and is not handled, the program might crash or experience other issues. The skin to use when displaying the DockPanel. The skin allows custom gradient color schemes to be used when drawing the DockStrips and Tabs. The skin used to display the auto hide strips and tabs. The skin used to display the Document and ToolWindow style DockStrips and Tabs. The skin used to display the auto hide strip and tabs. The gradient color skin for the DockStrips. The gradient color skin for the Tabs. The gradient color skin for the Tabs. Font used in AutoHideStrip elements. The skin used to display the document and tool strips and tabs. The skin used to display the Document style DockPane strip and tab. The skin used to display the ToolWindow style DockPane strip and tab. Font used in DockPaneStrip elements. The skin used to display the DockPane ToolWindow strip and tab. The skin used to display the active ToolWindow caption. The skin used to display the inactive ToolWindow caption. The skin used to display the DockPane strip and tab. The gradient color skin for the DockStrip. The skin used to display the active DockPane tabs. The skin used to display the inactive DockPane tabs. The skin used to display the dock pane tab The text color. The skin used to display the dock pane tab The beginning gradient color. The ending gradient color. The gradient color skin. The beginning gradient color. The ending gradient color. The gradient mode to display the colors. Dock window base class. Dock window of Visual Studio 2003/2005 theme. The location to draw the DockPaneStrip for Document style windows. Gets images for tabs and captions. Gets images for docking indicators. Switches a pane with its first child in the pane hierarchy. (The actual hiding happens elsewhere.) Pane to switch Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Determines whether the close button is visible on the content Calculate which tabs are displayed and in what order. Visual Studio 2005 theme (default theme). X for this inside the logical strip rectangle. Width of this . Dock window of Visual Studio 2012 Light theme. Initializes a new instance of the class. The dock panel. State of the dock. Determines whether the close button is visible on the content Calculate which tabs are displayed and in what order. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 Light theme. Visual Studio 2015 theme base.